Home

introduction - Custom Solutions, Inc.

1. If the controller is running the zone to a time temperature schedule this variable will be set to the desired temperature at the scheduled time and the setting will also be transmitted to the thermostat This variable stores the thermostat type and house code for the zone It can only be changed from the Thermostat Configuration Screens in the PC software and video menu system This variable stores the current operating modes of the zone Three different modes are tracked and stored in this variable HVAC system mode Heat Cool Auto or Off Fan mode On or Auto Control mode Run or Hold 226 Chapter 19 Thermostats These three modes control most of the thermostat operation For zones 1 and 2 these are the values that are displayed on the TV Thermostat Control Screen There are two ways to change them From the TV Thermostat Control Screen With a command in your schedule Thermostat Data Commands These thermostat data commands give you access to the Current Temperature and Temperature Setting system variables for each of the 16 zones You cannot access the Zone Configuration or Zone Status variables with these commands These commands are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the Other toolbar button then selecting Thermostat Data from the pop up menu They can all also be issued to the controller over the serial interface The format for sending commands over the serial interfa
2. N Appendix C Latitudes and Longitudes C 7 State Province Latitude Longitude Pennsylvania 40 33 Pennsylvania 40 03 Pennsylvania 39 95 Pennsylvania 40 43 Pennsylvania 40 33 Pennsylvania 41 42 Pennsylvania 41 25 Pennsylvania 39 97 Puerto Rico 18 45 Quebec 45 43 Quebec 45 43 Quebec 45 55 Quebec 45 52 Quebec 46 82 Quebec 45 40 46 35 41 83 50 45 52 13 50 40 32 78 34 00 34 95 44 37 Saskatchewan 44 08 103 22 Saskatchewan Saskatchewan South Carolina South Carolina South Carolina South Carolina South Dakota South Dakota South Dakota Tennessee Tennessee Tennessee Tennessee Texas Texas Texas Texas Texas Texas Texas Texas Texas Texas Texas Texas Texas Texas Rhode Island 35 05 35 97 35 15 36 17 32 45 35 20 30 27 30 08 25 90 27 80 32 78 31 77 32 75 29 30 29 75 27 50 33 58 32 55 Trois Rivieres Quebec Te wo wo A o Co oa oa C 8 Appendix C Latitudes and Longitudes State Province Latitude Longitude Texas 29 88 Texas 31 47 Texas 29 43 Texas 33 43 Texas 31 55 Texas 33 92 Utah 41 23 Utah 40 23 Utah 38 77 Utah 40 75 Vermont 42 85 Vermont 44 48 Vermont 44 27 Virginia 36 85 Virginia 36 83 Virginia 37 53 Virginia Virginia Washington Washington Washington Washington Washington Washington West Virginia West Virginia West Virginia Wisconsin Wisconsin Wisconsin Wisconsin Wisconsin Wisconsin Wisconsin Wisconsin Wyoming Wyoming Yukon Territory
3. Some of the weather variables have special values that determine how they are displayed on the weather conditions video screen For example a relative humidity variable with a value of 255 is displayed as blank spaces instead of a number You can use this if you don t have a way to determine the actual relative humidity Set it to 255 and it won t appear on the weather screen If you didn t do this it might display an incorrect number Before using these variables you should carefully read the descriptions provided below You will set these variables using the weather data commands described later 246 Chapter 23 Weather Data Temperature Variables Six different temperatures can be tracked Current inside temperature Today s low inside temperature Today s high inside temperature Current outside temperature Today s low outside temperature Today s high outside temperature The temperatures can range from 99 to 154 degrees in 1 degree increments Temperatures are stored as the actual temperature plus 100 When using the weather conditions video screen the controller automatically subtracts 100 and then displays the result This allows negative numbers to be displayed There are two exceptions to how the temperature is displayed 1 The value of 0 is displayed as 99 degrees instead of 100 This is because the screen does not have enough space for 100 2 A value of 255 is displayed as blank spaces instead of a number This i
4. Variable is any variable that you ve created in your schedule This command DOES NOT send a temperature setting command to the thermostat It merely changes the system variable value stored in the controller This command is useful if you want to use variables to calculate a temperature setting You can use this command to change the setting and then perform the Refresh Zone X Temperature Setting command to send it to the thermostat Variable Thermostat Variable Zone X Temperature Setting There are actually 16 of these commands one for each available HVAC zone replace the X with the desired zone These commands set variable to the Temperature Setting value for the specified zone Variable is any variable that you ve created in your schedule Once the Temperature Setting value is in the variable you can do anything you want with it You can use this command to periodically check the temperature setting for errors send it to the serial port and many other things Thermostat Variable Zone X Temperature Setting Constant There are actually 16 of these commands one for each available HVAC zone replace the X with the desired zone These commands set the Temperature Setting variable for the specified zone to the constant value H H can be any integer between 0 and 255 This command DOES NOT send a temperature setting command to the thermostat It merely changes the system variable value stored i
5. Flag XXX Clear This condition will be true if the specified flag is CLEAR It will be false if the flag is SET or NEUTRAL Flag XXX Neutral This condition will be true if the specified flag is NEUTRAL It will be false if the flag is SET or CLEAR Flag XXX Not Set This condition will be true if the specified flag is CLEAR or NEUTRAL It will be false if the flag is SET Flag XXX Not Clear This condition will be true if the specified flag is SET or NEUTRAL It will be false if the flag is CLEAR Flag XXX Not Neutral This condition will be true if the specified flag is SET or CLEAR It will be false if the flag is NEUTRAL 90 Chapter 10 _ Flags Power Failure Options When power is restored after a power failure the controller goes through a power failure recovery process As part of the process you can have the controller automatically adjust the states of the flags This is done by setting the Power Fail State on the flag summary screen to one of the following e No Change The flag will be left unchanged This is the default setting e Set The flag will be put in the SET state e Clear The flag will be put in the CLEAR state e Neutral The flag will be put in the NEUTRAL state Chapter 11__ Variables 91 CHAPTER 11 VARIABLES Introduction Variables provide the following features and capabilities e Can take on any integer value from 0 to 255 e Can all be set to the s
6. Pin 7 Request To Send RTS Pin 8 Clear To Send CTS Pin 9 Not Used Pins 7 RTS and 8 CTS are connected together Pins 1 CD 4 DTR and 6 DSR are connected together The serial port 3 and 4 connectors are DB 9 males using the following pins standard for DTE type ports a Q 4 5 Le EF S KE TN oN oA O WW 8 B Viewed looking into end of connector Pin 1 Carrier Detect CD Pin 2 Receive Data RD receive input into unit Pin 3 Transmit Data TD transmit from unit Pin 4 Data Terminal Ready DTR Pin 5 Ground Pin 6 Data Set Ready DSR Pin 7 Request To Send RTS Pin 8 Clear To Send CTS Pin 9 Not Used Pins 7 RTS and 8 CTS are connected together Pins 1 CD 4 DTR and 6 DSR are connected together 296 Chapter 27 Miscellaneous Infrared Transmit Jack This is a 3 5mm mono jack When connecting a mono plug the connections are as follows e The plug s tip is the infrared output 12V when transmitting tied to ground through resistor and LED when not transmitting e The plug s body is ground When connecting a stereo plug the connections are as follows e The plug s tip is the infrared output 12V when transmitting tied to ground through resistor and LED when not transmitting e The plug s body is ground e The plug s center ring is not unconnected Infrared Receive Jack This is a 3 5mm stereo jack When connec
7. These screens give you direct control over HVAC zones 1 and 2 How the screens work depends on your thermostat RCS TX10 B TX15 B And Serial Thermostats Use the buttons on your infrared remote as follows Pressing button 1 cycles the control mode between Run and Hold When in the Run or Auto mode the controller will automatically control the thermostat to your time temperature schedule just like a standard programmable thermostat When in the Hold or Off mode the schedule is not run this acts just like the Hold or Vacation mode on standard thermostats You should set the control mode to Hold when leaving home and to Run when you return home you can do this from this TV screen or with commands in your schedule Pressing button 2 cycles the HVAC system mode between Off Heat Cool and Auto This sends the appropriate X 10 or serial command to the thermostat to set it to the new mode Pressing button 3 cycles the fan between On and Auto On means the fan runs all the time while Auto means it runs only when commanded by the thermostat This sends the appropriate X 10 or serial command to the thermostat to set the fan to the new mode Pressing button 4 allows you to enter a new temperature setting You enter the setting with the number keys or with the channel and volume keys After making the setting you can enter it with the enter key or cancel it If you enter it the new setting is sent to the thermostat Pressing
8. 1 degree F resolution Each sensor requires three wires 5V ground and signal Up to 64 sensors can be connected to the same wires Each sensor has it s own unique address so it can be individually read e 10 sensors can be automatically read per second Note The optional multifunction expansion boards when used with the HomeVision controller can also connect to digital temperature sensors However when using HomeVision Pro all the digital sensors must connect directly to Home Vision Pro the multifunction expansion board connections will not function Sensor Connection Modes The DS1820 DS18S20 sensor can be used in either of two modes e Single drop mode Only one sensor is connected to a wire This mode is used only to read the sensor s address You cannot read the address if there are multiple devices on the same line e Multi drop mode Multiple sensors are connected to the same wire This is the normal operating mode Each sensor is uniquely identified by an 8 byte address This is the key feature that makes the multi drop mode possible However to use this mode you must know the sensor s address It is not printed on the part or it s package Instead you have to actually read it from the sensor This is done in the single drop mode as described in Reading a sensor address Connections The digital temperature sensors connect to the controller terminal block in the upper left corner of the board The sensor s data wir
9. Configure menu These codes are used to navigate through the video screen system e On the IR signal summary screen if you ve set up any signals to perform actions when they are received If the signals Device and Key Codes are correct the controller should respond to the signals assuming they have been loaded into the controller If necessary change the Device and Key Code settings and reload the schedule I1 Question Marks The remote signal doesn t follow the standard format If you expected this signal to follow the standard format and it didn t try the following e Verify your remote is set to the desired code e Make sure you ve selected the right function on your remote i e TV VCR cable etc e If necessary you may have to try a different code IR Transmit Problem From the IR control screen transmit an IR signal that you ve previously learned Does the IR TX LED on the controller blink 1 No The signal was not transmitted Examine the signal using the IR signal summary screen Is the Transmit Enabled box checked If not you must enable it and reload the schedule NOTE The Transmit Enabled box shows the setting that will take effect when the schedule is loaded in the controller It is possible to enable and disable signals from commands in the schedule also such changes will not be reflected on the IR signal summary screen If your schedule disables signals in this way yo
10. Eight digital inputs similar to the controller s port B except that the multifunction board does not have switches to disable the pull up resistors Two sets of eight digital inputs similar to the input capability but not output capability of the controller s port C Any or all of the three sets of eight digital inputs can instead be used as a port extender for the controller s ports A B or C although there is probably no benefit of this when used with HomeVision Pro Eight analog inputs Eight zones of infrared output Connect to the controller via 14 pin connectors labeled Expansion Boards H5 and H6 on the controller The red wire on the cable goes to pin 1 which is marked on the board with a line and the number 1 Refer to the documentation provided with the multifunction expansion board for more details Sylva Control Systems I O Boards Sylva Control Systems manufactures a variety of input output boards for their own control systems One of these boards provides 8 relays and 8 opto isolated inputs You can connect up to four of these boards to the controller Sylva Control Systems can be contacted at 519 Richard Street Thunder Bay Ontario Canada P7A 1R2 807 768 2487 807 767 0587 FAX http www sylvacontrols com Sylva 10 8081 And 10 8081 485 Board Description 8 SPST Form A relays 8 opto isolated 12 24 VAC VDC inputs LEDs to indicate relay and input states Pluggable terminal block connectors
11. Expansion Board Sylva Board Connectors Connector HomeVision Pro Circuit Board Power In Out Relay Status LEDs Relay Outputs Status X 10 Serial LEDs Serial Port 4 Serial Port 3 Chapter 1 Introduction T Status LEDs HomeVision Pro contains 43 status LEDs described below LED DESCRIPTION Power OK Indicates 12VDC power is applied Status 1 On steady when the controller is running normally Blinking on and off approximately once per second when the controller is halted if this happens reload your schedule into the controller While recovering from a power failure this LED will be off and the X 10 Intf LED will be on Status 2 On actually blinking at a very fast rate that makes it appear on when the peripheral chip is operating properly If it is off the peripheral chip is malfunctioning which will cause X 10 and infrared problems Status 3 On actually blinking at a very fast rate that makes it appear on when the serial port 3 chip is operating properly If it is off serial port 3 will not function Status 4 On actually blinking at a very fast rate that makes it appear on when the serial port 4 chip is operating properly If it is off serial port 4 will not function 8 Port ALEDs On when the relay output is on high 8 Port B LEDs On when the input port is high The input ports are high when nothing is connected and the pull up resistor is used s
12. Read text file filename txt into video screen 126 Chapter 13 Video Output Replace filename txt with the complete name of the desired file including the extension which must be txt Replace with the desired RAM video screen number 100 131 For example to read the contents of the file news txt into RAM video screen 100 send this ASCII text Read text file news txt into video screen 100 Notes The serial command is not case sensitive e If the specified file is already opened when the software tries to read it the command will not be executed Status of the command will be shown on the bottom of the main software screen e _HomevVision Pro will format the file so that text wraps around properly at the end of the each line If the file is too large to be displayed on one screen only one screen full will be shown Using The RAM Video Screens How would you use these screens Well you would need a computer program that could obtain data and put it into a text file Then either the program would format it to fit on a screen and transmit it to the controller or you could put a command in your schedule to read the file into the desired video screen Here s an idea of how this capability could be used A computer program could obtain data from a variety of sources such as E mail messages from your mail server Weather reports sports scores stock prices etc downloaded from the Internet Incoming fax messages
13. will blink and the Device Code and Key Code for the received signal will be shown Compare these to the codes listed beside each of the 16 functions If all 16 buttons match you re ready to control the video screens If some of the buttons use different Key Codes you can change the entry to match the actual received Key Code Some points to note e All signals from a specific remote should have the same Device Code This code should match the one shown in the Device Code text box e To assign a different remote key to a function enter the signal s actual Key Code in the text box next to the function If you make any changes you will have to reload the schedule into the controller e f your remote is transmitting different Device and Key Codes than those shown it s not a problem Just enter the actual Key Codes in the text boxes corresponding to each function 34 Chapter 3 Quick Start and the Device code in the Device Code text box However if you make such changes you will have to reload the schedule Most remotes don t have a Cancel button we ve assigned this function to the Mute button You may want to move this to a different button that works better with your remote s keypad layout If you make any changes to this screen you ll need to reload the schedule into the controller To do this choose Load Schedule from the File menu Click the Load button to load the schedule You should al
14. Chapter 2 _ Software Overview 27 a variety of reasons and do not necessarily mean there is a real problem Refer to the Miscellaneous chapter for details on error messages PROM Version This shows the version of PROM in the controller There is also a Test Add On Devices button When performed the HomeVision Pro controller will test communications with each of the possible HomeVision Pro add on boards Multifunction Expansion Board and HomeVision Phone and report the results This provides a quick way to verify these boards if you have any are connected and functioning properly The other tab displays information about the schedule currently open on the PC Two sections display the amount of controller memory used by your schedule This data is only available after loading a schedule into the controller Until it s loaded the software cannot determine how many bytes of RAM it will take The two values shown are Actions RAM This memory stores all of your conditions and actions On average each line in your schedule uses about 4 or 5 bytes of memory Commands to display or transmit long text strings require more as each character takes one byte Approximately 4 000 bytes of memory are available the exact amount is shown on the screen This should hold 8000 or more lines of a typical schedule If you write a schedule that comes close to using all this memory we d love to hear about it IR Signal RAM This memory s
15. However we recommend you do it from the PC first Use this screen to enter separate schedules for each HVAC system mode Heat Cool and Auto for each zone Here are some tips e The scheduled times do not have to be in sequence although it s easier to read if they are e If there are times at which you don t want the temperature to change you can enter a dash instead of a temperature If you enter any temperature less than 10 degrees it will also be interpreted as a dash e If you don t plan to use the Auto mode most user s don t you can skip it Just like standard programmable thermostats the controller can put any zone into a Run mode or Hold mode Run mode The controller controls the thermostat to the specified time temperature schedule Hold mode Holds the current temperature and does not send the scheduled temperature changes however you can still include commands in your schedule to change the temperature if you want This is called the thermostat control mode and you can change it from your TV screen or with a command in your schedule Each zone can be controlled independently You must set this to the Run mode or else the controller will not run your schedule Step 4 Loading The Schedule After making the settings described in steps 1 3 you will need to load the schedule into the controller The load screen contains an option to Reload thermostat time temperature schedule This refers to the sche
16. In order for this to function the regular HomeVision Pro application must be running on the PC and be connected to the HomevVision Pro controller You can then create shortcuts on your desktop that run the HV Desktop program Each shortcut must contain a command line parameter that specifies an ASCII serial message to send to HomeVision Pro When this shortcut is run the HV Desktop program will run but will be invisible will send a Windows message to the HomevVision Pro application and will then shut down The message tells the HomeVision Pro application to send the serial message to the HomeVision Pro controller which it does after adding a carriage return to the end The controller then executes the command The HomeVision Pro application will display a message at the bottom of the main screen indicating that it transmitted the serial data The message will say Received command TO HV XXXxX where XXXxX is the transmitted data If the HomeVision Pro application is not running an error message will be displayed Here s how to create a shortcut that can send a command e Use the Windows Explorer to create a shortcut to the HV Desktop application e Give the shortcut a meaningful name Porch light on TV Off etc e Place the shortcut on your desktop or anywhere else such as the Start menu e Right click the shortcut icon and select Properties from the pop up menu e The shortcut ta
17. LED never blinks and the IR Rx1 and IR Rx2 switches are in the closed position the controller may be defective However disconnect any external IR receivers or transmitters and repeat the test to verify they are not somehow interfering with the built in IR receivers Yes Open the IR test screen under the Other menu Transmit another IR signal to the controller Does the LED on the IR test screen blink and are the Device Code and Key Code fields filled in either with numbers or question marks A No Verify the following from the status screen under the Other menu The controller is running and not halted The IR receive function is enabled The IR report mode is enabled The master report mode is enabled If any of these are improperly set correct them and try again If the controller still doesn t report the signals on the IR test screen check communications with the controller as discussed earlier in this trouble shooting chapter If the controller still doesn t report IR signals it may be defective Yes Are the Device and Key Codes filled in with numbers or question marks 304 Chapter 28 Trouble Shooting 1 Numbers The controller correctly received IR signals that followed the standard format Test each of your remote s buttons and record their Device and Key Codes Make sure these codes match those shown e On the video remote control configuration screen under the
18. This is because the objects flags variables etc will probably be numbered differently in the two schedules For example assume you copy an action to run macro 10 named Turn all lights off When you paste it into the other schedule the action will be to run macro 10 but macro 10 may do something entirely different in this schedule It s also possible that the object you re copying doesn t even exist in the schedule you re pasting it to This would occur in the previous example if you only had 5 macros in the second schedule In this event the Actions Entry Screen will display the message NOT DEFINED instead of the macro s name and number in the action line You will then have to edit the action and select the correct macro for it For these reasons we recommend that after you paste actions you immediately review them and make the necessary changes Object Initial States The object summary screens are also used to set the initial state of many object types When you load a schedule to the controller for the first time you need to specify the initial states you want the controller to set for the various objects For example you can define the following e Whether flags should be SET CLEAR or NEUTRAL e The values to assign to your variables e What states to set for your output ports e What states ON or OFF and what levels 0 to 16 to assign to the X 10 modules The controller will not know what state your lights o
19. This section covers the use of standard IR signals to control HomeVision Pro A later section will cover using learned signals to control HomeVision Pro The use of standard signals is preferred as they are more reliable and there are certain things that can only be done with standard signals Setting Up The Remote Control Video Screen System The built in video screen system allows you to control your home automation system using a TV and a hand held remote control The video screen system is described in detail in the video chapter Before you can use this you have to set up your remote and the controller This section describes how to do this Configuring A Preprogrammed Remote The easiest way to send IR signals to the controller is with a preprogrammed remote A wide variety of such remotes are available today Some control as little as one device while others control up to a dozen Some are available for less than 10 To use this type of remote you enter a code number for the type and brand of equipment you want to control Most remotes can handle several types of equipment TVs VCRs cable boxes stereos etc You access each type by pressing the corresponding button on the remote or perhaps sliding a switch When using these remotes with the controller you have complete freedom as to what functions you assign to each button Follow this process to set up a programmable remote 1 Choose a remote contro
20. Times except that commands are sent at intervals of approximately 0 9 seconds instead of 0 4 seconds Actually what happens is that the house code and unit code is repeated between each Brighten command instead of just sending consecutive Brighten commands Brighten Times Same as Brighten Times except that all Brighten commands will be sent even after the level reaches 16 Brighten Times Slow Same as Force Brighten Times except that commands are sent at intervals of approximately 0 9 seconds instead of 0 4 seconds Actually what happens is that the house code and unit code is repeated between each Brighten command instead of just sending consecutive Brighten commands Set To Level This command sends X 10 Dim or Brighten commands as necessary to put the module at brightness level If the module is initially OFF or NEUTRAL it sends one X 10 On command first then Dim commands until level is reached H can be any integer between 0 and 16 Set To Level Slow Force Force Same as Set To Level except that commands are sent at intervals of approximately 0 9 seconds instead of 0 4 seconds Actually what happens is that the house code and unit code is repeated between each Dim Brighten command instead of just sending consecutive Dim Brighten commands To Level Same as Set To Level except that an X 10 Off command is sent first to ensure starting at a known conditio
21. between pins 4 and 17 See the Serial Port Configuration Header section at the end of this configuration section for details Serial Port 2 Serial port 2 refers to the port on the optional HomeVision Phone Serial device Refer to its owner s manual for operational details Serial Port 3 This serial port provides the following capabilities e Four operating modes RS 232 standard PC serial port _RS 485 half duplex two wire mode RS 485 full duplex four wire mode USB when serial port 1 is not using USB mode Supports baud rates of 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 Uses standard communication settings of 8 data bits 1 start bit 1 stop bit and no parity Does not use flow control RS 232 connections through male DB9 connector or terminal block RS 485 connections through terminal block USB connections through USB type B connector Your schedule can use this serial port just like serial port 1 with a few minor exceptions RS 232 Mode Connections You can connect to an RS 232 device to serial port 3 through the 9 pin male connector labeled Serial 3 on the circuit board or through the terminal block RS 232 Connector The connector follows the standard for a Data Terminating Equipment DTE device such as the 9 pin serial connector on most computers It connects the following pins although only Receive Transmit and Ground are really used 1 Carrier Detect CD 2 Receive D
22. is output port ID in decimal format 0 255 HIGH is the text to display if output is high LOW is the text to display if output is low lt HV Analog gt where is analog input ID in decimal format 0 15 EXAMPLES TAG DISPLAYED AS lt HV X10 A1 STATE gt lt HV X10 D16 level gt lt HV x 10 P10 state level gt lt HV Light 3 STATE gt lt HV Light 5 STATE gt lt HV light 15 level gt lt HV light 15 state level gt lt HV VAR 23 gt 154 lt HV Flag 4 Home Away Error gt Home lt HV flag 12 Door open Door closed gt Door closed lt HV Flag 6 Home Away Error gt Error On at unknown level 75 On at 75 lt HV Timer 0 STATEHMSC gt lt HV TIMER 3 MSC gt lt HV Timer 23 HM gt lt HV timer 223 STATE gt Running 1 12 55 98 4 32 65 3 17 Ringing ARMED Door closed lt HV INPUT 12 ARMED Disarmed gt lt HV input 1 Door open Door closed gt On Closed lt HV Output 16 On Off gt lt HV Output 1 Open Closed gt lt HV Analog 0 gt 219 lt HV Analog 7 gt 50 268 RETURNED TAG FORMAT TEXT lt HV DigitalSensor gt where is digital temp sensor ID in decimal format 0 63 Chapter 26 Web Server Digital temp sensor NOTES 50 will be subtracted from the value so the actual temperature is displayed If the value is 255 ERROR will be displayed lt HV SE gt where is scheduled event ID in decimal format 0 255 lt HV PE gt where is periodic event ID
23. the client means establishing a communications link with a listening server The Connection Status field will indicate whether a connection with the server is open or not Once a connection is opened the HomevVision Serial Port field will indicate whether the server s serial port which should be connected to the HomeVision Pro controller is open If it is not open the client will not be able to access the Home Vision Pro controller Once the connection is opened you can use the HomeVision Pro software as if it was directly connected to the controller The Remote Internet Access Screen may be closed or left open Using Remote Internet Access Once a connection is opened you can use the client Home Vision Pro software as if it was directly connected to the HomeVision Pro controller with a few limitations discussed below Using software on one PC to control a HomeVision Pro unit connected to another PC may be confusing at first It s important to understand which PC software screens are accessing the remote HomeVision Pro unit and which are using data from the local PC Anytime the client software needs to communicate with the HomeVision Pro controller it will send an internet message to the server PC The server PC will then send it out its serial port to HomeVision Pro Any serial messages received from HomeVision Pro by the server will be sent to the client software The client software will operate as if the HomeVision Pr
24. 24 34 44 E4 F4 6 05 15 25 35 45 E5 F5 T 7 oe 16 26 36 46 A6 B6 C6 E6 F6 8 o7 17 27 37 47 E7 F7 c 9 08 18 28 38 48 E8 F8 o 10 09 19 29 39 49 A9 B9 C9 E9 F9 D 11 0A 1A 2A 3A 4A EA FA E 12 0B 1B 2B 3B 48 EB FB P43 oc ic 2c ac fac EC FC 44 0D 40 20 30 fan AD BD CD DD ED FD P45 oe ae 26 3e 4e EE Fe 46 oF iF ar ar ar FF X 10 commands follow one of these two general formats Xaabb or Paabbcc Where aa is the address bb is the command cc is the data for some commands Here are some examples X0001 A1 Force On X0003 A1 Force Off X0106 A2 Force Dim XOFOC A16 Force Brighten P301109 D1 Set To Level 9 Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface 203 P001604 A All Lights On PF01606 P Brighten P521D20 F3 Preset Dim To Level 32 20 hex P532112 F4 Set PCS Light To Level 18 12 hex Serial Port Forwarding HomeVision Pro can automatically take data received from one serial port and transmit it out one or more of the other ports To enable this port forwarding open the Controller Settings screen under the Configure menu and select the Serial tab You can then select which port s should be forwarded to which other port s Note that you can select either or both directions for forwarding For example you can forward data r
25. Bit 0 Enabled Disabled Status 0O disabled 1 enabled Bit 1 Current State O low off 1 high on Bits 2 7 Not used all zeros e When commanded over the serial interface it puts the current state of the port into the system variable Result Value as described above and transmits it over the serial interface This allows reading of the port state via the serial interface See the section on serial communications for details on the format of this command and the serial data response Read 8 Bit Port Xx Into Result Value X can refer to either Port B or Port C if Port C is configured as an input This command reads all 8 lines in the port and puts their values into the system variable Result Value This is an 8 bit value with 1 bit representing the current state of each of the 8 lines in the port A 0 zero bit indicates the corresponding port is low while a 1 one bit indicates it is high The highest port number is listed first For example if a command to Read 8 Bit Port C returns the value 147d it is interpreted as follows The value 147d 93h is 10010011 in binary The 8 ports are as follows Port C 1 1 high Port C 2 1 high Port C 3 0 low Port C 4 0 low Port C 5 1 high Port C 6 0 low Port C 7 0 low Port C 8 1 high Chapter 12 Input and Output Ports 115 This command is useful if you re using Port C as an interface to a digital circuit with an 8 bit bus A singl
26. TMK Samsung 12 Sylvania Teknika VCR Goldstar Pilot LXI Marta Sears 037 1008 Realistic Emerson Totevision Memorex Research NEC VCR JC Penny Pentax Hitachi Sears 042 005 RCA Montgomery Ward or 035 Table 14 1 Some Preprogrammed Remote Codes Compatible With The Controller Testing A Preprogrammed Remote This process verifies that the remote is set up to transmit standard format IR signals that the controller can recognize 1 The controller must be setup as follows e The controller must be connected to the PC serial port e In the PC software the controllers IR Receive Mode Master Report Mode and IR Report Mode must be enabled You can verify these are set by using the Status screen under the 146 Chapter 14 Infrared Control Other menu If necessary you can enable these modes from the Controller Command screen under the Control menu Select IR Test from the Other menu The IR test screen will appear If you re using the built in IR receivers make sure they are enabled This is done with the configuration switches located near the Port B terminal block The two switches labeled IR Rx1 and IR Rx2 should be closed slid down to enable the built in IR receivers See the Miscellaneous chapter for more details on the switches Aim the remote at the controller circuit board or external receiver if used and transmit the signal If any infrared si
27. To skip a temperature entry enter a zero for the first digit A dash will be displayed indicating that the temperature won t change at that time e To change between AM and PM position the cursor on the A or P and press any number button e When you re done with your changes press enter to accept them or cancel to cancel e Note that the times do not have to be in sequence although it makes it easier to read Using The PC Thermostat Control Screen The PC software has a Thermostat Control Screen that can control the zone 1 and 2 thermostats It is located under the Control menu It allows you to change the system mode Heat Cool Auto or Off and the temperature setting When you click the Set button both settings are sent to the thermostat For this screen to function properly a schedule with the correct Thermostat Configuration Screen settings must have been downloaded into the controller The controller uses these settings to determine what X 10 or serial commands to send Reading X 10 Thermostat Data NOTE This section applies to the RCS TX10 B and TX15 B thermostats only For the RCS serial thermostats Home Vision Pro will read the status automatically without you doing anything The TX10 B and TX15 B thermostats require you to configure them in order to read their data as discussed below TheTX10 B and TX15 B thermostats can report the following data when commanded via X 10 System mode Off Heat Cool Auto
28. Turns the On Screen Display OSD circuitry on Sets the OSD to the internal video position Sets the video switch to the OSD position Sets the background color to its default setting Sets the horizontal and vertical screen offsets to their default settings Sets the screen blink ratio to 3 1 Displays page 1 of the main menu This command is the quickest way to start the video screen system Chapter 13 _ Video Output 129 Start Internal Video Mode This command sets the controller up to display video text overlaid onto internal video a solid background It performs the following actions Turns the On Screen Display OSD circuitry on Sets the OSD to the internal video position Sets the video switch to the OSD position Sets the background color to its default setting Sets the horizontal and vertical screen offsets to their default settings Sets the screen blink ratio to 3 1 Displays video screen 0 which is a blank screen that you can use to create your own screens Clears the video screen You might use this command when you want to display your own custom video screen on a solid background After you perform this command you can immediately start adding text and it will be automatically displayed Start External Video Mode This command sets the controller up to display video text overlaid onto the incoming video signal It performs the following actions Turns the On Screen Display OSD circuitry on S
29. XX Condition is true if the temperature setting of the specified HVAC zone is less than the value XX a number from 0 to 255 If Zone Temperature Setting gt XX Condition is true if the temperature setting of the specified HVAC zone is greater than the value XX a number from 0 to 255 If Zone Temperature Setting XX Condition is true if the temperature setting of the specified HVAC zone is equal to the value XX a number from 0 to 255 If Zone Temperature Setting lt gt XX Condition is true if the temperature setting of the specified HVAC zone is not equal to the value XX a number from 0 to 255 EnerZone StatNet Thermostats If you can leave your PC running you can control EnerZone StatNet thermostats Refer to the file StatNets installed in the application directory for details Custom Thermostat Control As discussed in previous sections the controller can automatically control zones 1 and 2 if they use RCS TX10 TX10 B TX15 TX15 B or serial thermostats If you have different thermostats you can still use the TV Thermostat Control Screens to control them but you will have to write your own macros to do this Even if you do use these RCS thermostats you may want to modify the way the automatic control works although this is rarely needed To do this you have to write your own macros that perform all the commands and use your own variables to hold the data mode temperature etc If you wish to
30. Yukon Territory 37 27 36 85 48 77 47 62 47 67 47 25 46 07 46 60 38 35 38 42 40 07 44 82 44 52 42 60 43 07 43 03 42 73 43 75 46 72 41 13 44 80 64 07 60 72 Appendix D__ Warranty D 1 APPENDIX D WARRANTY Three Year Limited Warranty WARRANTOR Custom Solutions Inc ELEMENTS OF WARRANTY Custom Solutions Inc warrants for the duration of this warranty HomevVision Pro hereafter referred to as the Product to be free from defects in materials and workmanship with the limitations or exclusions set out below WARRANTY DURATION This warranty shall terminate and be of no further effect three years after the date of original purchase of the Product or at the time the product is A damaged or not maintained as reasonable and necessary B modified C improperly installed D repaired by someone other than the warrantor for defect or malfunction covered by this warranty E used in a manner or purpose for which the product was not intended F damaged by an act of God such as a lightning strike or G sold by the original purchaser STATEMENT OF REMEDY in the event the product does not conform to this warranty at any time while this warranty is in effect the warrantor shall repair the defect and return it to you without charge for parts service or any other costs incurred by the warrantor or its representative in conjunction with the performance of this warranty THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER OR PROVIDE FOR T
31. always allows them to be performed and Stop If Ringing prevents them only if the timer expired during the power outage Chapter 9 Timers and Delays 85 NOTE These power failure states work the same way for all running timers regardless of whether they are being used as Standard Timers or Wait Timers Examples When might you use the different power failure states Here are a few examples If the timer has associated actions and you need to be sure they get done set the power failure state to No Change Assume you re displaying video screens and using a timer to delay a few seconds before changing to another screen All of a sudden the power goes out Since the TV has probably gone off there s not much point in trying to display a different screen You probably should set this timer s power fail state to Stop amp Clear to prevent it from performing any actions Assume you re using a timer to delay a few minutes before sounding an X 10 chime module to remind you to do something While the timer s still running the power goes off What do you want to do when it comes back Well if the timer still hasn t expired you d want it to keep running so it goes off at the proper time But what if it expired during the power failure perhaps because power was out for several hours Do you want the chime to sound as soon as power is restored This probably doesn t make much sense For this situation you may want to
32. and therefore gets executed every loop This approach will perform the actions every time the specified signal is received Clear Status Is On Bit This command clears the bit which was set when an X 10 Status is On command was received for this specific X 10 module Refer to the Clear Status Request Bit command for a discussion of how best to implement these advanced X 10 commands Clear Status Is Off Bit This command clears the bit which was set when an X 10 Status is Off command was received for this specific X 10 module Refer to the Clear Status Request Bit command for a discussion of how best to implement these advanced X 10 commands Clear Hail Request Bit This command clears the bit which was set when an X 10 Hail Request command was received for this house code Refer to the Clear Status Request Bit command for a discussion of how best to implement these advanced X 10 commands Clear Hail Acknowledge Bit This command clears the bit which was set when an X 10 Hail Acknowledge command was received for this House Code Refer to the Clear Status Request Bit command for a discussion of how best to implement these advanced X 10 commands Clear Preset Dim Bit And Level This command clears the bit which was set when an X 10 Preset Dim command was received for this specific X 10 module Refer to the Clear Status Request Bit command for a discussion of how b
33. being displayed The functions are explained below No Display When the video screen system is inactive no screens are being displayed The only remote key that functions is channel up which starts the video screen system and displays main menu page 1 Main Menu Screens When one of the main menu screens is being displayed the keys have these functions Number keys select from the menu entries Volume up and down keys rotate between the main menu screens Volume up moves forward while volume down moves backward The channel down key exits from the video screen system and shuts off the On Screen Display circuitry If you exit from the menu system using the channel down key the channel up key returns you to the main menu The enter and cancel keys are not used Object List Screens When one of the object list screens is being displayed the keys have these functions Number keys select specific objects from the list Volume up and down keys page through the objects Volume up displays objects with higher ID numbers while volume down displays objects with lower ID numbers The channel up key returns you to the previous menu The channel down key exits from the video screen system and shuts off the On Screen Display circuitry The enter and cancel keys are not used Object Control Screens When one of the object control screens is being displayed the keys have these functions Number keys select from
34. chapter NOTE Use the input output ports configuration screen under the Configure menu to set Port C to an input or output Input Port Event Triggers The controller can be set up to automatically perform a set of actions when any of the input ports changes state To set this up from the PC software 1 Using the input port summary screen find the specific input port which you want to trigger the actions 102 Chapter 12 Input and Output Ports 2 If you want to trigger the actions when the port goes high double click on the check box in the Hi Actions Defined column If you want to trigger the actions when the port goes low double click in the Low Actions Defined column This will call up the actions entry screen 3 On the actions entry screen enter whatever actions you want to perform When done click OK and you ll be returned to the input port summary screen 4 Make sure the actions are enabled The check box in the Hi Actions Enabled and Low Actions Enabled columns enable and disable the actions 5 Load the schedule into the controller Once set up in this fashion the controller constantly checks to see when the ports change state If the changed port has actions specified the controller will immediately perform them Port A SPDT Relays Port A contains 8 Single Pole Double Throw SPDT relays A SPDT relay is essentially a switch that can switch one point between two other po
35. check boxes on the screen for each partition in your system You can select any or all of the partitions to turn on Turn partitions chime mode off This command turns off the chime mode for the partition s specified by There will be separate check boxes on the screen for each partition in your system You can select any or all of the partitions to turn off Toggle partitions instant mode This command toggles the instant mode for the partition s specified by There will be separate check boxes on the screen for each partition in your system You can select any or all of the partitions to control If the partition instant mode is currently off it will turn on If it is currently on it will turn off Sound partitions fire panic This command sounds the fire panic alarm for the partition s specified by There will be separate check boxes on the screen for each partition in your system You can select any or all of the partitions to sound Sound partitions medical panic 254 Chapter 25 Security Systems This command sounds the medical panic alarm for the partition s specified by There will be separate check boxes on the screen for each partition in your system You can select any or all of the partitions to sound Sound partitions police panic This command sounds the police panic alarm for the partition s specified by There will be separate check boxes on the screen fo
36. e The port status is not updated automatically Click the Read button to update them e Port C will be set as an input or output based on the settings currently loaded in the controller To change this you must load a new schedule with different settings Macro Control Screen From this screen you can run any macro that has been previously loaded into the controller You should note several points about this screen e When you first display the screen the software will attempt to read the number of macros currently loaded in the controller If unsuccessful an error message will be displayed and you will not be able to run the macros e You can assign different macros and text descriptions to each of the 30 buttons To do this click on the text descriptions A new window will open where you can select from the available macros and change their descriptions e When you click the button to run a macro the PC will command the controller to run the macro with the corresponding ID number e The macro numbers and text descriptions for the buttons are stored in the computer schedule file They are not loaded into the controller NOTE The schedule file you have opened on your computer should match the schedule loaded into the controller or at least the macros should be the same If not there s a chance of running the wrong macro For example assume you wrote macro 4 which arms your burglar alarm You also set up this macro cont
37. in decimal format 0 255 lt HV HVAC ControlMode gt where is the zone in decimal format 0 15 lt HV HVAC SystemMode gt where is the zone in decimal format 0 15 lt HV HVAC FanMode gt where is the zone in decimal format 0 15 lt HV HVAC Setpoint gt where is the zone in decimal format 0 15 lt HV HVAC Temperature gt where is the zone in decimal format 0 15 lt HV SecPartition Status gt where is the partition in decimal format 0 7 lt HV SecZone Status gt where is the zone in decimal format 0 63 lt HV HVDateTime gt lt HV LoadedFileName gt lt HV LoadedFileDateTime gt lt HV RunningHalted gt e event time rate control mode HVAC zone system mode HVAC zone fan mode HVAC zone setpoint HVAC zone temperature Security partition status Security zone status HomeVision clock date and time Name of file loaded in controller Date and time of file loaded in controller HomeVision status NOTES Indicates whether the controller is running or halted EXAMPLES TAG DISPLAYED AS lt HV DigitalSensor 0 gt 75 ERROR lt HV DigitalSensor 1 gt lt HV SE 12 gt lt HV PE 12 gt lt HV HVAC 0 ControlMode gt lt HV HVAC 0 SystemMode gt lt HV HVAC 1 FanMode gt lt HV HVAC 3 Setpoint gt lt HV HVAC 3 Temperature gt OK 5 Jul 2000 at 1 11 21 PM 5 Jul 2000 at 1 11 00 PM lt HV SecPartition 0 Status gt lt HV SecZone
38. no action will be performed For instance assume that in the previous example you have only 10 flags defined Since flag 12 doesn t exist no action will be performed If the variable changes value later to a valid flag number and the command is executed again it will set the specified flag Chapter 10 _ Flags 89 Toggle Flag At Variable XXX This command looks up the value of variable XXX and uses it as the ID number of the flag The corresponding flag is then toggled A flag which is SET will be changed to CLEAR Conversely a flag which was CLEAR will be changed to SET A flag which is NEUTRAL will not be changed by this command If the value of the variable is not a valid flag number no action will be performed Read Flag This command causes the controller to read the state of the flag and to transmit it over the serial interface This command can only be issued over the serial port it cannot be included directly in a schedule This command allows an external computer or other device to determine the state of a flag See the file Serial installed in the application directory for details on the format of this command and the serial data response Flag Conditions The following flag conditions can be checked by an If Then or If Then Else statement If If If EE IE TE Flag XXX Set This condition will be true if the specified flag is SET It will be false if the flag is CLEAR or NEUTRAL
39. these drivers at http www ftdichip com F TWinDriver htm The HomeVision Pro installation program will automatically place the drivers in your HomeVision folder However they still need to be installed as described in the PC Setup Process section Serial Port Configuration Header The HomeVision Pro serial ports may be configured in several different ways The Serial Port Configuration Header routes the ports to the different connectors that they can use The user must place jumpers on the appropriate points to make the desired connections as described below HomeVision Pro contains three user controllable serial ports numbered 1 3 and 4 plus one special serial port dedicate to future functions Figure 16 3 shows each of these four ports along the left side The right side shows the connectors and terminal block positions the ports use The lines between them show the possible connections between the ports and the connectors and terminal blocks The arrows show the direction of the data flow Solid lines show the connections that are hard wired and always present The dashed lines show the selectable connections that the user can make by installing the appropriate jumper s The circled numbers indicate the pin number of the Serial Port Configuration Header where the connections are made For example the solid line between the Serial Port 1 TX output and the Serial 1 232 Connector shows that whenever seri
40. you need two conditions with an OR statement like this If Time Is After Sunset Or Time Is Before Sunrise Then Do whatever you want End If If you use an AND statement it will never be true because it can t be both after sunset and before sunrise of TODAY Therefore this will never be true If Time Is After Sunset And Time Is Before Sunrise Then Do whatever you want End If Alternatively there is a special time and date condition called After Dark that will work properly as discussed a little later Date Conditions These conditions are available from the Date Conditions Button on the actions entry screen toolbar This button brings up a screen with separate check boxes for each e Day of the week e Date of the month Month of the year Chapter 6 __Time and Date Control 67 By checking the appropriate boxes you can set up almost any date condition Here are examples of how this works e Box es checked Monday Condition will be true On all Mondays e Box es checked Monday Tuesday Condition will be true On all Mondays and Tuesdays e Box es checked 1st of month Condition will be true On the first day of each month e Box es checked Monday 1st of month Condition will be true Only on Mondays that are also the first of the month e Box es checked Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday 1st of month Condition will be true On the first of any month that falls on a weekday
41. 05 37 80 34 15 38 58 34 12 32 72 37 78 37 33 34 42 36 97 37 97 C 2 Appendix C Latitudes and Longitudes State Province Latitude Longitude Colorado 38 83 Colorado 39 75 Colorado 39 07 Colorado 38 27 Connecticut 41 18 Connecticut 41 77 Connecticut 41 53 Connecticut 41 67 Connecticut 41 30 Connecticut 41 05 Connecticut 41 55 C 38 90 Delaware 39 75 Florida 29 22 Florida N Ko O oa Florida Florida 24 57 25 78 28 55 30 42 27 77 27 33 30 45 84 28 Florida Florida Florida Florida Florida Florida Florida Florida Georgia Georgia Georgia Georgia Georgia Hawaii Hawaii Hawaii daho daho daho daho Ilinois Ilinois Ilinois Ilinois Ilinois Ilinois Ilinois Ilinois llinois 27 95 26 72 33 75 33 47 32 47 32 83 32 08 19 73 21 30 21 98 43 62 43 50 46 40 42 87 40 48 40 12 41 87 39 85 41 52 40 70 42 27 39 80 40 12 aa Sea SSeS o O amp j ow wo Appendix C Latitudes and Longitudes C 3 State Province Latitude Longitude ndiana 37 97 ndiana 41 07 ndiana 41 60 ndiana 39 77 ndiana 40 42 ndiana 40 18 ndiana 41 68 ndiana 39 47 41 97 41 52 41 58 42 50 41 67 42 50 42 50 Kansas 37 75 Kansas 39 12 Kansas 38 85 Kansas Kansas 37 70 Kentucky 38 48 Kentucky 37 00 Kentucky 38 05 Kentucky 38 25 Kentucky 37 08 Louisiana 30 45 Louisiana 29 95 Louisiana 32 52 Maine 44 32 Maine 44 80 Maine 44 90 Maine 43 67 Manitoba 49 85 Manitoba 58 75 Manitoba 49 90 Maryl
42. 10 RF remote that transmits codes K1 ON through K16 ON and wants these to control the video menu system In the K1 On Actions Defined Field performed whenever a K1 ON signal is received enter the command Simulate IR Button 1 Press Similarly in the K2 ON Actions Defined Field enter the command Simulate IR Button 2 Press The same would be done for all 16 signals where signals K11 ON through K16 ON could perform the non numeric commands like Channel Up Now whenever HomeVision Pro receives one of these X 10 signals it will perform the corresponding command thereby controlling the video menu system There is one important limitation of these commands You can include only one such command in any event or set of actions For example you should not do this Simulate IR Button 1 Press Simulate IR Button 2 Press If you do this only the last command will be executed When the controller encounters one of these commands it does not perform it immediately Instead it notes which signal should be simulated and goes to the next command After doing any subsequent commands it returns to normal operation During normal operation it periodically checks for any received IR signals and responds to them if necessary After handling any such IR signals it checks to see if it must simulate an IR keypress If so i e if it previously ran one of the Simulate IR Button Press commands it does the specified command As a result if you perfo
43. 10 commands over the power line Only the internal state table is adjusted If you want to transmit X 10 commands when power is restored you can include the commands in the Power Failure Recovery event accessed through the Objects Events menu Chapter 6 Time and Date Control 65 CHAPTER 6 TIME AND DATE CONTROL Introduction The controller provides several ways to control events based on time or date These are Scheduled Events Scheduled events are events that occur at a certain time each day You can base the time on a fixed time such as 5 00 PM or on sunset or sunrise Such as 1 hour after sunset You can define exactly what actions you want to perform when the time is reached If you only want to perform actions on certain days such as only on Sundays or only on January 1 you can use If Then statements to limit the actions to those days Periodic Events Periodic events are events that occur at a regular rate such as every 5 minutes or every hour Periodic events can also occur every time the controller executes a loop which usually takes 5 20 milliseconds lf Then Conditions The current time and date can be checked with If Then or If Then Else conditions You can then perform different actions based on the time or date For example if an outdoor motion sensor is triggered at night you might turn an outside light on If it is triggered during the day you wouldn t turn it on Timers Timers are used to keep tr
44. 4 5 inches X 4 5 inches Two different versions of this board can be used with Home Vision Pro 10 8081 board Connects directly to the 10 pin connector H7 labeled Sylva I O The relays must be powered by an external 12VDC power supply 236 Chapter 21 Expansion Boards e 10 8081 485 board Connects through an RS 485 port serial port 3 or 4 Must be powered by an external 12VDC power supply 10 8081 Setup 1 Remove power from the controller 2 Connect a 10 wire ribbon cable to connecter H7 Sylva I O Be sure to align pin 1 on the HomevVision Pro connector with the red wire on the cable Plug the other end of the cable into either of the 10 pin connectors on the 10 808 board Note that pin 1 the red wire goes towards the left edge of the board If you have multiple IO 808I boards you can chain them together Use 10 wire ribbon cables to connect the first board to the second board the second board to the third board and so on 3 Insert jumpers on the IO 808I board s to set their addresses as shown below Board Address Jumpers to Install 1 0 None 2 1 1 3 2 2 4 3 1 and 2 These jumper settings will take affect the next time power is applied to the board 4 Apply power to the controller 5 Connect a 12VDC power supply to the 12V connector on the IO 8O8l WARNING We recommend you use a separate power supply from the one that s powering HomeVision Pro This will prevent too much current being drawn from a s
45. Chapter 12 Input and Output Ports 111 Pulse If you need longer pulse lengths we recommend a different approach using other commands First set the port to the desired state with appropriate output port command e Then start a Wait Timer for the desired pulse length Set up the timer so that when it expires it sets the port back to its original state The controller will operate normally while waiting for the timer to expire and can therefore respond immediately to any incoming commands This approach will produce pulse lengths that are usually more than accurate enough The exact accuracy depends on your schedule but is usually within 20 milliseconds However in rare cases it can be less accurate for example if you re in the middle of transmitting multiple IR signals lasting several seconds the output port action could be delayed while waiting for the IR signals to complete The lengths of the pulses are almost always accurate within 1 of the value you specify If you need more precision we recommend that you test the command and measure its actual duration By adjusting the commanded value slightly you should be able to get within a millisecond of the desired length The only exception to the 1 accuracy spec is for very short pulses of a few milliseconds Such pulses could be several hundred microseconds too long Output Port High For Seconds Sets the output port to a high state for H seconds then
46. Controller Conditions Serial Interface Conditions Thermostat Conditions Security System Conditions Data Logging Conditions Weather Conditions Phone Conditions If Then Else Statements Format If Then and If Then Else statements are used when you only want to perform an action under certain conditions By including the action s within one of these statements you can limit when they are performed An lf Then statement has the following format TE condition s Then action s End If One or more conditions must be between the If and Then statements One or more actions must be between the Then and End If statements If the condition s are met i e they are true the action s will be performed An lf Then Else statement has a similar format TE condition s Then action s Else action s End If An If Then Else statement has two sets of actions If the condition s are met the first set of actions between Then and Else will be performed If the condition s aren t met the second set of actions between Else and End If will be performed This is an example of how an If Then Else statement might appear in schedule If Time is After Sunset AND Flag 2 In Home Mode is Set Then X10 A5 Outside Entry Light ON Else X10 A5 Outside Entry Light OFF End If You can also nest If Then and If Then Else statements Nesting means including another If Then
47. Display OSD circuitry that selects the background on which the text will be displayed see the switch labeled OSD Switch in Figure 13 1 In the Internal position the text will be displayed over a solid background internally generated video You can choose from eight background colors In the External position the text will be displayed over the incoming video at the video input jack If you set the OSD to this position and there s no video coming in there will be no display You do not need to use these commands if you use the Start Video Screen System Start Internal Video Mode and Start External Video Mode commands Those commands will automatically put the OSD circuitry into the proper position However you can use these commands to switch between internal and external video overlay any time you wish Chapter 13 _ Video Output 131 Initialize OSD Circuits This command initializes the On Screen Display OSD circuitry to the following settings Turns the On Screen Display OSD circuitry on Sets the OSD to the internal video position Sets the background color to its default setting Sets the horizontal and vertical screen offsets to their default settings Sets the screen blink ratio to 3 1 You do not need to use this command if you use the Start Video Screen System Start Internal Video Mode and Start External Video Mode commands Those commands will automatically initialize the OSD circuitry Set Horizont
48. From Thermostats Reading data from a thermostat requires two steps 1 Sending a data request command to the thermostat If you have configured zone 1 or 2 as a TX10 B the controller will automatically periodically request the thermostat settings If you have additional thermostats you will have to request their data in your schedule using the commands described in the Advanced Thermostat Control section If you have a TX15 B with the auto send feature you do not need to request status from it as it will report changes 2 Reading the thermostat response and updating the system variables accordingly The controller automatically reads responses from the TX10 B thermostat For more details on this see the Request Report commands in the Advanced Thermostat Control section The automatic process of requesting data for zones 1 and 2 is described below Automatic X 10 Data Requests TX10 B If you have configured zone 1 or 2 as a TX10 B the controller will periodically request the thermostat settings You can set the status request rate to between 1 and 15 minutes in 1 minute increments You can also disable the automatic requests Since this requires sending and receiving X 10 it can clog up the power line if done too frequently On the other hand the less frequently the status is read the longer it takes for temperature changes and manual changes at the thermostat to be detected by the controller Thus there is a tradeoff be
49. HomeVision Pro currently works with the Call Editor RSA from Flashline formerly Vive Synergies and the PC Caller ID Plug from ITU Technologies Users have reported that other caller ID devices work with HomeVision Pro as well although we have not tested these ourselves 2 Another software program is running on the PC that can get the caller ID data from an internal modem 3 With the HomeVision Phone CID add on device Unlike the two above methods this device works without a PC being connected This device also adds phone control capabilities To use this device for caller ID refer to the instructions provided with it Each method requires caller ID service from your phone company that provides both the number and name of incoming callers If your service only provides the phone number the controller will not be able to display the caller s name Caller ID Setup For Call Editor RSA When a call is received the Call Editor RSA routes the caller ID information to the PC If the HomeVision Pro application is running it will read the information from the Call Editor The application then formats the data for display on the caller ID TV screen and sends it to the controller The controller then executes a macro that you wrote This macro will display the caller ID screen Once displayed you can shut the display off with your infrared remote Pressing any of the 16 standard buttons the same ones that control the video screen system will shu
50. Humidity DailyHighOutsideHumidity WindSpeed WindDirection Pressure PressureDirection DailyRainfall InsideTemperature InsideHumidity WeeklyRainfall MonthlyRainfall DailyLowWindSpeed DailyHighWindSpeed PressureDirection DailyLowOutside Temperature DailyHighOutsideTemperature DailyLowlnsideTemperature DailyHighInsideTemperature Variable 0 Variable 1 Variable 2 Variable 3 2 Paste the following text into a word processor Save it as a text file named Weather txt and place it in the same directory as the HomeVision Pro application Note that this is one long line of text that wraps around If your word processor puts a carriage return in the middle delete it 12 15 AM 86 5 70 2 60 80 82 87 5 100 0 2 4 359 30 06 2 6 0 35 75 9 60 1 95 13 01 0 9 17 5 0 55 89 74 78 252 253 254 255 3 Enter the following command in your schedule somewhere you can easily command it to run perhaps in a macro Serial port 1 transmit Read data file weather txt 4 From the HomeVision Pro Configure menu open the Controller Settings screen Select the Video tab then check Enable weather conditions screen This allows the weather conditions screen to be displayed on your TV 5 Download the schedule into the controller 294 Chapter 27 Miscellaneous 6 Shut down then restart the HomeVision Pro software this causes it to read the configuration file 7 Display the weather conditions screen on your TV You can start it from p
51. Is Ringing This condition will be true if the timer is ringing It will be false if the timer is running or stopped Timer XXX Is Stopped This condition will be true if the timer is stopped It will be false if the timer is running or ringing Timer XXX Is Not Running This condition will be true if the timer is ringing or stopped It will be false if the timer is running Timer XXX Is Not Ringing This condition will be true if the timer is running or stopped It will be false if the timer is ringing Timer XXX Is Not Stopped This condition will be true if the timer is running or ringing It will be false if the timer is stopped Power Failure Options 84 Chapter 9 Timers and Delays Your schedule may have timers running when power goes out Two different situations may exist for running timers depending on how long the power was out 1 The timer should have expired during the power outage 2 The timer should still be running You can decide how the controller handles running timers while recovering from the power failure You do this by setting the Power Fail State on the timer summary screen Again note that these power failure settings will only apply to the timer if it is running when the power goes out The different power failure settings work as follows e No Change If you select No Change the controller will keep the timer running during the power outage The timer will then be counted d
52. Monday through Friday e Box es checked March Condition will be true On all days in March e Box es checked March Friday Condition will be true On all Fridays in March e Box es checked 25th of month December Condition will be true Only on December 25th e Box es checked 25th of month December Saturday Sunday Condition will be true On December 25th only if it happens to fall on Saturday or Sunday e Box es checked Friday Saturday April May June Condition will be true On all Fridays and Saturdays in the months of April May and June 68 Chapter 6 Time and Date Control Special Time And Date Conditions These conditions are available from the Special Time amp Date Conditions Button on the actions entry screen toolbar These same conditions can be specified using multiple time or date conditions discussed above However these special conditions are easier to enter TE If If TE TE If TE LE If If If If TE If Today Is A Weekday Condition is true if the current day of week is Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday or Friday Today Is A Weekend Condition is true if the current day of week is Saturday or Sunday Today Is Sunday Through Thursday Condition is true if the current day of week is Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday or Thursday Today Is Friday Or Saturday Condition is true if the current day of week is Friday or Saturday Season Is Winter Conditio
53. ON its level 0 to 16 will be put in the variable If the light is OFF the variable is set to 255 If NEUTRAL the variable is set to 254 This command allows you to store the current level and later set the light back to it See the following commands for more information on setting the light to the level contained in a variable Refer to the How To file for an example of how to use this command Note that this command will not work properly with PCS lighting modules and some of the newer Leviton and X 10 devices that support preset dim or extended codes as they have more than 17 light levels For these devices use the following command instead Chapter 5 X 10 57 Put Current Preset Dim Level Into Variable This command puts the X 10 module s current light setting 0 to 31 into the specified variable Note that it only works with X 10 devices where the level is stored as a range from 0 to 31 typically this is limited to the PCS switches and some of the newer Leviton and X 10 devices that support preset dim or extended codes For devices which support only levels 0 16 and respond to only the standard On Off Bright and Dim signals use the above Put Current Level Into Variable command instead If the light is ON its level 0 to 31 will be put in the variable If the light is OFF the variable is set to 0 If NEUTRAL a state which isn t really used for these types of X 10 devices the variab
54. PC will display the message Preparing controller and attempt to put the controller into the learn mode If the controller does not respond the PC will abort the learning process and display a message If this happens verify that the controller is properly connected and communicating If successful the message Aim remote at controller and transmit once will be displayed Then Chapter 14 Infrared Control 153 Aim the remote at the built in IR receivers or an external receiver e Quickly press and release the remote button you re learning The idea is to transmit a single signal If you press down too long the remote may transmit multiple signals e Depending on the remote and how close you hold it to the IR receiver one of five things will happen Wait several seconds to see what happens don t immediately press the button again The possibilities are A The message IR signal received now analyzing is displayed This is followed by the message Done analyzing signal This indicates the signal has been successfully learned Four key signal parameters will also be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen Carrier frequency Unless you ve checked the measure carrier frequency option the controller will use a default frequency of 38 4kHz which works with most remotes If this doesn t properly control your equipment you should try learning with the measure carrier frequency opti
55. Port Click Finish 3 The Found new hardware wizard may start again If it does repeat the process in Step 2 to install drivers for the USB Serial Port 4 Open the Device Manager in either of the following ways e Right click My Computer click Manage and then select Device Manager e Select Start Menu Settings Control Panel then open System select the Hardware tab and then click Device Manager Under the View menu select Devices by type Next expand Ports COM amp LPT and it should now list a new USB Serial Port Note that the port may only be listed while HomeVision Pro is connected via the USB cable To view or edit the properties double click or right click and select Properties a Note the Com port number assigned to the device This is the port number you will use in the HomeVision Pro software b Tochange the Com port number select the Port Settings tab and then click Advanced On Windows 98 1 Plug a USB A B cable into the HomeVision Pro USB port and into a PC USB port If Home Vision Pro is not powered apply power to it 2 The Add new hardware wizard should start and allow you to install the drivers for the USB lt gt Serial device a Select Search for the best drivers for your device and then click Next b Select Display a list of all the drivers in a specific location and then click Next c Selec
56. SHOOTING Note Our web site at www csi3 com homevis2 htm has a wide variety of trouble shooting information If this manual doesn t solve your problem please visit this web site The trouble shooting procedures are divided into seven topics Problems communicating with the controller Infrared signal receive problems Infrared signal transmit problems Video problems X 10 receive problems X 10 transmit problems X 10 noise interference problems Problems Communicating with the Controller Is the controller s Power OK LED on 1 No The controller is not receiving proper power Try the following 2 Yes e Disconnect any devices you have connected to the I O ports or connectors A short circuit could be shutting down the controller s internal power supply e Remove and then reconnect the power transformer jack The jack can sometimes seem to be inserted properly but is barely making electrical contact leading to intermittent operation e Verify the electrical outlet is functional If none of these solve the problem then the external power supply is defective What is the controller s Status 1 LED doing A Off Is the controller s X 10 Int LED on 1 Yes The controller is recovering from a power failure It must complete this process before it will be able to receive commands from the serial interface This process typically only takes a few seconds However if it s performing many X 10 or
57. Server 267 RETURNED TAG FORMAT TEXT X 10 device state Custom light state Variable value Flag state Timer value Input port state Output port state Analog input value lt HV X10 STATE LEVEL LEVEL gt where is X 10 address house code and unit code STATE means to display state as On or Off LEVEL means to display level as a number 0 to 100 LEVEL means to display level as a 0 to 100 lt HV Light STATE LEVEL gt where is light ID in decimal format 0 255 STATE means to display state as On Off Unknown Unknown State or On at unknown level LEVEL means to display level as a 0 to 100 lt HV Var gt where is variable ID in decimal format 0 255 lt HV Flag SET CLEAR NEUTRAL gt where is flag ID in decimal format 0 255 SET is the text to display if flag is set CLEAR is the text to display if flag is clear NEUTRAL is the text to display if flag is neutral lt HV Timer STATEHMSC gt is timer ID in decimal format 0 255 STATEHMSC indicates which values to display STATE either Running Halted or Ringing H hour value M minute value S second value C centisecond hundredths value lt HV Input HIGH LOW gt where is input port ID in decimal format 0 255 HIGH is the text to display if input is high LOW is the text to display if input is low lt HV Output HIGH LOW gt where
58. String Value with the name MemoryAcess and set its data value to True The next time to start the HomeVIsion Pro software memory access commands will be enabled You access them from the Actions Entry Screen via the Other button Note that when entering the address to read or write you enter two bytes in decimal format but the command will display the address in hexadecimal format For example the hex address EF59 shown in the example is entered as 239 for the Most Significant Byte and 89 for the Least Significant Byte IR Signal Transmission Details Electrical Connections The controller can transmit IR signals to devices such as televisions and stereos There is both a 3 5mm jack and a terminal block for connecting to external IR emitters or connection blocks The outputs are wired together and have the following electrical characteristics e When off not transmitting the output is tied to ground through two resistors and the IR TX status LED e When on transmitting the output is 12V nominal with a 27 Ohm resistor in series to limit the current e Aschematic of this circuit is shown below 152 Chapter 14 Infrared Control IR TX Output 1000 ohms IR LED Ground This output can directly drive many types of equipment including Xantech Corporation s Video Link Blast IR transmitter Amplified or non amplified connecting blocks which in turn drive multiple emitters I
59. Systems section in the Miscellaneous chapter for an overview Refer to the file Custom Lighting installed in the HomeVision directory for details Caller ID Configuration Screen This screen is used to configure the caller ID feature Refer to the caller ID chapter for details Expansion Board Configuration Screen This screen is used to configure a multifunction expansion board Sylva I O boards or other add on devices It is also used two configure the RS 232 485 serial ports known as port 3 and 4 Refer to other sections of this manual and or the device documentation for more details IR Transmit Zones Configuration Screen This screen is used to name the infrared transmit zones on a multifunction expansion board If you are using this board refer to its documentation for more details Digital Temperature Sensors Configuration Screen This screen is used to configure digital temperature sensors Web Server Configuration Screen This screen is used to configure the Internet web server built into the PC software This allows Home Vision Pro to be controlled by a web browser Remote Internet Access Configuration Screen This screen is used to configure the Remote Internet Access capability built into the PC software This allows HomeVision Pro software on one computer to communicate with HomeVision Pro software on another computer across the Internet to control Home Vision Pro Preferences Screen This screen
60. The format is as follows _at 12 30 55 PM May 05 The two underscore characters at the beginning represent two blank spaces This command is intended to be used after writing your own message to the log For example you might write a message indicating the burglar alarm when off then write the time It might appear as follows Alarm went off at 12 30 55 PM May 05 Log Current Time To Memory This command writes the current time to the event logging memory The format is as follows at 12 30 55 PM The two underscore characters at the beginning represent two blank spaces Log Current Date To Memory This command writes the current date to the controller s event logging memory The format is as follows Dec 30 Saturday Infrared Simulation Commands 138 Chapter 13 Video Output The built in video menu system is normally controlled by a user pressing buttons on an infrared remote Sometimes however it can be useful to have other ways to control the menu system A set of 16 video commands is provided that you can use in your schedule to do this These commands will cause HomevVision Pro to respond just as if a user had actually pressed the corresponding button on a remote The 16 commands are described below Simulate IR Button 0 Press Simulate IR Button 1 Press Simulate IR Button 2 Press Simulate IR Button 3 Press Simulate IR Button 4 Press Simulate IR Button 5 Press Simulate IR Button 6 Press Simulate IR B
61. The format for sending commands over the serial interface is described in the Serial file installed in the HomeVision directory These commands are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the appropriate toolbar button The command is chosen from the pull down list Reporting Commands The controller can be set up to automatically report the occurrence of certain events The events are reported by transmitting serial messages to the attached PC 160 Chapter 15 Controller Functions Enable Master Report Mode Disable Master Report Mode These commands enable or disable the overall master reporting function When disabled the controller will not report any events over the serial interface even if the individual reporting modes are enabled The master report mode must be enabled before the controller will report any events Enable Reporting Of Time And Date Along With Events Disable Reporting Of Time And Date Along With Events When an event occurs which is reported over the serial interface the controller can also report the event s time and date When this mode is enabled the controller will transmit an additional line of text which includes the time and date Enable Input Port Report Mode Disable Input Port Report Mode These commands enable or disable the Input Port Report Mode When enabled the controller will send a message over the serial interface whenever an enabled input port changes state
62. These commands are located under a new button titled Other on the actions entry screen e Display the caller ID screen whenever you want to This command is located under the Video button on the actions entry screen e Execute the caller ID macro using the standard Do Macro command Caller ID Commands These commands are located under a new button titled Other on the actions entry screen Set Caller ID Line 2 Text To H H HHTHTHHHHTFHHEFFHTHEEE This command specifies the text that will be displayed on line 2 of the caller ID TV screen This line is normally used to display the caller s name Line 1 always displays Phone call from This command isn t needed when using the automatic caller ID display It s provided in case you want to display something you create yourself Set Caller ID Line 3 Text To H HHTHTHHHHTTHHEFFTHERT This command specifies the text that will be displayed on line 3 of the caller ID TV screen This line is normally used to display the caller s phone number Line 1 always displays Phone call from Chapter 18 Caller ID 211 This command isn t needed when using the automatic caller ID display It s provided in case you want to display something you create yourself Put All 48 Bytes of Caller ID Data Into User Text Area Starting at Byte This command writes all the caller ID information to the text storage buffer The 48 bytes correspond to the two lines of text that HomeVision Pro displays
63. X 10 Transmit Problem 1 Verify the LED on the TW 523 module is lit If not make sure it s plugged into a live circuit If the LED is still not lit the TW 523 is defective 2 Verify the controller s X 10 Intf LED is lit If not try the following e Verify that the phone cable between the controller and the TW 523 module is installed and the connectors are securely mated e If you re using your own phone cable make sure it s a 4 conductor cable Many cables are only two conductor and will not work Test the controller with its original cable e Try using a different TW 523 module If the controller s X 10 Int LED still does not light check communications with it as described earlier If communications are OK but the X 10 Int LED will not light when the TW 523 module is properly installed the controller is defective although this particularly failure is extremely unlikely Open the X 10 control screen from the Control menu Use it to transmit an X 10 signal to a device you can observe What message is reported at the bottom of the window A Command Failed No Controller Response or Command Failed Invalid Controller Response This could occur if the controller is halted or if there was a communications problem between the controller and the computer Open the status screen under the Other menu and read the controller s status If the controller is halted or there are other errors
64. XXX With HH MM SS SS And Start This configures the timer as a Standard Timer It loads the specified timer with the specified time and starts it running HH MM SS SS refers to the hours minutes and seconds value If the timer is ringing when this command is executed it will be changed to running 82 Chapter 9 Timers and Delays Wait HH MM SS SS With Timer XXX Then This configures the timer as a Wait Timer It loads the specified timer with the specified time and starts it running HH MM SS SS refers to the hours minutes and seconds value If the timer is ringing when this command is executed it will be changed to running When you first enter a Wait Timer command you ll have to select a timer to use and a starting value It will look similar to the following on the display screen Wait HH MM SS SS With Timer XXX Then End Wait You then enter whatever actions you want between the WAIT and END lines Halt Timer XXX This stops the specified timer from running but doesn t change its value If the timer is stopped or ringing when this command is executed it will have no effect since the timer is not running Resume Timer XXX This starts the specified timer running again with its previous value as the starting value If you never started or cleared the timer prior to this command the timer could be at any value Therefore you will usually not want to use the Resume
65. You will normally never need to use this command However in rare cases it may be beneficial to clear all incoming data before sending serial commands to certain types of devices so this command is provided WARNING Do not use this command unless you fully understand its effects Copy XX characters of text starting at character YY into text storage buffer starting at location ZZ This command copies some or all of the received serial data into the text storage buffer It has three parameters e XX is the number of serial input characters to copy It can range from 1 up to the length of the received serial message e yy is the character location in the received serial message to start copying from e ZZ is the location in the text storage buffer to start copying the text to If you try to copy characters past the end of the serial message blank spaces will be copied for these If you write past the end of the text storage buffer location 256 it will wrap around and write to the start of the buffer Refer to the video chapter for details on how the text storage buffer works Serial Conditions The following serial conditions can be checked by an If Then or If Then Else statement They are used when reading data from external devices They can be used with any of the available serial ports If Exactly Serial Characters Are Received If gt Serial Characters Are Received 192 Chapter 16 _Serial Interfac
66. a scheduled event or the value of a variable Most also have help screens Configuration Status Screens These screens display the general status of the controller and allow you to change its configuration For example you can Change the current time and date Enable or disable the major controller functions for X 10 IR and I O ports Data Entry Screens These screens are used to enter data such as A time or date A variable value A timer value Custom Control Screens These screens are used to control HVAC systems security systems etc New screens will be regularly added Refer to the text file Video Screens installed in the application directory for the latest information Help Screens Many of the screens have help screens that explain important features Video Screen System Navigation An infrared remote control is normally used to navigate around the video screens 16 buttons keys are used for this purpose Number keys 0 9 Volume up and down keys Channel up and down keys Enter key Cancel key 120 Chapter 13 Video Output Your remote may not use these exact names for the keys particularly a Cancel key This isn t a problem as you can assign these functions to any buttons on your remote Refer to the Infrared Control chapter to properly configure your remote for operation with the video screen system The remote control s buttons have different functions depending which video screen is active
67. ability to receive learned IR signals See the Controller Setup For Receiving Learned IR Signals section for details Load the new schedule into the controller 156 Chapter 14 Infrared Control IR Transmission Settings The gap between infrared signal transmissions is variable from 0 to 255 milliseconds The default value is 100ms and should work in almost all situations If you find that some transmission don t work properly when you send them back to back you may want to try a longer gap The only drawback to a longer gap is that multiple transmissions take a little longer You can try setting the gap to less than 100ms to speed things up but be sure to test it to make sure it works consistently How well it works depends entirely on your particular equipment You can set the gap from the controller configuration screen under the Configure menu Importing and Exporting IR Signals Learned infrared signals can be exported to and imported from a disk file a file with a IRL extension not a schedule file This allows you to save the signals and use them in another schedule Importing and exporting is done from the IR signal summary screen The following data is imported and exported e Signal name e Signal description e Signal format device and key codes or pulse length data Actions associated with the signals are not imported or exported To export signals e Open the IR Signal screen e Select the signal
68. also nest Wait Timers like this Wait 5 Minutes With Timer 1 Then Set Flag 3 Wait 2 Minutes With Timer 1 Then Clear Flag 3 End Wait End Wait Result Five minutes after the Wait command is executed flag 3 will be set then 2 minutes later it will be cleared Note that the same timer 1 can be used for both Wait commands There is one very important thing to understand if you use the same Wait Timer in more than one place in a schedule If a wait timer is started again while it is already running the new actions will override the previous actions In some cases this may be exactly what you want but in other cases it could cause unexpected problems As an example assume your schedule executes the first command on timer 1 in the example above and begins waiting for 2 minutes Then before it expires and sets output port 1 low your schedule executes the second wait command When this happens the timer is reloaded with 5 minutes and resumes running When it goes off only the most recent wait timer actions will be performed In this example Flag 3 will be set but output port 1 will not go low One simple way to avoid this potential problem is to use a different timer number everywhere you need a Wait Timer in your schedule With 255 timers available you ll probably have more than you ever need Entering A Wait Timer Command To enter the Wait Timer command 1 Wherever in your schedule you want to start the
69. any other actions such as checking for an input port to change a timer to expire or a scheduled event to occur during this time Only after the port command is complete will it respond to any signals which came in during the wait After performing any such actions it will then resume normal operations This delay is intentional as the controller is designed to perform each set of commands as a group without interruption If it immediately responded to each incoming signal undesired operations could result For example Assume your schedule is executing a command to pulse an output low for 10 seconds After initially setting it low a user sends an IR command to set it low Consider what would happen if the controller executed the IR command immediately Since the port is already low the IR command would not change it When the 10 second pulse is completed the controller would then set the port back high again and leave it there Thus the port ends up high even though the user had sent an IR command to set it low Our design overcomes this problem by completing the pulse command before responding to any other commands The IR command is performed last leaving the port in the desired low state NOTE Since the controller doesn t perform other actions while executing this command it is recommended that it only be used for short pulses Pulses of a few seconds or less are sufficient to control most devices that use pulses as commands
70. are available e Read Controller button This button reads the current time and date from the controller and displays it The displayed time is not updated continually but only when this button is clicked e Synchronize Controller to PC button This button sets the controller to the same time and date as the computer e Set Controller to Specific Time button This button sets the controller to the time and date you specify Controller Settings Configuration Screen The controller has a variety of operating modes that can be turned on or off as well as other settings This screen defines the configuration that will be set when the schedule is loaded The controller is not immediately set to these values but only when the schedule is loaded To change the controller configuration immediately use the Controller Command screen under the Control menu The options which are set from this configuration screen are listed below Descriptions of what each of these does are provided elsewhere or in the help file To access context sensitive help press the F1 key from any screen Controller Functions enable or disable them X 10 Receive Function IR Receive Function Input Port Checking Function Event Reporting Modes enable or disable them Master Report Mode Reporting Of Time And Date Along With Events X 10 Signal Report Mode IR Signal Report Mode Input Port Report Mode Scheduled Event Report Mode Peri
71. be the same as what s being displayed If the TV s video input is being received from the controller and the controller is passing the external video straight through then the TV will try to display its own output This is in effect an endless loop where the TV really has no video input and cannot display anything Therefore the video input source for the controller should normally be another device such as VCR cable box camera etc 306 Chapter 28 Trouble Shooting X 10 Interface Cable Problem 1 The TW 523 or similar X 10 interface device connects with a 4 conductor straight thru phone cable Cross wired phone cables will not work If you use a cross wired cable the X 10 RX LED will go on and the TW 523 LED will go off If you see this condition you have a crossed cable or a defective TW 523 module You can also determine which type of cable you have by butting the ends together as if trying to plug one end into the other When you do this the colored wires should all be aligned X 10 Receive Problem 1 2 Verify the LED on the TW 523 module is lit If not make sure it s plugged into a live circuit If the LED is still not lit then the TW 523 is defective Verify the controller s X 10 Intf LED is lit If not try the following e Verify that the phone cable between the controller and the TW 523 module is installed and the connectors are securely mated e f you re using your own phon
72. button 5 takes you to the schedule screen where you can change the time temperature schedule for this zone and system mode Pressing button 6 causes the controller to immediately send the HVAC system mode fan mode and temperature settings to the thermostat You can do this if you want to ensure the thermostat is set properly RCS TX10 And TX15 Thermostat With a TX10 15 thermostat the screen works similarly to the bi directional version with several exceptions The fan mode control and status don t function The current temperature will probably be incorrect as the TX10 15 doesn t report this The screen will not update if someone manually changes a thermostat setting Chapter 19 Thermostats 219 These differences are due to the limited capabilities of the TX10 15 as compared to the bi directional version Using The TV Thermostat Schedule Screen Entry 5 on the TV Thermostat Control Screen opens the Thermostat Schedule Screen as shown ZONE 1 HEAT SCHEDULE TIME M F SAT SUN 30 70 70 00 72 72 00 72 66 30 66 E 15 70 72 70 30 72 72 230 71 71 71 245 7 70 sses 2 6 8 8 5 7 0 q vuuuUuUuUL gt r pp p SS ES HoH You can modify the schedule with your infrared remote The remote buttons work as follows The channel up and down buttons move the cursor up and down The volume up and down buttons move the cursor left and right To enter a value press the corresponding number button
73. can be useful for debugging You can view the data using the Terminal Emulator screen In some cases however it may be more useful to write it to a text file for later viewing Any word processor program can view it Logging is controlled using the status bar at the bottom of the main software screen It indicates whether the logging feature is turned on or off by displaying Logging On or Logging Off There is also a button that turns it on and off When on any received serial data is written to a log file The software creates a new log file each day The file is automatically named using the following convention yymmdd log where yy the last two digits of the year 00 to 99 mm two digits for the month 01 12 dd two digits for the date 01 31 The software can also automatically turn the logging feature on each time it starts up This option is set from the Preferences screen under the Configure menu Check the box On startup begin logging serial data to file This is useful if you have the HomeVision Pro software set to start up each time your computer starts and you want to have logging start automatically also Then after a power failure it can resume logging Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface 199 Notes e If the specified file is already opened when the software tries to write to it the text will not be written Therefore you should turn the logging off when you want to view today s log file e To reduce
74. command except after a Halt command If the timer is already running when a Resume command is executed the command will have no effect The Halt and Resume commands can be used temporarily halt a timer Stop amp Clear Timer XXX This stops the specified timer from running and clears the Ringing flag if it happens to be ringing It also sets the timer value to zero You may want to include this command in the timer s actions so that it s cleared after it expires This command is normally used after a timer has expired i e is Ringing You can check for this condition with an If Then statement You don t have to stop and clear a ringing timer if you don t want to However after it expires it will be Ringing forever unless you stop it Reset All Timers This command stops all timers clears the Running and Ringing flags and sets the values to zero Read State Of Timer XXX This command causes the controller to read the state of the timer identified by XXX and to transmit it over the serial interface State refers to Running Ringing or Stopped It does not transmit the actual value of the timer This command can only be issued over the serial port it cannot be included directly in a schedule It allows an external computer or other device to determine the state of a timer See the file Serial installed in the application directory for details on the form
75. communicate with two way X 10 thermostats from RCS use preset dim commands with PCS lighting modules LM14A modules and Leviton 6381 switches and read the status of two way X 10 lights Also supports lighting scenes with newer X 10 devices e Maintains a state table showing the On Off state and level of all 256 X 10 addresses modules e Can be configured to automatically perform a set of actions when any On or Off signal is received from another device e Can refresh an individual module or entire house code with a single command e Can perform actions when a sequence of X 10 signals is received e Module states can be used as conditions in If Then and If Then Else statements e Module states can be viewed and changed from the video screen system e Modules can be set to specific states in the event of a power failure e Modules states can be read and changed from the serial interface Throughout this manual we refer to X 10 modules There are many types of modules Wall switches to control lights Plug in appliance modules both 110VAC and 220VAC into which you can plug other devices Relay interface modules that can open or close relay contacts when a specific X 10 code is received Powerflash modules that can sense opened or closed contacts and transmit an X 10 code in response e Chime modules e Thermostats which respond to X 10 commands e And others As you can see there are a wide variety of X 10 compatible
76. communications protocol described in the Serial PDF file When this manual refers to connecting HomeVision Pro to a PC or talks about how HomeVision Pro reports events to the PC it is talking about this main serial port Ports 3 and 4 as well as the optional HomeVision Phone Serial device port 2 can be used to connect to other devices like security systems HVAC controllers serially controller audio visual equipment and similar devices They may also be connected to a PC but cannot be used to download schedules into Home Vision Pro The serial interfaces provide the following features and capabilities e The controller can use any serial port to transmit messages to a computer or other device Any event can be reported such as Input port changed X 10 signal received IR signal received Scheduled time has occurred Periodic time has occurred 170 Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface e Commands can also be issued to the controller serial port 1 from a computer or other device Simple ASCII commands can be issued to perform almost any of the controllers functions Commands can also be issued to the other serial ports although the user must program the Serial Data Input Event for those ports to respond to the incoming message e The serial ports can read ASCII and binary data in from external devices like security systems thermostats weather stations etc e You can send serial commands to a PC running th
77. configures how the PC software works Control Screens These screens accessed from the Control menu provide access to many of the controller s functions Through them you can directly control most of your home automation system To use these the controller must be connected to the computer s serial port The screens are e X 10 Control and X 10 grid control 20 Chapter 2 Software Overview eee o o o o o o Input Output Port Control Macro Control IR Control Video Control Thermostat Control Phone Control when using HomeVision Phone Flags and Variables Control Controller Commands Web Browser Defaults to showing the built in web pages if you have this option enabled using the Web Server screen under the Configure menu This is a simple browser mainly intended to provide quick access to the HomeVision web pages although it can display other web pages as well X 10 Control Screen From this screen you can Transmit any standard X 10 signal Perform any of the custom X 10 commands View received X 10 signals Access the X 10 grid control screen Refer to the X 10 chapter for the meanings of the various commands X 10 Grid Control Screen This screen shows the status of all 256 addresses and allows direct control of each address Note the following When you open the screen the software reads the status of all 256 X 10 addresses from the controller This could take several seconds if the serial por
78. data out serial port 4 Serial 4 RX On when receiving data in serial port 4 USB TX On when transmitting data out the USB port USB RX On when receiving data in the USB port On the early HomeVision Pro units the USB port LEDs are backwards The RX LED will flash when transmitting and the TX LED will flash when receiving The Status 1 and X 10 Intf LEDs can be used to assess the controller s status as follows 1 Atthe initial application of power the controller will spend a short time recovering from the power failure The exact amount of time depends on how many scheduled events and timer actions occurred during the outage and how many commands you included in your power failure 8 Chapter 1 _Introduction recovery event During this time the Status 1 LED will be off and the X 10 Int LED will be on 2 After the recovery is complete the Status 1 LED will go on and the other LEDs will assume their normal states 3 Ifthe Status 1 LED is blinking the schedule is halted This is normal while a schedule is being downloaded There are several other reasons the schedule could be halted e Ifan error occurs during the schedule load the controller will remain halted even if power is cycled The schedule must be reloaded Ifthe controller s self test fails or another serious error occurs the controller will halt itself This is done to prevent it from doing unexpected things e I
79. displayed on your TV The Load Name field specifies whether the item s name should be loaded into the controller When loaded the names can be shown on a TV with the video screen system However the controller is limited to 512 names If you have more than 512 items you can select which ones will be loaded to the controller and which will not See the Miscellaneous chapter for more information on item names Chapter 2 Software Overview 11 For many items you can specify the initial states they should be put in when the schedule is first loaded You can use this to ensure the schedule starts in a known state You can set the power fail states for many types of items After the controller recovers from a power failure it will automatically set the item to the specified state You can also set this field to No Change if you don t want the controller to take any special action When you add an item this field defaults to the safest state usually No Change You can enable or disable many types of items Commands in your schedule will only work on enabled items If you have schedule sections that you re still developing or that aren t working properly you can disable them until you re ready to use them For items that can have associated actions the summary screen is the doorway to the actions entry screen This is where you define or edit the actions you want to perform To enter or edit actions simply doub
80. edit some of the fields such as the Name and Description fields These fields support the standard Windows cut copy and paste functions Many fields use checkboxes to select between two states Use the mouse or cursor keys to first select the field Then click with the mouse left button to toggle the checkbox on and off The items that can perform actions will have one or more Actions Defined fields The box will be checked if any actions have been entered If will not be checked if there are no actions To enter or edit actions simply double click on the Actions Defined field This will take you to the actions entry screen There are several other fields that can be double clicked to take you to another screen These are The scheduled event summary screen where double clicking on the Scheduled Time or Random Interval fields takes you to another screen This screen is used to set the event s time and random interval if used When you close this screen you ll be returned to the scheduled event screen 12 Chapter 2 Software Overview The infrared signal summary screen where double clicking on the Signal Type Device Code or Key Code fields opens another screen This screen provides one way to define the format of the infrared signal to receive or transmit When you close this screen you ll be returned to the infrared signal screen e The Initial State and Power F
81. execute this command the value of the variable at that location will be read into variable XXX 16 Bit Variable Commands Increment Variable XXX MSB amp Variable YYY LSB This command uses two variables as a 16 bit value Variable XXX is the Most Significant Byte MSB and variable YYY is the Least Significant Byte LSB This command adds 1 to the LSB variable YYY If the initial value is 255 it will roll over to zero and then variable XXX will also be incremented For example if variable 1 0 and variable 3 255 the command Increment Variable 1 MSB amp Variable 3 LSB would give these results Variable 1 1 Variable 3 0 Since variable 1 is the MSB it counts the number of times variable 3 rolls over When used in this way the two variables can count up to 65 535 The total can be computed as 256 X MSB LSB If both variables are equal to 255 when this command is performed both will roll over to zero Decrement Variable XXX MSB amp Variable YYY LSB This command uses two variables as a 16 bit value Variable XXX is the Most Significant Byte MSB and variable YYY is the Least Significant Byte LSB This command subtracts 1 from the LSB variable YYY If the initial value is O it will roll under to 255 and then variable XXX will also be decremented For example if variable 1 5 and variable 3 0 the command Decrem
82. figure out the maximum possible delay and account for it e Finally it will take some time for the response itself to be transmitted You can get around this problem by using an extra long wait period However if you re reading the response and displaying it on a TV screen a long delay may be unacceptable Using the approach we recommend the controller will determine when the message is over and execute the actions immediately This gives you the fastest possible response Serial Transmissions From The Controller There are three types of data that can be transmitted by the controller over the serial interfaces e Report Messages The controller can be configured to report the occurrence of a variety of events over serial port 1 These include X 10 signals received input ports changing IR signals received scheduled event occurring and more This feature makes it very easy to record events and determine whether the controller is running your schedule the way you expect 184 Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface e Command Responses Whenever a command is sent to the controller over serial port 1 the controller will provide a response over the same interface The response will acknowledge the command received provide any data that s requested and provide an indication of completion Commanded Serial Transmissions Commands can be included in the schedule to transmit data over any of the serial ports Data can be sent in a variety of fo
83. flag variable etc To do this you must delete the line entirely and add a new one e To delete a line first select it then click the Delete Line button at the bottom of the screen There are certain lines that work in groups and cannot be deleted individually If you select one of these the Delete Line button will be disabled To delete these you must select the first line in the group and delete it This will delete the entire group For example If Then statements consist of a minimum of three lines 14 Chapter 2 Software Overview If Then End If You cannot delete the THEN or END lines individually Instead you must select the IF line and delete it This will remove all three lines It will also delete any conditions which might be between the IF and THEN lines conditions left by themselves would have no meaning Actions between the THEN and END lines will not be deleted They can be deleted individually if desired You can use Cut Copy Paste and Delete commands from within the Actions Entry Screen First select a schedule line then click the right mouse button to bring up the editing menu You can also perform the editing functions directly from the keyboard using the standard Windows editing keys as shown Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Delete Del Cut functions the same as copying a line then deleting it Note that you can only select one line at a time multiple line selections are not al
84. from your fax software Voice mail messages from voice mail software running on your PC Other home automation devices connected to your PC Text files created on your PC by other software The program could then periodically transmit this data to HomeVision Pro or you could periodically read it from a text file Each type of data could have it s own screen For example the weather report would go to screen 100 your e mail message list would go to screen 101 sports scores for your favorite teams would go to screen 102 and so on Once the data is in the controller you can view it at any time For example you could have the controller display the weather report screen each day when it wakes you up in the morning When you return home from work it could automatically display the stock price screen You could also access them from the video menu system so you could view them whenever you want Text Storage Buffer Overview The text storage buffer allows serial data presumably text coming into HomeVision Pro to be displayed on the TV screen Note that there are other serial commands that can be used to display text on the TV but they must follow the HomeVision Pro serial protocol format The advantage of the text storage buffer is that it can read data from devices that do not follow this format The text storage buffer consists of 256 bytes of memory each of which can hold one byte or character of text The character locations ar
85. general numbers at the end of the file so they don t take precedence over more specific numbers The software looks through the file for the first matching number so the more general numbers need to go last For example the CID_Name txt file could look like this 321 555 1234 John s parents 321 555 5678 Amy s parents 321 555 222 Local call 321 Area code 321 Play WAV File To Announce Caller HomeVision Pro can also automatically play a unique WAV file for each caller To do this add a message to the cid_name txt file after the caller s name like this 555 973 6547 Jane s parents play wav file parents wav You can use any number of spaces or tabs between the caller name Jane s parents and the phrase play wav file Follow the phrase play wav file with the WAV file name including the extension The specified WAV file must be located in the same directory as HomeVision Pro In addition you can have two wav files named Unavail wav and Private wav that play if the caller s number is unavailable same as out of area or private Direct Control Of Caller ID Screen You can also directly control the caller ID screen You could create your own system for displaying the caller ID information even one using a different caller ID device Several types of commands are provided that allow you to e Specify the text to display on lines 2 and 3 of the caller ID screen the first line is always Phone call from
86. handshaking where the settings are as follows port Comm port to open 1 2 3 etc baud Valid values are 110 300 600 1200 2400 9600 14400 19200 Parity N no parity E even parity O odd parity M mark S space data bits Number of data bits Valid values are 4 5 6 7 and 8 stop bits Number of stop bits Valid values are 1 and 2 handshaking 0 none 1 Xon Xoff 2 RTS CTS 3 both Xon Xoff and RTS CTS Note that there cannot be any spaces between the values as shown in this example of the most commonly used settings Open comm port 2 19200 N 8 1 2 After the comm port is open you can send data to it by entering a serial interface command in your schedule to transmit the following ASCII text To comm port DATA TO SEND Replace DATA TO SEND with the desired data The HomeVision Pro software will append a carriage return and line feed at the end As an example to send Arm alarm to the currently opened comm port send this ASCII text To comm port Arm alarm After sending the data you should close the comm port by entering a serial interface command in your schedule to transmit the following ASCII text 200 Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface Close comm port The complete process is shown in this example showing the serial text that should be sent to the PC Open comm port 2 19200 N 8 1 2 To comm port Arm alarm Close comm port Notes e If you try to send data without opening a co
87. important difference Instead of defining a single set of actions for the entire schedule in the Timer Summary Screen you specify the desired actions every time you Start the timer For example the following commands will wait 2 minutes then set output port 1 low Wait 2 Minutes With Timer 1 Then Set Output Port 1 Low End Wait The Wait command sets up timer 1 as a Wait Timer loads it with the value 2 minutes and then starts it running It then skips over the Wait Timer actions the actions between the WAIT and END statements and performs any following commands in the schedule Then the controller continues operating normally until the timer expires When it expires the controller automatically returns and performs the commands listed between the WAIT and END statements Thus the wait actions are performed only one time when the timer expires not when first encountered in the schedule You can also check the current state of a Wait Timer at any point in your schedule and perform conditional actions based on the result 80 Chapter 9 Timers and Delays A single Wait Timer can be used multiple places in a schedule with different actions to be performed each time For example you could also use the following commands elsewhere in the same schedule as the previous example Wait 5 Minutes With Timer 1 Then Set Flag 3 End Wait Result Five minutes after the Wait command is executed flag 3 will be set Note that you can
88. in the computer schedule file They are not loaded into the controller NOTE The schedule file you have opened on your computer should match the schedule loaded into the controller or at least the IR signals should be the same If not there s a chance of transmitting the wrong signal For example assume you learned the IR signal to control your VCR s power and saved it to IR signal 20 You also set up this IR control screen to transmit signal 20 and called it VCR Power You then loaded this into the controller Now assume you later learned a different IR signal to control your TV s power and also saved it to signal 20 replacing the VCR power signal You also changed the IR control screen description of signal 20 and called it TV Power However you haven t yet loaded the revised schedule into the controller If you click the button to transmit TV Power you will instead transmit the old VCR power signal instead The new schedule must be loaded before any of the changes will take effect Video Control Screen From this screen you can Start or stop the video screen system Change the color location or blinking characteristics of the screen Display any of the built in screens Display your own screen Switch between incoming video if you ve connected a video source and the text display screens Display the text on a solid background or overlaid onto incoming video and more You should note seve
89. instead of just sending consecutive Dim commands Dim Times Same as Dim Times except that all Force Dim commands will be sent even after level reaches 0 Dim Times Slow Same as Force Dim Times except that commands are sent at intervals of approximately 0 9 seconds instead of 0 4 seconds Actually what happens is that the house code and unit code is repeated between each Force Dim command instead of just sending consecutive Force Dim commands Brighten 52 Chapter 5 X 10 Force This command sends an X 10 Brighten command unless the module is already ON and at level 16 The first Brighten command sent to a module that is OFF or NEUTRAL causes it to go ON at level 16 Brighten This command sends one X 10 Brighten command regardless of the current module state The first Brighten command sent to a module that is OFF or NEUTRAL causes it to go ON at level 16 Brighten Times This command sends X 10 Brighten commands but stops sending commands if the level reaches 16 A module that was initially OFF or NEUTRAL will go on at level 16 with the first Brighten command then no more commands will be sent since level is already 16 HF can be between 1 and 23 Although 16 steps should be enough to go to full bright from level 0 some devices aren t so well behaved A few extra bright commands may be needed to ensure they go to full brightness Brighten Times Slow Force Force Same as Brighten
90. just as you type them Many of the other display characters do not match the keyboard keys Experiment with the different keys to learn what display characters are available If you ve connected an external video signal to the controllers video input jack you can switch between this signal and the On Screen Display OSD Set the video switch to the external video position in the Settings window and click the Load Settings Into Controller button The externally supplied video signal will be routed to the video output To return to the On Screen Display return the switch to the internal video position You can experiment with the other commands on this screen at your leisure 11 Verify infrared remote receive capabilit To verify the controller can receive IR signals Select Video Remote Control from the Configure menu Aim a standard remote control device at the controllers IR receivers near the top of the circuit board and press any key The controller s IR RX LED near the top of the controller circuit board should light as the signal is received If it doesn t make sure the IR Rx1 and IR Rx2 switches near the Port B terminal block are slid down which activates the built in IR receivers If it still doesn t work refer to the trouble shooting chapter If properly configured the controller will report the signal to the PC The simulated LED on the control screen should blink immediately a
91. lighting modules PCS lighting levels are stored in a unique format not as a simple number Note that there is no slow version of this command Force To Level In Variable This command reads the value of the specified variable and forces the X 10 module to that level If the variable value is 0 to 16 the light will be turned on at that level If the variable value is 255 the light will go off If the variable value is 254 the module state will be set to NEUTRAL Remember that a light ON at level 0 is not the same as OFF This command works similar to the Force To Level command expect that the level is taken from a variable instead of being specified in the command itself Remember that the Force commands first send an X 10 OFF signal to put the light in a known state then send the necessary commands to set the light to the desired level See the Put Current Level Into Variable command for more information on saving a light s level into a variable Refer to the How To file for an example of how to use this command Note that this command will not work properly with PCS lighting modules PCS lighting levels are stored in a unique format not as a simple number Note that there is no slow version of this command Transmit Preset Dim To Level In Variable This command transmits a preset dim signal The preset dim level 0 to 31 is taken from the specified variable Thus if the variable contains the value 26 the X 10
92. list box under the TV screen 5 For each infrared remote button that you want to cause an action select the type of action from the corresponding list box If you don t want the button to do anything leave the list box blank 6 For each type of action an additional list box will be shown Use it to select the specific action i e which macro to run which built in screen to display or which custom menu to display 7 Click Done save your schedule then download it 8 Test out your new menu system Tips On Using The Custom Menu System Here are a few suggestions to help you develop your custom menus e Use the number keys to perform actions just like with the built in screens 124 Chapter 13 Video Output e Use the volume up and down keys to page through your custom menus Note how the built in menu system uses the volume up key to go to the next page 1 2 3 4 1 and the volume down key to go to the previous page 4321 4 You can do the same thing with your custom menus e Use the channel down key to exit the video system just like the built in menu system does e If you don t want the users to be able to access screens like timers or periodic events simply leave them off your menus This will prevent them from inadvertently changing them e When you start the video menu system whether by pressing the channel up button on your remote or issuing a start video system command your first custom menu will be disp
93. name Var 12 value 0 gt lt form gt In this case the name field specifies the variable and also contains an equal sign indicating to set the variable equal to the value field The value field will contain the desired variable value The 0 tells the text box to initially display the number zero The user can then type in a new number and press Enter The new value will be placed in the value filed and sent to the web server The server will set the variable to this value One way to learn the command formats is to study the web pages automatically created by the web server To do this view one of the pages like the X 10 page or macro page in your web browser Then select view source to see the HTML code generated by HomeVision Pro Most of the pages contain buttons that perform actions and you can study how they are written The following table identifies the allowable commands and describes what to put in the name and value fields The commands are not case sensitive 212 Chapter 26 Web Server COMMAND NAME FIELD VALUE FIELD EXAMPLE FORMAT NOTES FORMAT NOTES FORMAT X10 COMMAND Light COMMAND Light 255 Infrared IR XX times is IR signal ID in decimal format 0 255 Not used You may enter anything you like XX is the number of times to transmit it Output COMMAND Output Port Flag COMMAND name X10 A1 On name X10 P11 Of
94. of 16 remote key codes each accessed through a set of tabs you ll probably never need to use more than one of these three sets the others allow different remotes to control the video screen system The screen shows Key Codes and Description fields for each of the 16 buttons It also shows the Device Code all keys should have the same Device Code but each will have its own Key Code In order for a button on your remote to control the video screens its Device Code and Key Code must be entered in the appropriate fields then loaded into the controller Initially these are set to the controller s default remote keys The default device is a Hitachi TV remote but you can set any programmable remote to transmit the same signals Look up the brand name of your programmable remote in the list below The number beside it is the code for the Hitachi TV Set your remote to this code using the procedure in your remote s owner s manual One For All Code 145 Control Code 145 Emerson Code 145 Gemini Code 100 RCA Code 047 Sony Code 31 Magnavox Code 0030 If you have a different brand of remote look up the code number for a Hitachi TV in your remote s owner s manual The manual will probably list several codes Try each one until you find one that works testing it as described below To test the 16 video screen control buttons push each of the corresponding buttons on your remote one at a time The window s simulated LED
95. on the caller ID TV screen The first 24 bytes are the callers name and the last 24 bytes are the callers number However the TV screen indents the lines by placing 2 blank spaces at the start of each line Therefore bytes 1 2 25 and 26 should be ignored The actual caller s name will start at byte 3 and the phone number will start at byte 27 This command is intended to be used with the variable command that can read a byte from the text storage buffer into a variable Used together these commands allow you to move the caller ID information into your own variables at which point you can do anything you like with them Set Caller ID Line 2 First 12 Characters To H H HHHH This command specifies the first 12 characters of text that will be displayed on line 2 of the caller ID TV screen Set Caller ID Line 2 Last 12 Characters To H HHHHH This command specifies the last 12 characters of text that will be displayed on line 2 of the caller ID TV screen Set Caller ID Line 3 First 12 Characters To H HHHH This command specifies the first 12 characters of text that will be displayed on line 3 of the caller ID TV screen Set Caller ID Line 3 Last 12 Characters To H H HHHHH This command specifies the last 12 characters of text that will be displayed on line 3 of the caller ID TV screen EXAMPLE The following 5 commands sent over the serial interface Set Caller ID Line 2 First 12 Characters To The
96. one time when you press the carriage return You can use the backspace key or edit the text to get it right before you send it Refer to chapter 16 Serial Interface for more details e The large window displays the data received from the controller It does not show the data you send to the controller e The normal command response from the controller includes some unprintable characters These are shown in the window as a square box You can also use any standard terminal emulator or communications program to communicate with the controller if you wish IR Learn Screen Use this screen to teach infrared signals to the controller It can then transmit them to control your audio video equipment IR Test Screen With this screen you can e Transmit any infrared signal that is currently loaded in the controller e Transmit any standard format IR signal You can transmit a signal with any Device Code and Key Code You can use this to train a learning remote which can then be used to control HomeVision Pro e When transmitting signals through a Multifunction Expansion Board you can select which zone s you want to transmit out of e Determine the Device Code and Key Code of any standard format IR signal that you transmit to the controller The screen displays this information for infrared signals that the controller receives 26 Chapter 2 Software Overview Refer to the infrared control chapter for a description of the var
97. or all three phases of the AC line Collision avoidance Waits for clear power line plus additional delay before transmitting Collision detection Automatic Transmission retry limit when transmission fails User selectable from 0 to 31 attempts IR receive and transmit carrier frequency limits Between 10kHz and 100kHz Video format baseband color NTSC or PAL video optional On Screen Display capability Number of rows 12 with typically only 11 displayed on most TVs Number of columns 24 Number of characters available 90 Number of background colors 8 Number of characters sizes 4 Number of blink rates 4 Screen refresh rate Typically every 15ms or faster Chapter 27 Miscellaneous 295 e Clock Clock resolution 10 milliseconds Leap year adjustment Automatic Daylight savings time adjustment Automatic but can be disabled Sunrise and sunset calculations Automatic e Status LEDs 43 see Chapter 1 for descriptions e Battery Type CR2032 3 0V user replaceable Backup data retention 6 years minimum Connectors Serial Ports The serial port 1 connector is a DB 9 female using the following pins standard for DCE type ports Viewed looking into end of connector Pin 1 Carrier Detect CD Pin 2 Transmit Data TD transmit from unit Pin 3 Receive Data RD receive input into unit Pin 4 Data Terminal Ready DTR Pin 5 Ground Pin 6 Data Set Ready DSR
98. previously stored in a weather variable Weather Variable XXXXX Constant Value Sets the weather variable indicated by XXXXX to the constant value which can range from 0 to 255 This is the primary command to set a weather variable over the serial interface For example a computer may be able to determine the temperature is 75 degrees It would then send this command over the serial interface to set the proper variable to 75 degrees Read Value Of Weather Variable XXXXX Over Serial Interface This command can only be performed over the serial interface and not within your schedule It transmits the value of the weather variable indicated by XXXXX over the serial interface Chapter 24 Telephone 249 CHAPTER 24 TELEPHONE Overview There are two accessories that add telephone capabilities to Home Vision Pro e HomeVision Phone Serial e HomeVision Phone CID These devices are summarized below Refer to the documentation provided with them for more details HomeVision Phone Serial This device adds phone interfacing capabilities and an extra serial port to HomeVision Pro It provides the following features Phone capabilities e Detects touchtone DTMF inputs from users to trigger any actions X 10 infrared macros thermostat etc User can input values into variables for example to set the temperature with the phone Can transmit DTMF signals as notification to user or to dial out Detects phone on hook and off
99. rainfall inches amounts are not included on the weather conditions screen and can range from 0 to 255 inches For example to set today s rainfall to 1 29 inches set the weather variables as follows Today s rainfall inches 1 Today s rainfall hundredths 29 248 Chapter 23 Weather Data Weather Data Commands The following weather data commands can be included in a schedule They are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the Other toolbar button then selecting Weather Data from the pop up menu They can also be issued to the controller over the serial interface The format for sending commands over the serial interface is described in the Serial file installed in the HomeVision directory Weather Variable XXXXX Variable Sets the weather variable indicated by XXXXX to the value of variable This is the primary command to set a weather variable within your schedule For example you might read the indoor temperature from a temperature sensor and store the result in one of your variables Then you would set the indoor temperature weather variable to the value of your variable When doing this you may need to adjust the variable value to match the format of the weather variable Variable Weather Variable XXXXX This command is the opposite of the prior command It sets variable equal to the weather variable indicated by XXXXX This command can be used to extract values which were
100. ready to hook them up 3 Install PC software To install the software A Start Microsoft Windows B Insert the installation CD into a CD ROM drive C Run the setup program and follow the on screen instructions 4 Run PC software To run the software A From the Start Menu open the HomeVision group and select the Home Vision Pro application B Select New Schedule under the HomevVision Pro File menu to start a new schedule Or select Open Schedule and select an existing file such as the example file example haf located in the same directory where you installed HomeVision Pro 5 Configure serial interface Select Serial Interface from the Configure menu Select the PC communications port the controller is connected to Set the baud rate to 19 200 the controller s default setting 6 Verify serial interface and controller are operatin Select Terminal Emulator from the Other menu Remove power from the controller and then reapply it The controller should transmit a message to the PC which displays the message in the terminal emulator window If unreadable characters appear the baud rate is probably incorrect Verify that the PC is set to 19 200 baud in the Serial Interface screen under the Configure menu If it is it s possible the controller has been set to a different speed Try changing the PC to the other speeds If this doesn t work refer to the trouble sho
101. regardless of their unit code Chapter 5 X 10 45 X 10 Transmission Settings X 10 commands can be transmitted over either 1 or 3 phases of the AC power line Most residential applications only need to transmit on one phase However in some instances you may need 3 phase transmission You can set the mode from the controller configuration screen under the Configure menu You can also include commands in your schedule to change the method at any time These commands are located under the controller command button on the actions entry screen The number of retries when an X 10 transmission fails is variable from 0 to 31 You can set this from the controller configuration screen under the Configure menu X 10 Lighting Scenes Some X 10 and Leviton brand devices like the LM14A lamp module and the Leviton 6343 wall switches support scenes A scene is a group of X 10 modules that can all be set to a predetermined level with a single command Scenes require the use of X 10 extended codes which HomeVision Pro can transmit HomevVision Pro supports scenes by allowing you to add modules to a scene remove them from a scene and execute the scene There are two steps to using scenes 1 Create the scene s 2 Execute a scene You create scenes by using the X 10 control screen in the PC software You can also create scenes in a schedule However you should first create the scenes using the X 10 control screen so you can qui
102. schedule into this group of actions and have a completely loop type system although you d lose many of the benefits of an event driven system Controller Error Messages During operation the controller constantly checks for errors If one occurs an ID number uniquely identifying the error is stored in internal memory There would normally be no need for you to worry about this However if you re experiencing problems or erratic operation you may want to check for an error Table 27 1 provides a brief description of the error ID numbers Most of the descriptions are probably too cryptic to be of much use to you However they may be of help to us in diagnosing your problem There are several instances that could lead to errors Sending commands over the serial interface Errors might occur in the physical interface perhaps due to noise or in the format of a command you send This is especially possible as you re first becoming familiar with the serial interface s command structure and the format of the many commands One wrong keystroke could potentially cause an error Extensive error checking is used to reduce this possibility but it is still possible for errors to occur In extreme cases such errors could possibly corrupt the schedule requiring reloading e Failure of the schedule download process If while you re loading a schedule power goes out the serial cable to the controller becomes disconnected or another error occ
103. set It will be false if not set A module s Status is On bit will be set whenever an X 10 Status is On signal is received over the power line that is addressed to this X 10 module Refer to the Clear Status Request Bit command for a discussion of how best to use this X 10 condition You can use this with two way X 10 modules that report their status First transmit a Status Request command to the desired house and unit code Then use this condition in a periodic event running each loop to see if this bit is set indicating the light is on If so so whatever you want now that you know the light is on Alternatively you could receive the light s response by checking for a received X 10 sequence that included the Status Is On signal If X 10 Module Status Is Off Bit Is Set This condition will be true if the specified module s house and unit code Status is Off bit is set It will be false if not set Chapter 5 X 10 61 A module s Status is Off bit will be set whenever an X 10 Status is Off signal is received over the power line that is addressed to this X 10 module Refer to the Clear Status Request Bit command for a discussion of how best to use this X 10 condition You can use this with two way X 10 modules that report their status First transmit a Status Request command to the desired house and unit code Then use this condition in a periodic event running each loop to see i
104. set the power failure state to Stop If Ringing This way if the timer expired during the power failure it will be skipped but if it s still running it will continue normally Chapter 10 _ Flags 87 CHAPTER 10 FLAGS Introduction Flags provide the following features and capabilities e Can be individually put into one of three states SET CLEAR or NEUTRAL e Can all be set to the same state as a group e Can be used as conditions in If Then and If Then Else statements e Can be viewed and changed from the video screen system e Can be set to predetermined states in the event of a power failure e Their current state can be read and changed from the serial interface e 2565 flags are available Using Flags Before using a flag create it from the flag summary screen Flags are objects that are useful for indicating that certain conditions exist For example you may have an alarm that provides an indication when it is armed The indication might come directly through an input port or perhaps from an X 10 signal You could then SET a flag called ALARM ARMED to indicate the alarm is armed You can then check the state of the flag in your schedule whenever you need to know if the alarm is armed A flag can also be used to set a mode For example you may have a Home mode Away mode Sleep mode and a Party mode You can use a separate flag for each mode and SET it when that mode is entered Flags ar
105. signal preset dim to level 26 is transmitted Set X 10 Device Directly To Level This command sets the device directly to the specified level 0 to 63 It only works with devices that support the newer X 10 extended codes The newer Leviton 6381 switches and X 10 LM14A and AM14A modules have several new features One of these is that they can be directly set to a level without going on to full brightness first This is sometimes called preset dimming although this is not technically correct HomeVision Pro can control these lights using X 10 s extended codes These extended codes follow a different format than the older extended codes whose commands were shown earlier You should also note that these are different than the preset dim commands used by the PCS brand lighting modules The devices can be set to any of 64 levels 0 to 63 Sending a level 63 command immediately turns the light on to full brightness Any other level command causes the light to slowly change to the desired level over several seconds If the module is off it does not go to full brightness first In our testing it appears that levels 62 and 63 are the same full on However the level 62 command causes the light to slowly brighten while the level 63 command sets it immediately to full on Level 0 is the same as sending a standard OFF command These modules also respond to all the standard X 10 commands ON OFF BRIGHTEN DIM etc You should note t
106. statement whenever the signal is not received the Else portion will be executed If this is within a periodic event running every loop the Else portion will be executed almost continually You can include other conditions in the If Then statement with the X 10 sequence if you desire The time limit you specify is the maximum time from the first signal to the last signal in the sequence If the signals are received within that time the condition is true If they take longer the condition is false A maximum of 6 seconds is allowed between each of the signals in a sequence Whenever there is a gap of more than 6 seconds the controller automatically clears the signals It then begins looking for the next sequence Chapter 5 X 10 63 A signal is either a house and unit code such as A 1 or a house and function code such as A On When you press a button on an X 10 wall switch or mini controller it often transmits 2 signals For example pressing A 1 On transmits an A 1 signal followed by an A On signal To enter this in a sequence you must enter it as 2 signals A 1 followed by A On A sequence can contain X 10 signals that also automatically trigger actions For example you may have previously set up an A 1 On signal to perform a set of actions in the X 10 module summary screen You could also include the sequence A 1 A On in an X 10 sequence If you then transmitted an A 1 A On sequence to the controller both sets of ac
107. statement inside the Then or Else parts of another You can nest up to 15 levels deep Chapter 4 Programming Language 37 Entering Conditions When you click the If Then button on the toolbar three lines will be entered in the listing window If Then End If When you click the If Then Else button four lines will be entered If Then Else End If To give meaning to these statements you must enter one or more conditions between the If and Then lines The toolbar is used to enter these conditions The toolbar buttons enter actions and conditions BETWEEN the currently selected line and the line above it Therefore to enter a condition between the If and Then lines you must first select the Then line This puts the toolbar in the Conditions mode allowing you to enter conditions Compound Conditions You can enter more than one condition between the If and Then lines Each condition will be shown on a separate line Conditions are joined together with OR or AND statements This type of condition is called a compound condition Each condition between the If and Then statements except for the first condition begins with the word OR or AND These specify the logic used in evaluating the conditions You specify which type on the condition edit screen An option box appears at the bottom of each edit screen for you to select whether it s an
108. that holds your schedule actions If you have a very large number of actions you might not have space for all 32 RAM video screens Each screen takes 264 bytes of RAM 11 rows X 24 characters per row Therefore 32 screens take up 8448 bytes This same RAM is also used for the data log The more RAM video screens you use the less room there is in the data log However since the data log is typically 64K bytes in size losing a few thousand bytes is probably not significant If there s not enough room in the controller to hold your schedule and the desired number of video screens you will get an error message when you load the schedule You will then have to either reduce the number of screens or delete some actions Displaying RAM Video Screens These screens are displayed using the following video command Display Video Screen You can display a RAM video screen just like you would any other video screen simply enter the desired screen number The RAM video screens are numbered 100 through 131 assuming you have configured the controller for all 32 available screens If you have less than 32 screens they are numbered starting at 100 and progressing upwards Once you display a screen you may want to switch to another screen using your remote control HomeVision Pro does not provide any automatic way to do this Instead you have to write the commands yourself to switch screens The methodology would be similar to switching between
109. the Other tab 3 Check the Serial Port 3 box to enable it 4 Select the serial port s baud rate when using the USB mode it is recommended you select 57 600 baud to maximize performance 5 Select the timeout period see the Serial Data Termination section below for details 6 Select whether the device should be full duplex or half duplex Half duplex should be selected if you re using the two wire RS 485 mode otherwise select full duplex 7 Enable or disable the option to receive binary data Most users should leave this disabled 8 When using the USB mode you will also need to configure any PC that will connect to the other end See the USB Mode section for details Serial Port 4 Serial port 4 provides essentially the same capabilities as serial port 3 except that it cannot be used in the USB mode Refer to the serial port 3 section for details 174 Chapter 16 Serial Interface MASTER 4000 FT _____ Figure 16 2 Typical RS 485 Two Wire System Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface 175 USB Mode HomeVision Pro contains a USB to serial converter allowing it to communicate with a PC s USB port The converter can be used with either the main serial port 1 or port 3 although we expect most users will use it with the main serial port only To use this converter you might place appropriate jumpers on the Serial Port Configuration Header In additio
110. the controller will not attempt to catch up It was designed this way because such a long power outage would be a very unusual occurrence The controller assumes that it was intentionally disconnected during this time and that it s not a real power failure When power is restored no scheduled events will be performed Any timers that were running when power went out will be stopped and cleared The controller determines when more than 2 days have passed based on passing midnight twice while power was out 4 Next the controller executes the commands specified by the user in Power Failure Recovery event if it is enabled These actions are done regardless of how long the power was out for 5 The controller resumes normal operation There are two important points to note about this power failure recovery process 1 Periodic events that should have occurred during the power outage will not be performed in the recovery routine After the controller resumes normal operation periodic events will again be performed at the specified rate 2 During this recovery routine normal operation is suspended The controller will not respond to any input commands or execute any scheduled or non scheduled events After recovery is complete the controller returns to the normal operating mode Power Failure Recovery Actions You can define a set of actions to perform after power is restored as follows e Open the Power Failure Recovery screen
111. the menu entries The channel up key returns you to the previous screen object list screen The channel down key exits from the video screen system and shuts off the On Screen Display circuitry The volume up and down enter and cancel keys are not used Configuration Status Screens Each of these screens works slightly differently However the remote keys work in a similar fashion as for the other screens Data Entry Screens When one of the data entry screens is being displayed the keys have these functions Number keys enter their corresponding value Volume up and down keys increment or decrement the digit the cursor is located on Channel up and down keys move the cursor right or left in the data entry field The cursor wraps around at the first and last digits The enter key confirms the data entry and returns to the previous screen The cancel key cancels the data entry and returns to the previous screen Some of the data entry screens behave slightly differently when entering specific data For example when entering the current month the volume up and down keys scroll through the 12 months Jan Feb etc Chapter 13 Video Output 121 e Help Screens From the help screens all keys return you to the previous screen Starting The Video System There are three ways to start displaying screens 1 Pressing the Channel Up button on your configured remote 2 Performing this command in your schedule St
112. the number of times the hard disk is written to the software holds the received data in a buffer The data is written to the log when the buffer reaches 400 characters When you turn logging off any unwritten data will be written For this reason if you view the active log file while logging is still turned on the log may not contain the latest data Also if the computer shuts off or the program terminates unexpectedly the last serial data may not be written to the log e Most serial messages from the controller end with an unprintable character a value of 1 You will usually see these in the file asa square at the start of the following line Sending Data To Other Serial Ports On A PC The controller can send data to the PC via the serial interface and have the data forwarded to another serial port called the user comm port This requires that the controller be connected to the computer s serial port and that the HomeVision Pro application be running on the computer To perform this function there are commands to e Open a comm port e Send data to the currently opened comm port e Close the currently opened comm port Before sending the text you must open the desired serial comm port on the PC note that you cannot open the port that the controller is currently connected to To do this enter a serial interface command in your schedule to transmit the following ASCII text Open comm port port baud parity data bits stop bits
113. the operation of the controller When halted the controller will not receive any X 10 or infrared signals check for input port changes perform any scheduled or periodic events count down any timers update the video screen if active or execute any part of a schedule However the controller can still receive and execute commands over the serial interface while halted This includes commands to transmit X 10 or IR signals change output ports change the video screen or any other action There is normally no_need for you to ever use these commands Transmit Controller Status This command causes the controller to transmit a status message over the serial interface The format is as follows e The returned value represents a number between 0 and 255 When converted to binary the 8 bits have the following meanings bit O LSB O controller running 1 controller halted bit 1 0 no controller error 1 controller error Chapter 15 Controller Functions 165 Set Set Set Set Set Set Baud Rate Baud Rate Baud Rate Baud Rate Baud Rate Baud Rate bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit5 bit6 TW 523 is present TW 523 is not present controller running loaded schedule controller using default schedule power up self test passed power up self test failed 0 controller clock OK 1 controller clock error 0 RAM checksum OK 1 RAM checksum error 0 0 0 bit 7 MSB Not used To 1200 To 2
114. this command should only be used when you know the result will be less than 256 Variable XXX Variable XXX x Variable YYY Multiplies variable XXX by variable YYY and puts the result in variable XXX Variables are 8 bits long and can only go as high as 255 If the result exceeds 255 only the lower 8 bits will be kept Therefore this command should only be used when you know the result will be less than 256 Variable XXX Variable Xxx 2 NOTE This command is provided for backwards compatibility with previous versions The next two commands are more powerful for performing division This commands divides variable XXX by two If the initial value is odd the least significant bit is ignored which results in rounding down See the examples below shown in decimal hexadecimal and binary formats INITIAL VALUE FINAL VALUE od 00h 00000000b od 00h 00000000b 1d 01h 00000001b od 00h 00000000b 2d 02h 00000010b 1d Olh 00000001b 3d 03h 00000011b 1d O1lh 00000001b 254d FEh 11111110b 127d 7Fh 01111111b 255d FFh 11111111b 127d 7Fh 01111111b Variable XXX Variable XXX Divides variable XXX by the constant value and puts the result in variable XXX can be any integer between 0 and 255 inclusive If the result is not an integer the remainder is discarded This has the effect of rounding down the result Fo
115. to switch closure devices As outputs they can drive 5V digital circuits LEDs etc e Four analog inputs for reading temperature sensors and similar devices e Up to 64 digital temperature sensors Three serial ports All three support RS 232 and two support RS 485 One can be used with built in USB to serial converter e Expansion capability to add more I O analog inputs zoned infrared output an extra serial port telephone control and more e Battery backed clock tracks daylight savings time leap years sunrise and sunset times etc 255 different events can be scheduled based on time e Whole house control from your IBM compatible computer over the serial interface up to 57 600 baud There s even a web server to allow you to control your home via the Internet when connected to a PC e Easy to use Windows software to create your schedule e Powerful programming language includes nested If Then Else statements and over 450 commands and 170 conditions Up to 255 flags variables timers macros and periodic events are available Large memory holds over 8000 lines allowing extremely powerful schedules e The control unit may be disconnected from your PC after the schedule is loaded It can even be moved to a different spot in your house perhaps near your TV Manual Organization This manual is organized as follows 2 Chapter 1 _Introduction e This chapter provides an overview of how the controller operates It
116. variable number no action will be performed Example Assume the command Variable Variable 3 100 is executed The controller will first look up the value of variable number 3 Let s assume its value is 12 The controller will then set variable number 12 to 100 Increment Variable Variable XXX Stop At 255 Increment Variable Variable XXX Roll Over At 255 Decrement Variable Variable XXX Stop At 0 Decrement Variable Variable XXX Roll Under At 0 These commands look up the value of variable XXX and use it as the ID number of the variable to increment or decrement If the value of the variable is not a valid variable number no action will be performed The incrementing and decrementing work the same as for the standard commands Variable Variable XXX Current Year Variable Variable XXX Current Month Variable Variable XXX Current Date Variable Variable XXX Current Day Of Week Variable Variable XXX Current Hour Variable Variable XXX Current Minute Variable Variable XXX Current Second Variable Variable XXX Current Centisecond These commands look up the value of variable XXX and use it as the ID number of the variable to set The corresponding variable is then set to the specified value Example Assume the command Variable Variable 3 Current Hour is executed The controller will first look up t
117. will do with the corresponding data Chapter 27 Miscellaneous 291 ALLOWED FIELD NAME WHERE HOMEVISION WILL PUT THE DATA NOTES Into Home Vision Pro variable can be any HomeVision Pro variable from 0 to 255 that you ve defined in your schedule doesn t get loaded into the controller DailyFlighineide Temperature in the weather variable Daily High Inside Degrees F DailyLowlnsideTemperature Into the weather variable Daily Low Inside Degrees F OutsideTemperature Into the weather variable Outside Temperature Into the weather variable Daily High Outside Temperature Into the weather variable Daily Low Outside Temperature InsideHumidity Into the weather variable Inside Humidity O to 100 Humidity Humidity OutsideHumidity Into the weather variable Outside Humidity O to 100 DailyHighOutsideHumidity Into the weather variable Daily High Outside O to 100 Humidity DailyLowOutsideHumidity Into the weather variable Daily Low Outside 0 to 100 Humidity WindSpeed Into the weather variable Wind Speed 0 to 254 DailyHighWindSpeed Into the weather variable Daily High Wind 0 to 254 Speed DailyLowWindSpeed Into the weather variable Daily Low Wind 0 to 254 Speed Also note that if you wish you can include comments in the configuration file by preceding a line with a semicolon Any line starting with a semicolon will be ignored Example Assume you ha
118. you defined Note that this condition only refers to receiving User Data When Command Data is being received this condition is false Serial Commands To Control Computer You can send commands to a computer running the Home Vision Pro software to Play a WAV file a sound file Start another program Send keystrokes to a program Write specific data to a text file Write log all serial data to a daily log file Send data to another serial port on the computer Send messages to the computer for display You send these as serial commands where the ASCII text you send has special meanings to the HomeVision Pro software The HomeVision Pro application then performs the specified tasks These are detailed in the following sections 194 Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface Playing Wave WAV Files You can play a wave sound file on your computer upon command from the controller This requires that the controller be connected to the computer s serial port and that the HomeVision Pro software be running on the computer To command a wave file to be played enter a serial interface command in your schedule to transmit the following ASCII text Play wav file filename wav Replace filename wav with the complete name of the wave file including the wav extension For example to play the wave file chimes wav send this ASCII text Play wav file chimes wav To help test playing wave files use the Serial Command Test screen locat
119. you can check with an If Then statement This command puts the received preset dim level 0 to 31 into the specified variable This allows you to receive preset dim signals from devices that transmit them For example certain thermostats transmit preset dim levels to report temperature and other status With this command you can store the received dim level in a variable and then do whatever else you need to with it Set To Level In Variable This command reads the value of the specified variable and sets the X 10 module to that level If the variable value is 0 to 16 the light will be turned on at that level If the variable value is 255 the light will go off If the variable value is 254 the module state will be set to NEUTRAL Remember that a light ON at level 0 is not the same as OFF This command works similar to the Set To Level command expect that the level is taken from a variable instead of being specified in the command itself Remember that these Set commands won t send X 10 signals if the controller thinks the light is already at the desired level As an example if the variable value is 16 and the light is already on at level 16 no X 10 signals will be sent See the Put Current Level Into Variable command for more information on saving a light s level into a variable Refer to the How To file for an example of how to use this command 58 Chapter 5 X 10 Note that this command will not work properly with PCS
120. you want X 10 module A1 is on AND Flag 1 is set OR Flag 2 is set 40 Chapter 4 Programming Language The following conditions will not give you the desired effect If X 10 module Al is on AND Flag 1 is set OR Flag 2 is set Then This compound condition will be evaluated as follows X 10 module A1 is on AND Flag 1 is set OR Flag 2 is set The first part of the condition is right as it s true if the X 10 module A1 is on and Flag 1 is set However the second part isn t correct In this case it will be true whenever Flag 2 is set regardless of the state of the X 10 module This isn t the desired behavior as you only want it to be true if Flag 2 is set AND the X 10 module is on To get the desired behavior you must enter the X 10 module condition along with each flag condition as shown If X 10 module Al is on AND Flag 1 is set OR X 10 module Al is on AND Flag 2 is set Then This will be evaluated as follows X 10 module A1 is on AND Flag 1 is set OR X 10 module A1 is on AND Flag 2 is set This gives the desired results Chapter 5 X 10 41 CHAPTER 5 X 10 Introduction X 10 signals are transmitted over the 110VAC power lines within the house or 220VAC power lines for international users These signals are used to control equipment located throughout the house The controller provides the following X 10 features and capabilities e Can receive and transmit all X 10 commands e Can
121. 11b bits 0 1 and 2 are set If the variable 128d 10000000b only bit 7 is set If Variable XXX Bit 0 Is Not Set 0 If Variable XXX Bit 1 Is Not Set 0 If Variable XXX Bit 2 Is Not Set 0 If Variable XXX Bit 3 Is Not Set 0 If Variable XXX Bit 4 Is Not Set 0 If Variable XXX Bit 5 Is Not Set 0 If Variable XXX Bit 6 Is Not Set 0 If Variable XXX Bit 7 Is Not Set 0 These eight conditions check to determine if the specified bit is not set has a value of zero Variables are stored as 8 bit numbers ranging from 0 to 255 Bit 0 is the least significant bit LSB and bit 7 is the most significant bit MSB Power Failure Options Variables do not have a Power Fail State that can be automatically set after a power failure Chapter 12 Input and Output Ports 101 CHAPTER 12 INPUT AND OUTPUT PORTS Introduction Input and output ports provide the following features and capabilities Port A provides 8 Single Pole Double Throw SPDT relays Port B provides 8 digital input lines that can accept up to 30V and be read as a one or zero The input lines contain pull up resistors allowing them to directly connect to switch closure inputs from alarm contacts motion sensors etc There are also switches that allow each pull up resistor to be disconnected simplifying connections to external voltage sources Port C provides 8 digital lines configurable as inputs or
122. 13 Status gt lt HV HVDateTime gt lt HV LoadedFileName gt lt HV LoadedFileDateTime gt lt HV RunningHalted gt Chapter 26 Web Server 269 TEXT TAG Selftest results lt HV SelftestResults gt lt HV SelftestResults gt NOTES Indicates the results of the self test that runs when power is applied to controller X 10 interface lt HV X10Status gt lt HV X10Status gt Error status NOTES Indicates whether the X 10 interface device TW 523 or PSC 05 is connected and running OK HomeVision lt HV ErrorNumber gt lt HV ErrorNumber gt No error error number NOTES Indicates the number of the latest error if any that has occurred in the controller PROM version lt HV PromVersion gt lt HV PromVersion gt PROM lt HV PromChecksum gt lt HV PromChecksum gt Abdh checksum PC clock date lt HV PCDateTime gt lt HV PCDateTime gt 5 Jul 2000 at 1 11 21 PM and time File name lt HV OpenedFileName gt lt HV OpenedFileName gt Example haf open in Home Vision software PC serial port lt HV ComPort gt lt HV ComPort gt PC serial port lt HV ComBaud gt lt HV ComBaud gt 19200 baud rate PC serial port lt HV ComStatus gt lt HV ComStatus gt status 270 Chapter 26 Web Server Tags That Return Complete HTML Tables The HomeVision Pro web pages that are automatically generated use tables to display information for the HomeVision Pro object types There are tables for flags variables time
123. 2 0 Port C Test Passed 164 Chapter 15 Controller Functions 1 Port C Test Failed bit 3 0 Clock Test Passed 1 Clock Test Failed bit 4 0 Analog Chip Test Passed 1 Analog Chip Test Failed bit 5 0 Serial Port 3 Chip Test Passed 1 Serial Port 3 Chip Test Failed bit 6 0 Serial Port 4 Chip Test Passed 1 Serial Port 4 Chip Test Failed bit 7 0 Peripheral Chip Test Passed 1 Peripheral Chip Test Failed Read Error Message This command causes the controller to transmit the error message ID over the serial interface Refer to the Miscellaneous chapter for a description of error messages Put Error Message In Result Value This command causes the controller to put the error message ID number into the system variable Result Value It can then be transmitted over the serial interface stored in a variable or used in some other way You could even do this every loop check for a non zero value indicating an error and then transmit it over the serial interface along with the time and date Refer to the Miscellaneous chapter for a description of Result Value Clear Error Message This command causes the controller to reset the error message ID number to zero indicating no error The error message ID is also cleared automatically each time power is cycled Refer to the Miscellaneous chapter for a description of error messages Halt Controller Resume Controller These commands halt and resume
124. 23d using military time as shown 0 12AM 1 1AM 2 2AM 11 11AM 12 12PM 13 1PM 23 11 PM 96 Chapter 11 _ Variables Variable XXX Current Minute This command puts the current minute of the time into variable XXX The value will range from 0 to 59d Variable XXX Current Second This command puts the current second of the time into variable XXX The value will range from O to 59d Variable XXX Current Centisecond This command puts the current centisecond of the time into variable XXX Centiseconds are hundredths of seconds and will range from 0 to 99d Variable XXX Value of Analog Input This command reads the analog input specified by and puts its value in variable XXX This command is only available if you have a multifunction expansion board with analog input capability attached to the controller This is the only command related to the analog input ports To use an analog input first use this command to put the analog value into a variable Then use any of the other variable commands or conditions to work with the analog value Variable XXX Value of Digital Temperature Sensor This command puts the temperature of the digital temperature sensor specified by into variable XXX This command does not actually read the temperature sensor The controller automatically reads each sensor on a periodic basis and stores the result This command puts tha
125. 255 name SE 1 DoNow name SE 1 Enable name SE 1 Disable name PE 4 DoNow name PE 5 Enable name PE 6 Disable name PE 12 Rate 5Minutes name PE 12 Rate 1Hour 274 Chapter 26 Web Server COMMAND NAME FIELD VALUE FIELD FORMAT NOTES FORMAT NOTES EXAMPLE FORMAT Timer Timer COMMAND is timer ID in decimal format 0 255 Not used You may enter name Timer 0 Start anything you like name Timer 12 STOP Allowable values for COMMAND name Timer 4 load with 0 30 00 00 Start name Timer 5 load with 0 30 00 00 Stop and start Load With HH MM SS CC Load With HH MM SS CC And Start Note The last two commands to load the timer with a value are not yet implemented HVAC Zone HVAC is zone in decimal format 0 15 For the Setpoint command name HVAC 0 Run COMMAND the desired temperature in name HVAC 1 COOL Two allowable values for COMMAND decimal format 0 255 must name HVAC 1 FanOn set the control mode be in value field This is how name HVAC 0 Setpoint Run you would do it if you want value 255 Hold the user to enter the desired temperature into a text box Four allowable values for COMMAND For other commands the set the system mode value field isn t used you Cool may enter anything you like Heat Auto Off Two allowable values for COMMAND set the fan mode FanOn FanAuto One allowable value for COM
126. 400 To 4800 To 9600 To 19200 To 57600 These commands change the baud rate used on serial port 1 The new rate will take effect only after all characters in the transmit buffer are transmitted at the prior baud rate The serial transmit buffer holds up to 256 characters Here s an example of how this works Assume you perform the following commands in your schedule and the baud rate is currently 19200 baud Transmit ASCII string Welcome Home John Set baud rate to 9600 Transmit ASCII string Alarm Off The first command will start transmitting the string Welcome Home John at 19200 baud If any characters were in the transmit buffer prior to performing this command they will be sent prior to the Welcome Home John string The second command will wait until the entire Welcome Home John string is transmitted before changing the baud rate to 9600 The string Alarm Off will then be sent at 9600 baud NOTE The new baud rate is maintained even through power failures If you change the rate in your schedule so should usually set it back to its normal rate after transmitting or receiving whatever you needed to at the different rate If you don t the PC will not be able to communicate with the controller if the PC is at a different rate You will then have to change the PC rate to match the controller s before you can communicate over the serial interface again Set X 10 To Transmit On One Phase Only This c
127. 5 96 97 98 99 100 DISPLAYED TEXT Dining_Room Bathroom Patio Sliding_Door Front_Door Side_Door Back_Door Patio_Door French Door Door Interior Exterior Perimeter Happy Birthday HAPPY BIRTHDAY Merry Christmas MERRY CHRISTMAS Happy Holidays HAPPY HOLIDAYS Happy New Year HAPPY NEW YEAR Good_Night Good_Morning Home _ Away _ Sleep Party Security Vacation Television Stereo CD_ Player Receiver Tape Deck Satellite Receiver Equalizer VCR VCR_ 1 VCR 2 DAT Player X 10 Flag Variable Timer Input Output Sch_Event___ Per Event IR_Signal_ Macro NOTE The underscore character _ is used to denote a blank space 136 Chapter 13 Video Output Display All 3 Digits Of Variable On Screen This command writes the value of variable number to the screen All three digits in the value are displayed Display Last 2 Digits Of Variable On Screen This command writes the value of variable number to the screen However only the last two digits are displayed This command is used when displaying numbers that will not go over 99 and therefore don t need 3 digits displayed Display Last Digit Of Variable On Screen This command writes the value of variable number to the screen However only the last digit is displayed This command is used when displaying numbers that will not go over 9 and therefore only need 1 digit displayed Display Value Of Timer On Video Screen This command writes
128. AND condition or an OR condition Evaluation Logic Compound conditions are evaluated according to the following rules e Conditions joined by AND must all be true in order for the compound condition to be true For example If Flag 1 In Sleep Mode is Set AND Timer 4 Go To Bed Delay is Running Then This is true only if BOTH conditions are true i e the flag is set and the timer is running If either condition is false the compound condition is false and the then actions will not be performed Similarly If Flag 1 In Sleep Mode is Set AND Timer 4 Go To Bed Delay is Running AND Time is After Sunset Then is true only if all three conditions are true 38 Chapter 4 Programming Language e Ifthe conditions are joined by OR only one must be true in order for the compound condition to be true For example If Flag 1 In Sleep Mode is Set OR Timer 4 Go To Bed Delay is Running Then This is true if either condition is true i e the flag is set or the timer is running If both conditions are false the compound condition is false Similarly If Flag 1 In Sleep Mode is Set OR Timer 4 Go To Bed Delay is Running OR Time is After Sunset Then is true if any one or more of the three conditions are true When OR and AND conditions are combined the AND conditions are evaluated as if they were surrounded by parentheses Here are some basic examples of how
129. ARNING As noted above input voltages into Port C are limited to between OV and 6V Voltages outside this range could damage the controller If you have inputs that can exceed this range connect them to Port B instead Port C Input Examples A few examples will best illustrate how to connect to Port C as an input The PCF8574 easily interfaces with switch closure inputs of the type found in burglar alarm sensors motion sensors water level sensors etc Switch closure inputs can be used with Port C in a similar fashion to Port B This example shows connecting an external switch to Port C 1 External Switch Controller Terminal Block NOTE No pull up resistors are used on Port C However the PCF85 74 interface device on Port C contains an internal weak pull up If the input is left open it will be pulled up to 5V However if the input is grounded the ground will over power the pull up bringing the input to ground When the switch is open no current flows through it The input buffer is internally pulled high in this condition Thus the controller will read the input as High a logic 1 When the switch is closed current will flow through it and pull the input buffer down to ground Thus the controller will read the input as Low a logic 0 Port C can also be used as an input from a 5V digital circuit as shown in the following circuit The common ground is necessary to ensure consistent voltage levels ar
130. Bill Caller ID Name Lookup If you are getting the caller ID information from the PC HomeVision Pro can do a caller ID name lookup When a call is received HomeVision Pro will look in a special file for the caller s phone number If it finds it it will use the name you ve associated with it instead of the name provided over the phone line This is useful when your caller ID service only sends you the caller s number as you can associate a name with it When using HomeVision Phone CID to get the caller ID information this feature is not available To use this feature create a text file named cid_name txt and put it in the same directory as the HomeVision Pro program Edit the file to include the number and name of potential callers in this format Custom Solutions Jane s parents Bill s parents 555 726 8864 555 973 6547 555 345 2388 If you selected the option to display the phone number exactly as it is received enter the phone number here exactly as it is received and displayed by Home Vision Pro Note that after creating or making changes to this file you must restart the HomeVision Pro software You can also use the following wildcard symbols in the phone number field Any single character Zero or more characters 210 Chapter 18 Caller ID For example to match any call from a number starting with 321 555 use 321 555 or 321 555 To match any call from area code 321 use 321 Note that you should put these
131. C software or from commands in your schedule you send the following signals House Unit Code A 5 House Unit Code A 7 House Unit Code A 8 _House Function Code A On House Function Code A Dim Effect First the three house unit code combinations arm modules A 5 A 7 and A 8 The house function code combination A On causes all three modules to turn on simultaneously The subsequent A Dim command causes all three modules to simultaneously dim once e Example From the X 10 control screen in the PC program or from commands in your schedule you send the following signals _House Unit Code A 5 House Function Code A On _House Unit Code A 7 _House Function Code A On _House Unit Code A 8 _House Function Code A On _House Function Code A Dim Effect Unlike the previous example these modules will not respond simultaneously First module A 5 will be turned on Approximately 1 second later A 7 will go on In another second A 8 will come on The final Dim command will cause only A 8 to dim once e Example You press the button All Lights Off on a mini controller that is set to house code A X 10 Transmissions A house function code combination of house code A and function code All Lights Off is transmitted All modules which have a house code of A will immediately turn OFF Note that no house unit code transmission is required This command affects all devices with the specified house code
132. Connect the TXA and TXB positions to the RS 485 network e Connect the TXA position to the RXA position e Connect the TXB position to the RXB position Note that this ties the transmit and receive lines together This means that the network cannot transmit and receive at the same time Consequently it is half duplex Because the transmit and receive lines are tied together HomeVision Pro will receive it s own transmission over this port Because this is normally not desirable there is an option to prevent it Selecting the half duplex option as described in Software Setup will disable receiving while transmission is taking place Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface 173 This is the way most RS 485 devices operate and is generally recommended for this port when using the RS 485 mode Hardware Setup To use serial port 3 jumpers must be placed on the Serial Port Configuration Header See the Serial Port Configuration Header section at the end of this configuration section for details In brief the following jumpers must be used e For RS 232 mode place a jumper between pins 6 and 7 e For RS 485 mode place a jumper between pins 6 and 15 e For USB mode place a jumper between pins 5 and 6 and another jumper between pins 18 and 19 Software Setup You must configure serial port 3 using the HomeVision Pro software as described below 1 Open the Expansion Boards Configuration Screen under the Configure menu 2 Select
133. Enable X 10 Report Mode Disable X 10 Report Mode These commands enable or disable the X 10 Report Mode When enabled the controller will send a message over the serial interface whenever an X 10 signal is received Enable Infrared Report Mode Disable Infrared Report Mode These commands enable or disable the Infrared Report Mode When enabled the controller will send a message over the serial interface whenever certain infrared signals are received Only infrared signals that follow the standard format and are included in the IR summary table can be received Enable Scheduled Event Report Mode Disable Scheduled Event Report Mode These commands enable or disable the Scheduled Event Report Mode When enabled the controller will send a message over the serial interface whenever a scheduled event occurs Enable Periodic Event Report Mode Disable Periodic Event Report Mode These commands enable or disable the Periodic Event Report Mode When enabled the controller will send a message over the serial interface whenever a periodic event occurs Periodic events that are performed every loop will not be reported if they were they would be transmitted virtually continually Events at all other rates will be reported every time they occur Enable Timer Report Mode Disable Timer Report Mode These commands enable or disable the Timer Report Mode When enabled the controller will send a report message over the serial interface whenever a time
134. Fan mode On Auto Current temperature Temperature setting 220 Chapter 19 Thermostats By reading this data the controller can determine not only the actual temperature but also when someone manually changes a setting There are three ways for the controller to request and read this information 1 Automatically If you ve configured HVAC zone 1 and or 2 for the RCS TX10 B thermostat the controller will automatically read the settings from them on a regular basis If the thermostat is a newer TX15 B the HomeVision Pro command Initialize Thermostat will enable the TX15 B s auto send feature after which it will automatically report changes to HomeVision Pro 2 With a direct command in your schedule There are commands to request each of the four different data types There s usually no need for you to do this with zones 1 and 2 as the controller does it automatically However there are some instances where you may want to These commands are described in the section Advanced Thermostat Control 3 By directly sending and reading X 10 preset dim signals to from the thermostat Prior to version 2 5 this was the only way to communicate with the TX10 B The How To file includes a thorough description of how to control the TX10 B in this fashion which requires you to write fairly complex macros Since version 2 5 and later now include commands to directly control the TX10 B there s no need to do it this way anymore Reading Data
135. G NX 584 PROGRAMMING LOCATIONS In addition to the above settings you must assign HomeVision Pro a user number for the security system It can be the same user number as you or a family member or it can be a separate user number for HomeVision Pro The only requirement is that this user number be assigned arm disarm authority to all partitions Refer to the security system installation manual in the Assigning Authority Level section for instructions on making these settings 252 Chapter 25 Security Systems 3 Connect Serial Port The NX 584 can connect to the built in HomeVision Pro serial ports or to the optional HomevVision Phone Serial board Set up the serial port as follows 1 2 3 Refer to the Serial Interface chapter for details on configuring the desired serial port Configure the HomeVision Pro port for 19200 baud operation you may choose another baud rate but the NX 584 must be set for the same rate as described previously Connect the serial cable e When using HomeVision Pro port 1 not recommended use a standard serial cable just like the one that comes with HomeVision Pro However you shouldn t connect the security system until you ve completed the other setup steps and downloaded your schedule into HomeVision Pro When using port 3 4 or the HomeVision Phone Serial port use either a null modem cable or a standard cable with a null modem adaptor These are available from most el
136. HE REIMBURSEMENT OR PAYMENT OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THIS INCLUDES DAMAGE CAUSED BY THE PRODUCT DUE TO A PRODUCT DEFECT OR INCORRECT APPLICATION OF THE PRODUCT Some states do not allow this exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above exclusion or limitation may not apply to you PROCEDURE FOR OBTAINING PERFORMANCE OF WARRANTY In the event that the Product does not conform to this warranty you may return the unit to the company you purchased it from or to Custom Solutions Inc To return it to Custom Solutions call 321 726 8864 to obtain a Return Material Authorization number RMA Any unit returned without an RMA clearly marked on the exterior package may be refused and returned at the sender s expense Ship the Product freight prepaid along with evidence of original purchase to the warrantor at the address provided with the RMA LEGAL REMEDIES This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state
137. HomeVision Pro Owner s Manual Version 3 5 Custom Solutions Inc No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of Custom Solutions Inc Information in this manual is believed to be accurate at the time of printing However it is subject to change without notice Custom Solutions Inc assumes no liability for errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document Custom Solutions Inc will not be liable for direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of this product or documentation whether due to the product itself or its application HomeVision is a registered trademark of Custom Solutions Inc X 10 is a registered trademark of X 10 USA Inc Powerhouse is a registered trademark of X 10 USA Inc MS DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Blast IR is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation Call Editor RSA is a trademark of Flashline formerly Vive Synergies Inc All other brands or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Copyright 1996 2006 Custom Solutions Inc All rights reserved Custom Solutions Inc P O Box 33905 Indialantic FL 32903 E mai
138. IR emitters or connection blocks There is also an LED that flashes whenever an IR signal is transmitted Can receive and recognize most IR signals which can be used as command inputs or video screen system controls There is both a 3 5mm stereo jack and a terminal block for connecting to external IR receivers There are also two built in IR receivers for direct control from a remote control or from a mini emitter There is also an LED that flashes whenever an IR signal is received Can be configured to automatically perform a set of actions when a specified IR signal is received IR signals can be viewed transmitted enabled and disabled from the video screen system or serial interface Can selective transmit though eight different zones when using a multifunction expansion board Can be controlled from any preprogrammed or learning remote You do not need a special or expensive remote The controller can store 255 different IR signals It can also transmit an unlimited number of standard signals For users needing more commands it is possible for software running on a PC to load additional signals into the controller while it is operating Refer to the file Using Extra IR Signals installed in the HomeVision directory for details on how this works This chapter explains The infrared signal formats and how the controller works with each type How to program your remote so it can be used to provide inputs to the contr
139. IR transmissions or you ve included delays in your power failure recovery routine it could take considerably longer 2 No Cycle power several times to see if it begins operating If not the controller is defective B On steady or blinking If the Status 1 LED is on steady the controller is running If blinking the controller is halted However it should still communicate over the serial interface Open the terminal emulator screen under the Other menu Remove then reapply power to the controller Observe what is shown in the emulator window immediately after power is restored 302 Chapter 28 Trouble Shooting 1 Garbage characters The computer is probably set to a different baud rate then the controller Try different baud rate settings in the serial port configuration screen under the Configure menu If none of the baud rates work Verify the serial cable connectors are properly mated and secured Try a different serial cable Reboot your computer and try again There may be a problem with the serial port Try a different PC serial port If none of these solve the problem either the controller or the computer s serial port is defective No characters Try the following e Verify the computer s communications port is opened the status will be shown at the bottom right of the main software screen If not select the correct serial port from the serial port configuration screen under the Conf
140. If the string reaches the end of a row it moves to the start of the next row and continues reaches the end of the screen row 12 column 24 it continues displaying at the upper left corner Display Text String On Screen This command writes string number to the screen strings that you can refer to by number The following table shows the available strings If it The controller contains a variety of built in This command takes less storage space and writes the text slightly faster than the Display String XXXXX On Screen command as the string is built in STRING Poni nuAWNRO RPRRER WNE 4 RR NOU 4 1 WO MNNNN WNrFRO N N U eA NNN ona N to WWW WW WNRO Ww w U e BB BWW WW lo WO A w 46 47 48 50 DISPLAYED TEXT ENTER MENU NUMBER _ PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN PRESS ENTER TO CONFIRM Time _ Date _ Off On _ Low_ High Opened Closed Disabled Enabled_ Set__ Clear Neutr Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Monday_ Tuesday__ Wednesday Thursday _ Friday Saturday _ Sunday Minutes Hours Sunrise Sunset __ Alarm Fire Bedroom Master Bedroom Bedroom_1 Bedroom 2 Bedroom_3 Bedroom_4 Guest_Bedroom Kitchen Living Room Family Room STRING 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 9
141. John D Set Caller ID Line 2 Last 12 Characters To oe Family ff Set Caller ID Line 3 First 12 Characters To 555 555 12 Set Caller ID Line 3 Last 12 Characters To 34 Display Caller ID Screen On Solid Background will display the following Phone call from The John Doe Family 555 555 1234 Caller ID Conditions You can check the phone number of a caller in an If Then statement Enter these conditions with the Other button on the Actions Entry Screen Toolbar and then select Caller ID Condition from the popup menu These conditions should be used inside your caller ID macro that runs whenever caller ID information is received If you place them elsewhere in your schedule they may not work as expected as the caller ID information may have been cleared 212 Chapter 18 Caller ID Caller s Phone Number is Out of area This condition will be true if the callers number is sent as Out of area Caller s Phone Number is Private This condition will be true if the callers number is sent as Private Caller s Phone Number is H H This condition will be true if the caller s number exactly matches your condition For this condition you enter the specific phone number you want to check Note several things about this You can enter as few or as many digits as you want For example you could enter only the first three digits to determine if the call is from a specifi
142. Line Feed and Carriage Return command it may not go where you expect it You can always avoid this problem by directly setting the desired row and column with the Set Cursor Row To and Set Cursor Column To commands The advantage of the Do Line Feed and Carriage Return command is that it takes less storage space and is faster than using the two separate commands Set Cursor Row To and Set Cursor Column To When you re creating a screen and you know your text doesn t reach the end of the row the Do Line Feed and Carriage Return command may be most appropriate Screen Removes all characters from the screen and sets the cursor to upper left corner row 1 column 1 This command only works for screens that you create When displaying the built in video menu system the controller redraws the screen many times each second If you were to execute the Clear Screen command the screen would be cleared then immediately redrawn Display Text XXXXX On Screen This command writes the string of characters XXXXxX to the screen at the current cursor location For example if the cursor is at row 1 and column 1 the command Display Text Burglar Alarm Armed On Screen will display Burglar Alarm Armed starting at the upper left corner of the screen Note that the quotes shown in the command do not appear on the video screen They are only used to highlight the displayed text in the command Chapter 13 Video Output 135
143. MAND to set setpoint Setpoint where the temperature to set the zone to is in the value field Security Zone SecZone is zone in decimal format 0 63 Not used You may enter name SecZone 3 ToggleBypass ToggleBypass This command toggles the zone anything you like bypass setting Chapter 26 _Web Server 215 COMMAND NAME FIELD VALUE FIELD EXAMPLE FORMAT NOTES FORMAT NOTES FORMAT Security Partition SecPartition is partition in decimal format Not used You may enter name SecPartition 0 ArmHome COMMAND 0 7 anything you like name SecPartition 1 DISARM Allowable values for COMMAND ArmHome ArmAway Disarm ToggleChime SoundFire SoundMedical SoundPolice Sync clock SyncClock Not used You may enter name Sync clock sets the controller s anything you like clock to the PC s time Open schedule file Method 1 Not used You may enter name OpenFile example haf opens the specified anything you like file in the PC SW OpenFile filename haf Method 2 Filename haf name OpenFile value example haf OpenFile Load schedule file LoadFile Not used You may enter name LoadFile downloads the anything you like currently opened file into controller Serial transmission Method 1 XXXX is the serial string to transmit to Not used You may enter name Serial TX Arm alarm HomeVision Pro A carriage return anything you like SerialTX XXXX will be added to the end of
144. R ADAPTER a standard modem cable will NOT work Radio Shack has two types of null modem adapters that will work 1 a male DB9 to female DB9 catalog 26 264A and 2 a male DB25 to female DB25 catalog 26 1496B You may also need a DB9 to DB25 adapter or cable if your modem uses a DB25 connector The modem itself must also be configured properly This is only done one time and requires using either the software that came with the modem or a terminal emulator program The table below shows the required settings It also shows the commands necessary to make these settings for most Hayes compatible modems Refer to your modem owner s manual for more information if necessary MODEM SETTING COMMAND TYPE THIS Echo off E ATE lt CR gt XOn XOf flow control amp K4 AT amp K4 lt CR gt Ignore DTR line amp DO AT amp DO lt CR gt Auto answer N of rings to answer SO N ATSO N lt CR gt the number zero NOTE All commands must be preceded by the two letters AT and ended with a carriage return lt CR gt For example to make these settings and set the modem to auto answer on the third ring type ATE lt CR gt AT amp K4 lt CR gt AT amp DO lt CR gt the last character is the number zero ATSO 3 lt CR gt You may also want to set the modem s speaker volume The options are summarized below SETTING COMMAND TYPE THIS Speaker always on M2 ATM2 Speaker always off M3 ATM3 Speaker on when dialing M1 ATM1 Speaker volu
145. R distribution systems Mini emitters or other emitters although this will result in a very high current flow that could damage the emitter We recommend that external resistors be placed in series with such emitters to prevent damage A 1000 Ohm resistor will limit the current to about 10mA which is normally sufficient for mini emitters Configuration for Transmission Before the controller can transmit an infrared signal you must tell it what the signal looks like This can be done in two ways 1 You can use the IR Learn screen to record the pulse lengths of the signal 2 Ifthe signal follows the standard format you can enter the signal s Device Code and Key Code Each method is explained below Learning Infrared Signals For Transmission Learning is the process by which the controller analyzes the IR signal and stores it in memory The procedure is as follows 1 The controller must be setup as follows e The controller must be connected to the PC serial port e The controllers IR Receive Mode Master Report Mode and IR Report Mode must be enabled You can verify these are set by using the Status screen under the Other menu If necessary you can enable these modes from the Controller Command screen under the Control menu 2 Select IR Learn from the Other menu The IR learn screen will appear 3 To learn a signal click the Learn button The
146. Result Value The following command sets Result Value equal to 14 Put Value Of 2 Received Characters 1 2 Into Result Value The following command sets Result Value equal to 149 Put Value Of 3 Received Characters 1 3 Into Result Value If the received data string is Current Temperature is 85 The following command sets Result Value equal to 85 Put Value Of 2 Received Characters 24 25 Into Result Value The following command sets Result Value equal to 255 to indicate an error condition because character 23 is not a valid number Put Value Of 2 Received Characters 23 24 Into Result Value Put Value Of Received Hex Character Into Result Value Put Value Of 2 Received Hex Characters Into Result Value These two commands look for a hex value at the specified location s in the serial data string convert it to a number and put it into the system variable Result Value After the value is put in Result Value you can use variable commands to move it to a variable and perform other operations on it If the specified locations are not valid numbers Result Value will be set equal to 255 to indicate an error The difference between these commands is how many characters are used to determine the value The first command looks at a single character that must be a number between 0 and 9 a letter between a and f or a letter between A and F The result will be a value between 0 and 15 The second command looks at two consecutive c
147. Serial port 4 always transmits RS 485 data RS 485 mode out this terminal block Jumper required for receiving data Special Serial 4 9 pin male 8 to 9 Reserved for future use port connector or terminal block 10 to 11 USB port Add on header port B 2 to 19 Reserved for future product that connects to 5 to 16 headers 178 Chapter 16 Serial Interface PROCESSOR SERIAL PORTS CONNECTORS USB Connector Serial Port 1 i F Serial 1 232 Serial 3 232 Vs ES Connector amp TB Serial 3 485 es 15 Terminal Block Serial 4 232 Connector Serial Port 4 Terminal Block Serial 4 485 A 14 Terminal Block Header Ports Special Serial Port be Wiring Key Hard wired Jumpers Figure 16 3 Serial Port Connection Options Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface 179 Serial Interface Commands To The Controller Transmitting Commands To The Controller Nearly every command that can be included in a schedule can also be transmitted to the controller over the main serial port port 1 When received by the controller it executes the command and reports the results back over the serial interface This requires the command to follow the serial protocol described in the Serial Protocol file installed in the HomeVision directory However the controller can also be configured to receive data in any format over any of the serial ports and take actions This capability provides you wit
148. Stop At 0 Decrements i e subtracts 1 from variable XXX until it reaches zero If the initial value before executing the command is zero it will not decrement Further Decrement commands will not affect the variable s value it will remain at zero If you want it to roll over to 255 use the Decrement Variable XXX Roll Under at 0 command Decrement Variable XXX Roll Under At 0 Decrements i e subtracts 1 from variable XXX If the initial value is zero it will roll over to 255 Variable XXX Variable XXX Subtracts the value from variable XXX Variables are 8 bits long and can only range from 0 to 255 There are no negative numbers allowed If you subtract two numbers where the second is larger than the first the result will not be a negative number When this happens the controller adds 256 to the result to force it back into the range of O to 255 Here are some examples CORRECT ACTUAL NUMBERS TO SUBTRACT RESULT RESULT 0O 1 T 255 0 2 2 254 O 200 200 56 0 255 255 1 20 20 0 0 Because of this limitation it is best to only subtract numbers where you know the result will not be negative This should work fine for most applications There are ways you could store negative numbers but it is a more complex process requiring several If Then statements and a separate flag to indicate whether the variable is positive or negative Variable XXX V
149. This command tells all X 10 devices in the specified house code to go to the specified scene It only works with Leviton brand devices that support the X 10 extended codes The scene number can be 1 to 64 Refer to the X 10 Lighting Scenes section for a detailed description X 10 Conditions The following X 10 conditions can be checked by an If Then or If Then Else statement If X 10 Module Is Off This condition will be true if the specified module house and unit code is OFF It will be false if the module is ON or NEUTRAL If X 10 Module Is On This condition will be true if the specified module house and unit code is ON It will be false if the module is OFF or NEUTRAL If X 10 Module Is Neutral This condition will be true if the specified module house and unit code is NEUTRAL It will be false if the module is ON or OFF If X 10 Module Is Not Off This condition will be true if the specified module house and unit code is either ON or NEUTRAL It will be false if the module is OFF If X 10 Module Is Not On This condition will be true if the specified module house and unit code is either OFF or NEUTRAL It will be false if the module is ON 60 Chapter 5 X 10 If X 10 Module Is Not Neutral If If If If TE If If This condition will be true if the specified module house and unit code is either ON or OFF It will be false if the module is NEUTRAL X 10 Module Is Enabled This condition wi
150. Using Tags That Return Values You can also embed custom tags in your HTML page When you request a page from the Home Vision Pro server the server will scan the page looking for any custom tags The server will then replace the tag with 266 Chapter 26 Web Server the data specified by the tag When the entire page has been scanned and converted the resulting page will be sent to the browser for display Thus the custom tags won t appear in the page that s sent to the browser the browser only sees the final page that results The tags can be divided into two groups 1 Tags that return individual values such as the value of a variable or the name of the schedule file currently running in the HomeVision Pro controller 2 Tags that return an entire HTML table such as a table displaying all the HomeVision Pro macros or scheduled events These tags are described in the following sections Tags That Return Individual Values You can place these tags in your web page to display status information from HomeVision Pro For example you can display such things as e The value of a variable The state of an X 10 device The state of an input port The HomeVision Pro controller s clock time and date The web server scans the HTML file for these custom tags and replaces them with the appropriate text The allowable tags are shown in the following table along with examples The commands are not case sensitive Chapter 26 Web
151. Var 23 gt lt HV Flag 4 Home Away Unknown gt To send a command from the web page you will include forms in your HTML page and post them to the HomeVision Pro server Here s an example that displays a button that when clicked will send the X 10 signal A1 Off lt form method POST gt lt input type submit name X10 Al Off value Turn light off gt lt form gt These methods are detailed in the following sections Displaying Complete Web Pages There are a variety of web pages that you can view simply by opening them You access them just as you would a regular web page There are two ways to do this 1 By typing the complete address and page name in the browser URL line like this HTTP 127 0 0 1 1033 HVTableX10 htm 2 By putting the file name in a web page using an address tag like this lt A HREF HVTableX10 htm gt Display X10 Table lt A gt You can then click on this link to open the desired page The following table describes the standard pages giving their name and the file used to format the page Chapter 26 Web Server 265 PAGE DESCRIPTION PAGE NAME FORMAT BASED ON General status clock time schedule HVTableStatus htm HVMainFormat htm name etc X10 addresses will only display X10 HVTablex10 htm HVMainFormat htm addresses for which you checked the Load Name field in the HomeVision Pro software Main Home Vision Pro web page HVWebPage htm HVWebPage h
152. a beta version for your use Most users however will prefer the HomeVision Pro web server described below No further development work is planned for the Internet Control Group software For more details on it see out web page at http www csi3 com HV_web htm 2 HomeVision Pro Web Server The HomeVision Pro software contains a built in web server This allows web browsers to control HomeVision Pro 3 Remote Internet Access The HomevVision Pro software contains a Remote Internet Access capability This allows a copy of the HomevVision Pro software running on one PC the client PC to control a Home Vision Pro unit connected to another PC the server PC Basically the client PC can control the remotely located Home Vision Pro unit as if it was directly connected to the client PC Web Server Overview The HomeVision Web Server provides several capabilities e Turns your computer into a web server that serves files to web browsers e Can be accessed by any web browser The browser can be on the same PC as Home Vision Pro on another PC on a network within your home or anywhere in the world if you have an Internet connection to your home PC e Can automatically create web pages showing HomeVision Pro status e Can insert HomeVision Pro status and control objects into custom web pages you create The HomeVision Pro installation program will create a directory named HTML in the HomeVision application directory a
153. a burglar alarm but the alarm isn t responding properly If you left the controller running with the signal enabled the alarm might get armed or disarmed inadvertently Disabling it will prevent this problem until you get around to fixing it at which time you can enable it Using an enable disable command may be easier than If Then Else statements in the schedule EXAMPLE You re using an X 10 chime module to signal when motion sensors detect motion outside your front or back door But you don t want the chime constantly sounding when you re entertaining guests in the Party mode or when you re sleeping How can you prevent this You could change every location in the schedule where the chime module is commanded to chime You would need If Then statements that would chime if you re not in the Party mode or Sleep mode This could get awkward if there are several places in the schedule where you command the chime as you d need to put the If Then statement in each place An easier way is to add the command Disable Chime Module to the code that sets up the Party and Sleep modes Then whenever you enter one of these modes the chime module is effectively turned off You then simply need to issue the command Enable Chime Module when you leave these modes 64 Chapter 5 X 10 Power Failure Options When power is restored after a power failure many X 10 devices such as lights will remain off even if they were o
154. a command from the controller Assume the command Report Current Temperature causes the thermostat to respond with Temperature is 85 Here s how we strongly recommend reading this 1 Wherever you want to read the temperature enter the necessary command s In this example you would use this command Serial Transmit Report Current Temperature 2 Select Serial Data Input from the Object Events menu This opens the actions entry screen for the Serial Data Input event The actions entered here will be run each time a complete serial message is received 3 In the actions entry screen enter an If Then statement to check for the temperature reporting message then put the temperature into a variable If Serial Input Character Numbers 1 15 are Temperature is Then Put Value Of 2 Received Characters 16 17 Into Result Value Var 0 Current Temperature Result Value End If Here s how this works 1 The command is sent to the thermostat whenever you command it Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface 183 2 As the response comes in it gets saved to memory 3 When the response is complete the controller executes the actions you ve specified in the Serial Data Input event If the message is the temperature report the temperature is put into a variable 4 When the controller finishes the actions it clears the incoming message The controller is now ready to receive more serial input data either commands or user data Th
155. ack of elapsed time Once loaded with an initial value a timer can be started running counting down to zero You can specify a set of actions to perform when the timer goes off expires You can also use If Then statements to check whether a timer is currently running Another use for a timer is as a wait timer This is different from a delay discussed below waits are normally used for longer times than are delays The wait timer is discussed in detail in the Timers and Delays chapter Delays A delay is a command in an action list to briefly wait before proceeding When the controller encounters a delay command it simply waits the specified time before proceeding During this time it can still receive X 10 and IR signals but it will not immediately take action on them Instead the controller waits for the delay to end then performs any actions following the delay command When those actions are complete it will then handle any previously received X 10 or IR signals Delays should usually be limited to a few seconds or less Delays are discussed in detail in the Timers and Delays chapter Scheduled events periodic events timers and delays are covered in the following three chapters This chapter explains the time and date conditions that can be used in If Then statements Time And Date Conditions The following time and date conditions can be used in an lf Then or lIf Then Else statement From t
156. actions are written in the schedule immediately after the command that starts the timer You can quickly see what will happen when it expires Wait Timers can also be used multiple times in a schedule with different actions to be performed each time In contrast a Standard Timer will always perform the same actions each time it expires Whether this is an advantage or disadvantage depends on what you re trying to do In general a Standard Timer is probably more appropriate if e You need to perform a large number of actions when the timer expires or e You want to start the timer multiple places in your schedule and have the same effect each time it expires A Wait Timer is probably more appropriate if e You only need to perform a few actions when the timer expires or e You only start the timer in one place in your schedule or e You need to use the same timer for multiple purposes although with 255 timers available you probably won t ever be forced to do this Timer Commands The following timer commands can be included in a schedule They can all also be issued to the controller over the serial interface The format for sending commands over the serial interface is described in the Serial file installed in the HomeVision directory These commands are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the appropriate toolbar button The command and selected timer are chosen from the pull down list Load Timer
157. actions entry screen toolbar There is no Video conditions button If Video Mode Is Active Condition is true if the video mode is active false if it is not If Video Mode Is Not Active Condition is true if the video mode is not active false if it is active Notes On Using The Video System This section provides some pointers for using the video system Also refer to the files installed in the application directory for more information The How To file provides details on creating your own video screens e When the controller is displaying the built in video screens it redraws most of the screen on a regular basis every 10 20 milliseconds If you re displaying such a screen and then write text on it it will probably only appear for a split second After displaying it the built in screen will be redrawn erasing anything you wrote there are some areas on these screens that are not redrawn where you could conceivably write text without it being overwritten Therefore you should not try to add your own text to the built in screens e To display your own screen first display video screen 0 This is a blank screen that is not periodically updated Therefore anything you write will remain displayed until you overwrite it or clear the screen e If you want to display static text on your own screens you only need to write it to the screen once However if you want the screen to update things such as variable values or the cur
158. ag The timer value will remain the same as it was when power went out it is not changed Actions set to be performed when the timer expires will not be performed regardless of whether the timer should have expired during the power outage Since the timer value is not changed you could restart the timer or check its value in your own power failure recovery event e Stop amp Clear As with Stop the timer will be stopped by clearing the Running flag However this power failure setting will also reset the timer value to zero Actions set to be performed when the timer expires will not be performed regardless of whether the timer should have expired during the power outage e Stop If Ringing This setting will cause different actions depending on whether the timer should have expired during the power outage If the timer should have expired it will be stopped from running by clearing the Running flag and the current value will be set to zero Since the timer hasn t actually gone off yet the Ringing flag will also be cleared Therefore events set to be performed when the timer expires will not be performed If the timer did not expire during the power failure then no action is performed The timer continues running and will expire at the expected time similar to the No Change setting In summary Stop and Stop amp Clear always prevent the timer actions from being performed No Change
159. age 3 of the main video menu system or by commanding HomeVision Pro to display video screen 59 8 Command the controller to send the serial message you entered in Step 3 The PC software will display a status message along the bottom of the main screen as it reads in the file The data will be loaded into the weather variables and displayed on the weather conditions screen In addition variables 0 through 3 will be set to the values 252 253 254 and 255 respectively Specifications e Maximum object quantities X 10 modules 256 Flags 255 Variables 255 Timers 255 Macros 255 IR Signals 255 although there are tricks that allowing using more than this Scheduled Events 255 Periodic Events 255 Input Ports 8 or 16 more available with optional boards Output Ports 8 or 16 more available with optional boards Analog inputs 4 more available with optional boards Object names loaded into controller 512 names of 16 characters each Maximum schedule length Approximately 8000 lines with average line 5 bytes long Maximum macro length Limited only by maximum schedule length Learned IR signal memory Approximately 40 000 bytes This should be more than enough to hold 255 typical signals If Then and Macro nesting limit 15 levels Maximum ASCII string transmit length 255 bytes X 10 communications Signals supported All Receive buffer 32 signals Transmission Selectable to transmit on one
160. ail State fields used on many screens have pop up list boxes When you select these fields a downward pointing arrow will appear at the right side Click on this arrow to pop up the list Use the mouse or cursor keys to select an option from this list When you leave the field the arrow will disappear Editing Actions You can use Cut Copy Paste and Delete commands to act on ALL the actions for a given event To use them first select the Actions Defined field for the desired event Schedule event 3 Macro 6 etc For X 10 modules and input ports be sure to select the correct Actions Defined field i e On Actions or Off Actions for X 10 and High Actions or Low Actions for input ports Then click the right mouse button to bring up the editing menu and select the desired command Note that when you Paste actions to an event that already has actions the new actions are placed at the end of the list You can also use these commands on individual actions in the Actions Entry Screen described later Copying Actions Between Two Applications You can multiple copies of the software on your computer and copy actions from one to another This is useful if you want to incorporate portions of an example schedule into your schedule Copying between schedules is performed in the same manner as copying within a schedule It s important to note that_you will usually need to edit the actions after they are pasted into the schedule
161. aking it think daylight savings time is currently active This will not cause the clock to change time This should only be used by expert users who need to customize how daylight savings time acts Daylight Savings Time Mode This command causes the controller to set its internal variable making it think daylight savings time is currently not active Disable Serial Thermostat Polling This command causes the controller to stop polling of serial thermostats This should only be used by expert users who want to communicate with the thermostats themselves and need to temporarily stop Home Vision Pro s polling to prevent interference Enable Serial Thermostat Polling This command causes the controller to start polling of serial thermostats Exit From All Actions Now This command causes the controller to immediately stop performing the remaining actions for the event scheduled event macro timer event etc When the controller reaches this action in your schedule it will immediately exit the event scheduled event macro timer event etc as well as any event that called it Here are some examples of how it works Assume the following code is placed in a scheduled event X 10 Al Hall light Force On Do macro 1 Bedroom light once X 10 A3 Kitchen light Force On Controller command Exit from all actions now X 10 A4 Porch light Force On Assume macro 1 contains the following code X 10 A2 Bedroom light Force On Whe
162. al Terminal Block Device The eight controller outputs are connected to the eight inputs of the latch Also the ground of the external circuit must be connected to the controller s ground When the controller is outputting a high logic 1 signal the voltage will be a minimum of 4 8V When outputting a low the voltage will be a maximum of 1V These levels are compatible with both CMOS and TTL circuits and can be read by the 74HC373 or almost any other digital integrated circuit Using Port C As An Input Port When used as an input port Port C interprets the voltage at the terminal block based on the following levels Voltage gt 3 5 V is read as a high 1 Voltage lt 1 5 V is read as a low 0 Voltages between 1 5 and 3 5 are indeterminate and may be read as a high or low and should therefore not be used Voltages gt 6 V or less than 0 V i e negative voltages exceed the maximum rating of the PCF8574 integrated circuit and should not be applied If you have inputs that can exceed this range connect them to Port B which can withstand up to 30V An open input will be pulled up by the PCF8574 and read as a high 1 This facilitates the use of switch closure inputs that are either closed or opened However external devices can easily 108 Chapter 12 Input and Output Ports override the pull up when they drive the port low or high Thus Port C will work with standard digital inputs as well as switch closure inputs W
163. al Screen Offset To Set Vertical Screen Offset To These commands shift the location of the On Screen Display on your television screen They are preset to the values that work for most televisions we ve tested However if the screen is off center on your TV you can adjust the location with these commands Both offsets can range in value from 0 to 31 Zeros put the OSD in the upper left corner of the screen On most televisions this will put the upper left corner of the OSD slightly out of the picture Increasing the horizontal value shifts the OSD to the right Increasing the vertical value shifts the OSD down Values near 30 will usually shift the OSD completely off the screen While this command is normally used only to center the OSD it can serve other uses For example by executing commands in succession to increase the offset the display can be made to roll off the screen either down or to the right Video Control Commands Display Video Screen Each of the built in screens has its own number You can use this command to directly display any of these screens without going through the menu system The built in screens are numbered starting at 1 Video screen number 0 is a blank screen that you can use to create your own screen Any time you want to make your own screen you should first use this command to select video screen 0 You can then use the other commands to display text on it We are regularly adding new v
164. al operation all sensors are connected to the S position The DTS switch is closed so that the sensors are connected to the controller circuitry e When you need to read the address of another sensor connect it to the A position Open the DTS switch to disconnect the other sensors leaving only the sensor in the A position connected Read its address When complete move the new sensor to the S position and close the DTS switch In this way you do not have to disconnect the existing sensors However it is OK to use both the S and A positions for normal operation if you prefer Software Configuration To configure these sensors use the Digital Temperature Sensor Configuration Screen located under the Configure menu To add sensors click the Add Sensor button Each sensor is uniquely identified by an 8 byte address You have to enter each sensor s address in the sensor table If you do not know the address you can read it from the sensor Check the Enable automatic sensor reading option so the controller will automatically read the sensors Reading A Sensor Address To read a sensor s address 1 Connect it to either the A or S position e If using the A position remove any other sensors that are connected to the A position Place the DTS switch in the open position to disconnect any sensors connected to the S position e If using the S position place the DTS s
165. al port 1 transmits the data will go to the serial port 1 connector The dashed line between the circled numbers 4 and 17 show that in order to receive data from the serial port 1 connector a jumper must be placed across pins 4 and 17 of the configuration header The Table 16 1 provides another way of understanding the serial port configuration For each port it shows the possible connection points and where jumpers must be installed Table 16 1 Serial Port Connection Options tort connecrionrowr Jumpers nomes PORT CONNECTION POINT JUMPERS NOTES main port connector connector Jumper required for receiving data Can only be used if serial port 3 is not using main port 19 to 20 USB mode Add on header port B 1 to 20 Reserved for future product that connects to main port 3 to 4 headers Port 3 Serial 3 9 pin male 6 to 7 Serial port 3 always transmits RS 232 data connector or terminal block out this connector and terminal block Jumper for RS 232 mode required for receiving data Port 3 Serial 3 terminal block for 6 to 15 Serial port 3 always transmits RS 485 data RS 485 mode out this terminal block Jumper required for receiving data 3 Can only be used if serial port 1 is not using 18 re 19 USB mode 2 4 Serial 4 9 pin male 8 to 13 Jumpers required for both receiving and connector or terminal block 11 to 12 transmitting data for RS 232 mode Port 4 Serial 4 terminal block for 13 to 14
166. al temperature sensor 67 Setwhen digital temperature sensorreadfails o Set if expansion board 2 part U19 is not responding Set if expansion board 1 doesn t respond to IR zone command 128 80 _ Set when an invalid phone command is encountered in your schedule 134 86 _ Set when an invalid memory access command is encountered in your schedule 137 89 Notused s O 141 8D_ Setwhen a security system does not respond to HomeVision Pro over the serial port 144 90 Set when a Sylva 8081 485 board does not respond over the serialport_ 145 91 Set when a Sylva 8081 485 board sends a Negative Acknowledgement message to HomeVision Pro over the serial port Set if expansion board 2 doesn t respond to IR zone command Set when an illegal Sylva I O board number command is encountered in your schedule A C 4 Setwhen an illegal thermostat condition type is encountered in your schedule Set if digital temperature sensor read fails and temperature conversion never completed probably wrong device address A l C 68 69 6B 6D f igi igi T 5 7 E F 0 1 2 3 Set if invalid data is found in RAM reload your schedule 5 6 7 8 9 B Set if expansion board 2 part U18 is not responding Set if invalid data is found in RAM reload your schedule Set when an invalid weather command is encountered in your schedule Chapter 28 Trouble Shooting 301 CHAPTER 28 TROUBLE
167. all of applies equally to Home Vision Pro On Line Help The help file provides some context sensitive help information From any screen in the PC software press F1 the function 1 key or select the help menu However the help file was written for HomeVision not HomevVision Pro and is somewhat out of date Please refer to this manual and any new documentation installed in your PC s HomevVision directory for the complete Home Vision Pro documentation Controller Operation Overview To help you understand how the controller operates we first need to introduce some terms The three most important are EVENTS ACTIONS and OBJECTS The controller s operation can be summarized as EVENTS occur which trigger ACTIONS which can change OBJECTS EVENTS can be any of the following An X 10 signal is received An infrared signal is received An input port changes state A command is received over the serial interface usually from a PC A specified time is reached i e it s 7 00PM on a Friday A timer has gone off expired The controller recovers from a power failure A phone call is received containing caller ID information Chapter 1__ Introduction 3 The touch tone signal is received from a telephone when using HomeVision Phone And others OBJECTS are items which are can be changed or controlled and include X 10 Modules Flags Variables Timers Input Ports Output Ports Analog Inputs Digital Temperature Sensors In
168. ame value as a group e Can be incremented or decremented e Can be used to perform math functions addition subtraction multiplication and division e Can be used as pointers to other variables e Can be used to store data such as time date X 10 signal ID etc e Can be combined to form 16 bit or longer variables e Can be used as conditions in If Then or If Then Else statements e Can be viewed and changed from the video screen system Can be set to predetermined states in the event of a power failure e Can be read and changed from the serial interface e 255 variables are available Note that in addition to these variables there are a variety of system variables These system variables hold specific information such as thermostat settings and weather data You can transfer data between these variables using several different commands Using Variables Before using a variable create it from the variable summary screen Variables are 8 bit integer values that can range from 0 to 255 You can change variables perform simple math functions on them and check their value They can be used for a variety of purposes including e Counting the number of times an event occurs a motion sensor detects motion a door opens an alarm goes off a power failure occurs etc Although a single variable can only count up to 255 it s quite easy to obtain higher counts using multiple variables The controller provides built in command
169. ample if your remote has a cable box function that you re not using its keys could be configured as command inputs If your remote can transmit standard signals you can use the same signals i e remote buttons as used to control the video screen system if you want However the functions of the signals then depends on whether the video screen is active If the video screen system is active when these signals are received they will be used to navigate through the video system Actions you ve defined to be performed when these signals are received will not be performed If the video screen system is not active when these signals are received the actions you ve defined to be performed when these signals are received will be performed 150 Chapter 14 Infrared Control Normal Method Using IR Signal Summary Screen Following is the way most users will set this up It requires adding each IR signal to the IR signal summary screen An alternative method is described later that avoids the limit of 255 IR signals on this screen If your remote can transmit standard signals here s how to set this up 1 Configure your remote to transmit standard format signals Refer to the section Configuring A Preprogrammed Remote to do this 2 Verify your remote is properly transmitting standard format signals Refer to the section Testing A Preprogrammed Remote to do this 3 Record the Device and Key Codes for ea
170. and 39 28 Massachusetts 42 35 Massachusetts 42 08 Massachusetts 42 37 Massachusetts 41 70 Massachusetts 42 20 Massachusetts 42 70 Massachusetts 42 63 Massachusetts 41 63 DIDIOIOIOl olol S S S S S 5 35 5 D B 9 9 G 9 S f a C 4 Appendix C Latitudes and Longitudes State Province Latitude Longitude Massachusetts 42 45 Massachusetts 42 38 Massachusetts 42 10 Massachusetts 42 27 Mexico 19 43 Michigan 42 28 Michigan 42 32 Michigan 43 60 Michigan 42 33 Michigan Michigan aN wo O N Michigan 42 25 84 40 42 28 85 58 42 73 84 55 Michigan 43 43 83 93 Michigan Michigan Minnesota 46 78 44 98 44 02 45 57 44 95 30 40 30 37 32 30 31 57 38 95 37 08 39 77 38 63 37 22 45 78 Minnesota Minnesota Minnesota Mississippi Mississippi Mississippi Mississippi Missouri Missouri Missouri Missouri Missouri Missouri Montana Montana Montana Montana Montana N W Territories N W Territories Nebraska Nebraska Nevada Nevada Nevada New Brunswick New Brunswick New Brunswick St Cloud Minnesota 46 02 47 50 48 55 46 60 82 50 62 45 40 82 39 17 36 17 39 52 45 97 45 27 A A oO amp O N O N oa N Appendix C _ Latitudes and Longitudes C 5 State Province Latitude Longitude New Hampshire 43 20 New Hampshire 42 98 New Hampshire 43 08 New Jersey 39 37 New Jersey New Jersey New Jersey New Jersey New Jersey New Jersey New Mexico New Mexic
171. and if you absolutely need to We also suggest that if you do you also include comments in your schedule to explain what each signal is Otherwise you may have a hard time understanding it later Disable IR Signal Transmit Mode The transmit capability of each infrared signal can be individually enabled and disabled When disabled commands in the schedule to transmit the signal will be ignored You would normally enable or disable a signal from the IR summary screen However you can also do it from a command in the schedule This command will disable the specified signal Enable IR Signal Transmit Mode This command will enable transmission of the specified signal It does not actually transmit a signal See the discussion of the preceding command for more information Disable IR Signal Receive Mode The controller can be configured to automatically perform a set of actions when a specific infrared signal is received To do this you must first enter the actions you want to perform then enable the receive mode When the receive mode is disabled the specified infrared signal cannot be received and the actions will therefore not be performed You would normally enable or disable signal reception from the IR summary screen However you can also do it from a command in the schedule This command will disable receiving of the specified signal Enable IR Signal Receive Mode This command will enable reception of the specified signal and allow
172. and obtain its checksum before you transmit out another port You don t have to worry about HomeVision Pro automatically transmitting data out a serial port as they won t be added to the checksum The checksum is an 8 bit value and is therefore limited to the range of 0 to 255 If the sum exceeds 255 only the lower 8 bits are kept In effect the total sum is divided by 256 and the remainder is the checksum The checksum is calculated by summing the raw binary values of the transmitted data For example the capital letter A has a value of 65 and the number 1 has a value of 49 See Appendix B for a table of the values of the standard ASCII characters As an example assume you transmit ABC 123 followed by a carriage return and line feed Here are the values that will be summed up FQOWNHOQAWD mj o 65 decimal 41 hex 66 decimal 42 hex 67 decimal 43 hex 49 decimal 31 hex 50 decimal 32 hex 51 decimal 33 hex 13 decimal 0D hex 10 decimal 0A hex The total sum is 371 decimal 173 hex The checksum value is 115 decimal 73 hex Thus the Put Transmit Checksum Value Into Result Value command will put the value of 115 into Result Value Serial Receive Commands These commands are used to read serial data from external devices They can be used with any of the available serial ports Put Number Of Characters Received Into Result Value This command determines the number of serial charact
173. any defined actions to be performed See the discussion of the preceding command for more information 158 Chapter 14 Infrared Control Select IR Transmit Zones This command selects enables the specified infrared transmit zones This command is only available if you have a multifunction expansion board with IR zoning capability attached to the controller When you enter this command in a schedule you can select any or all of the 8 IR zones After this command is run subsequent infrared transmissions from the controller will only be output on the selected zones of the expansion board You can use this command at any place in your schedule to change the selected zones Notes When the controller restarts after a power failure it defaults to making all 8 zones active This command does not affect the IR transmitter built into the main controller It always transmits regardless of which zones are active IR Signal Conditions There are no infrared signal conditions that can be checked by an If Then or If Then Else statement Chapter 15 Controller Functions 159 CHAPTER 15 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS Introduction The controller has many operating modes and functions You can change these at any time using a variety of means including e With a command in your schedule e Through the Controller Commands screen in the PC software e By enabling and disabling functions with the Controller Settings configuration sc
174. are several important factors to note about this capability e The first character of the incoming data for serial port 1 CANNOT BE A COMMA A comma is used as the first character of the controller s commands Any incoming data beginning with a comma may be improperly interpreted as a command This limitation does not apply to serial ports 3 and 4 they may begin messages with a comma e The first character of the incoming data for serial port 1 CANNOT BE THE BINARY CHARACTER DC1 ASCII VALUE 17 OR DC3 ASCII VALUE 19 These characters are used for serial interface handshaking using the XOn XOff protocol and could interfere with communications As long as the serial device the controller is communicating with is using ASCII format this will not be a problem as binary data won t be used This limitation does not apply to serial ports 3 and 4 those ports do not use XOn XOff handshaking 180 Chapter 16__ Serial Interface Up to 254 characters can be included in a single data string for serial port 1 For ports 3 and 4 the limit is 64 characters If more data is received before the previous message is processed and the buffer overflows the newest data could be lost Ports 3 and 4 have an option to receive binary data When disabled the data should not contain binary values of zero or 255 Also the ports will ignore any line feeds they receive this is done to simplify receiving ASCII transmissions that end with a carriag
175. ariable XXX 94 Chapter 11 _ Variables Subtracts the value of variable XXX from the constant value As noted above negative numbers cannot be stored and will be converted to within the range of 0 to 255 Variable XXX Variable XXX Variable YYY Subtracts the value of variable YYY from variable XXX As noted previously negative numbers cannot be stored and will be converted to within the range of 0 to 255 Variable XXX Variable XXX 2 NOTE This command is provided for backwards compatibility with previous versions The next two commands are more powerful for performing multiplication This command multiplies variable XXX by two If the initial value is gt 128d 01111111b the result will be truncated to an 8 bit value See the examples below shown in decimal hexadecimal and binary formats INITIAL VALUE FINAL VALUE 1d O1h 00000001b 2d 02h 00000010b 127d 7Fh 01111111b 254d FEh 11111110b 128d 80h 10000000b od 00h 00000000b 129d 81h 10000001b 2d 02h 00000010b 255d FFh 11111111b 254d FEh 11111110b Variable XXX Variable XXX x Multiplies variable XXX by the constant value and puts the result in variable XXX can be any integer between 0 and 255 inclusive Variables are 8 bits long and can only go as high as 255 If the result exceeds 255 only the lower 8 bits will be kept Therefore
176. ariable Conditions The following variable conditions can be checked by an If Then or If Then Else statement If Variable XXX If Variable XXX lt gt If Variable XXX lt If Variable XXX lt If Variable XXX gt If Variable XXX gt These six conditions compare the specified variable to the constant value If Variable XXX Variable Yyy If Variable XXX lt gt Variable YYY If Variable XXX lt Variable YYY If Variable XXX lt Variable Yyy If Variable XXX gt Variable Yyy If Variable XXX gt Variable Yyy These six conditions compare one variable to another If Variable XXX Bit 0 Is Set 1 If Variable XXX Bit 1 Is Set 1 If Variable XXX Bit 2 Is Set 1 If Variable XXX Bit 3 Is Set 1 If Variable XXX Bit 4 Is Set 1 If Variable XXX Bit 5 Is Set 1 If Variable XXX Bit 6 Is Set T If Variable XXX Bit 7 Is Set 1 100 Chapter 11 _ Variables These eight conditions check to determine if the specified bit is set has a value of one Variables are stored as 8 bit numbers ranging from 0 to 255 Bit 0 is the least significant bit LSB and bit 7 is the most significant bit MSB Here are some examples If the variable Od O0000000b no bits are set If the variable 1d 00000001b only bit 0 is set If the variable 7d 000001
177. art Video Menu System 3 Performing these commands in your schedule Initialize For Internal Video Mode Display Screen The first two methods both start the video screen system and display page 1 of the main menu The third method displays the selected screen This is useful when you need to display a certain screen and don t want to make the user have to navigate through the menu system to reach it Regardless of how you start the video system you can always use your remote to navigate around Stopping The Video System There are three ways to stop displaying screens 1 Many of the built in video screens allow you to shut the system off Some screens have this option on the menu and you simply press the corresponding button on your remote Other screens use the Channel Down button to exit 2 Remove power from the controller then re apply power 3 Use the Stop Video Mode command in your schedule If you desire you can prevent the user from turning the video system off To do so select this option from the Controller Settings screen When this option is selected e Ifthe user tries to exit the video menu system using an IR remote the command is ignored and the screen remains unchanged e When learning an infrared signal the video system will be temporarily shut off When learning is complete it will be restarted e When power is restored to the controller it automatically starts the video menu system You do not need t
178. at is already in the desired state will have no effect However the transmission could interfere with other devices in your house that might be transmitting at the same time To reduce this possibility it s best to minimize the number of transmissions you send over the power lines One problem with these commands can occur if the controller cannot properly track the module states For example standard X 10 wall switches allow manual control of their lights However when you manually change them no X 10 signal is sent out from the switch Therefore the controller will not know that the light has changed Its internal state table will be incorrect causing these commands to work improperly For example assume that a light is off and the controller has correctly kept track of it You then manually turn the light on at the wall switch which the controller is unaware of Assume now that your schedule executes an Off command for this light The controller thinks the light is already off and therefore does not send the OFF command The light stays on Because of this potential problem these commands are best used for X 10 modules that aren t normally controlled manually As long as the controller can keep track of the state these commands will work properly and minimize the number of X 10 transmissions For modules that are controlled manually the next group of commands is more appropriate 2 The second group contains the same basic commands as
179. at of this command and the serial data response Put timer value into 4 variables This command takes the current value of the specified timer and puts it into four variables You must use four consecutive variables in this order e Centiseconds hundredths of seconds e Seconds e Minutes Chapter9 Timers and Delays 83 Hours For example if you select variable 5 as the first variable the centiseconds value will go in variable 5 the seconds will go in variable 6 the minutes will go in variable 7 and the hours will go in variable 8 Load timer with value from 4 variables This command loads the timer with the values of the four specified variables This command does not start the timer Use the Resume Timer command after this command to start it As with the previous command you must use four consecutive variables in this order Centiseconds hundredths of seconds Seconds Minutes Hours The centisecond second and minute values must be within the allowable ranges as follows e Centiseconds 0 to 99 e Seconds 0 to 59 e Minutes 0 to 59 If a variable contains an invalid value the timer may or may not run properly Timer Conditions The following timer conditions can be checked by an If Then or If Then Else statement LE TE If If EE If Timer XXX Is Running This condition will be true if the timer is running It will be false if the timer is ringing or stopped Timer XXX
180. at transmit their state when changed manually allowing the controller to track the state However the transmissions from these devices can interfere with other X 10 signals degrading overall reliability Therefore use of these two way devices is discouraged Many lights modules can be dimmed all the way down to zero This is not the same as turning it off A light that is on at level 0 will respond to brighten commands by brightening one step at a time Most lights that are off will go to full brightness when they receive a brighten command There are many newer X 10 compatible lighting control modules available that can be directly set to any desired level without first going to full brightness These are recommended for use whenever possible X 10 Event Triggers The controller can be set up to automatically perform a set of actions when a specified X 10 signal is received but not when HomeVision Pro transmits Any ON or OFF signal from any of the 256 X 10 codes can easily be used as a trigger To set this up from the PC software e Open the X 10 Modules screen under the Objects Events menu e Select the module house code and unit code that you want to trigger the action e Double click on the On Actions Defined or Off Actions Defined field depending on which signal ON or OFF you want The actions entry screen will appear e Enter the actions and conditions then click OK You ll return to the X 10 summa
181. ata RD 3 Transmit Data TD 4 Data Terminal Ready DTR 5 Ground 6 Data Set Ready DSR 7 Request To Send RTS 8 Clear To Send CTS 9 Not Used Pins 7 RTS and 8 CTS are connected together Pins 1 CD 4 DTR and 6 DSR are connected together 172 Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface A standard straight through serial cable is designed to connect a DTE device like this port or a computer port to a Data Communicating Equipment DCE device like a modem LCD display caller ID device etc Most devices are designed as DCE meaning you can connect them to port 3 with a standard serial cable If you want to connect this port to another DTE device like a computer you will need to use a null modem cable or a standard cable with a null modem adapter Note that this connector is the opposite of the main HomeVision Pro serial port 1 which is a DCE connector If you want to connect HomeVision Pro to both a PC and other devices we suggest you connect the port 1 to the PC and port 3 or 4 to other devices RS 232 Terminal Block The terminal block provides access to the three primary serial lines Transmit Receive and Ground This makes it easy to connect a homemade cable This obviously won t connect the other serial lines but most devices don t use these anyway If your device does require these other lines you must use the 9 pin connector Note that it is possible to use both
182. brighten commands are not needed with PCS modules This enables lights to be quickly set to any level The controller will not adjust the level in its internal state table for PCS modules when this command is used Since these modules can be directly set to any level there s generally no need for this feature If you need to track the level use a variable Micro Dim PCS Light 1 Level 1 2 PCS lighting modules support a micro dim command that decreases the brightness in steps of approximately 1 2 This command is implemented with the X 10 Hail Request command The controller will not adjust the level in its internal state table for PCS modules when this command is used Since these modules can be directly set to any level there s generally no need for this feature If you need to track the level use a variable Micro Brighten PCS Light 1 Level 1 2 PCS lighting modules support a micro brighten command that increases the brightness in steps of approximately 1 2 This command is implemented with the X 10 Hail Acknowledge command The controller will not adjust the level in its internal state table for PCS modules when this command is used Since these modules can be directly set to any level there s generally no need for this feature If you need to track the level use a variable Put Current Level Into Variable This command puts the X 10 module s current light setting into the specified variable If the light is
183. c area code If HomeVision Pro is configured to display a formatted number your condition must include the same formatting In other words you must include the dashes like this If Caller s Phone Number is 123 456 7890 Then If you re not displaying formatted numbers most likely only international users would not use a formatted display then enter just the digits You can enter a question mark as a wild card character This will match any digit For example the following condition will be true for any number where the last four digits are 7890 although we can t think of any reason to do this If Caller s Phone Number is 7890 Then Chapter 19 Thermostats 213 CHAPTER 19 THERMOSTATS Introduction The controller provides extensive capabilities to control and monitor multiple thermostats The key features include TV screens to control and view status of two HVAC zones e Automatic control of two zones to custom time temperature schedules At the specified times the controller sends commands to the thermostat s to change to the new temperature setting Capabilities include Schedules can contain 8 times temperatures per day for three different days Monday Friday Saturday and Sunday There are separate schedules for Heat Cool and Auto modes You can modify the schedules from your TV or PC e Commands you can include in your schedule to directly control each zone up t
184. capabilities Up to 16 screens of any text you want For each screen you can define actions for 15 different infrared remote buttons The 10 number keys Channel up and down Volume up and down Enter Allowable actions for each remote button are to Run a macro Display another custom menu screen Display a built in screen Exit the video menu system Can display custom screens that you create in your schedule by using commands to write text to the screen You can display variable values timer values the current time etc You can watch the values change in real time Can display RAM video screens which can store text received over the serial interface and display it at a later time These are primarily for use with other PC software programs that can obtain information like stock quotes weather reports etc and send it to HomeVision Pro for later viewing A text storage buffer that can store any text received from the serial interface regardless of data format and later display all or any part of it on a video screen Screens are 11 rows of 24 characters each actually the controller can generate 12 rows but most televisions can only display 11 Each row can be individually set to one of 4 character sizes Individual characters can be made to blink Three different blink rates are available Text can be displayed over solid background or overlaid on top of incoming video When a solid background is used yo
185. ce is described in the Serial file installed in the HomeVision directory Thermostat Variable Zone X Current Temperature Variable There are actually 16 of these commands one for each available HVAC zone replace the X with the desired zone These commands set the Current Temperature variable for the specified zone to the value of variable Variable is any variable that you ve created in your schedule These commands are useful if you have a way to determine the current temperature using variables perhaps by reading an analog sensor and want it to appear on the TV Thermostat Control Screens Variable Thermostat Variable Zone X Current Temperature There are actually 16 of these commands one for each available HVAC zone replace the X with the desired zone These commands set variable to the Current Temperature value for the specified zone Variable is any variable that you ve created in your schedule Once the temperature value is in the variable you can do anything you want with it Here s an example of how this command might be used Assume you have an RCS TX10 B thermostat controlling HVAC zone 1 The controller can automatically request the current temperature from this thermostat and it will put it in the system variable Zone 1 Current Temperature This temperature will then be displayed on the TV Thermostat Control Screen To do other things with it you can use this command to put the t
186. ch signal 4 Use the IR signal summary screen under the Objects Events menu to enter the Device and Key Codes for each signal You can also enter whatever actions you want performed when that IR signal is received Refer to the section Entering IR Signal Actions for details on how to do this 5 Load the new schedule into the controller You can now use your remote to command the controller to perform the specified actions If your remote doesn t transmit standard signals you must set HomeVision Pro up to recognize learned signals Here s how to set this up 1 Refer to the previous section Controller Setup For Receiving Learned IR Signals to enable this capability 2 Learn the IR signals as described in Learning Infrared Signals for Transmission 3 Use the IR signal summary screen under the Objects Events menu to enter whatever actions you want performed when that IR signal is received Refer to the section Entering IR Signal Actions for details on how to do this 4 Load the new schedule into the controller You can now use your remote to command the controller to perform the specified actions Alternate Method Receive Any Standard IR Signal The method shown above is limited by the maximum of 255 IR signals that HomeVision supports This alternate method allows you to create a periodic event that can detect when any of the 65 536 possible standard IR signals is received You ca
187. chedule Set the event s rate to every 1 minute and include the following commands in it Serial transmit AT Serial transmit Carriage return and line feed When the modem receives this command it will determine the baud rate it was received at It will then use the same baud rate when transmitting data to the controller This command must be sent periodically so that if the modem s power is lost it is reset properly when it comes back If you choose this option we recommend you set the controller to 19 200 baud Chapter 27 Miscellaneous 287 This may seem like a complex process but it s necessary if you want to communicate faster than 2400 baud Making a Remote Connection Follow this procedure whenever you want to connect to the controller from a computer at a different site Start the HomeVision Pro software Open the serial interface configuration screen Select the Thru Modem option button and click the Setup Dial button Select the com port your local modem is connected to Type the phone number where the controller is located into the phone number text box Select the desired speaker and volume settings for the local modem Check the Enable Pulse Dialing checkbox if your local phone does not support tone dialing If you need to send any additional commands to your local modem type them in the provided text box This will normally not be necessary Click the Dial button Status is shown as the software makes th
188. ches that allow each pull up resistor to be disconnected see the Miscellaneous chapter for details on these switches Here are some devices that can be connected to this port Magnetic switches used in alarm systems Motion sensors Glass break detectors Smoke alarms some types Water level detectors Radon detectors some types Push button switches Thermal switches Thermostats isolated TV on off sensors Any other switch or relay Voltage sources Port B Description Input Port B connections are provided on terminal blocks located along the top side of the board There are eight connection points one for each of the eight inputs 5V and ground positions are also provided to power external devices up to 100mA of current There are many types of equipment with outputs that are simple switches or relays When the switch or relay is closed an electrical circuit path is made across it When opened there is no circuit path Wires connected to these outputs can be connected to the inputs of Port B These devices are connected to Port B by attaching one wire to the desired input port and the other to one of the ground points Devices that output a voltage can also be connected to Port B Port B Electrical Characteristics The Port B inputs interface to an industry standard DS1489 or equivalent integrated circuit which has the following electrical characteristics Absolute Maximum Ratings Maximum Input Voltage 30 VDC AC vol
189. cify three parameters e The byte number to begin transmitting from This can range from 1 up to the size of the data log a maximum of 65 535 The number of lines of data to transmit This can range from 1 to 65 535 e The number of bytes to transmit in each line of text The total number of data bytes transmitted will be this figure multiplied by the number of bytes per line The controller will put a line feed and carriage return at the end of each line If you request data that extends beyond the end of the data log the controller will transmit data from the corresponding locations in RAM This data will be meaningless so it s up to you to determine the proper number of lines to transmit You can do this by first reading the data log pointer which will indicate the number of bytes used in the data log Chapter 22 Data Logging 241 Transmit Partial Data Log In Binary Format This command is similar to the previous command except that each data log byte is transmitted as a single binary value ranging from Od to 255d No spaces are placed between the bytes Also there is no carriage return or line feed at the end of the line Thus all the bytes are transmitted back to back Data Logging Conditions The data logging conditions described below can be checked by an If Then or If Then Else statement They are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the Other toolbar button then selecting Data Log f
190. ckly test them to verify they work You may then want to put the same scene creation commands into a macro in your schedule allowing you to easily recreate the scenes in case they get lost Many X 10 devices will lose their scene settings after a power failure so you may want the Power Failure Recovery Event to run the macro that sets the scenes again Unfortunately X 10 and Leviton implement scenes differently and not even all Leviton devices work the same way You may have to do some experimenting to figure out if and how your devices support scenes For example the X 10 approach is limited to four scenes per house code while the Leviton approach can have up to 64 Creating Scenes To create scenes open the X 10 control screen in the PC software The HomeVision Pro controller must be connected to the PC You will use the following two custom commands located near the bottom of the custom command list box 1 Include in scene at level XX of 63 for X 10 brand devices re in scene at current level for Leviton brand devices 2 Remove from X 10 scene for X 10 brand devices Reeve from Leviton scene for Leviton brand devices Note that the light levels for both X 10 and Leviton devices range from 0 to 63 This is consistent with the Set directly to level command that these modules also respond to 46 Chapter 5 X 10 Also note that it is possible to use these commands in your schedule This is useful for X 10 de
191. controller s event log Whenever an enabled port changes it will be written to the log as shown in these examples Input Port B 1 changed to high Input Port B 5 changed to low Disable Input Port Log Mode This command disables automatic logging of input port changes to the controller s event log Enable Scheduled Event Log Mode This command enables automatic logging of scheduled events to the controller s event log Whenever a scheduled event occurs the event name will be written to the log as shown in these examples Sch Ev Porch Light On Sch Ev Garage Light Off Disable Scheduled Event Log Mode This command disables automatic logging of scheduled events to the controller s event log Enable Thermostat Log Mode This command enables automatic logging of scheduled thermostat changes to the controller s event log Whenever a scheduled thermostat temperature change occurs it will be written to the log as shown in these examples Set zone 1 temp to 75 Set zone 2 temp to 71 Disable Thermostat Log Mode This command disables automatic logging of scheduled thermostat changes to the controller s event log Chapter 15 Controller Functions 163 Enable Caller ID Log Mode This command enables automatic logging of received phone calls to the controller s event log Whenever a phone call is received caller ID information will be written to the log as shown in this example Phone call from John Doe 407 555 1234 Disabl
192. custom screens The basic approach is to use a variable to keep track of what screen you re displaying In the received infrared signal event for each button you check the variable to see if you re displaying a RAM video screen If you are you then take the desired action switch to another RAM screen display a built in screen shut the video system off etc Refer to the How To file for details on creating and navigating your own screens Writing Text To RAM Video Screens There are two ways to get text into the RAM video screens from a PC 1 By sending commands to the controller over the serial interface usually from a computer The commands to write the text are detailed in the Serial Protocol file which describes all the serial commands This capability is intended to allow computer programs to send text to Home Vision Pro for viewing later There are no programs yet available that use this capability However you may write your own programs that do so 2 By reading a text file that s on a computer and transmitting it to the controller You can initiate this action in your schedule by sending a serial command to the computer The computer which must be running the HomeVision Pro software will then read the text file into the desired RAM video screen The second method is detailed below To read a text file into a controller RAM video screen enter a serial interface command in your schedule to transmit the following ASCII text
193. d Seconds Minutes Hours Clear Transmit Checksum Value Put Transmit Checksum Value Into Result Value These two commands allow calculating a checksum value on data transmitted out a serial port These may be useful if you need HomeVision Pro to communicate with external devices that require a checksum HomeVision Pro automatically calculates a running checksum on all data you send out a serial port using one of the serial port commands If you need to calculate a checksum on the data you transmit you would first use the Clear Transmit Checksum Value prior to starting the transmission This resets the checksum value to zero You would then transmit the data that must be checksummed The controller will automatically calculate a running checksum on the data After you ve finished transmitting the data use the Put Transmit Checksum Value Into Result Value command As the name implies this will put the value of the checksum into the system variable Result Value You can then use a variable command to put Result Value into one of your own variables at which point you can do anything you like with it Most commonly you would transmit this value either as a single binary character or two hex characters Note several things about the checksum process Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface 189 The controller maintains a single checksum value there is not one for each serial port Therefore you must send all the data for a port
194. d the controller s status also shows 70 Then someone manually changes the thermostat setpoint to 71 Then before the controller has read the new setpoint you send the X 10 command from your bed to raise the temperature The controller will think the current setting is 70 add 1 to it and send a command to set the thermostat to 71 Since the thermostat is already at 71 it doesn t change This error usually isn t too serious though since you can press the button again a few minutes later when you realize it hasn t warmed up The RCS TX10 B thermostat has a command that raises or lowers the setpoint 1 degree Since the TX10 B always knows what its setting is you may prefer using this command instead of the previously described built in method However the controller does not directly implement this RCS command Instead you have to do it with X 10 Preset Dim signals Refer to the RCS documentation on the X 10 signals for details on doing this Set Zone 1 to Currently Scheduled Temperature Set Zone 2 to Currently Scheduled Temperature The controller sets the thermostat to the temperature specified in the time temperature schedule for the zone s current HVAC system mode Heat Cool or Auto It also updates its internal system variable Temperature Setting for the specified zone to reflect the setting If the system mode is Off no action is performed since there is no time temperature schedule for the Off mode These commands are only work
195. ddRowColor gt schedule name etc Infrared signals Digital temperature sensors lt HV TABLE DigitalSensor HeadColor EvenRowColor OddRowColor gt Chapter 26 _Web Server 271 Using Tags That Perform Actions You can also use your web page to control HomeVision Pro Your web page sends commands to the HomeVision Pro server which then sends them to the Home Vision Pro controller via the PC s serial port To do this you add an HTML form to your web page and post it to the HomeVision Pro server The form element name usually defines the action to perform although the value field can be used in some cases You can have as many forms as you want on a page As an example here s the HTML code to display a button that when clicked will command Home Vision Pro to send the X 10 signal A1 Off lt form method POST gt lt input type submit name X10 Al Off value Bedroom light off gt lt form gt The name field indicates this is an X 10 command for address A1 and that an OFF signal should be sent The type field named submit tells the browser to display a button The value field indicates the button label text that is displayed this can be anything you want You can also use a text box to enter a value Here s the HTML code to display a text box for changing the value of a HomeVision Pro variable lt form method POST gt lt input type text
196. defined actions to be performed automatically when the port goes high this is known as a High Trigger This command disables this trigger preventing the actions from being performed All other aspects of the input port continue to function normally The controller will continue to check for changes in the input and you can still use the state of the port as a condition in an If Then statement This command has the same effect as if you had disabled the trigger from the PC input port summary screen before loading the schedule Either way the port works normally except that it won t automatically perform any actions you may have defined Use the command Enable Input Port High Trigger to re enable it Enable Input Port High Trigger If you have defined actions to be performed automatically when the port goes high this is known as a High Trigger This command enables this trigger allowing the actions to be performed Advanced Input Port Commands Read Input Port State Into Result Value This command takes different actions depending on whether it is executed in a schedule or commanded over the serial interface e Ina schedule it puts the current state of the port a single line into the system variable Result Value After reading the value into Result Value you can transfer it to a variable use it as a condition in an If Then statement or transmit it over the serial interface The 8 bit value is defined as follows
197. dition will be displayed in the listing window in English like text The meaning of most actions and conditions will be immediately obvious Actions Actions are simply commands that perform a certain action when they are executed The toolbar on the actions entry screen allows you to enter actions for many types of items as listed below The actions that are available for each item are described in their individual chapters X 10 Scheduled Events Periodic Events Timers Wait Commands Delay Commands Flags Variables Input Ports Output Ports Video Commands Infrared Signals Controller Commands Serial Interface Commands Macros Caller ID Commands Thermostat Commands Security System Commands Data Logging Commands Weather Data Commands Phone Commands lf Then Statements lf Then Else Statements The last two of these items If Then and If Then Else statements aren t really actions However these toolbar buttons are used to initially enter these statements Conditions Conditions are used as part of If Then and If Then Else statements The toolbar on the actions entry screen allows you to enter conditions for many types of items as listed below The specific conditions that are available for each item are described in their individual chapters e X 10 36 Chapter 4 Programming Language Time Conditions Date Conditions Special Time Date Conditions Timers Flags Variables Input Ports Output Ports
198. do this you should read two files installed in the application directory first 1 The Video Screens file which describes the general process of how the TV Thermostat Control Screens work 2 The How To file which contains a detailed description of how to control the RCS TX10 B thermostat It was written before we added all the thermostat commands so it does everything using the basic X 10 commands Use this as a guide to determine what to implement and how Chapter 20 Other Inputs 229 CHAPTER 20 OTHER INPUTS Analog Inputs HomeVision Pro contains four analog inputs If you have one or two Multifunction Expansion Boards MFEB those boards each provide an additional 8 analog inputs Those inputs function exactly the same as the HomeVision Pro inputs This gives a maximum of 20 analog inputs available with HomeVision Pro The HomeVision Pro inputs will be the first four inputs listed on the Analog Inputs Screen under the Objects Events menu Any Multifunction Expansion Boards inputs will be listed after that The following list shows how the ID numbers relate to the connection points 7 MFEB input 4 13 MFEB 2 input2 17 MFEB 2 inpute The analog inputs operate from 0 to 5 VDC and provide 8 bit 256 level resolution When an input is read the voltage is converted into a value between 0 and 255 00h to FFh This gives a resolution of 19 61mV 5V 255 steps To determine the actual voltage from the value read in mult
199. ds for these lighting systems Instead the user or system developer must do one of the following 1 Create a macro within the HomeVision schedule that controls the lighting system It is expected that the macro would transmit serial messages to an external lighting system controller However the macro could also control HomeVision relay outputs that directly connect to the external lights We call this method the User Created Macro and Variables Method 2 Create PC software that controls the lighting system The HomeVision controller would then transmit serial messages to the PC and the PC software would control the lighting system We call this method the HomeVision Default Method With either method it is anticipated that once someone has created a macro or software others could use it rather easily Once this is done HomeVision will provide the following capabilities e Define and name up to 255 lights e Track light levels in an internal state table e Enter commands in the schedule for these lights such as Light 3 Porch light On Light 7 Kitchen light to level 50 and Light 45 Master bath select scene 6 e Use the HomeVision software web browser or other PC software to control the lights and read status e View a TV screen showing the light status and allowing them to be controlled e Check the current light status in If Then conditions The file Custom Lighting installed in the HomeV
200. dule entered in step 3 You should check this box the first time so that it loads On subsequent schedule downloads you may wish to leave it unchecked This will cause the controller to keep the current time temperature schedule in its memory unchanged Remember that the user can change the thermostat schedule from the TV screen Such changes ARE NOT reflected in the schedule file on the computer Therefore if you download a new schedule with this option checked any changes the user made from the TV will be overwritten To preserve them uncheck the box before downloading Once you ve loaded the schedule you can use it as described in the following sections The first time you load a schedule the settings temperature system mode etc will likely be incorrect We recommend you use the TV Thermostat Control Screen to set them properly or put commands in your schedule to do it The settings are preserved on subsequent downloads so you only need to do this once 218 Chapter 19 Thermostats Using the TV Thermostat Control Screen Main Menu Page 3 of the video screen system allows you to access the Thermostat Control Screens assuming they have been enabled as described in step 2 These screens look similar to the following AC HEAT CONTROL lt Zone 1 gt 1 Control Mode RUN 2 HVAC Mode COOL 3 Fan Mode AUTO 4 Current Setting 75 Current Temp x 6 5 View Edit Schedule 6 Refresh Settings Now 7 Main Menu ENTER MENU NUMBER
201. e If lt Serial Characters Are Received These three conditions compare the number of characters received i e the serial string length to the value Use one of these when you need to know that the string was a certain length If Serial Input Character Numbers X Y are ZZZZZZZZ This condition is used to compare the input string or a portion of it to certain characters The symbol meanings are X refers to the location in the string of the first character to compare i e the character number Y refers to the location in the string of the last character to compare ZZZZZZZZ are the characters to compare the received data to The number of characters in ZZZZZZZZ must equal the number in the received data specified by X and Y See the examples for more information The condition is true if all characters match exactly false is any do not match EXAMPLES 1 To see if the received data string is Alarm Armed enter this If Serial Input Character Numbers 1 11 are Alarm Armed Then Do whatever you want here End If 2 To see if the received data string is Q enter this If Serial Input Character Numbers 1 1 are Q Then Do whatever you want here End If 3 To see if the received data string contains the letters OK as the third and fourth characters enter this If Serial Input Character Numbers 3 4 are OK Then Do whatever you want here End If 4 Assume you re reading a the
202. e Write variable 1 Temporary Variable to data log Var 1 Temporary Variable Analog input 1 Temp Sensor 1 Write variable 1 Temporary Variable to data log Var 1 Temporary Variable Analog input 2 Temp Sensor 2 Write variable 1 Temporary Variable to data log Var 1 Temporary Variable Analog input 3 Temp Sensor 3 Write variable 1 Temporary Variable to data log Var 1 Temporary Variable Analog input 4 Temp Sensor 4 Write variable 1 Temporary Variable to data log The first eight commands temperature sensor values write the current date and time to the log and the second eight write the When you want to read the data log use this command 242 Chapter 22 Data Logging Transmit complete data log in ASCII format using 8 bytes per line Assuming there are six entries in the log 48 bytes total the report would look similar to this By recording the same number of bytes to the log each time in this case 8 bytes the data log report is easy to interpret In this example the first column is the month 05 May the second is the date OA hex means the 10th the third is the hour 8 00 AM the fourth is the minute and so on Reading From The Data Log There are two general ways to get data out of the log 1 Use acomputer to command the controller to transmit the data 2 Set up the controller to automatically transmit the data Requesting Data From A Computer One convenient way t
203. e If all you want to do is teach HomeVision Pro your remote s signals so HomeVision Pro can control your equipment this section is not applicable This is only required if you want Home Vision Pro to recognize such signals from your remote and take action on them If you don t need to receive learned IR signals we recommend you leave the capability disabled If you want to have Home Vision Pro recognize when you transmit learned signals to it you must enable this capability before you can use it Doing so will slightly slow down the controller s operation as it will try to match received IR signals to all your learned signals this isn t necessary when using standard signals To enable this capability 1 Open the Controller Settings screen under the Configure menu 2 Select the Infrared tab 3 Inthe Receive learned IR signals box check Enable this capability The other items control how HomeVision Pro checks for matching signals and will explained later You will also need to download the schedule before the new settings will take affect Learning IR Signals To receive learned IR signals you must obviously learn them first Follow the same procedure as described in Learning Infrared Signals for Transmission a later section Once you ve learned the signal s go to the IR Signal Summary Screen under the Objects Events menu You can then enter actions to perform when the signal is received using th
204. e Caller ID Log Mode This command disables automatic logging of received phone calls to the controller s event log Enable Logging Of Time This command enables logging of the current time to the controller s event log whenever an automatically logged event occurs Here are some examples X10 RX D All Lights On at 12 30 55 PM Input Port B 1 changed to high at 11 33 27 AM Sch Ev Porch Light On at 06 15 00 PM Set zone 1 temp to 75 at 07 30 00 AM Disable Logging Of Time This command disables logging of the current time to the controller s event log whenever an automatically logged event occurs Other Commands Transmit Time And Date This command causes the controller to transmit the current time and date over serial port 1 Transmit Sunrise Time Transmit Sunset Time These commands cause the controller to transmit either today s sunrise or sunset time over serial port 1 Execute Self Test This command causes the controller to execute a self test and transmit the result over the serial interface This is the same self test the controller performs automatically at power up The test result is contained in one byte which is transmitted as two ASCII hex characters The value should be converter to binary and each bit evaluated The bit meanings are as follows bit O LSB 0 82C55 Chip Test Passed 1 82C55 Chip Test Failed bit 1 0 External RAM Read Write Test Passed 1 External RAM Read Write Test Failed bit
205. e Home Vision Pro software to Play a WAV file a sound file Start another program Send keystrokes to a program Write specific data to a text file Write all serial data to a daily log file Send data to another serial port on the computer Receive data from another serial port on the computer Display a message in the message window e The PC based computer program supplied with your controller uses the main serial port port 1 to communicate with it You can also use this interface to send your own commands to the controller or receive information from the controller You can use a standard communications or terminal program for this purpose or you can incorporate the communications in your own program In fact any device that can transmit RS 232 serial data can be used to operate the controller e Each of the three built in serial ports and the USB port have LEDs to show when they are transmitting and receiving data You do not need to know anything about the serial interface except how to connect the cable between the controller and your computer The rest of this chapter is a detailed description of the interface protocol for those who wish to perform their own interfacing to the controller or use the extra serial ports If you do not plan to use this capability you may wish to skip the rest of this chapter This chapter is divided into three main sections describing 1 How to configure the ports 2 Transmitti
206. e a file from the server PC although the Home Vision Pro web server can do this e Communications with the HomevVision Pro controller will be slower than normal because the data must pass through the Internet The delay is usually not significant when sending or receiving one or two messages such as when issuing an X10 command However communications intensive operations such as downloading a schedule into HomeVision Pro or reading the event log will usually take several times longer than normal e Any serial data sent from the HomeVision Pro controller will be received by both the client and server PC software If this data commands the software to do something both programs will try to do it For example if the controller sends a serial command telling the software to play a WAV file both the client and server software will attempt to play it Chapter 27 Miscellaneous 281 CHAPTER 27 MISCELLANEOUS Configuration Switches HomeVision Pro has 12 switches that are used to configure certain functions The 12 switches are located in a single device near the Port B terminal block Each switch has a small slider that can be slid left or right as viewed in the following drawing The circuit board has labels next to each switch indicating their functions Each switch can be moved to the left to open the switch or to the right to close it Open Closed IR Rx1 IR Rx2 RAM DTS B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 PASHOOEEESAA The func
207. e cable make sure it s a 4 conductor cable Many cables are only two conductor and will not work Test the controller with its original cable e Try using a different TW 523 module If the controller s X 10 Int LED still does not light check communications with it as described earlier If communications are OK but the X 10 Int LED will not light when the TW 523 module is properly installed the controller is defective although this particularly failure is extremely unlikely Open the X 10 control screen from the Control menu Transmit X 10 signals to the controller using a mini controller or other X 10 transmitting device Are the X 10 signals reported on the control screen A No Does the controller s X 10 RX LED blink when the signal is transmitted note that the LED may be very dim and requires you to look closely at it I Yes Try the following e Verify the controller is running not halted by using the status screen under the Other menu If halted either resume it or reload your schedule e Verify the X 10 receive function is enabled using the status screen under the Other menu If necessary enable it from the controller command screen e Verify that the X 10 report mode and the master report mode are both enabled If necessary enable them from the controller command screen e Verify communications with the controller as described earlier e Try using a different TW 523 module If
208. e command will read a byte from the bus After reading the value into Result Value you can transfer it to a variable use it as a condition in an If Then statement or transmit it over the serial interface Input Port Conditions The following input port conditions can be checked by an If Then or If Then Else statement If Input Port Is Low This condition will be true if the port is low logic zero false if high logic one If Input Port Is High This condition will be true if the port is high logic one false if low logic zero If Input Port Is Enabled This condition will be true if the port is enabled false if disabled If Input Port Is Disabled This condition will be true if the port is disabled false if enabled Output Port Notes Use Of Output Enable Disable Outputs can be individually enabled or disabled When disabled an output will not respond to commands to change it Naturally you ll normally want to have all your outputs enabled but the disable feature provides additional control capabilities that may be useful in certain situations Example If you re developing a schedule and one of the outputs is not working the way you want it to you could temporarily disable it to prevent problems For example you might be using an output to arm disarm a burglar alarm but the alarm isn t responding properly If you left the controller running with the output enabled the alarm might get armed or disa
209. e commands enable and disable this function If you are not using the X 10 receive capability you should disable it this will slightly improve the controller s operating speed While disabled you can still transmit X 10 signals Enable Input Port Function Disable Input Port Function In order for the controller to detect changes of the input ports the input port checking function must be enabled These commands enable and disable this function If you are not using any input ports you should disable this function this will slightly improve the controller s operating speed Event Log Commands These commands control the event log that can be displayed on your TV Clear TV Event Log This command clears all 256 lines of the controller s event log Any new logged events will be placed at the end bottom of the log The log is automatically cleared each time a new schedule is loaded 162 Chapter 15 Controller Functions Enable X 10 Receive Log Mode This command enables automatic logging of received X 10 signals to the controller s event log Whenever a signal is received it will be written to the log as shown in these examples X10 RX A 1 X10 RX A Off X10 RX D All Lights On X10 RX Preset Dim 30 Disable X 10 Receive Log Mode This command disables automatic logging of received X 10 signals to the controller s event log Enable Input Port Log Mode This command enables automatic logging of input port changes to the
210. e connection It follows this general procedure Opens the com port to your local modem Initializes the modem Dials the phone number Connects with the remote modem Checks the controller to ensure it s communicating properly If the connection is successful it displays the message HomeVision responding properly Ready for remote operations The main software screen also displays the message Remote If an error occurs a message will be displayed and the modem will hang up Refer to the trouble shooting section After the connection is made click the OK button to close the Dial Remote Modem screen Click the OK button to close the Serial Interface Configuration screen You can now use the controller just as if you were connected to it When you re done return to the Dial Remote Modem screen and click Hang Up Note that there are two limitations to what you can do remotely 1 When you download a schedule the remote unit will keep the serial port baud rate unchanged 2 You will not be able to send commands from the controller command screen to change the remote the controller s baud rate These limitations are necessary to prevent the baud rate from changing and the modem connection to be lost Remote Modem Trouble Shooting You may want to check the connection between the modem and the controller before leaving the controller s location There are two ways to do this 1 Make sure the master seria
211. e connects to the A always or S switched position The sensor s 5V and ground wires connect to the corresponding terminal block positions The DS1820 DS18S20 pins are shown below note that this is a bottom view Data Ground Power i d Bottom View You can connect multiple sensors to this single wire this is the typical multi drop operating mode like this Controller Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Gnd R E E i AorS 5V 232 Chapter 20 Other Inputs NOTE The total wiring length can affect performance of these sensors Total lengths of over 1000 feet are possible with good quality unshielded cable When choosing cable for very long runs choose the lowest possible capacitance per foot Shielded cable has higher capacitance and should be avoided If you do have shielded cable leave the shield unconnected at each end to minimize capacitance The A always terminal block position is always connected to the controller circuitry The S switched position is only connected when the DTS switch is in the closed position These different positions are provided to simplify the reading of a sensor s address when first configuring it When reading the address only one sensor may be connected at a time If you already have sensors connected you would normally have to disconnect them This switched position provides an alternative and was intended to be used as follows During norm
212. e controller is defective X 10 Noise Interference Problems X 10 systems often experience problems with the signals properly transmitting through household wiring If your X 10 communications are intermittent or only some module work try the following e Try plugging either the controller of the X 10 transmitter receiver into a different electrical outlet If the controller and the X 10 device are on different electrical circuits you may need a phase coupler or amplifier to ensure proper communications This is especially true with larger houses where the signal gets attenuated significantly e Make sure the controller s TW 523 module and other X 10 devices are not plugged into a surge protector These sometimes filter out the X 10 signal e Turn off other electrical appliances Some of these can generate noise and drown out the X 10 signals Filters are available that can eliminate this problem e You can test transmissions from the controller throughout your house in the following manner 1 In your schedule create a periodic event that first sends out a specific X 10 ON command then an OFF command Load this into the controller 2 Connect a lamp radio or other small electrical device to a lamp or appliance module 3 Plug the lamp or appliance module into the various electrical outlets throughout your house If the controller s X 10 transmissions are getting through the device will go on and off Do this to determine if you re
213. e cursor to the start of the next row For example if the current row is 11 it will change to 12 If it s 12 it will wrap around to 1 The column number will always be set to 1 This command can be used in place of separate commands to set the row and column when you want to go to column 1 There is one quirk to how this command functions If text has wrapped around at the end of a row and into the next row this command will not work properly The On Screen Display OSD control circuitry which generates the video text does not have a command to go to the start of the next row Rather it only supports commands to directly set the row and column with the Set Cursor Row To and Set Cursor Column To commands In order to provide this Do Line Feed and Carriage Return command the controller maintains an internal variable that keeps track of the current row number When it executes a Do Line Feed and Carriage Return command it looks at the current row number variable and sets the OSD circuitry directly to the next row number using the Set Cursor Row To command and the first column using the Set Cursor Column To 1 command The problem occurs when you write text that reaches the end of a row The On Screen Display OSD circuitry automatically moves to the start of the next row to display more text However the internal variable that keeps track of the current row number does not know the OSD circuitry has wrapped around If you issue a Do
214. e if it is enabled Recovering From Power Failure Condition is true if the controller is currently in the power failure recovery process false if not This condition is only true while the controller is executing your power failure recovery event and any macros that are called from it Not Recovering From Power Failure Condition is true if the controller is not currently in the power failure recovery process false if it is Video Mode Is Active Condition is true if the video mode is active false if it is not Video Mode Is Not Active Condition is true if the video mode is not active false if it is active Controller Error Condition is true if the controller has detected an error condition false if not Any error conditions are reset erased when e Power is cycled The Reset Controller command is executed e The Clear Error Message command is executed e A scheduled is loaded into the controller No Controller Error Condition is true if the controller has not detected an error condition false if it has TW 523 OK Condition is true if the TW 523 is connected and functioning false otherwise The X 10 Int LED should be lit whenever the TW 523 is OK TW 523 Error Condition is true if the controller cannot communicate with the TW 523 false if it can The X 10 Intf LED should be off whenever the TW 523 is missing unconnected or defective Chapter 16 Serial Interface 169 CHAPTER 16 SERIAL INTERFACE Introducti
215. e input would be read as a high just as if a voltage were connected When you disconnect the pull up resistor via the configuration switch the open input will be properly ready as a low See the following figure for an example 5V 2 2K ohms Switch Bl open External Controller Device Terminal Block 106 Chapter 12 Input and Output Ports Port C Digital Input Output Port C is connected to a PCF8574 integrated circuit that provides eight interface lines The port can be configured as an input or output port all 8 lines will be the same type When used as an input it can connect directly to switch closure type devices just as with Port B or to digital signals As an output it can directly drive digital logic or lower power peripherals such as LEDs up to 20mA current WARNING Before making any hardware connections to this port the controller must be set to the desired mode input or output This is done using the I O port configuration screen of the PC program If you configure port C as an output but connect input devices to it damage to the controller or the external devices could result Port C Description Input Output Port C connections are provided on terminal blocks located along the top side of the board There are eight connection points one for each of the eight inputs outputs All digital inputs and outputs are referenced to the controllers ground This ground is brought out to the terminal block and mu
216. e normally used in either of two states SET or CLEAR While this should be sufficient for most applications there are times when having a third state for flags would be useful To accommodate this a flag can also be set to a third state called NEUTRAL When a flag is neutral it will fail a test that checks for SET and also a test for CLEAR The NEUTRAL state is sometimes useful in developing complex schedules but is only rarely necessary You can probably create any schedule you desire using only the SET and CLEAR states A flag will always remain in the same state until you specifically change it The state of a flag can be checked in a schedule with an If Then or If Then Else statement Flags can also be viewed on a TV through the video screen system You can see the current state of all flags and even watch them change in real time You can also set them clear them or put them in neutral using an infrared remote control 88 Chapter 10 _ Flags Flag Commands The following flag commands can be included in a schedule They can all also be issued to the controller over the serial interface The format for sending commands over the serial interface is described in the Serial file installed in the HomeVision directory These commands are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the appropriate toolbar button The command and selected flag are chosen from the pull down list Standard Flag Com
217. e numbered 1 through 256 There are two associated commands that can be used in your schedule One is a serial command that extracts text from a received serial message and puts it into a specific location in the text storage buffer see the Serial Interface chapter for a detailed description The second is a video command that writes a specific portion of the text storage buffer to the video screen see the commands part of this chapter for details Chapter 13 _ Video Output 127 Using The Text Storage Buffer Use of the text storage buffer is best explained with an example Assume you have a device connected to HomeVision Pro s serial port that periodically sends HomeVision Pro the name and artist of a CD being played Assume the serial data is in the following format CD artist The Beatles CD title The White Album Assume also that each message always sends 20 characters for the artist and title using trailing blank spaces if the artist or title is less than 20 characters Assume that you want to create a video screen to display this information that looks like this COMPACT DISK INFO CD artist The Beatles CD title The White Album This requires two steps 1 Putting the received serial data into the text storage buffer 2 Displaying the data from the text storage buffer First however you must decide which part of the text storage buffer to use to hold the information This is entirely up to you to choose you can us
218. e out the appropriate X 10 signal s to send to perform the command RCS Serial Thermostats Allowable RCS Serial Thermostat Configurations There are two general types of RCS serial thermostat controllers Chapter 19 Thermostats 215 1 Single zone 2 Multi zone You can use a mixture of single zone and multi zone serial thermostats with HomeVision Pro However there are a few restrictions All thermostat controllers must connect to the same HomevVision Pro serial port Since port 1 is used to load a schedule into HomeVision Pro it s usually best to use another port for the thermostats e When using more than one thermostat controller they must all be of the RS 485 type RS 232 does not allow multiple devices e You can have a maximum of two multi zone controllers e You can have a maximum of 9 zones total Configure RCS Serial Thermostats You must first install the thermostat s refer to the RCS documentation for details You must also assign addresses to each unit this is done by setting switches This section explains how to determine the correct addresses Refer to the RCS documentation for details on actually setting the address switches note that when you change the address setting you must remove and reapply power to the thermostat before it will recognize the new address In HomeVision Pro thermostats are referenced by their zone number Zones are numbered consecutively from 1 up to the last zone and zone
219. e problem either the controller or the computers serial port is defective Chapter 28 Trouble Shooting 303 b Yes Communications seems to be working To perform a thorough communications test open the Debug screen under the Other menu Click the Start button under the Serial Comm Test The test will run until aborted The fields display the number of trials and errors Each trial consists of 512 separate commands of about 12 serial characters each If there are any errors then the serial communications is intermittent If this happens try the following e Verify the serial cable connectors are properly mated and secured e Reboot your computer and try again There may be a problem with the serial port e Try a different serial port e Try a different serial cable If none of these solve the problem either the controller or the computer s serial port is defective IR Receive Problem Make sure the built in IR receivers are enabled This is done with the configuration switches located near the Port B terminal block The two switches labeled IR Rx1 and IR Rx2 should be closed slid down to enable the built in IR receivers Transmit an IR signal to the controller s built in receivers from several feet away Does the IR RX LED blink 1 No Check the remote s batteries and or try another remote device Verify the controller is powered the Power OK LED is lit If the IR RX
220. e return and line feed End If The first three commands are the memory access commands that read the three bytes containing the IR signal information into your variables numbers 28 29 and 30 in this example If a standard IR signal was received the EF59 variable will contain the value of one so check for this value You can then take whatever actions you want In this example we simply transmit the device and key codes out the serial port Typically users would check the device and key code in additional If Then statements and take appropriate actions The EF59 variable will contain one of four possible values 0 Means no new IR signal was received 1 Means a standard IR signal was received The next two bytes will contain the device and key code 2 Means a learned IR signal was received The next byte will contain the ID of the IR signal it matches 3 Means an unknown IR signal was received This will also happen if IR noise is received In order to enter the memory access commands in your schedule this capability must be enabled To do this you must edit the Windows registry on your PC This can be done using RegEdit Open the registry and then open this path HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software VB and VBA Program Settings HomeVision Under the Miscellaneous section look for an entry with the name MemoryAcess and change its data value to True If it s not there add an entry using Edit New
221. e return and line feed as the line feed can make it more difficult to decode the data When the receive binary data option is enabled any character can be received Before you use this serial input capability it s important to understand exactly how the controller handles incoming data Otherwise errors or data loss could occur in your application This section describes the serial receive process 1 The first step depends on which serial port is receiving the data Serial port 1 When the first serial character is received the controller checks to see if it s a comma If so it is interpreted as a command i e this is Command Data The serial interface protocol documentation describes how commands are handled The following steps are not applicable Any other character other than the prohibited DC1 and DC3 characters are interpreted as the first character of a new incoming data string called User Data At this point the User Data is considered In Process and you can check for this condition in an If Then statement if necessary e Serial ports 3 and 4 The first serial character is interpreted as the first character of a new incoming data string called User Data At this point the User Data is considered In Process and you can check for this condition in an If Then statement if necessary Subsequent incoming characters are added to the end of the User Data string When the data is terminated as explai
222. e same process as for standard signals Following is a suggestion for learning IR signals for reception Most remotes transmit the same signal multiple times when you press the button The number of repetitions often depends on how long you hold the button For example you may notice that if you hold the button for a normal duration Home Vision Pro receives 24 pulses as shown in the Number of Pulses box on the IR Learn screen However if you press the button very quickly there may be only 12 pulses Conversely if you hold it longer you may get 36 pulses For these types of signals we suggest you learn and save the shorter signals i e the 12 pulse signal in this case This will improve the recognition later when you re using the remote to control HomeVision Pro For example assume you learn and save the 12 pulse signal When you later transmit a signal to Home Vision Pro HomeVision Pro will check to see if the received signal matches all 12 pulses of the saved signal If so a match is declared and HomeVision Pro performs any specified action If when using the remote you actually hold the button down longer and 24 or 36 pulses are transmitted the signal will still be recognized by HomeVision Pro since the first 12 pulses will be the same and that s all that matters On the other hand if you learn and save the 24 pulse signal and then during normal use you transmit a shorter 12 Chapter 14 Infrared Control 149 pulse si
223. e screens located under the Advanced menu are used to configure special enhanced functions AC Heating TV screen Security TV screen Thermostat schedule Custom TV menu video main menu page 4 Custom TV menu system 16 custom menus The first two screens are used to set up the corresponding built in video screens which can be displayed on your TV Details on all these functions are provided elsewhere in the manual Custom TV Menu Page 4 of the video menu system is a user definable menu The screen contains 6 blank entries You can customize the text that s displayed in each In addition you can specify a macro that s performed each time the user presses the corresponding button on their remote This PC screen is used to configure the TV screen Use the following procedure to set up this menu screen 1 Create a macro for each item you want in the menu up to six If you want to display a custom screen your macro must do it 2 Inthe PC software open the Custom TV Menu screen under the Advanced menu 24 Chapter 2 Software Overview 3 For each entry you want displayed on main menu page 4 A Enable the menu item by checking the check box unchecked entries will display Unused B Enter the text to be displayed next to the menu number up to 22 characters C Select the macro you want to perform when the user presses the corresponding remote button 4 Click OK 5 Load the schedule into the controller That s a
224. e the Remove from scene command to remove it To test whether the scene works transmit the Execute scene command as described in the next section Chapter 5 X 10 47 Executing Scenes Executing a scene means sending an X 10 signal to command the modules to go to the desired scene All modules in the scene should simultaneously go to their preset level You can execute a scene either from the X 10 control screen in the PC software or within a schedule To execute a scene from the PC open the X 10 control screen Then 1 Select the desired house code the unit code doesn t matter as scenes apply to the entire house code 2 Select the custom command Execute X 10 scene or Execute Leviton scene depending on the device type 3 Enter the scene number in the scene number text box 4 Click the Perform Command button This will send an X 10 command to the house code and all the lights in the scene should respond To execute a scene within your schedule use the command Execute X 10 scene or Execute Leviton scene described later X 10 Commands Overview The following X 10 commands can be included in a schedule Many of them can be sent from the X 10 control screen in the PC program They can also be issued to the controller over the serial interface The format for sending commands over the serial interface is described in the Serial file installed in the HomevVision d
225. e the 256 characters any way you want The easiest way would be to use the first 20 characters to hold the artist and the next 20 to hold the title like this Characters 1 20 CD artist Characters 21 40 CD title To put the serial data into the text storage buffer you use the following commands in the Serial Data Input Event If Received serial characters 1 11 are CD artist Then Copy 20 characters of received serial text starting at char 12 into text storage buffer starting at location 1 End If If Received serial characters 1 10 are CD title Then Copy 20 characters of received serial text starting at char 11 into text storage buffer starting at location 21 End If Next we need to create the video screen to display the information Refer to the How To file installed in the HomevVision directory for details on creating custom screens The basic commands to create the video screen are as follows Video Set cursor row to 1 Video Set cursor column to 4 Video Display text COMPACT DISK INFO Video Set cursor row to 3 Video Set cursor column to 1 128 Chapter 13 Video Output Video Video Video Video Video Video Video Video Video Video Display text CD artist Set cursor row to 4 Set cursor column to 3 Display 20 character long text string Set cursor row to 6 Set cursor column to 1 Display text CD title Set cursor row to 7 Set cursor column to 3 Display 20 character
226. e used by the two systems Ground External Controller Device Terminal Block Chapter 12 Input and Output Ports 109 You can also mix and match switch closure inputs with digital inputs as shown in this example Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Output 5 Output 6 Switch 1 Switch 2 Ground Ground External Controller Devices Terminal Block Control Of Output Ports Output ports can be controlled in three ways e By a command in the schedule e By a command received over the serial interface If a computer is connected to the serial interface it can directly control all of the outputs e By the screen menu system and an infrared remote This section describes the commands that can be used and gives examples Output Port Commands The following output port commands can be included in a schedule They can all also be issued to the controller over the serial interface The format for sending commands over the serial interface is described in the Serial file installed in the HomeVision directory These commands are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the appropriate toolbar button The command and selected port are chosen from the pull down list 110 Chapter 12 Input and Output Ports Standard Output Port Commands Set Output Port Low Sets the output port to a low logic zero state Ports A and C use different hardware drivers and therefore their lo
227. eVision Pro which you ll probably do when first testing it use the IP address 127 0 0 1 127 0 0 1 has special meaning and tells the browser to use the local PC If the browser is on a different PC you ll need to determine the HomeVision Pro PC s IP address Replace PortNumber with the port number you assigned to the server using the Web Server Configuration Screen 1033 is the default web server port number Here s an example HTTP 127 0 0 1 1033 HVWebPage htm After the web address is the file name to open HVWebPage htm is a file installed in the HomeVision HTML directory and is the starting point to access the HomeVision Pro web page This page defines the framework of the main HomeVision Pro Internet web page It makes extensive use of HTML frames to display the information It displays the HTML page HVTop htm in the top frame named top frame and the HTML page HVIndex htm in the left frame named index frame Both HVTop htm and HVIndex htm are files installed in the HomeVision HTML directory HVTop htm displays a small title bar across the top of the window HVIndex htm displays a menu that you can select from which determines what is displayed in the main frame You can edit any of these three pages to change the appearance or functionality of the web page If you do make backup copies of each file in case you run into problems and need to return to the or
228. eate your own status pages for objects flags variables X 10 etc using the built in object tables You can then display these pages in the main frame instead of displaying the automatically generated pages This would allow you to change the table color display multiple tables on a page etc You don t have to create the table that displays the information but can instead include a tag in your page that tells HomeVision Pro to generate the table and insert it For example the tag lt HV Table Flag OO99FF FFFFDD FFFFCC gt tells the software to generate the flag status table It will use a heading background color of 0099FF medium blue and alternating table row colors of FFFFDD light yellow and FFFFCC a slightly darker yellow 3 Create your own status pages for objects flags variables X 10 etc without using the built in object tables This gives you the same capabilities as the previous option but allows you to display the object information in any way you like For example you could Create a table containing only the flags you want to display omitting unwanted flags Use images to display the status of each flag Use the flag status in JavaScript or VBScript functions Create an image map which could show the floor plan of your home that you can click on to send X 10 commands To display status information you will include tags such as this in your HTML file lt HV X10 Al state level gt lt HV
229. eceived from port 2 out port 1 but you don t have to forward data received from port 1 out port 2 although you can There are several important things to note about how this feature works Data is forwarded to the destination port s after the received message is terminated not as each character is received This normally is when a carriage return is received although it can occur after a designated timeout Line feeds received from a port will normally not be forwarded to another port carriage returns will be forwarded Serial port 1 supports a serial command protocol for sending serial commands to Home Vision Pro detailed in separate documentation This protocol uses commands that start with a comma character i e Messages received on this serial port that start with a comma will not be forwarded to another port Serial messages received while the controller is halted will not be forwarded to another port Since the controller is halted during a schedule download no forwarding will occur during a schedule download so the messages won t affect any devices attached to a serial port Chapter 17 Macros 205 CHAPTER 17 MACROS Introduction A macro is a set of conditions and actions Macros are useful when you want to perform the same set of actions conditions at several different places in your schedule Instead of repeating the actions conditions each place you can enter them into a macro Then whereve
230. ecified events to occur Each loop these periodic events will also be performed With most schedules a loop will be complete every few milliseconds However if you have a lot of periodic events executing every loop and you re displaying a video screen at the same time a loop might take up to 30 milliseconds Change Event Rate To Every 1 Minute This command sets the rate at which the event is performed to once every minute It will be performed every time the controller s clock increments the minute value Change Event Rate To Every 5 Minutes This command sets the rate at which the event is performed to once every 5 minutes It will be performed every time the controller s clock minute value reaches multiples of 5 minutes i e on the hour and at 5 10 15 etc minutes after the hour Change Event Rate To Every 15 Minutes This command sets the rate at which the event is performed to once every 15 minutes It will be performed every time the controller s clock minute value reaches multiples of 15 minutes i e on the hour and at 15 30 and 45 minutes after the hour Chapter 8 Periodic Events 75 Change Event Rate To Every 1 Hour This command sets the rate at which the event is performed to once every hour It will be performed every time the controller s clock increments the hour value i e at 12 00 AM 1 00 AM 2 00 AM etc Change Event Rate To Every 2 Hours This command sets the rate at which the event is performed to once e
231. ection to be 2400 baud Otherwise it may take too long for the local modem to determine the remote modem s baud rate and the remote modem will hang up e f the program is unable to communicate with the controller after dialing OK try redialing If the problem persists the remote modem is probably not set up correctly Additional Modem Notes e Problems connecting can sometimes occur if you re calling with a high speed 9600 baud or greater modem and the remote modem is much slower such as 2400 baud You can fix this by forcing your local modem to connect at a slower rate The commands shown below are used by many modems for this purpose but you should check your modem s manual to verify it Enter the command in the Extra Modem Commands text box as described in the next paragraph PHONE LINE CONNECTION RATE COMMAND Highest possible speed default F 1200 baud F4 2400 baud F5 4800 baud F6 9600 baud F8 12000 baud F9 14400 baud F10 e You can send any additional commands to your local modem We don t expect this to be necessary very often but the capability is provided just in case You include these commands in the Dial Remote Modem screen They will be sent to the modem immediately prior to dialing You do not need to include the letters AT or a carriage return You can also string multiple commands together For example force the modem to connect at 2400 baud fill the text box in with the following F5 e You can incl
232. ectronics stores such as Radio Shack NOTE The NX 584 has four jumpers that can switch the functions of the serial port pins The cable types described in step 3 above are appropriate if you leave the NX 584 jumpers in their default positions 4 Configure HomeVision Pro Software Next you should configure the HomeVision Pro software First tell HomeVision Pro about the security system you re using 1 2 3 8 9 1 11 0 Open the Security System Configuration screen under the Configure menu In the Security system type box select CADDX NetworX RS 232 In the Number of zones box select the number of security system zones you have There can be a maximum of 64 In the Number of partitions box select the number of partitions in your security system There can be a maximum of eight although most users have only one In the Controller serial port box select the HomeVision Pro serial port number the thermostats are connected to In the User number box enter the security system user number you ve assigned to HomeVision Pro as described previously For each zone you can enter a descriptive name This name will be used in your schedule and displayed on the security system TV screen Click OK Open the Security TV Screen Configuration screen under the Advanced menu Check the Enable video TV control screen box if you want page 3 of the built in video menu system to access t
233. ed under the Other menu In the text box enter the ASCII command exactly as you would send it over the serial interface and then click the Try It button The HomevVision Pro software will then run just as if it had received that ASCII command over the serial interface If the command is entered properly and the wave file exists the wav file will play Notes e To play wave files you must have a sound card installed e The sound card s volume level must be set properly in order to hear the wave file The serial commands are not case sensitive The wave files must be located in the same directory as the HomeVision Pro application e If you command a wave file while another is still playing the one playing will be aborted and the new one will start e Status of the wave file will be shown on the bottom of the main software screen Running Other Computer Programs You can run other programs on your computer upon command from the controller This requires that the controller be connected to the computer s serial port and that the HomeVision Pro application be running on the computer To command a program to run enter a serial interface command in your schedule to transmit the following ASCII text Run program filename exe Replace filename exe with the complete name of the program or a file including the extension The extension would usually be exe but could be com or bat It could also be the extension of a docu
234. edule file or the HomeVision Pro controller for example tell it to transmit an X 10 signal 260 Chapter 26 Web Server Configuration After installing the HomeVision Pro software configure the web server Use the Web Server Configuration Screen under the Configure menu Under the Configure tab set the following items Port Number You must tell the software what port number you want it to use on your computer It defaults to using port 1033 which will work in most situations You will normally never need to change this However you may need to if the server fails to start when using the chosen port You can set it to any number between 0 and 32 000 although numbers above 1024 are recommended Automatically run server at startup Check this if you want the web server to start running each time the HomeVision Pro software starts Regardless of whether you enable this you can start and stop the server manually from the Web Server Configuration Screen Report results of server commands When checked the web server will report back to the browser the results of the command received from the browser The result message will appear in the main browser frame You will then have to click Back to get back to the previous page unless you use the approach described below to automatically return When unchecked no message will be sent back to the browser and the browser will continue to display the last page this saves you f
235. em as described in the video chapter Assigning Video Functions To Different Keys Any of the 16 keys used by the video screen system can be assigned to any key on your remote All 16 keys must have the same Device Code but each will have a different Key Code To assign a function to a different key 1 Identify the signal s Device and Key Codes You can use the method described in Testing A Preprogrammed Remote to find these 2 Verify that the signal s Device Code matches that shown in the video remote control configuration screen All signals from a specific remote should have the same Device Code 3 Enter the signal s Key Code into the Key Code field of the function you want to replace For example if the received signal s Key Code is 145 and you want to use it for the Cancel function enter 145 in the Key Code field for the Cancel button Configuring A Learning Remote Learning remotes require you to transmit an infrared signal to the remote which then learns the signal When programming a learning remote you must teach it signals that follow the standard format This will allow those signals to be received by the controller The process is as follows 1 Inthe PC software select Infrared Test from the Other menu 2 Connect the controller to the serial port and make sure the infrared receive function is enabled Also make sure the video screen system is off 3 Select a Device Code t
236. emperature value into your own variable You can then e Display it on a custom TV screen perhaps putting it in the top left corner overlaid onto the TV channel you re watching e Perform some math functions on it to decide whether to switch HVAC system modes open close air ducts in certain rooms turn on off a whole house ventilation system etc e Report it out the serial interface every 5 minutes and log it to a PC file You could then open the file in a spreadsheet program and create a graph of your house s temperature Thermostat Variable Zone X Current Temperature Constant There are actually 16 of these commands one for each available HVAC zone replace the X with the desired zone These commands set the Current Temperature variable for the specified zone to the constant value H can be any integer between 0 and 255 These commands are primarily intended for use with the temperature values that are displayed on the TV Thermostat Control Screens If you don t have a thermostat that can report temperature you may want to set the temperature to zero so that the user doesn t confuse it with the true temperature Thermostat Variable Zone X Temperature Setting Variable Chapter 19 Thermostats 227 There are actually 16 of these commands one for each available HVAC zone replace the X with the desired zone These commands set the Temperature Setting variable for the specified zone to the value of variable
237. ene command to remove it To test whether the scene works transmit the Execute scene command as described in the next section Leviton Type Scenes As an example for Leviton brand devices assume you want to create the same two scenes as in the above example Here s how you d create these scenes 1 Set X 10 devices A 1 A 2 and A 3 to their desired levels for scene 1 you can do this by manually setting the devices to the right levels or by sending X 10 commands to them Select the custom command Include in scene at current level Enter 1 in the scene number text box Select house code A and unit code 1 Click the Perform Command button This will send an X 10 command to module A 1 telling it to include itself in scene 1 at it s current level Select house code A and unit code 2 Click the Perform Command button This will send an X 10 command to module A 2 telling it to include itself in scene 1 at it s current level 8 Select house code A and unit code 3 9 Click the Perform Command button This will send an X 10 command to module A 3 telling it to include itself in scene 1 at it s current level 10 Repeat the above steps for scene 2 Rd DDI NO Ya The above steps send the necessary commands to the X 10 modules to put them in the two house code A scenes If you decide you don t want a particular module to be in a scene us
238. ent Variable 1 MSB amp Variable 3 LSB would give these results Variable 1 4 Chapter 11__ Variables 99 Variable 3 255 If both variables are equal to zero when this command is performed both will roll under to 255 Other Advanced Commands Read Value Of Variable XXX This command causes the controller to read the value of variable XXX and to transmit it over the serial interface This command can only be issued over the serial port it cannot be included directly ina schedule This allows an external computer or other device to determine the value of a variable See the file Serial installed in the application directory for details on the format of this command and the serial data response Byte in Text Storage Buffer Variable XXX This command takes the value of value of variable XXX and puts it into byte number of the text storage buffer It uses a single byte in the buffer For example if the variable value is 65 and you put it into a byte in the buffer the one buffer byte will then contain the value 65 If you display this byte on the TV screen it will appear as A as 65 is the ASCII value for a capital A When used with the following command you can move variables into the buffer and retrieve them back Variable XXX Byte from Text Storage Buffer e This command takes byte number of the text storage buffer and puts it into variable XXX V
239. enu system This should display page 1 of the video menu system If the display is erratic or unclear refer to the video chapter to make adjustments to the video signal level If there is still no output at all the controller may be defective 2 Yes What is the exact problem A Textis blurry or screen appears scrambled There may be a problem with the controller or external cable Try a different cable If the problem remains try to connect the controller to another TV This will help us determine where the problem lies B Characters are flickering on and off If you re displaying your own video screen this problem can be caused by e Periodically clearing the screen then rewriting it e Repeatedly writing two or more characters to the same spot on the screen e Writing a text string that wraps around to the following line then writing the next line starting at the first column thus over writing the wrapped around text from the previous line C External video is not passed through the controller Verify the following e The video switch is set to the external video position e The video cable is properly connected from the output jack of the video source to the controller s input jack e The external video source is providing a video signal NOTE It is usually not possible to connect both of the controller s video jacks to a TV and have the TV act as the video output source The TV s video output will normally
240. enu system For example you could create a screen that looks like this Joe s Automation System Lighting X 10 Security system HVAC system Event log Start home theater Start party mode Menu page 2 Built in menu system Exit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Pressing buttons 1 2 3 and 4 would display the corresponding built in video screen Buttons 5 and 6 would run the appropriate macro Button 7 would display another one of your custom menus Button 8 would display main menu page 1 of the built in video menu system thus allowing you to access all the other built in screens without requiring you to put them on your own custom menus Button 9 would shut off the video menu system Setting Up The Custom Menu System Here s how to create your own custom menus 1 Open the Controller Settings Configuration Screen select the Video Settings tab and check the Enable custom TV menu system option 2 Open the Custom TV Menu System screen under the Advanced menu 3 Enter the number of menus you want to have You can start with one and add more later if you like 4 In the blue simulated TV screen enter the text as you want it to appear on the TV The top line should usually be a screen title Note that certain non text characters will appear different on your TV than shown on the PC screen the simulated display cannot reproduce the same characters that the HomeVision Pro controller does The actual characters are described in the
241. er the signal s Device Code and Key Code The PC software provides a simple way for you to determine what these codes are and then enter them 2 Learn the signal Learning is the process by which the controller analyzes the signal and stores it in memory The signals are stored as measurements of the pulse lengths This takes more memory than simply storing the signal s Device Code and Key Code Learning signals in this way is not necessary for standard format signals However it is the only way to handle signals that do not meet the standard format as discussed in the following section Chapter 14 Infrared Control 143 Other Infrared Signals Description Any signal not following the standard format falls into this category The controller must learn these signals by measuring and storing the individual lengths of the infrared pulses Receiving Other Format Signals Signals in non standard formats can be received by the controller and learned for later transmission just like standard signals can They can also be used as commands to the controller or for controlling the video screen system However they have some limits that standard signals don t have It will usually be best if you can configure your remote to transmit standard signals for controlling HomeVision Pro If your remote can t do this then you may want to use HomeVision Pro s ability to receive learned IR signals Transmitting Other Format Signa
242. er will not perform any actions you set up to be performed automatically In addition the controller will not check the port state or update its value However you can still perform the other input port commands After being enabled again the port will work normally Enable Input Port Enables the input port This command must be issued to a Disabled input before it can be used normally Disable Input Port Low Trigger If you have defined actions to be performed automatically when the port goes low this is known as a Low Trigger This command disables this trigger preventing the actions from being performed All other aspects of the input port continue to function normally The controller will continue to check for changes in the input and you can still use the state of the port as a condition in an If Then statement This command has the same effect as if you had disabled the trigger from the PC input port summary screen before loading the schedule Either way the port works normally except that it won t automatically perform any actions you may have defined Use the command Enable Input Port Low Trigger to re enable it Enable Input Port Low Trigger If you have defined actions to be performed automatically when the port goes low this is known as a Low Trigger This command enables this trigger allowing the actions to be performed 114 Chapter 12 Input and Output Ports Disable Input Port High Trigger If you have
243. erface chapter Set the baud rate to 9600 which is the rate used by the RCS thermostats Set the Serial Timeout parameter to none although this really doesn t matter If you re using the RS 485 mode select the half duplex mode which is what the RCS RS 485 thermostats use If you re using an add on HomevVision Phone Serial port configure it as described in its documentation Set the baud rate to 9600 which is the rate used by the RCS thermostats Set the Serial Timeout parameter to none although this really doesn t matter Step 2 TV Screen Configuration Enable the TV Thermostat Control Screen s so you can control the thermostat s from the TV Do this using the PC software AC Heating TV Screen located under the Advanced menu Check the Enable Screen Chapter 19 Thermostats 217 checkbox for each zone Underneath each select the Use built in commands option the other option allows you to write your own macros to control the thermostat Step 3 Thermostat Schedule Setup The controller can control the zone 1 and 2 thermostats to independent time temperature schedules If you wish to use this feature you should first enter the schedule using Thermostat Schedule Screen This screen is located under the Advanced menu in the PC software Alternately you can bypass this step and enter the schedule using the TV Thermostat Schedule Screen as described in Using the TV Thermostat Schedule Screen
244. erial port to server PC serial port e HomeVision Pro software is e HomeVision Pro software is running and web server function is running and remote internet enabled access server function is enabled Client PC software Any web browser Home Vision Pro software Client PC capabilities e Web pages to control Yes No Home Vision Pro Download schedule into No Yes Home Vision Pro e View all serial data from No Yes Home Vision Pro Intended use For easily monitoring and controlling For loading new schedules into the your home from a remote location controller and or debugging problems from a remote location Chapter 26 Web Server 279 Server Configuration To use the remote internet access capability you must first configure the HomeVision Pro software on the PC the HomeVision Pro controller is connected to the server PC Use the Remote Internet Access Screen under the Configure menu to do this In the Select Connection Mode field select the Server option In the Local Server field set the following items IP Address Enter the computer s IP address Port Number You must tell the software what port number you want it to use on your computer It defaults to using port 1043 which will work in most situations You will normally never need to change this However you may need to if the server fails to start when using the chosen port You can set it to any number between 0 and 32 000 although numbers abo
245. ers received and puts the value into the system variable Result Value You can then use a variable command to move Result Value into a regular variable that you created From there you can do anything with it you like Put Value Of Received Character Into Result Value Put Value Of 2 Received Characters Into Result Value Put Value Of 3 Received Characters Into Result Value These commands look at the specified location s in the serial data string convert it to a number and put it into the system variable Result Value After the value is put in Result Value you can use variable commands to move it to a variable and perform other operations on it If the specified locations are not valid numbers Result Value will be set equal to 255 to indicate an error The difference between these commands is how many characters are used to determine the value The first command looks at a single character that must be a number between 0 and 9 The second command looks at two consecutive characters both of which must be a number between 0 and 9 The third command looks at three consecutive characters all of which must be a number between 0 and 9 190 Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface EXAMPLES 1 If the received data string is 149 The following command sets Result Value equal to 1 Put Value Of Received Character 1 Into Result Value The following command sets Result Value equal to 4 Put Value Of Received Character 2 Into
246. es come with a listing of all the devices they support and the codes for each You ll need to select from these a code that the controller can recognize The controller can recognize a wide variety of codes under the TV VCR Cable Box and Auxiliary functions You only need to select one of these As noted above the TV function is recommended e Table 14 1 lists some of the many codes the controller can receive Codes are given for the most common remote control brands If you don t have one of these brands you may have to do a little experimenting Try using your remote s codes for the brands of equipment shown in the table You can then test it as described in Testing A Preprogrammed Remote to make sure it generates the correct infrared signals e Once you ve chosen the remote code to use program it into your remote following the instructions that came with it e We suggest you select an equipment brand different than any equipment you own You don t want your VCR changing channels every time you use your remote to send a command to the controller After setting up your remote it s a good idea to test it to make sure it doesn t affect any of your equipment If it does you should select a different code for your remote Codes One For Device Device Brands All Control Magna RCA Sony Type 1 Emerson vox 0030 Sharp Realistic Montgomery Ward 165 0040 Optonica NEC Techwood Citizen Candle 056 Hitachi Luxman
247. essage TEXT TO WRITE Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface 201 Replace TEXT TO WRITE with the desired text For example to display the message Security system armed send this ASCII text Display message Security system armed Notes e You must place the desired text between the double quotes but the quotes will not be displayed There is no way to display double quotes The serial commands are not case sensitive However the text to write the text between the double quotes will be written in whatever case you enter The software screen Serial Command Test located under the Other menu can help you test sending messages In the text box enter the ASCII command exactly as you would send it over the serial interface and then click the Try It button The HomeVision Pro software will then run just as if it had received that ASCII command over the serial interface If the command is entered properly the text will be displayed in the message window HV Desktop Control Program A small software program was created that provides another way to control your home This program allows icons on your computer desktop to send a command to HomeVision Pro For example one icon might turn on a light another might lower your thermostat setpoint by one degree another might trigger a macro etc This program is called HV Desktop and is automatically installed in the same directory you installed HomeVision Pro Here s how it works
248. est to implement these advanced X 10 commands When an X 10 preset dim signal is received immediately following an X 10 house unit code signal the controller stores the level of the preset dim signal This command not only clears the preset dim bit but also resets the preset dim level to 0 56 Chapter 5 X 10 Clear All Advanced X 10 Bits This command clears the bits Status Request Status Is On Status Is Off Hail Request Hail Acknowledge and Preset Dim Refer to the Clear Status Request Bit command for a discussion of how best to implement these advanced X 10 commands This command also resets the preset dim level to 0 Read Current State This command causes the controller to read the module s state ON OFF and level and to transmit it over the serial interface This command can only be issued by a command over the serial port it cannot be included directly in a schedule This allows an external computer or other device to determine the state of a module See the file Serial installed in the application directory for details on the format of this command and the serial data response Set PCS Light Level To This command sets a PCS lighting module directly to the specified level can be any level from 0 to 31 0 means full off and 31 means full on This command is implemented by sending an X 10 Preset Dim command to the appropriate level Unlike most X 10 devices dim and
249. et Row Character Size To PWN Each row on the screen can be set to 1 of 4 sizes The default size is 1 which gives the smallest character size Sizes 2 through 4 increase the character size by the corresponding ratio in both height and width As you increase the size fewer characters will fit on a row and fewer rows will fit on the screen Set Character Blink Ratio To 1 3 Set Character Blink Ratio To 1 1 Set Character Blink Ratio To 3 1 Set Character Blink Off Individual characters on the screen can be made to blink with the Set Character Blink On and Set Character Blink Off commands discussed later All characters which have been set to blink will then blink in unison at the rate of approximately once per second These commands set the ratio of the blinking on time to the off time For example the 1 3 ratio will cause the blinking text to be turned off for 3 times as long as it s on In this case it will be on for 1 4 of a second and off for 3 4 of a second The table below summarizes the three available ratios RATIO ON TIME OFF TIME TOTAL TIME 1 3 1 4 sec 3 4 sec 1 sec 1 1 1 2 sec 1 2 sec 1 sec 3 1 3 4 sec 1 4 sec 1 sec The command Set Screen Blink Off stops all blinking Any characters that have been defined to blink by the Set Character Blink On command will remain on continuously Set Character Blink On Set Character Blink Off Individual characters on the screen can be made to blink This is done by setting the charac
250. ets the OSD to the external video position Sets the video switch to the OSD position Sets the horizontal and vertical screen offsets to their default settings Sets the screen blink ratio to 3 1 Displays video screen 0 which is a blank screen that you can use to create your own screens Clears the video screen You might use this command when you want to display your own custom video screen or other text on top of the incoming video After you perform this command you can immediately start adding text and it will be automatically displayed Stop Video Mode This command performs the following actions Turns the On Screen Display OSD circuit off Sets the video switch to the external video position This is the simplest way to shut off the video screen system when not using it Set Video Switch To External Video Position Set Video Switch To On Screen Display Position The video switch switches the video output jack between the incoming video signal called the external video source and the On Screen Display OSD video source Figure 13 1 shows the operation of the video system and where the video switch fits in In the external position the signal at the video input jack will be fed directly to the video output jack bypassing the OSD You should put the switch into this position when you do not want to display any video screens 130 Chapter 13 Video Output In the On Screen Display position the signal from the OSD
251. ets the internal state level to 16 If the module is already ON the level is unchanged If the module is ON or NEUTRAL this command sends an X 10 Off command and sets the internal state level to 0 If the module is already OFF no action is taken Off This command sends an X 10 Off command regardless of the current module state and sets the internal state level to 0 This command sends an X 10 Dim command unless the module is already ON and at level 0 The first Dim command sent to a module that is OFF or NEUTRAL causes it to go ON at level 16 Dim This command sends an X 10 Dim command regardless of the current module state The first Dim command sent to a module that is OFF or NEUTRAL causes it to go ON at level 16 Dim Times This command sends a specified number X 10 Dim commands but stops sending commands if the level reaches 0 A module that was initially OFF or NEUTRAL will go ON at level 16 with the first Dim command then decrease one level on each subsequent Dim command HF can be between 1 and 23 Although 16 steps should be enough to go to full dim some devices aren t so well behaved A few extra Dim commands may be needed to ensure they go to level 0 Dim Times Slow Force Force Same as Dim Times except that commands are sent at intervals of approximately 0 9 seconds instead of 0 4 seconds Actually what happens is that the house code and unit code is repeated between each Dim command
252. etting for the specified zone to reflect the new setting There are separate setback temperatures for the Heat and Cool modes they are entered in the PC Thermostat Configuration Screen These setback temperatures apply to all zones there are not separate temperatures for each zone This command is usually used to save energy when away from home The Heat mode temperature is set at a fairly low temperature perhaps 60 degrees and the Cool mode temperature is set fairly high perhaps 85 degrees The controller determines the current system mode looks up the setback temperature for that mode and then commands the thermostat to that temperature Chapter 19 Thermostats 223 Raise Zone Temperature 1 Degree Lower Zone Temperature 1 Degree The controller sets the specified thermostat zone from 1 to 16 to 1 degree higher or lower than the current temperature setpoint It also updates its internal system variable Temperature Setting for the specified zone to reflect the new setting Note that these commands only work properly if the controller can keep track of the temperature setting accurately If the controller s status in wrong the commanded temperature will also be wrong For example assume you have an X 10 controller by your bed to send commands to the controller When the controller receives a certain X 10 signal it performs the command Raise Zone 1 Temperature 1 Degree Now assume the thermostat setpoint is 70 degrees an
253. f name X10 A1 Level 10 name X10 A1 Level value 10 name X10 A1 Bright value 4 name X10 A1 PCSLevel 5 name X10 A1 PCSLevel value 5 values can be contained in the value field if desired Server will look for the values in the name field If not found the server will look in the value field is X 10 address house code and unit code Allowable values for COMMAND On Off Bright Dim Level PresetDim HouseUnit FunctionOn FunctionOff FunctionBright FunctionDim FunctionAllLightsOn FunctionAllLightsOff FunctionAllUnits Off PCSLevel DirectToLevel X10Scene LevitonScene is light ID in decimal format 0 255 values can be contained in the value field if desired Server will look for the values in the name field If not found the server will look in the value field name Light 1 On name Light 11 Off name Light 5 Level 50 name Light 5 Level value 50 name Light 6 Bright 25 name Macro 4 name IR 9 1 time name IR 12 10 times Allowable values for COMMAND On Off Bright Dim Level is macro ID in decimal format 0 255 Not used You may enter anything you like is output ID in decimal format 0 255 Not used You may enter anything you like name Output 0 HIGH name Output 12 low Allowable values for COMMAND name Output 15 toggle High Low Toggle is flag ID in decimal forma
254. f this bit is set indicating the light is off If so so whatever you want now that you know the light is off Alternatively you could receive the light s response by checking for a received X 10 sequence that included the Status Is Off signal If X 10 Module Hail Request Bit Is Set This condition will be true if the specified module s house and unit code Hail Request bit is set It will be false if not set A module s Hail Request bit will be set whenever an X 10 Hail Request signal is received over the power line that is addressed to this X 10 module Refer to the Clear Status Request Bit command for a discussion of how best to use this X 10 condition If X 10 Module Hail Acknowledge Bit Is Set This condition will be true if the specified module s house and unit code Hail Acknowledge bit is set It will be false if not set A module s Hail Acknowledge bit will be set whenever an X 10 Hail Acknowledge signal is received over the power line that is addressed to this X 10 module Refer to the Clear Status Request Bit command for a discussion of how best to use this X 10 condition If X 10 Module Preset Dim Bit Is Set This condition will be true if the specified module s house and unit code Preset Dim bit is set It will be false if not set A module s Preset Dim bit will be set whenever an X 10 Preset Dim signal is received over the po
255. f you ve executed a Halt Controller command Safety Tips HomeVision Pro provides many features that can be used to control your home or office building etc If used improperly damage to your home equipment electronics or other items could result Be very careful in how you set up and use the controller Custom Solutions Inc is not responsible for any damage or other consequences that may result from the use of Home Vision Pro e Lamp and appliance modules with polarized plugs must be used only with polarized wall outlets Do not connect appliances or other devices that require a full 110V load to lamp modules Lamp modules or other devices with dimming capability can damage such equipment including TVs and stereos Connect such devices to appliance modules only Do not connect fluorescent lights to lamp modules or other devices with dimming capability as damage may result Do not use wall switches to control electrical outlets as damage to plugged in devices could result Do not use wall switches to control fluorescent lights as damage may result Do not exceed the ratings of any device This includes the controller s input and outputs as well as external devices Turn off power at the circuit breaker or fuse panel before working on electrical outlets Remove power from the controller before opening unit Take care when using the controller to control critical equipment such as security systems air conditioni
256. figuration screen will appear This screen shows the 16 keys that are used in the video screen system Each key has its own Key Code and a label both of which you can edit There is also a Device Code and label The codes and labels will be filled in with the controllers current settings the first time you use it it will contain the default remote settings This screen displays three sets of 16 remote Key Codes each accessed through a set of tabs You ll probably never need to use more than one of these three sets the others allow two additional different remotes to control the video screen system If you programmed your remote to any code other than the default one click on the Select Remote button A dialog box will appear Select your chosen remote from the list in the dialog box and click the OK button This will return you to the previous screen If your remote doesn t appear in this list skip this step The Device and Key Codes for the selected remote will be filled in along with the labels The Device and Key Codes must be sent to the controller so it knows what remote you re using The labels are for your own use Some remotes use different labels and your keys may differ slightly from what those listed For example many remotes don t have a Cancel key Its function may instead be under Clear or Recall You can use the label field to identify which buttons on your own remote are u
257. for zones 1 and 2 because they are the only zones that have a built in time temperature schedule These commands are normally used when the homeowner returns home and wants the thermostat to start running again Set Zone Control Mode to Run Auto Set Zone Control Mode to Hold Off The controller updates its control mode variable for the specified zone from 1 to 16 to indicate the new control mode It does not send any commands to the thermostat When in the Run or Auto control mode the controller will control the thermostat to your time temperature schedule just like a standard programmable thermostat When in the Hold or Off control mode the schedule is not run this acts just like the Hold or Vacation mode on standard thermostats Note that these commands do not send any commands to the thermostat They are usually used in conjunction with other commands For example when you leave home you can use these commands Set Zone 1 Control Mode to Hold Off Set Zone 1 Temperature Back When you return home you d do this Set Zone 1 Control Mode to Run Auto 224 Chapter 19 Thermostats Set Zone 1 to Currently Scheduled Temperature Initialize Zone Thermostat This command initializes the specified thermostat from 1 to 16 This is only applicable to the RCS TX10 B and TX 15B thermostats the command will be ignored if the zone is configured for any other thermostat This command sets the following thermostat sett
258. frared Signals Macros sets of conditions and actions Scheduled Events Periodic Events Video Output displayed on television screen Serial Output to a PC or other device The phone line when using HomeVision Phone Thermostats Security Systems Data Log Weather data The controllers operating modes And more ACTIONS perform hundreds of different tasks many of which change an object Common actions include Transmitting an X 10 signal Transmitting an infrared signal Transmitting data over the serial interface Changing an output port Displaying video data on a TV screen Changing the value of a variable Changing the state of a flag Starting or stopping a timer Changing the operating mode of the controller Executing a macro Controlling a thermostat Controlling a security system And more Actions can also be CONDITIONED That is the actions are only performed if certain conditions are met This is done with If Then Else statements There are more than a hundred conditions that can be specified You use the controller by creating a schedule or program if you prefer The schedule defines what happens i e what actions are performed when any event occurs The wide variety of available events and actions allows you to develop a very powerful home control system 4 Chapter 1 Introduction Creating A Schedule The basic steps in creating a schedule are to Make the necessary electrical connection
259. fter the signal is received If the signal happens to match the standard signal format used by the controller the signals Device Code and Key Code will be displayed in the window If the signal is a different format question marks will be shown in these fields NOTE Several items must be set up properly before the controller can report the signal to the PC The controller must be connected to the proper PC serial communications port and set to the proper baud rate Chapter 3 Quick Start 33 The controller Master Report Mode and the IR Report Mode must be enabled You can verify these are set by opening the Status Screen under the Other menu and clicking on the Read Status button You can enable these modes from the Controller Command screen under the Control menu If these are properly set but the IR control screen still does not report IR signals being received refer to the trouble shooting chapter 12 Setting Up Your Remote To Control The Video Screens The controller uses a set of 16 remote buttons keys to navigate through the built in video screen system You have many options for setting this up as detailed in chapter 14 Infrared Control However this section provides a brief description of how to set a programmable remote to the controller s default setting 1 Open the video IR control configuration screen under the Configure menu This screen displays three sets
260. ftware select the Serial Interface screen under the Configure menu and then select the serial port number assigned to the USB port the number which was indicated in the Windows Device Manager as described above e The Windows operating system will only recognize the USB port and thus the serial port number assigned to it while HomeVision Pro is connected to the PC USB port and is powered up If you open the HomeVision Pro software at other times it will not be able to open the serial port After connecting and powering HomevVision Pro use the Serial Interface screen under the Configure menu to open the port again e When the USB cable is disconnected from the PC or HomeVision Pro is powered down Windows will automatically shut down the USB port If the HomeVision Pro software is running and has the PC serial port opened and it then tries to communicate with HomeVision Pro the software might crash Whether it actually crashes or not is highly dependent upon the Windows software you are running If you have the software running when the USB cable is disconnected or HomeVision Pro is powered down the safest thing is to shut down the software and then restart it after the cable is reconnected and HomeVision Pro is powered up again If you intend to leave HomeVision Pro continuously connected to a running PC it s possible that a power failure that resets HomeVision Pro could disable the PC USB serial port leading to a software crash We rec
261. fy the controller is set up as described in Step 1 Make sure the remote s batteries are OK 4 After the signal is successfully learned it should be tested Click the Load button This loads the signal into a temporary test area in the controller s memory 5 Click the Xmit Test button and the controller will transmit the signal that was loaded into its temporary test memory Aim an external IR transmitter at the device you want to control It should respond to the IR signal If it doesn t try learning the signal again 154 Chapter 14 Infrared Control 6 After you ve verified the signal was learned properly you must save it to one of the defined IR signals Select a signal from the list box under IR Signal To Save To Click Save If you don t have an IR signal defined to save it to you can click New to add one and then save to it 7 Repeat this process for each signal you want to learn 8 Save your schedule file which holds the IR signal format data 9 Load the schedule into the controller Here are some tips for learning remote signals e Aim the remote directly at the IR receiver Holding it at a wide angle will occasionally prevent accurately learning a signal e When using an external IR receiver if you hold the remote too close within a few feet it may overpower the HomeVision Pro circuitry Try holding the remote 5 to 15 feet from the receiver e Ifthe learned signal does not p
262. g commands over the serial interface is described in the Serial file installed in the HomeVision directory These commands are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the appropriate toolbar button The command and selected event are chosen from the pull down list Enable Periodic Event In order to perform actions the event must first be enabled This is normally done from the periodic event summary screen in the PC program However you can also enable or disabled events in the schedule This command enables the event allowing it to be performed Disable Periodic Event In order to perform actions the event must first be enabled This is normally done from the periodic event summary screen in the PC program However you can also enable or disabled events in the schedule This command disables the event preventing it from being performed Do Periodic Event Now This command causes the controller to perform the periodic event actions immediately The event will also continue to occur at its specified rate When this command is executed the actions will be performed even if the event is disabled This provides great flexibility in your schedules because it allows you to use periodic events as macros if you use up all 255 macros Change Event Rate To Every Loop This command sets the rate at which the event is performed to once every loop The controller runs in a simple loop constantly checking for sp
263. ge how the area around each displayed character appears This applies to all text on the screen as a group You cannot set the background for individual characters The options are as follows e When the None mode is selected the space around the characters will display the underlying video This is the default mode of operation and works best when displaying internal video e The Outline mode draws a single pixel wide black border around the text This is useful when overlaying text onto incoming video as it makes the characters stand out better against the video background It is not particularly helpful in the internal video mode e The Square mode displays each character on a black square This is useful when overlaying text onto incoming video as it makes the characters stand out better against the video background When used in the internal video mode the effect is usually not desirable Chapter 13 Video Output 133 e The Solid mode is similar to the Square mode in the appearance of the text However this mode also displays a black border around the entire screen outside the text display area The effects of these different modes can be best understood by experimenting with the video control screen provided in the PC software Display one of the built in screens using the different background settings to see how they work Set Row Character Size To Set Row Character Size To Set Row Character Size To S
264. gnal HomeVision Pro will not recognize it as HomeVision Pro is looking for at least 24 pulses and only 12 are received Adjusting Signal Matching Parameters HomeVision Pro uses a custom algorithm for comparing received signals to learned signals to detect a match Ideally it should always detect a learned signal with 100 reliability and never have a mismatch We have spent considerable time fine tuning the algorithm to work with the many available remotes However this is still in Beta testing and you may find that it doesn t work 100 for you In this case there are several algorithm parameters you can adjust To do this change one or more of the settings on the Controller Settings screen under the Infrared tab The settings are described below CheckOnAndOffTimes Setting Each IR signal consists of a series of IR pulses with gaps between them HomeVision Pro measures the length of each pulse the on time and gap the off time and compares these for the received and learned signal For most remotes the on time and off time of a pulse doesn t matter but the sum of the times does The sum of the times is usually more consistent then the individual on and off times and gives more reliable results When CheckOnAndOffTimes is False the default setting HomeVision Pro only checks the sum of the on time and off time If you find that HomeVision Pro is mismatching certain signals try changing this t
265. gnal is received regardless of its format the IR RX LED near the IR terminal block will blink In addition the green LED on the computer s IR test screen will also blink If the controllers LED blinks but the IR test screen s doesn t verify that everything is set up as described in Step 1 If the received infrared signal follows the standard format the signal s Device Code and Key Code will be displayed If question marks are displayed in the Device and Key Code fields then the signal doesn t follow the standard format Configuring The Controller To Control The Video Screen System Note Your remote must transmit standard signals to automatically control the built in video menu system Learned signals cannot control it actually it can if you use the simulate received IR signal commands but this is fairly complicated and should only be attempted by expert users Once you ve programmed your remote you need to set up the controller to recognize the remote s signals The controller is initially set up to respond to a specific type of remote control device If you program your remote to match this you do not need to configure the controller The initial default remote device is the device listed in the first row of Table 14 1 To set up the controller to use a different remote control proceed as follows 1 Select the video remote control configuration screen from the Configuration menu A con
266. gnal to Double click on any of these three fields e IR Signal Type e Device Code e Key Code All of these call up the IR data screen From there A Select Standard from the signal format list box B Enter the signal s Device Code and Key Code that you recorded earlier in the corresponding text boxes C Click OK to return to the IR signal summary screen 5 Make sure the Transmit Enabled checkbox is set for the signal on the IR signal summary screen This signal has now been set to transmit the specified standard signal and thereby control your equipment 6 Save your schedule file which holds the IR signal format data 7 Load the schedule into the controller Entering IR Signal Actions You can define a set of actions to perform whenever a standard format infrared signal is received To do this e Open the IR Signal screen under the Objects Events menu e Double click on the Actions Defined field of the signal you want The actions entry screen will appear e Enter the actions and conditions then click OK You ll return to the IR signal summary screen e Enable the actions by checking the Actions Enabled field The actions are automatically enabled after you enter them but you re free to enable or disable them at any time e If the selected signal was learned instead of being entered as a standard signal with Device and Key Codes you must enable the controllers
267. h powerful control over your home automation system You can program the controller to run independently of your computer but still be able to execute any command at any time from the computer It s also possible to design a complete automation system running on your computer The computer could decide what to do and when and then issue the appropriate command to the controller The format for transmitting commands to the controller is described in the Serial Protocol file installed in the HomevVision directory By default only serial port 1 supports this standard protocol However you can also configure other ports to use the standard protocol Do this with the Serial tab on the Controller Settings Screen Reading Serial Data From External Devices Overview The controller can read in virtually any format of serial data and take action based on it This serial data is called User Data to distinguish it from the Command Data used to send direct commands to the controller This capability allows the controller to communicate with serial devices such as Security systems Thermostats Weather stations Modems In brief the controller can Read in serial data ASCII and binary Compare the data or any portion of it to a known value with an In Then statement Count the number of received characters and put the number into a variable Convert a number anywhere in the data to a valued and store it in a variable There
268. hange how the page is displayed for example you can change the background color add text and graphics etc Note If you want the password option enabled to restrict outside access but also want to access the server from within your home without entering your name and password you can You do this by enabling the password option then from within your home you include your password in the URL to access the page In the browser window include at the end of the URL the following ACCESS password Replace password with your password For example if your password is abcde and you want to access the web page named HVTableStatus htm the complete URL would look like this HTTP 127 0 0 1 1033 HVTableStatus htm access abcde Note that URLs contained in web page links must also have this text added otherwise when you click on a link you will have to manually enter your name and password when requested For example the default web page HVWebPage htm includes a frame whose source file is HVTableStatus htm You should change it to HVTableStatus htm access abcde That way when you open HVWebPage htm and the server requests the file HVTableStatus htm to fill in the main frame the password will be sent to the server and you won t have to enter it manually You should add the text access abcde at the end of all links within your web pages If you re using the default web pages instal
269. haracter 2 is transmitted so that it will be displayed as the number 2 on a terminal program In ASCII the number 2 is represented as a 1 byte value of 32h 50d In binary form the 8 bits are 00110010 the most significant bit is written first It s these 8 bits that are transmitted over the serial interface When the computer on the receiving end reads the byte it s read as 32h A terminal program will then convert the 32h to its ASCII equivalent character the number 2 and display it a 2 However if you develop your own program and read the byte in as a variable it will be read as 32h 50d not 2 If you intend for it to be a 2 you ll need to convert it from ASCII first This command is useful for transmitting messages to be displayed on a terminal emulation program However since it transmits in ASCII format it can only transmit characters that can be entered with a single keystroke The next command overcomes this limitation and can transmit any value over the serial interface even those that can t be properly displayed on a terminal emulation program NOTE If you want to transmit a binary value in your schedule first set a variable equal to the desired value then perform the command Transmit Variable As 1 Binary Byte described below Transmit Time and Date This command causes the controller to transmit the current time and date in the following format Time 23 04 50 Date 03 05 95 Note that the time is repo
270. haracters both of which must be a number between 0 and 9 a letter between a and f or a letter between A and F The result will be a value between 0 and 255 Put Value Of Received Hex Character At Variable Into Result Value Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface 191 Put Value Of 2 Received Hex Characters At Variable Into Result Value Put Value Of Received Character At Variable Into Result Value Put Value Of 2 Received Characters At Variable Into Result Value Put Value Of 3 Received Characters At Variable Into Result Value These five commands are similar to the five previous commands The difference is that instead of specifying a fixed character location in the serial message you specify a variable When the command runs it will use the variable s value as the character location to start reading from Put Binary Value Of Received Character Into Result Value This command takes the character at the specified location in the serial data string and puts it into the system variable Result Value This command uses the binary value of the character Refer to Appendix B of the User s Manual to convert between binary and ASCII values Here are some examples RECEIVED CHARACTER VALUE PUT IN VARIABLE 65 66 97 50 35 Carriage return 13 n WP Clear Serial Input Buffer This command clears all incoming serial data from the buffer Any message or command coming in will be lost This includes both User Data and Command Data
271. hat these modules might be incompatible with certain X 10 repeaters If you have trouble with them contact the manufacturer Set X 10 Device Directly To Level In Variable This command sets the device directly to the level contained in variable The level can range from 0 to 63 It only works with devices that support the newer X 10 extended codes See the above command Set X 10 Device Directly To Level for more details Include In Scene At Level Chapter 5 X 10 59 This command puts the selected X 10 device into the specified scene at the specified level It only works with X 10 brand devices that support the X 10 extended codes The scene number can be 1 to 4 and the level can range from 0 to 63 Refer to the X 10 Lighting Scenes section for a detailed description Include In Scene At Current Level This command puts the selected X 10 device into the specified scene at whatever level the light is currently at It only works with Leviton brand devices that support the X 10 extended codes The scene number can be 1 to 64 Refer to the X 10 Lighting Scenes section for a detailed description Execute X 10 Type Scene This command tells all X 10 devices in the specified house code to go to the specified scene It only works with X 10 brand devices that support the X 10 extended codes The scene number can be 1 to 4 Refer to the X 10 Lighting Scenes section for a detailed description Execute Leviton Type Scene
272. having communication problems with certain areas in your house If this doesn t solve your problem refer to the X10 debugging tips file installed in the HomeVision directory Appendix A__FCFCC CE Information __A 1 APPENDIX A FCC CE INFORMATION FCC Rules Part 15 Digital Devices The United States Federal Communications Commission has specified that the following notice be brought to the attention of users of this product This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer
273. he actions entry screen of the PC program there are three different buttons on the toolbar for accessing these conditions Time Conditions Button Date Conditions Button Special Time amp Date Conditions Button The conditions available through each button are described below 66 Chapter 6 Time and Date Control Time Conditions These conditions are available from the Time Conditions Button on the actions entry screen toolbar If Time Is HH MM AM PM This condition is true if the current time is exactly equal to the specified time The specified time is entered in hours and minutes Seconds are not used This condition will be true for the entire minute specified while the seconds value is increasing from 0 to 59 If Time Is Before HH MM AM PM This condition is true if the current time is before i e earlier in the day than the specified time The specified time is entered in hours and minutes Seconds are not used If Time Is After HH MM AM PM This condition is true if the current time is after i e later in the day than the specified time The specified time is entered in hours and minutes Seconds are not used Note For sunrise and sunset times the comparison if based on whether it is before or after today s sunrise or sunset Therefore before sunrise is only true between midnight and sunrise and after sunset is only true between sunset and midnight Therefore if you need to know if it s between sunset and sunrise
274. he port a single line into the system variable Result Value After reading the value into Result Value you can transfer it to a variable use it as a condition in an If Then statement or transmit it over the serial interface The 8 bit value is defined as follows Bit 0 Enabled Disabled Status O disabled 1 enabled Bit 1 Current State O low off 1 high on Bits 2 7 Not used all zeros When commanded over the serial interface it puts the current state of the port into the system variable Result Value as described above and transmits it over the serial interface This allows reading of the port state via the serial interface See the section on serial communications for details on the format of this command and the serial data response Set 8 Bit Port X To YYYYYYYY X can refer to either Port A or Port C if Port C is configured as an output This command sets all 8 lines in the port simultaneously YYYYYYYY represents the desired states of the 8 lines with the highest port number being listed first For example Set 8 Bit Port C To 10001111 will set the 8 lines of Port C as follows Port C 1 1 high Port C 2 1 high Port C 3 1 high Port C 4 1 high Port C 5 0 low Port C 6 0 low Port C 7 0 low Port C 8 1 high This command is useful if you re using Port C as an interface to a digital circuit with an 8 bit bus A single command will write a b
275. he security system control screens Click OK At this point you can download your schedule into HomeVision Pro if you like You will then be able to use the security system control screens on the TV menu system Use these screens to verify Home Vision Pro is communicating with the security system properly If the screen reports a communications error here are some things to try e Remove power from the security system then reapply it Verify the serial cable is properly connected between Home Vision Pro and the NX 584 Be sure you have the correct cable type This is a common problem when using serial devices Verify that the NX 584 parameters were set up properly It s quite easy to make a mistake and that may prevent HomeVision Pro from communicating with it Verify the HomeVision Pro serial port is working properly One way to do this is to disconnect the port from the security system and connect it to another serial port on your PC Use the Home Vision Pro software to open that serial port and then view the Terminal Emulator screen The HomeVision Pro serial port should be sending out messages like 0227042D58 These are HomeVision Pro messages requesting data from the security system If you don t see these messages then either Chapter 25 Security Systems 253 the serial port isn t properly configured or the security system settings in the HomeVision Pro software are incorrect If you see unreadable characters the baud
276. he serial interface commands can only write text to the custom screen currently being displayed The text is not stored in the controller If the user changes to another screen the text will be lost If the user wants to view it again the computer would have to send it again The RAM video screens overcomes this problem These are called RAM video screens because the text is actually stored in the controller RAM memory The text can be sent from a computer at any time and stored in the controller Users can then view these screens whenever they want The key to this feature is to have PC software that can obtain data and send it to the controller The HomeVision Pro software can do this to a limited extent as explained later However we re providing this feature in large part so that other software vendors can develop programs that can easily display information on the TV Configuring The RAM Video Screens Before using the RAM video screens you need to tell the controller how many you want to use The controller will then set aside enough RAM to hold them Open the Controller Settings screen under the Configure menu select the Video Settings tab then enter the desired number of screens in the appropriate text box If you re not using these screens enter zero to save memory Chapter 13 Video Output 125 The controller can store up to 32 RAM video screens depending on your schedule size The screens are stored in the same RAM
277. he value of variable number 3 Let s assume its value is 12 The controller will then set variable 12 to the current hour If the value of the variable is not a valid variable number no action will be performed For instance assume that in the previous example you have only 10 variables defined Since variable 12 doesn t exist no action will be performed If variable 3 s value later changes to a valid variable number and the command is executed again it will work properly 98 Chapter 11 _ Variables Variable XXX Variable Variable YYY This command looks up the value of variable YYY and uses it as the ID number of the variable to read Variable XXX is then set to the corresponding value If the value of the YYY variable is not a valid variable number no action will be performed Example Assume the command Variable 2 Variable Variable 3 is executed The controller will first look up the value of variable number 3 Let s assume its value is 12 The controller will then look up the value of variable 12 let s assume its 100 Variable 2 will then be set to 100 This probably seems like a bizarre command with no possible use However it s actually quite handy when used for a look up table The YYY variable is used as a pointer or index into a table of consecutive variables You first set variable YYY to the location in the table that you want to read When you
278. hen power goes out for some time some of your scheduled events that should have occurred will not have been performed You can have the controller catch up with these after power is restored if desired When power is restored after a power failure the controller goes through a power failure recovery process As part of the process it will either skip or catch up each scheduled event that was missed You specify what it should do by setting the Power Fail State of each event on the schedule event summary screen There are two options e Skip The event will not be performed It will occur again at the next scheduled time e Catch Up The controller will perform the scheduled event as part of the recovery process Refer to the Miscellaneous chapter for a detailed description of how this process works Chapter 8 Periodic Events 73 CHAPTER 8 PERIODIC EVENTS Introduction Periodic events are events that occur at a regular rate such as every 5 minutes or every hour Periodic events provide the following features and capabilities Actions can be set to occur each time the periodic event occurs Events can be set for the following rates Every Loop Every 1 Minute Every 5 Minutes Every 15 Minutes Every 1 Hour Every 2 Hours Every 4 Hours Every 8 Hours Rates for the events can be changed from the video screen system by using an infrared remote control They can also be enabled or disabled in the same wa
279. hermostats and serial thermostats RCS X 10 Thermostats To initially configure your thermostat s use the PC software Thermostat Configuration Screen located under the Configure menu You should make the following settings e The number of zones Two zones can be controlled using the built in TV screens and controls e For each zone select the thermostat type Currently TX10 TX10 B TX15 and TX15 B thermostats are supported e Select the X 10 house code for each RCS thermostat e Select the setback temperatures for the Heat and Cool modes These should be energy saving temperatures to use when you re away from home When you perform a setback temperature command in your schedule the controller will use one of these temperatures as the new setpoint depending on whether the system is in the Heat or Cool mode e If either the zone 1 or 2 thermostat is a bi directional thermostat then a status request rate text box will be shown Set it as follows When using the TX10 B enter the frequency at which the controller should read the status from the thermostat When using the TX15 B which has an auto send feature set the request rate to 0 See the section Reading Thermostat Data for more details This screen tells the controller what type of thermostat you have for each zone If you use a thermostat command in your schedule or from the Thermostat Control Screens the controller uses this configuration information to figur
280. hers allow different remotes to control the video screen system The screen shows Key Codes and Description fields for each of the 16 buttons It also shows the Device Code all keys should have the same Device Code but each will have its own Key Code In order for a button on your remote to control the video screens its Device Code and Key Code must be entered in the appropriate fields This screen also has a window that displays information on received infrared signals You can use this to test whether your remote is set up to transmit the proper IR signal This screen can also transmit any of the standard infrared signals You can use this feature if you have a learning remote that requires training Detailed procedures for setting up the controller s infrared transmit and receive capability are provided in the infrared control chapter Thermostat Configuration Screen The controller has built in features to control a two zone Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning HVAC system via the system thermostats Refer to the Thermostats chapter for details Security System Configuration Screen The controller has built in features to control a security system Refer to the Security Systems chapter for details Chapter 2 Software Overview 19 Custom Lighting Configuration Screen The controller can be used to control non X10 lighting systems This screen is used to configure such systems Refer to the Custom Lighting
281. his timeout feature Select the method to use from the Controller Settings screen under the Configure menu Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface 181 Serial ports 3 and 4 are always terminated by a carriage return Optionally they can also be terminated by a timeout of variable duration You can select whether to use the optional timeout feature and specify the desired timeout period in the Expansion Boards Configuration screen under the Configure menu Note that all the serial ports have a maximum received message length 254 characters for port 1 64 characters for the other ports If the limit is reached before the message is terminated by one of the above methods it will be immediately terminated as there is no more room to store the incoming data How to Receive Serial Data You may be asking yourself All these serial commands and conditions are great but just how do use them to read in serial data The first thing to think about in setting up your system is WHEN the data will come into the controller There are two general possibilities 1 Data comes into the controller only in response to commands issued from the controller An example is when you request the temperature setting from a thermostat and it responds by sending serial data Another example is when you send an ARM command to a security system and it responds with OK This type of data is called Expected Serial Data since you issued the command and you kno
282. hook conditions Detects and counts phone rings Can answer and hang up the phone Works with phones inside and outside the house Serial port capabilities RS 232 serial port standard PC serial port Supports baud rates of 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 Uses standard communication settings of 8 data bits 1 start bit 1 stop bit and no parity Does not use flow control Connects to HomeVision Pro through provided ribbon cable RS 232 connections through male DB9 connector Your software can use this serial port just like the built in HomeVision Pro serial ports with a few minor exceptions as described in the HomeVision Phone Serial documentation HomeVision Phone CID This device adds phone interfacing and caller ID capabilities to HomeVision Pro The phone capabilities are the same as HomeVision Phone Serial It also detects caller ID information from the phone line for display on TV It does not provide an extra serial port Chapter 25 Security Systems 251 CHAPTER 25 SECURITY SYSTEMS Overview HomeVision Pro can be used with the CADDX NetworX line of security systems When used with such a system HomeVision Pro provides the following capabilities e HomeVision Pro can arm or disarm the system switch between Home and Away modes bypass zones turn the keypad chime mode on and off and more e HomeVision Pro can track the status of the security system detect alarm conditions detect zone trouble conditions and
283. ial port If yours does you can set the controller to 2400 baud also However you will lose the speed advantage of a faster modem There are several possible ways to get a higher speed Some modems allow you to change the default serial port DTE rate This is usually done using S register 23 Refer to your modem s owner manual for setting a higher baud rate If you do this then set the controller to the same baud rate 19 200 is recommended Other modems default to using the same baud rate as the baud rate of the last command sent to it over the serial interface They remember the rate even if power goes out If you have this type of modem configure it using the same baud rate as you will have the controller set to For example assume you want to run the controller at 19 200 baud for the fastest possible speed Before you configure the modem as described earlier set your computer s serial port baud rate to 19 200 When you finish configuring the modem by sending the amp W command the modem will store the current baud rate also Then every time it powers up it will default to 19 200 baud matching the controller If your modem does not remember the baud rate after a power outage and you can t change its default baud rate you have one more option to get higher than 2400 baud This involves having the controller periodically set the attached modem to match the controller s baud rate This requires you to create a periodic event in the s
284. ialize the serial port 3 control chip This resets it to the correct baud rate and duplex mode Most users would never use this command it s provided for the rare cases where a user desires a way to reinitialize the port without doing a complete controller reset Re Initialize Serial Port 4 Same as previous command but for serial port 4 Controller Conditions The following controller conditions can be checked by an If Then or If Then Else statement If Master Report Mode Enabled Condition is true if the master report mode is enabled false if it is disabled If Master Report Mode Disabled Condition is true if the master report mode is disabled false if it is enabled If IR Receive Function Enabled Condition is true if the IR receive function is enabled false if it is disabled If IR Receive Function Disabled Condition is true if the IR receive function is disabled false if it is enabled If X 10 Receive Function Enabled Condition is true if the X 10 receive function is enabled false if it is disabled If X 10 Receive Function Disabled Condition is true if the X 10 receive function is disabled false if it is enabled If Input Port Function Enabled 168 Chapter 15 Controller Functions If If EE If If If If If LE Condition is true if the input port function is enabled false if it is disabled Input Port Function Disabled Condition is true if the input port function is disabled fals
285. ideo screens Read the text file Video Screens installed in the application directory to get updated information on the available screens and their use Display Caller ID Screen On Solid Background This command starts the video screen system on a solid background and displays the caller ID information The data is displayed on rows 9 through 11 of the screen as in this example Phone call from John Doe 407 555 1234 132 Chapter 13 Video Output Display Caller ID Screen On External Video Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set Set This command starts the video screen system and overlays the caller ID information on top of the incoming video See the previous command for more information Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Default Screen Screen Screen Screen Screen Screen Screen Screen Background Background Background Background Background Background Background Background To To To To To To To To Black Blue Green Cyan Red Magenta Yellow White When you re displaying text over internal video a solid background you can choose from one of eight background colors When you first set the OSD to internal mode either with the Start Video Screen System Start Internal Video Mode or the Set OSD To Internal Video Background command the background will be set to its default color This command sets the default co
286. iginal versions The HVWebPage htm page also contains a frame named main frame This is the largest frame and is where all the HomeVision Pro status information and control buttons are located HVIndex htm contains links that determine what information to display in the main frame For example if you study the HVIndex htm file you ll see links such as lt A REF HVTableFlag htm target main frame gt Flags lt A gt These HTML tags tell the browser to display the specified file HVTableFlag htm for example in the frame named main frame The HTML files such as HVTableFlag htm and HVTableVar htm do not exist in the HomeVision HTML directory Instead the HomeVision Pro software will create them on the fly The software will use the information in the currently opened schedule to display the specified information The information is generally presented in a table with one line used for each object For example if you have 20 flags defined the table will list the 20 flags by name It will also contain fields to display the flag status and control buttons to change them The basic format for these pages is specified in the HTML file named HVMainFormat htm If you read this file you ll see the text InsertStatusHere in the middle of some standard HTML code The HomeVision Pro software will replace this with the table containing the desired 262 Chapter 26 Web Server data You can edit this file to c
287. igure menu If the port will not open shut down all other applications and try again If it still won t open reboot your computer If it still won t open there is a problem with your computer e Verify the proper computer serial port is selected e Verify the computer baud rate is correct Try each of the baud rate settings on the serial port configuration screen one at a time and see if the computer can communicate with the controller Verify the serial cable is connected and the connectors are properly mated and secured Reboot your computer and try again There may be a problem with the serial port Try a different PC serial port Try a different serial cable If none of these solve the problem either the controller or the computer s serial port is defective Message received OK The computer is receiving serial transmissions from the controller OK Now check transmissions to the controller In the top box on the terminal emulator screen enter G00 these are zeros not the letter O then press the ENTER key The controller should respond with the following message that should appear on the terminal emulator screen Cmd 17 Done Did this message appear a No Try the following Verify the serial cable connectors are properly mated and secured Reboot your computer and try again There may be a problem with the serial port Try a different PC serial port Try a different serial cable If none of these solve th
288. in a few minutes This accuracy is maintained throughout the year This is in contrast to some other home controllers that can be off by 30 minutes or more at various times of the year The controller automatically adjusts for daylight savings time However you can disable this if you live in an area that doesn t use it European users should check the European daylight savings time option Europe uses a different start date than the United States which determines the standard daylight savings time dates The U S dates are based on the new 2007 standard Click the View Data button on this screen to see your sunrise and sunset times for each day of the year Input Output Port Configuration Screen The controller has three sets of ports each with 8 lines signals Port A output only Port B input only Port C input or output This configuration screen is used to configure port C as an input or output You should set this properly before connecting any devices to this port WARNING Do not set port C to an output if you have any devices connected that might be damaged by being driven to ground or 5 volts The default condition for port C is as an input which is the safest condition See the chapter on input output ports for details on using these ports Chapter 2 _ Software Overview 17 Controller Time Date Configuration Screen This screen is used to set the time and date of the controller not the PC Three buttons
289. infrared signals Events include scheduled events periodic events serial port events phone events security system events and the power failure recovery event These screens are used to create view and edit these items The summary screens also take you to the action entry screen where you define what actions you want to perform when an event associated with the item occurs This is where you ll be doing most of your work Control This menu opens control screens that give you direct control of HomeVision Pro s functions There are control screens for X 10 infrared signals input output ports video functions and more To operate these the controller must be connected to the serial port Some of these also require that a schedule to be loaded in order to work while others can be used without a loaded schedule Other This menu provides access to miscellaneous screens that provide infrared signal learning and testing status information and other features Advanced This menu opens some advanced screens that are used to provide special enhanced functions Help This menu provides access to the software help system You can also access context sensitive help by pressing the function 1 F1 key from any screen However the help system is for the HomevVision controller and has not been updated for HomeVision Pro Please refer to this manual for the HomeVision Pro information 10 Chapter 2 Software Overview Program Screen Descr
290. ing codes CODE SHIFT CTRL CONTROL Yl 5 IRS RS Is YO I I 5 I OI TT 7 Tm mm om 4 7 Olo NID oOo Ri O h me Re ee RP MM He Me m i e To specify that any combination of SHIFT CTRL and ALT should be held down while several other keys are pressed enclose the code for those keys in parentheses For example to specify to hold down SHIFT while E and C are pressed use EC To specify to hold down SHIFT while E is pressed followed by C without the SHIFT use EC e To specify repeating keys use the form key number You must place a space between key and number For example RIGHT 20 means press the RIGHT ARROW key 20 times Example As an example use the Serial Command Test screen located under the Other menu From the dropdown list select and run Run program notepad exe Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface 197 The NotePad application should run and it s main will window appear it s now the active window Click back on the HomeVision Pro application to activate it then select and run Activate window NotePad This should bring the NotePad window to the front Click back on HomeVision Pro It s difficult to demonstrate sending keystrokes here because you have to activate HomeVision Pro to enter the command so the keystrokes will be sent to HomeVision Pro instead of NotePad However we can get around this by entering two commands in one Type in the text box and run it Activa
291. ing on a PC send data to the HomeVision Pro controller One way to do this is with Dynamic Data Exchange which is discussed elsewhere Another method is with the use of text files containing data If a program can create a data file in the proper format the HomeVision Pro controller can send a serial command to the PC which is running the HomeVision Pro software telling it to read the file and load the data into the controller The data can be loaded into HomeVision Pro variables or weather condition variables which hold weather information For example if you have a weather station or weather program that can output the data periodically into a comma separated value file you will be able to read the data into the controller and display it on the TV screen The rest of this section describes how to use this capability There are three basic steps required 1 Setup another PC program to create a comma delimited text file 2 Create a configuration file that tells HomeVision Pro the text file format i e what data is contained in each field 3 Set up HomeVision Pro to send a serial command to the PC requesting the text file be read and its data be loaded into the controller Step 1 Set Up Other Program Any program you wish to use must be able to output data into a comma separated value CSV file The required format for this file will be described in the next section However the process for configuring other programs t
292. ingle supply 6 Connect your inputs and outputs to the appropriate IO 808I connectors 7 In the software open the Expansion Board Configuration Screen located under the Configure menu Select the Sylva I O Boards tab then place a checkmark next to the board s installed Select the Expansion Port option IO 8081 485 Setup The IO 8081 485 boards connect through an RS 485 serial port port 3 or 4 It is also possible to connect them to port 1 or a HomeVision Phone Serial port if you use a RS 232 to RS 485 converter but this is more complicated The following steps assume you re using one of the built in RS 485 ports 1 From the Expansion Board option under the Configure menu select the Other tab and configure the selected serial port as follows e 9600 baud this is what the 1O 8081 485 boards use e Timeout None e Half duplex 485 two wire mode 2 From the Expansion Board option under the Configure menu select the Sylva I O Boards tab and configure the Sylva board s as follows e Check each board that you are using e Select the Serial Port option for the Board connection method Chapter 21__ Expansion Boards 237 e Select the serial port the board s will be connected to all boards connect to the same port 3 Set the configuration jumpers on the IO 8081 485 board as follows e Remove the RS 485 termination jumper e Remove jumper J1 which causes a 4ms delay i
293. ings Enable Preset Dim Command Mode sends Preset Dim level 18 command Disable Ack Message Mode sends Preset Dim level 21 command Disable Echo Command Mode sends Preset Dim level 23 command Disable Safe Command Mode sends Preset Dim level 25 command Disable Unit Code On Off Mode sends Preset Dim level 17 commana Enable Auto Send Mode sends Preset Dim level 26 command ignored by TX10 B NOTE These Preset Dim levels are 1 number smaller than that shown in RCS s documentation This is because RCS numbers the levels as 1 to 32 while HomeVision Pro numbers them 0 to 31 You typically have to initialize the TX10 B thermostat only once You can do it by putting this command in a macro then running the macro from the Macro Control Screen However some users like to periodically initialize the thermostat to ensure it s set properly If you wish to do this we recommend you do it with a scheduled event set to run in the middle of the night maybe 3 00 AM This way the X 10 signals probably won t interfere with any others Note that the TX15 B may lose it s auto send setting after a power failure Therefore we recommend you perform this command in your power failure recovery event and also in a periodic event running every few hours to ensure the correct setting Request Zone Current Temperature Report Request Zone Temperature Setting Report Request Zone System Mode Report Request Zone Fa
294. ins some semi custom entries that you can Chapter 13 Video Output 119 enable and disable Page 4 is a custom screen where you can create six entries of your own You can use page 4 to perform your own macros or to take you custom screens that you create yourself Object List Screens These screens list the objects in your schedule in the order of their ID numbers There are separate screens for X 10 IR signals scheduled events periodic events input ports output ports macros flags variables and timers The screens list either 4 or 8 objects at a time displaying their names and other information You can scroll through them to view their status and make changes Pressing an object s number key on your remote takes you to the object control screen Object Control Screens These screens allow you to make changes to or control the selected object For instance you can Execute a macro Change the state of a flag or the value of a variable Start stop or reload a timer Transmit an X 10 or infrared signal Control an output port Change the time of a scheduled event Change the rate of a periodic event Enable or disable X 10 actions IR signal actions input output ports and scheduled and periodic events These object control screens are organized as menus allowing you to easily select the desired action Some actions will take you to another screen where you enter more detail such as the new time for
295. installed in the HomeVision directory These commands are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the appropriate toolbar button The command and selected variable s are chosen from the pull down list Standard Variable Commands Variable XXX Sets variable XXX to the constant value When you enter this command in a schedule you select the specific variable XXX from a pull down list When you send this command over the serial interface the variable is referred to by its ID number 0 to 255 can be any integer between 0 and 255 Variable XXX Variable YYY Puts the value of variable YYY into variable XXX Variable XXX Random Number This command generates a random number between 0 and 255 inclusive and puts it into variable XXX Variable XXX Result Value Puts the value of the system variable Result Value into variable XXX See the Miscellaneous chapter for a detailed description of Result Value Result Value will contain different values depending on the previously executed command Math Commands Increment Variable XXX Stop At 255 Increments i e adds 1 to variable XXX until it reaches 255 The value of XXX increases by one each time this command is executed until 255 is reached If the initial value before executing the command is 255 it will not increment Further increment commands will n
296. introduces some of the terminology used in this manual and in the PC software program e Chapter 2 describes the PC software program and its many screens e Chapter 3 provides a Quick Start process to get the controller initially set up and checked out It also serves as a brief demo of the controller s capabilities e Chapter 4 provides an overview of how you enter actions and conditions in essence this is the programming language that defines how the controller works for you e Chapters 5 27 provide detailed information on each of HomeVision Pro s objects and interfaces Each chapter provides An overview Descriptions of all available commands to perform actions Descriptions of all available conditions for use in If Then statements Physical connection information for input output ports video interface etc Details on how to use the objects And more e Chapter 28 provides trouble shooting suggestions Checking For Updated Information After installing the computer software as described in chapter 2 please read the Read Me and New Info files They contain important information We are constantly adding new features that may not be covered in this manual These will be discussed in these files Also see our web site as http www csi3 com homevis2 htm for the latest software and lots more useful information Most of the information there is for the Home Vision controller but almost
297. ints The output port is always in one of two states e When turned on the output is high the relay in on e When turned off the output is low the relay in off Port A Description Port A contains a total of 24 terminal block positions for connecting to the relays The terminal blocks are located along the right side of the board Each relay has three positions that you can wire to e Common C This position is connected to the Normally Closed position when the relay is off It is connected to the Normally Opened position when the relay is on e Normally Closed NC This position is connected to the Common position when the relay is off It is disconnected from everything when the relay is on e Normally Opened NO This position is connected to the Common position when the relay is on It is disconnected from everything when the relay is off The following drawings show how this works Relay Off Relay On Output Low Output High Port A Relay Electrical Characteristics The relays are rated for 10 Amps at 125 VAC 6 Amps at 277 VAC and 5 Amps at 100 VDC Chapter 12 Input and Output Ports 103 Port B Digital Inputs Port B provides 8 inputs that are protected up to 30V They are digital inputs because they are read as a one or zero i e in one of two possible states They contain pull up resistors allowing them to be directly connected to switch closure inputs There are also swit
298. ion Pro PC software will read the file in At this point the software knows the format of your custom data file It is now ready to read it in and load the contents into the Home Vision Pro controller Step 3 Send Serial Command To Read In File To command a data file to be read enter a serial interface command in your schedule to transmit the following ASCII text Read data file filename txt Replace filename txt with the complete name of the text file containing the data you want to read This file must be located in the same directory as the HomeVision Pro application To read a file located in another directory enter the full path name between double quotes like this Read data file c weather station data filename txt When the HomevVision Pro PC software receives this serial command it will read the specified file and load the data into HomeVision Pro variables It uses the field definitions in the configuration file to determine where to load each variable Note the following about how this works e The text file must be in comma separated values format as described previously e Spaces and tabs in the file will be ignored e If there are multiple lines in the file only the last line is used This is assumed to be the most recent reading e f you have a data file that is created or updated regularly you may use a periodic event to read the data Reading it every 5 minutes will ensure the Home Vision Pro variables are ke
299. ion Pro software will then run just as if it had received that ASCII command over the serial interface Receiving Data From Other Serial Ports On A PC As discussed above the controller can send data to the PC via the serial interface and have the data forwarded to another serial port This requires that the controller first send a serial command to the PC to open the desired serial port as described above While this port called the user comm port is open any data received by it will also automatically transmitted to the controller Thus the controller has two way communications capability with both the HomeVision Pro software on the PC and the user comm port Sending Messages To The PC For Display The controller can send text messages to the PC for display in a message window The window will show the message along with its date and time based on the computer s clock This can assist in debugging your schedule and for alerting the computer user to important events This requires that the controller be connected to the computer s serial port and that the HomeVision Pro application be running on the computer The message window is accessed with the View Messages command under the Other menu In addition the first time the PC receives a message from the controller it will open this window automatically To send a message to the PC enter a serial interface command in your schedule to transmit the following ASCII text Display m
300. ions were used in writing this manual The term controller is often used This refers to the HomeVision Pro control unit box itself not the PC software When we write PC software or software or PC program we re referring to the Window based program running on your PC Schedule refers to the disk file that contains all your settings objects conditions and actions This schedule is loaded into the controller and the controller runs your house according to this schedule Your actions and conditions are listed on the actions entry screen Example actions and conditions in this manual will be shown using a unique font as follows Transmit IR signal 3 TV Power one time The examples may not necessarily be shown exactly as the PC software would display them The PC software is constantly being updated and the wording could be changed slightly to clarify the meaning This should not present any problems because you don t enter commands by typing the text anyway Instead you use the mouse to click on command buttons and select objects from pull down lists The PC software then automatically generates the text to describe the command Numeric format Most of the data used by the controller is comprised of a single byte Each byte contains 8 bits and can ranges in value between 0 and 255 Throughout this manual values will be written in three different formats decimal hexadecimal and binary Suffixes wi
301. ious IR signal formats and how to use them Serial Command Test Screen The HomeVision Pro software can play wave sound files and run other programs on your PC It can also write text to a file on the PC The commands to so this are sent from the controller to the PC via the serial interface You can use this screen to simulate a serial command and test it This way you can be sure the command will work when you send it from the controller Refer to the Serial Interface chapter for details on the available commands Status Screen This screen provides information on the current schedule and the controller s current operating modes One tab displays information about the current state of the controller e To read the current state of the controller click the Read Status button The display is only updated when you click this button it does not update automatically e One section shows which operating modes are enabled To change a mode use the Controller Command screen under the Control menu e Another section shows which reporting modes are enabled These determine which events the controller will report over the serial interface To change a mode use the Controller Command screen under the Control menu e The third section shows other information about how the controller is operating The following data is provided File Name Date and Time This shows which schedule file was last loaded into the contr
302. iply the value by 0 01961V To determine the value that corresponds to a particular input voltage multiply the voltage by 51 the reciprocal of 0 01961 The table below shows several input voltages and how they will be read 0 000 O0 ey miju Software Configuration To configure the analog inputs select Analog Inputs from the Objects Events menu For each input you can enter the following 230 Chapter 20 Other Inputs e Name e Description e Gain and Offset Value These values are used to automatically adjust the analog input voltage value One major use is to convert the raw value read in 0 to 255 to a more meaningful value like temperature in degrees F This often requires multiplication or addition and can be accomplished with the gain and offset values If you re unsure of how to use these values simply leave them at their default settings The controller multiples the input value 0 255 by the gain then adds or subtracts the offset value Mathematically Final value Input Value X Gain Offset Value where e The gain can range from 0 to 2 55 in increments of 0 01 The default value is 1 e The offset voltage can range from 127 to 128 The default value is 0 Note If the result of this calculation is greater than 255 it is set to 255 If the result is less than O it is set to 0 Example Assume Gain 2 00 Offset value 30 Input voltage 1V The controller reads the 1V i
303. iptions Most of the program s screens are self explanatory and will not require much time to learn This section describes some of the more complex screens There are six main types of screens Object event summary screens The action entry screen Configuration screens Control screens Advanced screens Other screens Object Event Summary Screens These screens are used to create view and edit objects and events They are accessed with the pull down menu Objects Events There are separate screens for each of the following items X 10 Modules Flags Variables Timers Input Ports Output Ports Analog Inputs Infrared Signals Macros Scheduled Events Periodic Events Custom Lights Power Failure Recovery Phone Event when using HomeVision Phone Serial Data Input Common Features Each screen is slightly different but they have a number of common features They list all of the currently defined items in table format You can add delete or edit items You can have up to 255 of each item type except for input and output ports which are fixed at 8 or 16 and X 10 modules where there are always 256 You cannot delete an item if it s the last one as there must be at least one of each type You can assign names to each item This makes your schedule easier to read In addition the names can be shown on your TV screen if you use the video screen system however only the first 16 characters of the name can be
304. irectory These commands are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the appropriate toolbar button The command and selected X 10 module are chosen from the pull down list This section provides an overview of the various types of commands Following this are detailed descriptions of each command Standard X 10 Commands That Transmit X 10 Signals This group of commands causes the controller to transmit X 10 signals over the power line The basic X 10 commands include On Off Brighten and Dim However the controller also supports a wide variety of additional commands These X 10 commands can be broken into three major groups 1 The first group of commands transmit X 10 signals unless until the X 10 module reaches a certain state These commands are On Off Dim Dim Times Brighten Brighten Times Set To Level 48 Chapter 5 X 10 Before transmitting these commands the controller checks the current state of the module If the module is in a state where the command would have no effect the command will not be sent For example if a module is OFF when an OFF command is encountered in a schedule No Off command will be sent over the power line Similarly an ON command will not be sent to a module already ON and a Brighten command will not be sent to a module already ON at Level 16 the maximum level This procedure minimizes transmissions over the power line Sending a command to a module th
305. is available for the data log The command Write variable to data log is used to write data into the log Any or all of the data log can be transmitted out in ASCII or binary format You can check the amount of free space in the log in an If Then statement Data Logging Commands The following data logging commands can be included in a schedule They are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the Other toolbar button then selecting Data Log from the pop up menu They can also be issued to the controller over the serial interface The format for sending commands over the serial interface is described in the Serial file installed in the HomeVision directory Write Clear Reset Variable To Data Log Writes the value of variable to the next spot in the data log then advances the data log pointer to the following location If the data log is full the data will not be written and error number 125 will occur this error will not affect the controller s operation To prevent this error you can check that there is space available in the log before performing this command Data Log Clears the entire data log by writing zeros to each byte This command does not reset the data log pointer Data Log Pointer To Start Of Log Resets the data log pointer to the first location in the data log giving it a value of zero You would normally do this after reading the data log Transmit Data Log P
306. is recommended approach may surprise you The first idea that probably comes to your mind is something like this Serial Transmit Report Current Temperature Wait 0 00 00 50 with timer 0 Thermostat Timer Then If Serial Input Character Numbers 1 15 are Temperature is Then Put Value Of 2 Received Characters 16 17 Into Result Value Var 0 Current Temperature Result Value Else We didn t get the expected response You might want to try again or just leave End If End Wait However with this approach the wait timer must wait long enough for the complete response to come it If not the If Then Else statement will be false and the temperature won t be read Figuring out how long to wait can be tricky You have to wait long enough for the serial transmission to go out and for the response itself e f you happened to send a lot of other serial transmissions just prior to running these commands the serial output buffer could contain up to 256 characters ALL of these would have to be transmitted before the command Report Current Temperature would go out Under worst case conditions you could have to wait for 282 characters to be transmitted 256 in the buffer plus the 26 in Report Current Temperature The response is 17 more If the port speed is 2400 baud it will transmit 240 CHARACTERS per second 282 characters will take 1 175 seconds e Then it will take some time for the thermostat to begin its response You must
307. ision directory describes how to use this capability Object Names The video screen system allows you to display information about many object types on your TV You can also display the object s name if you ve loaded it into the controller In creating your schedule you can give names up to 30 characters long to all objects However the controller is limited to storing 512 names of 16 characters each Each of the object summary screens contains a Load Name field This specifies whether or not the item s name should be loaded into the controller Initially you should probably leave this field enabled checked Chapter 27 Miscellaneous 283 and load all your object names If you ever reach the 512 name limit you can selectively disable loading of the names you won t be using often You can see how many names are set to be loaded with the status screen under the Other menu As noted above the PC software can handle names of 30 characters but the controller can only store the first 16 characters of each name Subsequent characters will be ignored If you want the name to be clear when viewed on the video screen make the first 16 characters descriptive and unique by themselves Power Failure Recovery Process The controller is designed to automatically recover from a power failure It can also catch up your house to where it would have been if the power hadn t gone out It does this by keeping track of the actions
308. it Timer but not as both in your schedule Standard Timers In the standard mode the timer simply counts down to zero When it reaches zero it stops running and begins ringing Actions will be performed when the timer expires if they were defined in the Timer Summary Screen The following command will set the timer to be a Standard Timer It will load it with the specified value and start it counting down Load Timer XXX With HH MM SS SS And Start To enter this command 1 Wherever in your schedule you want to start the timer running click the Timer button on the actions entry screen toolbar 2 Select Load Timer XXX With HH MM SS SS And Start 3 Select the timer you want to use from the timer name list 4 Enter the initial timer value hours minutes seconds and centiseconds hundredths of seconds 5 Click OK A Standard Timer can be used in two general ways 1 You can check the current state of the timer at any point in your schedule and perform conditional actions based on the result Chapter9 Timers and Delays 79 2 You can configure the timer to automatically perform a set of actions when it expires starts ringing This is the more typical use With this approach you never need to check the timer in your schedule although you can if you want to You define the actions as described in the following section Entering Standard Timer Actions When you use a standard timer y
309. items available We use the term modules to refer to any device which can receive or transmit X 10 signals Controller X 10 Operation The controller constantly monitors the AC power line in your home checking for X 10 signals It uses the TW 523 or equivalent Two Way Power Line Interface device The controller maintains an internal table that keeps track of the current state of all X 10 devices Whenever an X 10 signal is detected by the TW 523 the controller updates the state table to reflect the new state The controller also updates the table whenever it transmits an X 10 signal The controller always keeps track of all 256 house unit codes regardless of which ones you use Two separate parameters are tracked 42 Chapter 5 X 10 ON OFF Status All devices are either ON or OFF Devices that are ON will also have a level of 0 to 16 Devices that are OFF will have their level set to 0 e Level Many lights and lamp modules can be dimmed to levels between full on and full off The controller keeps track of the current level by assigning it a number from 0 to 16 Level 16 is full on Lower values represent decreasing brightness levels Modules that cannot be dimmed will always have a level of 16 when on In some situations the controller will not be able to accurately track an X 10 device For example if someone manually turns the light on or off the controller will not Know about it There are some two way X 10 devices th
310. itted as three bytes with leading zeros for value less than 100 188 Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface For a comparison of the three variable formats consider transmitting a variable that contained the value 106d 6Ah The table below shows the data that would actually be transmitted and how it would be displayed on a terminal emulation program that was expecting ASCII characters COMMAND BYTE S TRANSMITTED AS DISPLAYED 1 Binary Byte 6Ah J 2 Hex Bytes 36h 41h 6A 3 Decimal Bytes 31h 30h 36h 106 Transmit Variable As ASCII Bytes Without Leading Zeros This is similar to the previous command but leading zeros are omitted Here s how the variable values would be transmitted A variable value of 145 145 A variable value of 31 31 A variable value of 4 4 A variable value of 0 0 Transmit Timer As 4 Binary Bytes Transmits the value of timer number as 4 binary bytes The byte order is Centiseconds hundredths of a second Seconds Minutes Hours This command is most appropriate for transmitting data to a program that can receive the full range of values from 0 to 255 If you simply want to display data using a terminal emulation program you should use the following command instead Transmit Timer As 8 Hex Bytes Transmits the value of timer number as 8 hex bytes Each of the four time values is transmitted as two bytes in hex ASCII format The value order is Centiseconds hundredths of a secon
311. ize the chance of unauthorized users accessing your system If this option isn t enabled users have complete access to the server and HomeVision Pro without entering a user name or password You might disable this if you re using the server on a local area network within your home or only on the same PC as the server where you re not worried about unauthorized use When the password option is enabled Chapter 26 _Web Server 261 and you first access a web page you will be requested to enter your user name and password After that you don t have to reenter it unless you wait more than five minutes between accesses in which case you will have to reenter it User name and password If you require a password you will need to enter the user name and password Using The Web Pages With A Browser In order to access the web pages the HomeVision Pro software must be running and the web server started If the server is not running you will not be able to access it remotely The schedule file loaded in the controller should also be opened in the PC software If not the server will not properly display the object names and status Once the server is running you can access the main HomeVision Pro web page by opening this URL in your browser HTTP IPAddress PortNumber HVWebPage htm Replace IPAddress with the IP address of the computer that HomeVision Pro is running on If you re running the browser on the same PC as Hom
312. king before going further Here s a suggested order Read at least the first three chapters of this manual They will give you an overview of how the controller works You can then refer to the later chapters for more details as you need to Connect the controller and make sure it s working properly Verify the X 10 interface is functioning Learn the basics of scheduled events flags variable timers and lf Then statements Load the example schedule included on the CD and see how it works Create and load a simple schedule of your own Add to it as you go along Learn how the video output works and get it hooked up Learn how the two way infrared capability works First set the controller up so your remote control can be used as an input Then teach the controller your remotes so it can control your TV stereo etc Hook up the digital inputs and outputs as you need them Continue to add to your schedule or change it as you need to Chapter 1__ Introduction 5 If you re in a real hurry to get started and are familiar with home control systems and typical programming concepts you could jump to the Quick Start chapter and start setting the controller up However if you run into problems go back and read the relevant parts of this manual We tried to make everything as self explanatory as possible but the controller has so many capabilities that the manual will still be needed Manual Conventions Several convent
313. l csi csi3 com Contents CONTENTS ii Contents Contents iii Advanced X 10 Commands PCS Lighting Commands iV Contents Contents V Vi Contents Contents vii RS 485 Four Wire Full Duplex Mode RS 485 Two Wire Half Duplex Mode viii Contents Contents ix X Contents Contents xi xii Contents X 10 Noise Interference Problems APPENDICES APPENDIX A APPENDIX B APPENDIX C Chapter 1__ Introduction 1 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Welcome to HomeVision Pro and the exciting world of advanced home automation HomeVision Pro provides many powerful yet easy to use features Among these e Video output displays menus and control screens on your TV You can even create your own screens to control your house or display messages e Infrared receive capability so you can control HomeVision Pro and your whole house from your own remote control e Infrared transmit capability to control TVs stereos etc e Two way X 10 communication to control and monitor lights appliances thermostats etc Received X 10 sequences can trigger events e Eight single pole double throw relays to drive external solenoids motors etc e Eight digital inputs for direct connection of switch closure type devices such as switches and relay contacts or external voltage sources Allows direct connections of most alarm sensors e Eight bi directional I O ports As inputs they can connect
314. l device Here are some suggestions Select a remote that has at least the following buttons keys The number keys 0 to 9 Channel up and down Volume up and down Two other keys ideally they would be labeled Enter and Clear or Cancel These 16 keys are used to control the video screen system They don t have to match these exactly as you can assign the functions to any keys However remotes with these buttons will make it easier for you to remember which button does what e If you want to use one remote to control both your TV and HomeVision Pro choose a remote that can control two different TVs Use one of these for your TV the other as the input to the controller If possible use the TV function to control HomeVision Pro An auxiliary function is also OK if you can set it to the TV codes Since the video screen system requires the channel and volume keys it works best when set to the TV device This is because of the way most remotes handle the other devices like VCRs and cable boxes When you select one of these devices on the remote the volume keys are normally not affected Instead they continue to control the TV volume even though the other buttons now control the VCR or cable box Therefore you cannot reassign these keys to a different code for the controller as they ll still be controlling your TV 2 Select a device code Chapter 14 Infrared Control 145 3 e Preprogrammed remot
315. l interface reporting mode is enabled Then remove and then reapply power to the controller When power is restored the controller will transmit a serial message The modem s receive LED usually labeled RD will flash briefly If it doesn t then the modem is not connected properly 2 Include in your schedule the following commands 288 Chapter 27 Miscellaneous Serial transmit ATM2L2H1 Serial transmit Carriage return and line feed These commands will cause the modem to go off hook pick up the phone line Put them somewhere you can easily trigger them such as in an X 10 signal event Then trigger the event and verify the phone goes off hook Remove power from the modem to hang up If the modem doesn t pick up the phone then the modem is not connected properly e f an error occurs while opening the com port verify you have selected the correct port Make sure no other application is using it If the problem persists restart the computer e Ifan error occurs while initializing the modem verify you have selected the correct com port Make sure the modem is connected properly and turned on if an external modem If the problem persists refer to your modem owner s manual and verify the modem is Hayes compatible e Ifan error occurs while dialing or connecting with the remote modem try redialing There may be a noisy phone line If you re using a 2400 baud modem you may need to use the F5 command discussed below to force the conn
316. layed Therefore make this your main screen e You could make your first screen a Welcome screen that displays a message This can be used by installers to display your company name and phone number for users to call if they have problems Then have each remote button display the main user menu e The custom menus can be displayed in your schedule with this command Video Display video screen number The 16 available custom menus are screen numbers 84 through 99 So if you wanted to start the first menu you would simply display screen 84 RAM Video Screens The other HomeVision Pro video screens can be grouped into three categories 1 The built in video menu system containing predefined text and data These screens are ready to use without any effort on your part 2 Custom menus discussed above containing text that you define using the PC 3 Custom screens containing anything you want to write including variable values timer values and other things you can t do on the custom menus These screens can be created either by putting commands in your schedule or sending commands over the serial interface With HomeVision Pro users can send real time data from a PC to HomeVision Pro for display This provides a lot of power as it can display e mail messages weather reports sports scores and anything else that the computer has access to However this is difficult to do with the other commands and screens This is because t
317. ld If this zone uses a multi zone thermostat controller select RCS serial multi zone in the Stat type field In the Unit address field select the address of this thermostat controller either 1 or 2 In the Zone number field select the zone number as shown on the thermostat controller circuit board that this zone is connected to Select the setback temperatures for the Heat and Cool modes These should be energy saving temperatures to use when you re away from home When you perform a setback temperature command in your schedule the controller will use one of these temperatures as the new setpoint depending on whether the system is in the Heat or Cool mode Next configure the Home Vision Pro serial port the thermostat s will be connected to If you re using port 1 set its baud rate to 9600 which is the rate used by the RCS thermostats You can use the Controller Commands Screen under the Control menu to change the controller s baud rate to 9600 After doing this you must configure the PC software to 9600 baud also using the Serial Interface Configuration Screen located under the Configure menu Note that this same port is used to load a schedule into HomeVision Pro and to communicate with it from the PC If you use this same port for the thermostats you will have to switch connections each time you download a schedule If you re using port 3 or 4 configure it as described in the Serial Int
318. le click on the Actions Defined field You can enable or disable many types of items Commands in your schedule will only work on enabled items If you have schedule sections that you re still developing or that aren t working properly you can disable them until you re ready to use them Working With Object Summary Tables All of the object and event summary screens except for the power failure recovery screen display the items in a table format Here are some tips for working with these tables If the table contains more than 16 items a vertical scroll bar or elevator will appear You can then scroll through the multiple pages with a mouse You can also use the cursor keys to move between items Most tables have more columns than can be displayed at one time These tables have a horizontal scroll bar to move between columns The cursor keys also can be used for this purpose Most of the columns can be resized and reordered To change the column width depress the mouse button on the right edge of the column in the column heading area Move the mouse left or right to change the width then release the button To change the order of a column depress the mouse button in the column heading area Move the mouse left or right to move the column then release the button These changes will remain in effect until the screen is closed The table will return to the default settings the next time the screen is opened You can directly
319. le is set to 254 This command allows you to store the current level and later set the light back to it NOTE HomeVision Pro stores the light level as a value between 0 and 31 However some of the newer devices that support direct to level commands have 64 levels 0 to 63 For these devices HomeVision Pro stores the level scaled down by a factor of 2 to make it fit to be precise the level is divided by 2 then rounded down For example levels 62 and 63 are stored as 31 levels 60 and 61 are stored as 30 and levels 0 and 1 are stored as 0 Therefore if you set the device to a level say 40 with the direct to level command then put the level into a variable the variable value will be half the actual level 20 in this example If you then use the Set X 10 Device Directly To Level In Variable command to set it to this level it will go to level 20 which is half of what you probably expect Therefore if you need to store the level and then later return it to that same level you must multiply the variable by two after obtaining the level like this Put Current Preset Dim Level Into Variable 1 Old light level Var 1 Old light level Var 1 Old light level X 2 Put Received Preset Dim Level Into Variable Whenever the controller receives a preset dim signal immediately following a house unit code signal it stores the preset dim level for that house unit code It also sets its Preset Dim Received bit which
320. le the output The output will remain in whatever state it powered up in Since the output is disabled it will not respond to commands except an Enable command e Low Disabled The controller will set the output low then disable it The output will remain low until it is enabled and changed by subsequent commands e High Disabled The controller will set the output high then disable it The output will remain high until it is enabled and changed by subsequent commands Input Port Power Failure Options When power is restored after a power failure some digital inputs to the controller may not be in the correct state This might occur for a variety of reasons The interfacing device may take a longer time to start up than the controller for example you have a computer hooked to the inputs and it has to reboot itself e The interfacing device may have been damaged The interfacing device must be issued certain commands before it provides the correct output e The interfacing device is on a different power circuit than the controller and that circuit has not recovered power If the controller were to take actions based on these inputs undesired operations might occur To prevent this possibility the controller can be programmed to automatically disable an input after recovery from a power failure The input s Power Fail State can be set to one of the following e No Change Makes no changes to the port This is the defa
321. led in your HomeVision HTML directory the two files you need to edit are HVWebPage htm and HVIndex htm It would be best if you created two new pages perhaps named HVWebPageNoPassword htm and HVindexNoPassword htm Those pages would have the 2access abcde embedded in all the links You could then access these pages from within your home without having to enter your password From outside your home you would access the regular web pages The only risk with this is that is someone happened to access one of the pages with the access abcde embedded in it they could read it and find your password However they won t be able to access the page in the first place unless they know your password so this isn t a real issue Object Status Information Most of the web pages can display status such as flag states variable values etc In most cases you will need to click the Read status now button to tell the server to read the status The next time you display the web page the new status will be shown There is one exception to the need to click the Read status now button If you have the auto report feature enabled some objects will report their status to the PC automatically See the next section for details Auto Report Feature The Auto Report feature allows the controller to automatically report state changes to the PC It can automatically report changes of X 10 addresses input ports out
322. ll be true if the specified module house and unit code is ENABLED It will be false if the module is DISABLED X 10 Module Is Disabled This condition will be true if the specified module house and unit code is DISABLED It will be false if the module is ENABLED X 10 Module Level This condition will be true if the specified module s house and unit code current level 0 to 16 is equal to It will be false if not X 10 Module Level lt This condition will be true if the specified module s house and unit code current level 0 to 16 is less than or equal to It will be false if the level is greater than X 10 Module Level gt This condition will be true if the specified module s house and unit code current level 0 to 16 is greater than or equal to It will be false if the level is less than X 10 Module Status Request Bit Is Set This condition will be true if the specified module s house and unit code Status Request bit is set It will be false if not set A module s Status Request bit will be set whenever an X 10 Status Request signal is received over the power line that is addressed to this X 10 module Refer to the Clear Status Request Bit command for a discussion of how best to use this X 10 condition X 10 Module Status Is On Bit Is Set This condition will be true if the specified module s house and unit code Status is On bit is
323. ll be used to indicate the format of a value as described below FORMAT SUFFIX EXAMPLES Decimal d Od 4d 47d 255d or 0 4 47 255 Hexadecimal h 00h 04h 2Fh FFh Binary b 00000000b 00000100b 00101111b 11111111b Notes Decimal values will often be written without the suffix Any value without a suffix will always be decimal Hexadecimal values are always written as 2 digits ranging from 00h to FFh 6 Chapter 1 Introduction Board Drawing The drawing below shows the HomeVision Pro circuit board and the locations of important connectors and other devices Digital Temp Analog Port B Port C Extra IR IR TX IRRX Built In IR Sensors Inputs Inputs VO Connections Jack Jack Receivers Ag ie WV eo COC OCOOCOOC OY VY COOCOO OY OV ONG OGC OCOQOCOO O oooono0o ao000000 DTS i Port B LEDs Port C LEDs oo Status LED IR Status LEDs OOOOH DOHOHHHHOOHOHHOOOOO BPLP1P191919 19191919 19191919 91919198 Configuration Switches FAHDHDHDDO00000000O0 LUOUUUUDUOUDINII ITT Future Expansion Board Connector s ouuv00T Serial Port Configuration Header fanooonn O000000000 aYaYeTaYeYaYeTaYal 890000090 iz 0000000000 MoTeTeXexoToTom aa A MAT AT AWS Oouu00T BAA 0000000 u5 warararal ooo0o0000 SOVOGGOYVOS SOSVS SG OVO GOB OCGSOSSVG9g 2 lt 5 5 Serial 1 Serial 3 Serial 4 Sooo000 BRER USB Female Male Male
324. ll there is to it You might want to first test this out by creating a simple macro perhaps flashing the controller s User LED Once you re comfortable with how it works you might try creating your owns screens and accessing them from here Other Screens These screens are located under the Other menu and provide a variety of functions Schedule Viewer Terminal Emulator IR Signal Learning IR Signal Testing Serial Command Testing Status Screen View Messages Read Event Log Debug Tools Schedule Viewer The Schedule Viewer screen displays a complete list of all the actions contained in your schedule It is used primarily to quickly view or search the entire schedule You will normally not use this to actually create your schedule use the various screens under the Objects Events menu for that This screen is accessed from the Other menu This screen lists all schedule actions in a single scrolling window It works as follows e You cannot enter delete or edit the actions from this screen However double clicking on a line opens the Actions Entry Screen for the event where you can edit it After you click OK the schedule viewer window will be updated automatically e When you access the Actions Entry Screen from the individual object summary screens schedule changes are not automatically shown in the Schedule Viewer screen You have to select the Update Now menu option to update it e The Find menu a
325. llows you to search for text strings in the schedule e The Output to File menu writes the listing to a text file Chapter 2 _ Software Overview 25 Terminal Emulator Screen This screen acts as a simple terminal emulator to communicate directly with the controller It has two main uses 1 You can view serial transmissions from the controller This can be useful in several instances e When you apply power to the controller you can make sure that it s working by looking for the serial transmissions from it If you see nothing something is not set up properly If you see only unrecognizable characters the PC s baud rate setting is probably incorrect e When testing your schedule you can include commands for the controller to transmit serial messages You can view these messages with the terminal emulator and verify things are happening as you expect 2 You can send commands directly to the controller You probably won t need to use this capability as the other control screens can handle almost every command you ll want However if you re writing your own program to control the controller you can use this screen to test out the command format and make sure you know exactly how it works Several points should be noted about this terminal emulator e To send commands to the controller enter ASCII text in the top text box then press the carriage return The entire string of text including the carriage return will be sent at
326. long text string Video Commands Starting at character 1 starting at character 21 The following video commands can be included in a schedule They can all also be issued to the controller over the serial interface The format for sending commands over the serial interface is described in the Serial Protocol file installed in the HomeVision directory These commands are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the appropriate toolbar button The command is chosen from the pull down list The video commands are divided into five groups e Configuration Commands e Control Commands e Text Commands e Event Log Commands e Infrared Simulation Commands Video Configuration Commands These commands initialize the video system and control its major operating modes When you want to display video data or text use these commands first to get things set up There are four primary commands that should serve most of your needs Start Video Menu System Start Internal Video Mode Start External Video Mode Stop Video Mode There are multiple settings that must be made to use the video system These commands configure them all in the quickest fashion The individual settings can be adjusted with other commands that will be described following these commands Start Video Menu System This command starts the video screen system and displays the main menu It performs the following actions to do this
327. lor This default setting is maintained after you stop displaying video and even through power failures We recommend that you choose your preferred background color and make it the default color This way you won t need to set it every time you start displaying text The controller is initially configured with blue as the default color Current Current Current Current Current Current Current Current Screen Screen Screen Screen Screen Screen Screen Screen Background Background Background Background Background Background Background Background To To To To To To To To Black Blue Green Cyan Red Magenta Yellow White When you re displaying text over internal video a solid background you can choose from one of eight background colors When you first set the OSD to internal mode either with the Start Video Screen System Start Internal Video Mode or the Set OSD To Internal Video Background command the background will be set to its default color This command allows you to change the current color at any time All screens you display after this will also be set to this color However if you stop then restart the video system the screen will return to its default color this command does not change the color Character Background Style To None Character Background Style To Outline Character Background Style To Square Character Background Style To Solid These commands chan
328. lowed Several other things should be noted about how these commands work with If Then and Wait statements lf Then Statements To Cut Copy or Delete an If Then statement select the If line You cannot Cut Copy or Delete the Then Else or End If lines individually When you Cut or Delete an If Then statement all associated conditions are deleted as well Actions within the If Then statement are not deleted When you Copy an If Then statement the associated conditions and actions are not copied When you Paste an If Then statement the associated Then Else and End If lines are also pasted No conditions or actions are pasted Wait Timers To Cut Copy or Delete a Wait statement select the Wait line You cannot Cut Copy or Delete the End Wait line When you Copy a Wait statement the associated actions are not copied When you Paste a Wait statement the associated End Wait line is also pasted No actions are pasted Toolbar The buttons along the left side of the window are known as the Toolbar Click on the desired toolbar button to enter a new action or condition The new line will be added immediately before the line currently selected in the listing window For example if you select the first line and then click on the Flag button the Flag action will be inserted as the new first line The other lines will move down If no line is selected when you click the toolba
329. ls Before the controller can transmit these non standard IR signals it must learn the signal s format The signal format is then stored in the controllers memory ready to be transmitted upon command The process for learning is described later The controller learns signals by measuring and storing the individual lengths of the infrared pulses The number of pulses varies from device to device Consequently the amount of memory required to store each pulse varies Most signals require 60 to 200 bytes of memory The controller has approximately 50 000 bytes of memory available for the IR signals This should be more than enough to hold 255 signals IR Signal Reception Details Introduction This section covers receiving signals from a remote control device to control the operation of the controller The process of learning an IR signal for re transmission is covered in the later section on transmission Receiving and recognizing IR signals which we call decoding the signal is far more difficult than learning a signal for re transmission Most electronic devices only have to work with one remote control type Designing a universal receiver to work with many different signal formats is quite a challenge Every received signal must be analyzed to determine if it matches one of the many millions of possible signals The decoding must take place in near real time to provide an acceptable user interface to the automation system Fac
330. m the log before using the Reset Data Log Pointer command Note that while the controller is transmitting this command it will not be able to perform other actions This can take a while if there is a large amount of data in the log For example a full log 65 535 bytes transmitted in ASCII format using 3 characters per byte at 19 200 baud would require approximately 100 seconds minimum It may take longer if the computer cannot keep up with the serial data and slows the controller down Transmit Complete Data Log In Binary Format This command is similar to the previous command except that each data log byte is transmitted as a single binary value ranging from Od to 255d No spaces are placed between the bytes Also there is no carriage return or line feed at the end of the line Thus all the bytes are transmitted back to back This mode is intended for use by a computer program that can read binary data It will only take one third as long as the ASCII command Note that if you view the transmission on a terminal emulator screen the data will likely be incorrect as terminal emulators can t display most binary characters Transmit Partial Data Log In ASCII Format Transmits only the specified data log contents out the serial port in ASCII format ASCII format means each byte is transmitted as two hex digits ranging from OOH to FFh followed by a blank space When entering this command in your schedule you must spe
331. mands Set Flag Clear Flag Neutral Flag These commands put the flag in the specified state either SET CLEAR or NEUTRAL When you enter one of these commands in a schedule you select the specific flag from a pull down list When you send one of these commands over the serial interface the flag is referred to by its ID number 0 to 255 Toggle Flag This command reverses the state of the flag A flag which is SET will be changed to CLEAR Conversely a flag which was CLEAR will be changed to SET A flag which is NEUTRAL will not be changed by this command Set All Flags Clear All Flags Neutral All Flags These commands put all flags in the specified state either SET CLEAR or NEUTRAL Advanced Flag Commands Make Flag XXX Equal To Flag YYY This command looks at the current state of the flag identified by YYY and puts the flag identified by XXX into the same state Set Flag At Variable XXX Clear Flag At Variable XXX Neutral Flag At Variable XXX These commands look up the value of variable XXX and use it as the ID number of the flag The corresponding flag is then put into the specified state either SET CLEAR or NEUTRAL Example Assume the command Set Flag At Variable 3 is executed The controller will first look up the value of variable number 3 Let s assume its value is 12 The controller will then SET flag 12 If the value of the variable is not a valid flag number
332. me low L ATL Speaker volume medium L2 ATL2 Speaker volume high L3 ATL3 286 Chapter 27 Miscellaneous Once you ve entered the modem s settings you must save them to the modem s internal memory This ensures they are reloaded each time power is applied to the modem The command for this is usually ATE amp W lt CR gt You can also combine all the commands into a single line as in this example ATE amp K4 amp D0 amp SO0 3M1LE amp W lt CR gt Setting The Controller And The Modem To The Same Baud Rate Lastly you must ensure that the controller is set to the same baud rate as the modem s serial interface since they will be talking together Note that the modem s serial baud rate may be different than the baud rate between the two modems When people talk about having a 19 200 baud modem they re referring to the phone line speed The connection from the modem to the computer s serial port may be anywhere from 2400 baud to over 100 000 baud These are two separate connections with independent baud rates Unfortunately not all modems set the serial port baud rate the same way You should check your modem s owners manual to determine what its default baud rate called the DTE rate is Your options depend on the modem s speed If you have a 2400 baud modem it probably defaults to 2400 on the serial port also Set the controller to 2400 baud and you re ready to go Most modems faster than 2400 baud also default to 2400 baud on the ser
333. ment such as doc for a Microsoft Word document For example to run the Windows program NotePad send this ASCII text Run program notepad exe For this to work the file to run must be located in the same directory as the HomeVision Pro application or the file s path must be specified in your computer s path usually in the Autoexec bat file You can also include a path or command line arguments by enclosing them in double quotes In this example Microsoft Excel is located in the directory excel within the directory msoffice on drive C Run program c msoffice excel excel Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface 195 To help test running external programs use the Serial Command Test screen located under the Other menu In the text box enter the ASCII command exactly as you would send it over the serial interface and then click the Try It button The HomeVision Pro software will then run just as if it had received that ASCII command over the serial interface If the command is entered properly and the program exists the program will run Notes e The serial commands are not case sensitive e Status of the program execution will be shown on the bottom of the main software screen Sending Keystrokes To Other Programs On A PC You can run other programs on your computer upon command from the controller as described above You can also send keystrokes to those applications This requires that the controller be connected to the com
334. mm port first or you close a comm port that wasn t opened an error will occur This will be shown on the message bar on the main software screen but will not affect any other operations Once you open a comm port it will work properly e You will also get an error if you try to open the comm port that the controller is connected to as shown at the bottom right of the main software screen e To send data you must place the desired data between the double quotes but the quotes will not be sent There is no way to send double quotes e The HomeVision Pro software will automatically append a carriage return and line feed at the end of each To comm port command e The serial commands are not case sensitive However the data to send the text between the double quotes will be sent in whatever case you enter e The status bar on the bottom of the main software screen will show the status of commands associated with the user comm port e While the user comm port is open any data received by it will automatically transmitted to the controller Thus the port provides two way communications with the controller This is further detailed in the section Receiving Data from Other Serial Ports on a PC The software screen Serial Command Test located under the Other menu can help you test this function In the text box enter the ASCII command exactly as you would send it over the serial interface then click the Try It button The HomeVis
335. more e The Security System video screen can display system and zone status and also allow users to control the system with an infrared remote HomeVision Pro can also be used with other security systems although they generally provide lesser functionality See the HomeVision web site for application notes on setting up such systems Installation And Setup Follow the steps described below to install the CADDX system and configure it for use 1 Install Security System You must first install the security system refer to the CADDX documentation for details You must also install an NX 584 device into the security system note some newer CADDX systems include a built in serial interface and do not require the NX 584 This provides the RS 232 serial interface that Home Vision Pro connects to We strongly recommend you get the security system up and running before connecting it to HomeVision Pro This will reduce the likelihood of problems and make troubleshooting much easier 2 Configure Security System Communication Settings The CADDX NX 584 provides a variety of configurable settings that control how it works Several of these must be properly set up before it can be used with HomeVision Pro The table below shows the required settings and the NX 584 programming locations for each Refer to the NX 584 Installation Manual for details on how to program these NX 584 parameters not shown in the table can be set to any value REQUIRED SETTIN
336. mount of time For example these commands will shut it off after 15 seconds Wait 00 00 15 00 with timer 0 Caller ID Timer Then Stop Video Mode End Wait 3 Open the caller ID configuration screen under the Configure menu A Select PC Call Editor RSA in the Caller ID Configuration option box B Select the serial port the Call Editor is connected to C Select the macro that you want to run when a call is received 4 Load your schedule 5 Start the HomeVision Pro application and open your schedule Your schedule must be opened so that the software will configure the PC s serial port to receive the caller ID information Caller ID Setup For ITU Technologies Device The PC Caller ID Plug from ITU Technologies can also be used with HomeVision Pro Setup is the same as with the Call Editor RSA except that you much select the PC ITU Device option box on the Caller ID Configuration screen Other caller ID devices may work with HomeVision Pro when configured this same way but we haven t tested them For example several users have reported that the popular Rochelle device ANI 232 works with HomeVision Pro Caller ID Setup For Other Software Programs Here s how to configure the controller for caller ID if you re using another program to get the caller ID info 1 Add anew macro using the macro summary screen that will be run automatically whenever a call is received See the discussion in the Caller ID Setup for Call Edi
337. must be set up properly before the controller can report the signal to the PC The controller must be connected to the proper PC serial communications port and set to the proper baud rate The controller Master Report Mode and the X 10 Report Mode must be enabled You can verify they are set by opening the status screen under the Other menu and clicking on the Read Status button You can enable these modes from the Controller Command screen under the Control menu If these are properly set but the X 10 control screen still does not report X 10 signals being received refer to the trouble shooting chapter To verify the controller can transmit X 10 signals e Select a house code and unit code from the left side of the control screen e Select a command such as ON or OFF from the Standard X 10 Commands list e Click the Send Complete Command button to transmit it The X 10 TX LED near the middle of the controller circuit board should blink as it transmits The X 10 RX LED should also blink as the controller will receive its own transmission e Any X 10 device s set to the selected house and unit code should respond You can also test the other X 10 commands available from this screen if you wish All commands are fully functional even if you haven t loaded a schedule into the controller 10 Verify video output This step is only applicable if you have the video output connected if no
338. n To Level Slow Chapter 5 X 10 53 Same as Force To Level except that commands are sent at intervals of approximately 0 9 seconds instead of 0 4 seconds Actually what happens is that the house code and unit code is repeated between each Dim Brighten command instead of just sending consecutive Dim Brighten commands Transmit House Unit Code Only This command sends the house code and the unit code without a function code It is usually used when you want to arm several modules in preparation for a subsequent function code The function code will then be performed by all modules simultaneously Transmit House Function Code Only This command sends the house code and function code without a unit code The 12 available function codes are On Off Brighten Dim All Lights On All Units Off All Lights Off Hail Request Hail Acknowledge Status Request Status Is On Status Is Off Note Preset Dim is sent with a separate command below Transmit Preset Dim To Level This command sends the advanced X 10 command Preset Dim with the level specified in It does not change the current state set in the state table This command can be used for the X 10 lights that can receive the Preset Dim command Toggle Module This command sends an X 10 On command if the module is OFF If the module is initially ON or NEUTRAL it sends an X 10 Off command Refresh Module This command sends an X 10 On c
339. n if the USB port will communicate with a PC you must install the USB drivers on the PC PC Setup Process HomeVision Pro requires Windows drivers that allow the PC to use a USB port to communicate with the HomeVision Pro controller The drivers also allow any other program that uses a standard PC serial port to instead use the USB port even if the software wasn t written for a USB port The HomeVision Pro drivers do this by creating a virtual serial port that other programs can use These other programs will think they are communicating via a standard serial port but the drivers will actually be using the USB port to direct traffic to and from Home Vision Pro Follow these steps to set up a PC to use its USB port to communicate with HomeVision Pro The steps are shown for Windows XP and Windows but other Windows versions are very similar On Windows XP 1 Plug a USB A B cable into the HomeVision Pro USB port and into a PC USB port If HomeVision Pro is not powered apply power to it 2 The Found new hardware wizard should start and allow you to install the drivers for the USB lt gt Serial device a Select Install from a list or specific location advanced and then click Next b Select Search for the best driver in these locations c Select the USB Drivers folder in the HomeVision directory and then click Next d The wizard should say it completed installing the software for the USB Serial
340. n Mode Report These commands request that the specified thermostat from 1 to 16 report the specified data back These are only applicable to the RCS TX10 B thermostat the commands will be ignored if the zone is configured for any other thermostat including RCS serial thermostats The TX10 B reports the data using an X 10 house and unit code followed by a Preset Dim signal and level from 0 to 31 They can also be used with the TX15 B but since this thermostat has an auto send mode it s normally not necessary to request status manually When the controller receives the response X 10 signals back from the thermostat it automatically updates the appropriate thermostat settings It does this by first checking to see whether the X 10 house code matches that for any of your thermostats If it does it checks to see whether the unit code was a valid report code and whether the signal was Preset Dim of a valid level If everything is OK the setting is changed for the appropriate thermostat These thermostat settings are stored in separate internal system variables for each zone You normally don t need to use these commands for HVAC zones 1 and 2 if you set up the controller to control them automatically as described earlier The controller will request the data periodically However you can still use these commands to force the controller to request the data immediately For example assume there s a place in your schedule where it s imp
341. n board response e Set the board address jumpers on each board as shown below Firstboard address 0 no jumpers installed Second board address 1 jumper 1 installed Third board address 2 jumper 2 installed Fourth board address 3 jumpers 1 and 2 installed 4 Connect the IO 8081 485 board s to the selected RS 485 port Follow the process described in the Serial Interface chapter The connections are summarized below e Connect the port s TXA position to the 1 O 8081 485 board s RS485 S position Connect the port s TXB position to the O 8081 485 board s RS485 S position e Connect the port s TXA position to its RXA position e Connect the ports TXB position to its RXB position The first two connections connect the port to the IO 8081 485 board while the last two tie the port s transmit and receive lines together which is required for a two wire RS 485 connection If you have more than one IO 8081 485 board you can have a maximum of four connect each to the same TXA and TXB positions 5 Connect a 12VDC power supply to the 12V connector on the IO 808l WARNING We recommend you use a separate power supply from the one that s powering HomeVision Pro This will prevent too much current being drawn from a single supply 6 Download your schedule Using The I O Boards The 10 8081 board s inputs and outputs are used in exactly the same manner as the other the controller I O ports The ne
342. n is true if the current month is January February or March Season Is Spring Condition is true if the current month is April May or June Season Is Summer Condition is true if the current month is July August or September Season Is Fall Condition is true if the current month is October November or December Time Is AM Condition is true if current time is between 12 00 AM midnight and 11 59 AM Time Is PM Condition is true if current time is between 12 00 PM noon and 11 59 PM Time Is Daytime Condition is true if current time is between 6 00 AM and 6 00 PM Time Is Nighttime Condition is true if current time is between 6 00 PM and 6 00 AM Light Condition is true if current time is after sunrise and before sunset Dark Condition is true if current time is after sunset and before sunrise Chapter 7 Scheduled Events 69 CHAPTER 7 SCHEDULED EVENTS Introduction Scheduled events are events that occur at a certain time each day Scheduled events provide the following features and capabilities Actions can be set to occur each time a scheduled event occurs Can be based on a fixed time such as 5 00 AM or 11 23 PM Can be based on a variable time such as sunset sunrise or dark Events can be scheduled for before or after the variable time by up to 4 hours Can be set to random also called security mode In this mode you specify an interval of up to 4 hours around the base time The event will then occu
343. n the controller There probably isn t much use for this command but we included it for the heck of it Thermostat Conditions The thermostat conditions described below can be checked by an If Then or If Then Else statement They are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the Other toolbar button then selecting Thermostat Condition from the pop up menu LE If If If If If If EE TE If TE zone zone zone zone zone zone zone zone System Mode System Mode System Mode System Mode Fan Mode is Fan Mode is is Off is Heat is Cool is Auto On Auto Control Mode is Run Control Mode is Hold Condition is true if the specified HVAC zone is in the specified operating mode Zone Current Temperature lt XX Condition is true if the current temperature of the specified HVAC zone is less than the value XX a number from 0 to 255 Zone Current Temperature gt XX Condition is true if the current temperature of the specified HVAC zone is greater than the value XX a number from 0 to 255 Zone Current Temperature XX 228 Chapter 19 Thermostats Condition is true if the current temperature of the specified HVAC zone is equal to the value XX a number from 0 to 255 If Zone Current Temperature lt gt XX Condition is true if the current temperature of the specified HVAC zone is not equal to the value XX a number from 0 to 255 If Zone Temperature Setting lt
344. n the scheduled event runs it will transmit X 10 signals A1 ON A2 ON and A3 ON It will then exit and not transmit A4 ON But now lets assume macro 1 also contains an Exit from all actions now command like this X 10 A2 Bedroom light Force On Controller command Exit from all actions now Chapter 15 Controller Functions 167 Reset Now when the scheduled event runs it will transmit X 10 signals A1 ON and A2 ON but nothing else Thats because the Exit from all actions now command in macro 1 aborts all the actions even those in the scheduled event and just those in the macro that contained it Ideally there should be a command to exit the macro but return to the event that called it keep running from there but such a command it not available Controller This command resets the HomeVision Pro processor The effect is similar but not identical to a power cycle and the controller will transmit the normal startup message after the reset is complete Note that when this command is performed in a schedule the controller is immediately reset and will not perform any actions that may have followed the reset command in the schedule After the reset is complete the controller resumes normal operations Most users would never use this command it s provided for the rare cases where a user desires a way to reset the controller without cycling power Re Initialize Serial Port 3 This command causes the controller to reinit
345. n then check the signal s device and key code to decide what action to take This is intended for advanced users as it requires using special memory access commands that are normally hidden from users Here s how this process works Whenever the controller receives an IR signal it will store up to three bytes of information about the signal in RAM e You create a periodic event that runs every loop The periodic event uses the memory access commands to read the signal information into three of your own variables You can then check these variables in If Then statements and take action e After all periodic events have run the controller will reset the signal information This enables you to detect when a new signal is received Following is an example of the code that goes in the periodic event Memory access Read data from address EF59h into variable 28 Signal type Memory access Read data from address EF5Ah into variable 29 Device code Memory access Read data from address EF5Bh into variable 30 Key code If Var 28 IRRX signal type 1 Then Chapter 14 Infrared Control 151 transmit IRRX Serial port transmit Variable 28 Signal type value as 2 hex bytes Serial port transmit Serial port 1 1 dt Serial port 1 transmit Variable 29 Device code value as 2 hex bytes 1 T 1 Serial port transmit Serial port transmit Variable 30 Key code value as 2 hex bytes Serial port transmit Carriag
346. n when the power went out As a result the controller s internal state table which tracks the module states may be incorrect If you have X 10 devices that behave in this manner you can set up the controller to automatically adjust the internal state table after a power failure When power is restored after a power failure the controller goes through a power failure recovery process As part of the process you can specify whether the internal state table is adjusted for any module This is done by setting the Power Fail State on the X 10 summary screen to one of the following No Change The state will be left unchanged This is the default setting On The internal state will be set to ON and level 16 You might use this setting if you have a device that always turns itself on after a power failure Off The internal state will be set to OFF and level 0 You might use this setting if you have a device that always turns itself off after a power failure Many X 10 lamp modules behave or should we say misbehave like this Neutral The internal state will be set to NEUTRAL and level 0 You might use this setting to indicate you don t Know what the module will do after a power failure Disable This will disable the module You might use this for an X 10 device that you want to make sure gets left alone after a power failure NOTE These power failure recovery settings do not cause the controller to actually transmit any X
347. nal are chosen from the pull down list Chapter 14 Infrared Control 157 Transmit IR Signal Number Once This command will transmit the specified infrared signal one time Transmit IR Signal Number XX Times This command will transmit the specified infrared signal XX times The XX value can be between 1 and 255 Transmit IR Signal At Variable One Time This command uses the value of variable number as the ID number of the infrared signal to transmit If the value is not a valid IR signal number the command is skipped Transmit Standard IR Signal Device Code and Key Code XX Times This command will transmit the specified standard infrared signal XX times The XX value can be between 1 and 255 You have to enter the signal s device and key code The main use for this command is if you reach the 255 learned signal limit and you have some equipment that that uses standard IR signals If so you can transmit the standard signals with this command and they won t use up any of the 255 available learned signals You can then learn other signals in their place thereby surpassing the 255 signal limit The main drawback of this command is it can make your schedule harder to read The normal IR transmit command shown previously uses the signal name and ID making it clearer what the signal does This new command only uses device and key codes which aren t readily understandable Therefore we recommend you only use this comm
348. nd 6 and a 4 zone controller for zones 2 through 5 In this case the single zone thermostats must be set to addresses 1 and 6 The multi zone controller address may be 1 or 2 If you have two multi zone controllers one will be address 1 and the other address 2 216 Chapter 19 Thermostats As an example here s a system with 2 single zone thermostats and one 4 zone thermostat HomeVision Pro Thermostat Thermostat Thermostat Zone Number Type Address Board Zone Not applicable Not applicable 4 zone 1 6 O Thermostat Board Zone refers to the number system used on the controller board of multi zone thermostats For example a 4 zone controller has four connections numbered 1 through 4 In this example these connections correspond to HomeVision Pro zones 3 through 6 Configure HomeVision Pro Software Next you should configure the HomeVision Pro software First tell HomeVision Pro about the thermostats you re using i AON Open the Thermostat Configuration screen under the Configure menu In the Thermostat type box select RCS serial stats connected to HV In the of zones box select the total number of thermostat zones you have In the Comm port box select the HomeVision Pro serial port the thermostats are connected to For each zone select the corresponding tab and then e If this zone uses a single zone thermostat select RCS serial single zone in the Stat type fie
349. nd will place several HTML files in it These files can be used for displaying a wide variety of HomeVision Pro status and control web pages They contain standard HTML codes plus some Home Vision unique tags You don t have to do anything special to use these web pages However if you want to you can modify them to change the web pages appearance You can also create as many new pages as you like You do this by changing the HTML and or embedding HomevVision unique tags in the pages You must be familiar with HTML before attempting this After installation you need to configure the web server built into the HomeVision Pro software This is done with the Web Server Configuration Screen under the Configure menu After this you can open any web browser and enter the web address URL for your PC The web address will contain the IP address of the PC the web server port number and the file name to display Depending on the file name the web server will send a file back to the browser for display There are several types of files you can access Some files will be sent to the browser exactly as is Other files will be read by the web server which will replace custom tags with HomeVision Pro status information and send the resulting file to the browser You can then use control buttons on the web page to send commands back to the HomeVision Pro web server These commands can control the software for example tell it to open a HomeVision Pro sch
350. nded state For example if a flag is currently SET and your schedule performs a command to SET it the flag doesn t change state However the controller will still send an auto report In general the controller sends a report if a command to change an object s state is performed regardless of whether the object actually changes state This normally doesn t pose any problem but just means some unnecessary messages may be sent However this will be a problem if your schedule performs such commands repeatedly such as in a periodic event running every loop discussed next NOTE This behavior sending reports when no flag or variable actually changed will not occur with HomeVision Pro_ version 3 44 and higher The extra memory available with HomeVision Pro allowed a design change to prevent this Reports will only be sent when a value actually changes e Your schedule should not perform certain commands repeatedly or else serial messages will be transmitted continuously which could slow down both the controller and the PC software This problem mainly occurs in a periodic event running every loop For example if a periodic event has a command to SET a flag and it does so every loop you ll get a new message every loop The same thing will happen if you have a variable that increments every loop This situation is easy to observe as you simply have to open the terminal emulator screen and you ll serial messages filling the screen It s OK to
351. ned below the incoming data is considered Complete You can check for this condition in an If Then statement although this is usually not necessary or desirable When the data is complete the controller executes any actions you ve specified in the Serial Data Input event for that port This is where you will check the User Data string and do whatever you need to with it When the controller finishes the Serial Data Input event actions you defined it clears the User Data input string Thereafter you will not be able use the string Data Terminator The controller needs to know when the incoming serial data is complete or terminated so it knows when to take action on it You can set serial port 1 to use either of two methods 1 Carriage return Reception is terminated when a carriage return a binary value of 13 is received It is also terminated if there is a one second gap after a character this is necessary to prevent the controller from locking up if the data does not contain a carriage return This is the default method and works well for receiving ASCII data When receiving binary data you may have to select the timeout option instead 50ms timeout Reception is terminated when a gap of 50 milliseconds or longer occurs after a character It is not terminated by a carriage return This allows reception of binary data If your connected device does not send carriage returns at the end of messages you ll have to use t
352. neral format is shown below SECTION NAME Section name SECTION FORMAT Format description Data The individual parts are described below Section Name This section consists of a single line starting with SECTION NAME Following this with or without blank spaces is the name of the section Currently only one name is supported Custom data file The complete line looks like this SECTION NAME Custom data file This indicates this section describes a custom data file that can be read and loaded into the HomeVision Pro controller Section Format This section consists of a single line starting with SECTION FORMAT Following this with or without blank spaces is the format of the data Currently only one format is supported comma separated values The complete line looks like this SECTION FORMAT Comma separated values This indicates the data file will be in CSV format in rows where each row contains one or more fields separated by commas Data This section defines the use of each field or column of data in the text file you want to read in One row is used for each field of data The first row defines the first field the second row defines the second field and so on For each field in the text file you need to tell HomeVision Pro what to do with the data load it into a variable ignore it etc You do this by the name you assign The table below shows the allowed names and what HomeVision Pro
353. ng after a power failure Therefore we recommend you perform the Initialize Thermostat command in your power failure recovery event and also in a periodic event running every few hours to ensure the correct setting Advanced Thermostat Control This section describes thermostat commands and conditions you can include in your schedule You can use these to get more control over zone 1 and 2 thermostats than is provided with the built in control capability You can also use these to control additional zones up to 16 Thermostat Related Commands There are two types of commands related to thermostats e Thermostat commands These directly control the thermostats and are the primary commands you ll use 222 Chapter 19 Thermostats e Thermostat data commands These are used to manipulate the temperature setting and current temperature values For example you can put these values into a variable then do anything you can with a variable display it on the TV send it over the serial port perform math on it etc Both types of commands are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the Other toolbar button In the pop up menu you then select either Thermostat Commands or Thermostat Data Both types are described below Thermostat Commands The following thermostat commands can be included in a schedule They can also be issued to the controller over the serial interface The format for sending commands o
354. ng and heating units water heaters pool pumps etc Test you schedule thoroughly to ensure it works as you intend Perform critical commands multiple times Even with the controllers advanced X 10 communications error checking signals may occasionally not be received Provide feedback or status inputs to the controller so it can verify proper operation For example an output from the security system can tell the controller whether the system is armed If an arming attempt fails set it to retry If your HVAC system provides two way communication periodically check it s status Chapter 2 Software Overview 9 CHAPTER 2 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW The supplied Windows software is used to configure the controller and create a schedule It can also directly control many of the controller s functions This chapter provides an overview of its functions and screens Program Overview Main Menu The program s main menu contains the following entries File From this menu you can create new schedules open existing ones or save them You can also load the schedule into the controller or print reports Configure This menu is used to access a large variety of controller and PC software settings This is one of the first menus you would normally use Objects Events This menu takes you to the summary screens for objects and events Objects include X 10 modules input output ports analog inputs flags variables timers macros and
355. ng to the controller How to transmit commands to the controller and how to read data from external devices 3 Transmitting from the controller How to interpret command responses and other messages from the controller and how to include commands in your schedule to transmit serial data Configuration The serial ports require both hardware and software configuration Hardware configuration means connecting cables and placing of configuration jumpers on the Serial Port Configuration Header the Serial Port Configuration Header is described at the end of this configuration section Software configuration means selecting the port s baud rate and other operating parameters Configuration of each of the three built in serial ports is described in the following sections Serial Port 1 Serial port 1 communicates with a computer via a standard RS 232 serial interface the optional USB connection will be discussed later The supplied cable connects the computer s 9 pin serial port a male DB 9 connector to the controllers 9 pin serial port 1 connector a female DB 9 labeled Serial 1 on the Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface 171 circuit board This requires a standard serial cable not a null modem cable If your computer uses a 25 pin serial connector instead of a 9 pin connector an adapter is required To use this port in the standard RS 232 mode one jumper must be placed on the Serial Port Configuration Header
356. none of these solve the problem the controller may be defective Il No Does the LED on the TW 523 module blink when the signal is transmitted a Yes Try the following e Verify that the phone cable between the controller and the TW 523 module is installed and the connectors are securely mated Chapter 28 Trouble Shooting 307 e f you re using your own phone cable make sure it s a 4 conductor cable Many cables are only two conductor and will not work Test the controller with its original cable e Try using a different TW 523 module If none of these solve the problem either the TW 523 module or the controller is defective although this particularly failure is extremely unlikely b No Either the signal is not reaching the TW 523 module or the TW 523 is defective Try plugging an X 10 appliance module or other receiver into the same outlet as the TW 523 If it responds to X 10 signals but the TW 523 LED doesn t blink the TW 523 is defective If the appliance module doesn t respond either the problem is elsewhere in your house Refer to X 10 Noise Interference Problems for help in isolating this type of problem B Only some signals are reported The problem is probably with the X 10 signals traveling through your household wiring Refer to X 10 Noise Interference Problems for help is isolating this type of problem C Yes all signals are reported The controller is properly receiving X 10 signals
357. normally not needed as HomeVision Pro will request status periodically This command is provided mainly for possible future use with other security systems Security System Events Several types of events are associated with security systems Your schedule can determine when one of these events occurs and take any action you desire The events are e A partition is armed by a user e A partition is disarmed by a user e A partition alarm occurs To detect when one of these events occurs and perform actions use the Security System Event screen under the Objects Events menu This event will run whenever any of the security system events occur performing the actions you ve specified To determine which event occurred use an If Then statement with the event as the condition For example to do something whenever a partition 1 alarm occurs enter this in the Security System Event If EVENT Partition 1 alarms occurs Then Chapter 25 Security Systems 255 DO WHATEVER YOU WANT End If The events you can check for in an If Then statement are described in detail below These events can only be used inside the Security System Event EVENT Partition becomes manually armed This event occurs once and only once each time the specified partition is manually armed It does not occur when HomeVision Pro arms the system but only when a user arms it from a keypad This event can be used in an If Then condition allowing you to perform acti
358. nput and converts it to a value of 51 as described earlier It then multiplies it by 2 the gain giving a value of 102 Finally it adds the offset of 30 giving the result of 132 Analog Input Commands There is only one command you can include in your schedule related to analog inputs It is a variable command located under the Variable toolbar button as described below Variable XXX Value of Analog Input This command puts the value of the analog input specified by after adjusting for the Gain and Offset values as described previously into variable XXX This command does not actually read the analog input The controller automatically reads each analog input on a periodic basis and stores the result This command puts that stored value into the variable This is the only command related to the analog inputs To use an analog input first use this command to put the value into a variable Then use any of the other variable commands or conditions to work with the value Analog Input Conditions There are no specific lf Then conditions for the analog inputs However you can put an analog input value into a variable and then use any of the variable conditions Chapter 20 Other Inputs 231 Digital Temperature Sensors The controller can connect to Maxim formerly Dallas Semiconductor digital temperature sensors part number DS1820 or DS18S20 The main features are Temperature range of 50 to 205 degrees F
359. numbers cannot be skipped The RCS thermostats are configured by setting their address In configuring your system it s important to understand how the HomeVision Pro zone numbers correspond to the thermostat addresses Once they re configured you ll refer to them by zone numbers in your Home Vision Pro schedule The addresses must be assigned in a certain manner and depend upon whether you re using single zone or multi zone controllers and how many The following notes explain the settings for the various configurations One or more single zone thermostats The address on each thermostat must match its zone number in HomeVision Pro For example if you have three thermostats they will be zones 1 2 and 3 and their addresses must be set to 1 2 and 3 note that thermostat address 0 is not used One or two multi zone controllers The multi zone controller address may be 1 or 2 note that thermostat address 0 is not used If you have two multi zone controllers one will be address 1 and the other address 2 Unlike single zone controllers the addresses of multi zone controllers do not match their zone numbers Instead you will use the HomeVision Pro software to indicate which zones use which controller address and output connection Single zone thermostat s and multi zone controller s together The address of each single zone thermostat must match its zone number For example you could use a single zone thermostat for zones 1 a
360. ny digital temperature sensors attached to the S switched input will be connected This position must be used during normal operation in order to read sensors connected to the S input 282 Chapter 27 Miscellaneous SWITCH SWITCH DESCRIPTION LABEL WHEN OPENED LEFT WHEN CLOSED RIGHT B8 Input Port B8 will be disconnected from the Input Port B8 will be connected to the pull up resistor This position should be used pull up resistor This position must be when connecting to an external device that used when connecting to an external outputs a voltage when active device that opens and closes a contact B7 Same as above for Port B7 Same as above for Port B7 B6 Same as above for Port B6 Same as above for Port B6 B5 Same as above for Port B5 Same as above for Port B5 B4 Same as above for Port B4 Same as above for Port B4 B3 Same as above for Port B3 Same as above for Port B3 B2 Same as above for Port B2 Same as above for Port B2 B1 Same as above for Port B1 Same as above for Port B1 Custom Lighting Systems Some users would like to use HomeVision with lighting systems that don t use the X 10 protocol such as Lutron C Bus CentraLite UPB etc To facilitate this the controller supports what are called custom lighting commands The HomeVision controller does not include built in control of such lighting systems i e there are not specific comman
361. o True HomeVision Pro will then check the separate on time and off time of each pulse reducing the likelihood of a miscompare CheckFirstPulse Setting This indicates whether HomeVision Pro should try to match the first infrared pulse in the signal The first pulse transmitted by a remote often varies widely in duration If it varies too much Home Vision Pro can t recognize the signal When this parameter is set to False the default setting HomeVision Pro will ignore the first pulse making a match more likely If you find that Home Vision Pro is mismatching certain signals try changing this to True Tolerance Settin This defines how closely the durations of the received IR signal pulses must be to those of the learned signal The higher the tolerance the more likely HomeVision Pro will declare the signal as matching The tolerance can range from 1 to 13 However it is unlikely you would ever need to go below 2 or above 7 A higher value increases the likelihood of recognizing a signal but if it s too high it could cause Home Vision Pro to mis recognize some signals Setting Up A Remote To Use As Command Inputs In addition to controlling the video screen system your remote can be used to issue commands to the controller Whenever these signals are received the controller will execute whatever actions you ve specified for them You might want to use unused functions on your remote as command inputs For ex
362. o New Mexico New Mexico New York New York New York New York New York New York New York New York New York New York New York New York New York Newfoundland North Carolina North Carolina North Carolina North Carolina North Carolina North Carolina North Carolina North Dakota North Dakota North Dakota Nova Scotia Nova Scotia Nova Scotia Ohio Ohio Ohio Ohio 39 95 40 67 40 73 40 73 40 92 40 22 35 08 32 43 35 53 35 68 42 65 42 10 42 88 40 78 40 75 43 10 43 17 42 82 43 05 42 73 43 10 41 03 40 93 47 57 35 60 35 23 36 00 36 07 35 78 34 23 36 10 46 80 46 88 48 23 44 67 44 65 46 15 A O foe 39 10 41 50 A oO C 6 Appendix C Latitudes and Longitudes State Province Latitude Longitude Ohio 40 00 Ohio 39 77 Ohio 39 40 Ohio 40 75 Ohio 41 47 Ohio 39 93 Ohio 40 37 Ohio 41 65 Ohio 41 10 Ohio 39 93 Oklahoma 36 40 Oklahoma Oklahoma 36 15 Ontario 44 17 Ontario 43 15 Ontario 43 33 Ontario 43 55 Ontario 43 25 Ontario Ontario Ontario Ontario Ontario Ontario Ontario Ontario Ontario Ontario Ontario Ontario Ontario Ontario Ontario Ontario Oregon Oregon Oregon Oregon Oregon P E Island Pennsylvania Pennsylvania Pennsylvania Pennsylvania Pennsylvania 44 23 43 45 42 98 43 55 43 10 46 32 43 90 45 43 44 32 48 50 43 17 46 50 48 38 43 65 42 32 44 78 44 05 42 17 45 52 44 93 46 23 40 60 40 52 40 62 42 12 40 27 F oO O on gt gt
363. o a maximum of 16 zones These commands control RCS TX10 TX10 B TX15 and TX15 B thermostats They can also read the settings back from the bi directional TX10 B and TX15 B In addition they support the RCS serial RS232 and RS485 thermostats There are also a variety of conditions you can use in If Then statements Note The newer TXB16 thermostat should function similar to the TX15 B thermostats discussed herein e Internal controller system variables to track the status of up to 16 HVAC zones These thermostat variables are automatically updated by the controller making thermostat control much simpler than if you had to create your own variables to do this e APC Thermostat Configuration Screen to configure up to 16 thermostats e A TV Thermostat Configuration Screen to set up or change the zone 1 and 2 thermostat configurations APC Thermostat Control Screen to control the zone 1 and 2 thermostats e With a few simple commands in your schedule you can easily set up your HVAC system to do these things and more When you leave home set the thermostat back and put it into the Hold mode When you return home put the thermostat into the Run mode and change the temperature setting to the currently scheduled temperature Automatically switch between Heat and Cool modes based on the current temperature as read from the thermostat itself or from an analog temperature sensor Periodically check the temperature setting c
364. o controller were directly connected to the local serial port while it will actually be communicating via the Internet Therefore any software screen that communicates with the controller will be using the Internet to access the remote unit This includes the following screens e Load screen Controller Time Date screen e Video Remote Control Configuration screen when it displays received IR messages e Digital Temperature Sensor Configuration screen when it reads the sensors All of the control screens under the Control menu All of the screens under the Other menu except for the View Schedule and Serial Command Test screens All of the other screens will be accessing the ocal client PC That is any schedule you open edit or save will be on the local PC Remote Internet Access Notes e The settings on the configuration screen are automatically saved in the Windows System Registry If you select either Client or Server in the Select Connection Mode field whenever the HomeVision Pro software starts up it will automatically try to start the client or server If you do not want it to automatically start select the None option From the client software you cannot open close or change the server PC s serial port Therefore the serial port must already be opened on the server PC e Any schedule you open or save in the client program will be read from or written to the client PC You cannot retriev
365. o create the file is beyond the scope of this document 290 Chapter 27 Miscellaneous Step 2 Create Configuration File You can create a configuration file on the PC that can control certain aspects of how Home Vision Pro operates Currently its only use is to tell HomeVision Pro the format of a data file you want to read into the controller In the future other uses for this configuration file will be developed You only need to create this file if you want to be able to read data files into the controller To enable use of this file open the Preferences screen under the Configure menu and then check Enable use of HVConfig txt file The configuration file must be a text file named HVConfig txt It must be located in the same directory as the Home Vision Pro application You can create it with any word processor just be sure to save it as a text file The HomeVision Pro application will read this file each time it starts If you make a change to the configuration file you must shut down the HomeVision Pro program then restart it before it the changes take effect The configuration file must contain separate sections for each function or feature Currently only one function exists reading in a text file so the file will have only one section Each section consists of three parts a section name a section format and the data The first two parts are one line each while the data part can be one or more lines The ge
366. o include any commands in the Power Failure Recovery event to start it e You can still shut off the video system by using the Stop Video Mode command if you desire Alternate Navigation System The video menu system is normally controlled by a user pressing buttons on an infrared remote Sometimes however it can be useful to have other ways to control the menu system A set of 16 video commands is provided that you can use in your schedule to do this These commands will cause HomeVision Pro to respond just as if a user had actually pressed the corresponding button on a remote These are called Infrared Simulation Commands and are described in the Video Commands section 122 Chapter 13 _ Video Output Event Log Page 3 of the main menu system accesses the event log This log can record the occurrence of events and can be viewed on your TV The log holds 256 lines of data in a scrolling fashion New events are added at the bottom of the list Once all 256 lines are filled the new data overwrites the oldest data Thus the 256 most recent lines are always displayed To view the log select item 4 from main menu page 3 of the video menu system The channel up and down keys move up and down 1 screen 9 lines at a time The volume up and down keys move 1 line at a time Once you reach the top oldest events or the bottom newest events you can t go any further The enter and cancel keys are used to return to the main menu Many ty
367. o read and save the data log results is by logging the serial transmission to a file You can do this from a computer by following these steps 1 From the main software screen click the Logging button so it s green All serial transmissions from the controller will now be written to a text file The file will be named with today s date in this format yymmdd log where yy the last two digits of the year 00 99 mm two digits for the month 01 12 dd two digits for the date 01 31 2 Command the controller to transmit the data log It s probably easiest to first write a macro with this command in it Transmit complete data log in ASCII format using 8 bytes per line Then you can use the macro control screen to issue the command The screen may report that the command failed this is normal as the large amount of serial data coming from the controller confuses the software into thinking the command failed As an alternative to running a macro you can issue the command directly to the controller from the terminal emulator screen The command to do this is 030000000000 Refer to the serial protocol documentation for more details on sending serial commands to the controller 3 Open the terminal emulator screen to view the data being transmitted The data may take a while to transmit 4 After the transmission is complete disable the logging from the main screen Chapter 22 Data Logging 243 5 Open
368. o the LEDs are normally on When the pull up resistor is not used an unconnected input will be low and the LED will be off 8 Port C LEDs On when the port is high When configured as inputs the ports are high when nothing is connected so the LEDs are normally on When configured as outputs the LED reflects the output state Infrared TX Blinks on when transmitting an IR signal Infrared RX Blinks on when receiving an IR signal either from the built in receivers or an external receiver X 10 Intf On when the X 10 interface device TW 523 or equivalent is connected and powered Off when not connected or malfunctioning Note When the X 10 interface device is connected and using digital temperature sensors the LED may blink at a very fast rate instead of being on steady X 10 TX On when transmitting an X 10 signal X 10 RX On when receiving an X 10 signal Note that the LED blinks very quickly and is very dim and may be difficult to see Digital temp sensor Flashes when communicating with a digital temperature sensor Serial 1 TX On when transmitting data out serial port 1 It will also be on when transmitting data out the USB port Serial 1 RX On when receiving data in serial port 1 It will also be on when receiving data from the USB port Serial 3 TX On when transmitting data out serial port 3 Serial 3 RX On when receiving data in serial port 3 Serial 4 TX On when transmitting
369. o use You can pick any number from 0 to 255 4 For each of the buttons you want to program choose a different Key Code Key Codes can range from 0 to 255 5 Teach the signal to your remote by transmitting it from the controller to your learning remote If your remote needs only a single keypress click the Transmit Once button on the screen If your remote 148 Chapter 14 Infrared Control requires repeated transmissions click the Xmit Repeatedly button When your remote has learned the signal stop the transmissions by clicking the Stop button or pressing any key on the keyboard 6 Test your remote as described in Testing A Preprogrammed Remote to verify that it learned the signal properly 7 After your remote has learned all the signals you must configure the controller to recognize them Follow the same process as for the preprogrammed remotes i e enter the Device Codes and Key Codes on the video remote control configuration screen under the Configuration menu Controller Setup For Receiving Learned IR Signals This section covers the use of learned IR signals from your remote to control HomeVision Pro The previous sections covered using standard signals to control HomeVision Pro The use of standard signals is preferred as they are more reliable and there are a few things that can only be done with standard signals Initial Software Setup For Receiving Learned IR Signals Not
370. ode Only Transmit Preset Dim to Level Refresh Module Refresh House Code Set To Level In Variable Force To Level In Variable Transmit Preset Dim To Level In Variable Set X 10 Device Directly To Level Set X 10 Device Directly To Level In Variable Include In Scene At Level Include In Scene At Current Level Execute X 10 Type Scene Execute Leviton Type Scene X 10 Control Commands These commands do not actually transmit any X 10 signals Instead they are used to set or change how the controller operates with respect to these X 10 modules These commands are Enable Module Disable Module Enable On Trigger Disable On Trigger Enable Off Trigger Disable Off Trigger Set State To On Set State To Off Set State To Neutral Read Current State cannot be included in schedule Put Current Level Into Variable Put Current Preset Dim Level Into Variable Put Received Preset Dim Level Into Variable Advanced X 10 Commands Six X 10 signals are called advanced in this manual These signals are implemented by only a subset of X 10 compatible devices However when they are implemented they can provide additional control capabilities The controller can transmit and receive all of these commands They are Status Request Status Is On Status Is Off Hail Request Hail Acknowledge Preset Dim Whenever the controller receives one of these signals over the power line it sets a corre
371. odic Event Report Mode Timer Report Mode Controller Actions Report Mode Event Logging Modes enable or disable them Logging Of Time Along With Events Input Port Log Mode Scheduled Event Log Mode Caller ID Log Mode Thermostat Change Log Mode Logging Of Time Along With Events X 10 Settings 1 Phase or 3 Phase Transmission of Retries 18 Chapter 2 Software Overview Infrared Signal Settings Gap Between Transmissions Receive Learned IR Signals if you want Home Vision Pro to receive learned IR signals Video Settings Enable Weather Conditions Screen Enable Custom TV Menu System Number of RAM Video Screens Keep Video System On PC Communications Settings Enable automatic reporting to specially designed PC programs See the Auto Report file for details Serial Port Settings Select ports to use standard HomeVision Pro serial communications protocol Enable disable serial port forwarding Other Settings Daily Clock Adjustment Factor Serial Input Data Terminator Temperature Scale Fahrenheit or Celsius Video Remote Control Configuration Screen The controller uses a set of 16 remote buttons keys to navigate through the built in video screen system You use this screen to tell the controller which buttons on your remote you wish to use The screen displays three sets of 16 remote key codes each accessed through a set of tabs You ll probably never need to use more than one of these three sets the ot
372. ointer Value Location Transmits the value of the data log pointer ranging from 0 up to the size of the log out serial port 1 This value indicates how many bytes have been logged If the pointer is at the beginning of the log meaning no data has been logged the pointer value will be zero When the log is full the pointer value will equal the size of the log 240 Chapter 22 Data Logging Transmit Complete Data Log In ASCII Format Transmits the entire data log contents out serial port 1 in ASCII format ASCII format means each byte is transmitted as two hex digits ranging from OOH to FFh followed by a blank space Data will be transmitted beginning with the first byte in the log and ending with the byte at the data log pointer location For example if you have logged 10 bytes of data the pointer will be at byte 10 and this command will transmit bytes 1 through 10 When entering this command in your schedule you must specify the number of bytes to transmit in each line of text The controller will put a line feed and carriage return at the end of each line For example if the data log contains 20 bytes and you command it to transmit 5 bytes per line it will look similar to this 01 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 00 03 00 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 00 If the pointer points to the first byte in the log when this command is run indicating no data has been logged no data will be transmitted Therefore you should transmit the data fro
373. oller How to teach the controller the infrared signals used by your TV stereo etc so it can send commands to them IR signal commands and conditions Infrared Signal Description Infrared signals from remote control devices consist of a series of pulses of infrared light Each button on each remote uses a different combination of pulses Different devices from different manufacturers often use different pulse formats The many different formats make it a challenge to design a device that can receive and transmit all types In spite of this complexity the controller is compatible with the vast majority of commercial remote control devices used today However there are a few limitations The IR capabilities are as follows 142 Chapter 14 Infrared Control e Works with modulated and unmodulated infrared signals does not work with ultrasonic or RF remotes e Works with carrier frequencies in the range of 10kHz to 100kHz Most consumer electronics use remotes near 40kHz Near the 10kHz and 100kHz limits the receiver sensitivity drops off slightly As noted above there are a wide variety of infrared signal formats However as far as the controller is concerned they can be separated into two types 1 standard format signals and 2 all others These two types of signals are handled differently when being received or transmitted by the controller as discussed below Standard Infrared Signals Description The
374. oller The time and date are of the file itself not the time the schedule was loaded into the controller Controller Running or Halted This indicates whether the controller is currently running or is halted It will be halted when loading a schedule after it executes a Halt Controller command or if an error occurs Self Test Passed or Failed This indicates whether the controller s most recent self test performed every time power is applied passed or failed If it fails the controller will be automatically halted to prevent possible erratic operation It will also tell you which test s failed TW 523 OK or Error This indicates whether a TW 523 module or equivalent is connected and functioning properly This device is used to receive and transmit X 10 signals This should match the state of the X 10 Intf LED on the controller RAM OK or Error This indicates whether the controllers RAM is properly loaded This error could occur if a schedule download is aborted before it completes If you see this error you must reload your schedule Clock OK or Error This indicates whether the controllers internal clock is running properly If the clock ever stops running due to an error it will be reset to January 1 1990 and restarted No Controller Error or Error During normal operation the controller constantly checks for error conditions If one occurs it records the error number Errors can occur for
375. ommand causes all subsequent X 10 transmissions to be transmitted on only one phase of the AC power line This is the default position and works in most residential applications Set X 10 To Transmit On All Three Phases This command causes all subsequent X 10 transmissions to be transmitted on all three phases of the AC power line 166 Chapter 15 Controller Functions Set Clock Ahead Minutes This command will set the clock ahead by the specified number of minutes which can range from 1 to 60 This is intended primarily for international locations where daylight savings time does follow the U S standards The user can disable HomeVision Pro s automatic daylight savings time adjustment and then add scheduled events to change the time on the appropriate days Note that you should not use this command when it will cause the time to cross midnight We recommend you do it in a scheduled event set for early in the morning Set Clock Back Minutes This command will set the clock back by the specified number of minutes which can range from 1 to 60 Note that you should not use this command when it will cause the time to cross midnight We recommend you do it in a scheduled event set for early in the morning but not so early as to cross midnight i e don t set the clock back 60 minutes at 12 30 AM or it will cause problems Set Daylight Savings Time Mode Clear This command causes the controller to set its internal variable m
376. ommand if the current state is ON regardless of level It sends an X 10 Off command if the current state is OFF This ensures the specified module is in the state the controller thinks it should be in However since it doesn t send Brighten or Dim commands the level may not be correct Refresh House Code This command works the same as the Refresh Module command except that it refreshes all 16 units in the specified house code Care should be taken in using this command as it will take nearly 16 seconds to complete approximately 1 second for each unit code 54 Chapter 5 X 10 Disable Module This command disables the module A disabled module will not respond to any commands except for Enable Module This command can be used as a quick way to prevent any other part of your schedule from controlling a module Note that this command doesn t affect the X 10 device in any way it only determines whether the controller with send commands to the specified X 10 address Enable Module This command enables a module that was previously disabled A module must be enabled before it will respond to any commands or transmit an X 10 signal Note that this command doesn t affect the X 10 device in any way it only determines whether the controller with send commands to the specified X 10 address Enable Off Trigger If you want the controller to perform actions when an X 10 Off command is received you must first define the actions from
377. ommend you test how the software behaves on your PC in these circumstances before leaving it unattended for long periods If the software crashes you may prefer to use a standard serial port instead of a USB port to connect to HomeVision Pro USB Technical Details This information is provided for those interested in how the USB drivers function HomeVision Pro contains a FT232BM USB to serial converter chip from Future Technology Devices International FTDI This chip requires Virtual COM Port VCP Drivers from FTDI to be installed on the PC These drivers cause Windows to see an extra Com Port in addition to any existing hardware Com Ports Programs such as HomeVision Pro accesses the USB port in the same way as it would access a standard Windows Com Port using the Windows VCOMM API calls or by using a Com Port Library These programs will think they are communicating via a standard serial port but the drivers will actually be using the USB port to direct traffic to and from HomeVision Pro FTDI currently offers two versions of these drivers HomeVision Pro ships with the older versions which are Win XP certified and meet all the needs of HomeVision Pro The newer version has enhanced features as well as an improved control panel but is not Win XP certified Unless you experience problems with the Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface 177 provided drivers there is no need to use the newer drivers The FTDI website maintains the latest version of
378. on HomeVision Pro contains three built in serial ports that the user can control In addition one external port can be added on The following table summarizes the port capabilities Home Vision Pro female DB9 Main serial port for downloading schedules and connector Serial 1 interfacing to PC e Two operating modes RS 232 standard PC serial port USB when serial port 3 is not using USB mode Supports baud rates of 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 default is 19200 e RS 232 connection through female DB9 connector e USB connection through USB connector 2 HomevVision Phone Serial RS 232 standard PC serial port add on device connector Home Vision Pro male DB9 e Four operating modes connector Serial 3 or RS 232 standard PC serial port terminal block for serial port 3 RS 485 full duplex 4 wire RS 485 half duplex 2 wire USB when serial port 1 is not using USB mode Supports baud rates of 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 e RS 232 connection through male DB9 connector or terminal block e RS 485 connection through terminal block Home Vision Pro male DB9 Same as port 3 except that USB option is not available connector Serial 4 or terminal block for serial port 4 Port 1 is the main serial port used to control HomeVision Pro from a PC This port is used to download schedules into HomeVision Pro or to connect to a PC running other software This port uses the serial
379. on enabled Number of pulses This is the number of pulses in the signal Signal length This is the length of the signal in milliseconds Typical signals are from 40ms to 200ms Duty cycle This is the percent of time that the carrier frequency is modulated on for It s usually around 40 Note that there are more details that aren t shown Signals that have all the same parameters shown above aren t necessarily the same B The message Remote may be too close to controller is displayed If this happens you need to move the remote further away and try again The learn mode is automatically restarted and the controller waits for you to transmit again C The message Remote may be too far away from controller is displayed If this happens you need to move the remote closer and try again The learn mode is automatically restarted and the controller waits for you to transmit again D An error message is reported This means there was a problem with the format of the signal Try again If the problem persists Move the remote closer to or further from the controller Press the remote button very quickly don t hold it Record the error message and report it to us This may be an unusual signal that the controller cannot learn E Nothing happens This indicates the controller did not receive any IR signal at all or that it is not properly set up to report it Try again If there s still no response Veri
380. on is only active in the single drop mode e The Read Temperature button works differently depending on the mode In the multi drop mode it uses the sensor ID in the text box looks up that sensor s address in the controller memory then reads that device s temperature To work properly the schedule with this data must already have been downloaded into the controller entering it into the configuration table is not sufficient If the address is incorrect the temperature cannot be read In the single drop mode the controller does not use any sensor address Instead the controller requests all connected devices to report their temperature which is the reason you can only have one connected If more than one is connected they will report at the same time and the data will be corrupted Digital Temperature Sensor Commands There is only one command you can include in your schedule related to digital temperature sensors It is a variable command located under the Variable toolbar button as described below Variable XXX Value of Digital Temperature Sensor This command puts the temperature of the digital temperature sensor specified by into variable XXX This command does not actually read the temperature sensor The controller automatically reads each sensor on a periodic basis and stores the result This command puts that stored temperature into the variable This approach maximizes speed because if we were to
381. on is true if the specified partition is currently armed regardless of whether it s in the Home Stay or Away mode It will be false if disarmed Partition is ready to arm This condition is true if the specified partition is currently ready to arm Partition is not ready to arm This condition is true if the specified partition is currently not ready to arm Partition has alarm condition This condition is true if the specified partition currently has an alarm condition Partition has no alarm condition This condition is true if the specified partition currently does not have an alarm condition Partition chime mode is on This condition is true if the specified partition s chime mode is currently on Partition chime mode is off This condition is true if the specified partition s chime mode is currently off Zone is faulted This condition is true if the specified zone is currently faulted Zone is not faulted This condition is true if the specified zone is not currently faulted Zone is bypassed This condition is true if the specified zone is currently bypassed Zone is not bypassed This condition is true if the specified zone is not currently bypassed Zone is in trouble condition This condition is true if the specified zone is currently in a trouble condition Chapter 25 Security Systems 257 Zone is not in trouble condition This condition is true if the specified zone is not currentl
382. ons whenever the partition gets armed manually This If Then condition can only be used in the Security System Event actions section if you need to know elsewhere in your schedule whether the partition is currently armed use the Partition is armed condition When the specified partition is manually armed the Security System Event will run once and this condition will be true After the Security System Event is finished running this condition will be false This ensures that the condition is true only once for each arming EVENT Partition becomes manually disarmed This event occurs once and only once each time the specified partition is manually disarmed It does not occur when HomeVision Pro disarms the system but only when a user disarms it from a keypad This event can be used in an If Then condition allowing you to perform actions whenever the partition gets disarmed manually This If Then condition can only be used in the Security System Event actions section if you need to know elsewhere in your schedule whether the partition is currently disarmed use the Partition is disarmed condition When the specified partition is manually disarmed the Security System Event will run once and this condition will be true After the Security System Event is finished running this condition will be false This ensures that the condition is true only once for each disarming EVENT Partition alarms occurs This event occur
383. or an experienced radio TV technician for help The user may find the following booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful How to Identify and Resolve Radio TV Interference Problems This booklet is available from the U S Government Printing Office Washington D C 20402 Stock No 004 000 00345 4 Use of shielded cables for the video and input output ports is required to comply with Class B limits of Part 15 of the FCC rules Any changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Custom Solutions Inc may cause harmful interference and void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment CE Compliance Information For Europe HomeVision Pro is CE compliant and marked Harmonized Standards were used in the product design and testing and a conformity assessment was performed to evaluate compliance Custom Solutions Inc has issued a Declaration of Conformity stating the products meet the essential requirements of the Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive EMC Directive 89 336 EEC A copy of the Declaration of Conformity will be provided upon request HomeVision Pro and other Custom Solutions Inc products are usually combined with other products to make a complete home automation system The overall performance and CE compliance of the end system depends on a variety of factors The following information is intended to help end users and installers ensure the end system incorporating Custom Solu
384. ortant to know the current system mode with certainty Since the controller only requests the system mode occasionally someone could manually change the thermostat and without the controller knowing about it yet You can run the Request Zone 1 System Mode Report command wait a few seconds for the response then continue knowing that the setting is correct If you have more than two HVAC zones you will have to include these commands in your schedule to read their status It s easiest to put the commands in a periodic event set to run every 1 or 5 minutes to do this However these events would then run right on the minute mark which is the same time as the controller would automatically request the TX10 B data for zones 1 and 2 The controller would space out the transmissions but it s possible the thermostats would report back at Chapter 19 Thermostats 225 the same time and the X 10 signals would collide To avoid this use a Wait Timer to wait a few seconds after the periodic event to request the data as shown here Wait 0 00 10 00 with timer 1 Thermostat Request Timer Request Zone 3 Temperature Report End Wait Refresh Zone System Mode Refresh Zone Fan Mode Refresh Zone Temperature Setting These commands refresh the specified thermostat from 1 to 16 setting Refresh means that the controller looks at the current setting a system variable maintained inside the controller and sends the same command to the thermosta
385. ot affect the variable s value it will remain at 255 If you want it to roll over to zero use the Increment Variable XXX Roll Over at 255 command Increment Variable XXX Roll Over At 255 Increments i e adds 1 to variable XXX If the initial value is 255 it will roll over to zero Variable XXX Variable XXX Chapter 11 _ Variables 93 Adds the constant value to variable XXX can be any integer between O and 255 inclusive Variables are 8 bits long and can only go as high as 255 If you add two numbers that exceed 255 the result may not be as you expect When this happens the controller truncates the result to 8 bits This is the same as subtracting 256 from the result Here are some examples CORRECT ACTUAL NUMBERS TO ADD RESULT RESULT 255 0 255 255 255 1 256 0 255 2 257 T 100 200 300 44 255 255 510 254 Because of this limitation it is best to only add numbers you know will add up to less than 256 This should work fine for most applications There are ways you could use two variables to store numbers larger than 256 but it takes a more complex process requiring several If Then statements Variable XXX Variable XXX Variable YYY Adds the value of variable YYY to variable XXX As noted above the result will be truncated to within the range of 0 to 255 even if the sum exceeds 255 Decrement Variable XXX
386. ot send any X 10 signal over the power line Set State To Neutral This command sets the current state in the state table to NEUTRAL It leaves the level unchanged It does not send any X 10 signal over the power line Transmit Module Status Signal This command sends either the advanced X 10 command Status is On or Status is Off depending on the current state of the module It does not change the current state set in the state table You might use this in response to a Status Request signal sent from another device Clear Status Request Bit Chapter 5 X 10 55 This command clears the bit which was set when an X 10 Status Request command was received for this specific X 10 module The best way to receive and respond to advanced X 10 signals sent from other devices is as follows 1 Set up a periodic event that is executed every loop 2 In this periodic event use an If Then statement to check whether the corresponding advanced X 10 bit is set for the modules you re interested in The bit should normally be clear so the Then actions will be skipped When the signal is received the bit will be set and the Then actions will be performed 3 Inthe Then part of the If Then statement enter whatever actions you want done when the signal is received Somewhere in the Then section include a command to clear the status bit This is necessary so that the If Then statement isn t always true
387. ote e Ifthe learned signal still won t control your equipment it may be because the signal is one of the rare types that doesn t use a carrier Try the process in the next section to learn signals without a carrier frequency Learning Infrared Signals Without A Carrier The vast majority gt 99 5 of infrared signals use a carrier to transmit the signal but a few do not To learn signals that don t have a carrier first check the Learn signal with no carrier box on the IR learn screen You then must hold the remote within a few inches of the built in IR receivers while learning Note that signals without a carrier can only be learned for transmission later You will not be able to use them to trigger actions Chapter 14 Infrared Control 155 Transmitting Standard Infrared Signals If your remote controlled equipment happens to follow the standard infrared signal format you can store its signals by referring to its Device Code and Key Codes instead of following the learning process although you can learn the signals also 1 To determine if your remote uses the standard format follow the procedure described in Testing A Preprogrammed Remote If it doesn t you will have to learn these signals as described earlier 2 Record the Device and Key Codes for each signal you want to learn 3 Open the IR signal summary screen under the Objects Events menu 4 Select a signal to save each si
388. oting chapter 7 Verify controller can receive serial commands Select I O Ports from the Control menu In the Output Ports section click on any of the checkboxes for Port A Checking the box will turn on the corresponding relay Verify the relay turns on you can hear it click and see its red status LED light Chapter 3 Quick Start 31 8 Set controller time and date Select Controller Time Date from the Configure menu Click the Read Controller button The controller s time and date will be read and displayed To change the time or date either 1 Click the Synchronize Controller to PC button to set the controller to the same time and date as the computer or 2 Enter a specific time and date and click the Set Controller to Specific Time button 9 Verify X 10 operation Select X 10 Control Screen from the Control menu To verify the controller can receive X 10 signals e Use an X 10 transmitter such as mini controller to transmit a signal through your house e The X 10 RX LED near the middle of the controller circuit board should blink as it receives the signal although the blinking will be dim and may be difficult to see e f properly configured the controller will report the signal to the PC The simulated LED on the control screen should blink and a message should be displayed in the message window This message will show the received X 10 signal NOTE Several items
389. ou can specify a set of actions to perform whenever the timer goes off however you are not required to you can instead check the timer state at any time with an If Then statement NOTE These actions do not apply to wait timers Actions for a wait timer are entered in the schedule where the timer is started as described later To enter actions for standard timers 1 Open the Timer screen under the Objects Events menu 2 Add a new timer if necessary 3 Double click on the Actions Defined field of the timer you want The actions entry screen will appear 4 Enter the actions and conditions then click OK You ll return to the timer summary screen 5 Enable the actions by checking the Actions Enabled field The actions are automatically enabled after you enter them but you re free to enable or disable them at any time 6 Load the new schedule into the controller Notice that you define the actions separately from the command in the schedule that starts the timer You can have many different places in your schedule where you load the timer with a value and start it running But regardless of where you start it the effect is always the same When the timer expires the same set of actions will be performed automatically This makes it easy to use the timer in multiple places but restricts it to performing a single set of actions Wait Timers A Wait Timer is similar to the Standard Timer with one
390. our custom menus Another custom menu entry could display a fully custom screen perhaps showing the temperature of all the rooms in your house Another custom menu entry could call up one of the RAM video screens perhaps displaying stock quotes sent earlier in the day from your PC Built In Video Menu System The controller contains numerous built in screens that can be displayed at any time You can move between screens with an infrared remote This system provides many capabilities e View the status of and issue commands for X 10 modules input output ports IR signals scheduled events periodic events macros flags variables and timers e Control advanced functions such as heating and air conditioning systems and security systems e Provide a menu system to access your own custom designed screens e View and change the controller operating modes The best way to learn about the video screen system is by displaying it on your TV and moving through it with your infrared remote control To do this you ll first need to configure your remote to work with the controller Refer to the Infrared Control chapter for information on how to do this This section explains the key features of the video screen system Video Screens Overview The screens are grouped into seven general categories e Main Menu Screens There are four main menu screens you use to select other screens The first two always display the same entries Page 3 conta
391. our schedule Set if RAM data is invalid or there s a major schedule error reload your schedule i Chapter 27 Miscellaneous 299 DH Decimal Hex DESCRIPTION Set if an input port which has it s state change bit setisdisabled Set if an input port which has it s state change bit set is disabled Set if X 10 receive buffer overflows and message is lost Set if any self test fails i is lost i e0 3c Setiferror receiving IR signal O SOSS SS e6 42 Set when an invalid video command is encountered in your schedule S S e8 44 Setif invalid data is found in RAM reload your schedule SCS e9 45_ Set if 82C55 has error or if invalid data is found in RAM reload your schedule 80 50_ Set when an invalid macro command is encountered in your schedule 86 56_ Set when an illegal timer condition type is encountered in your schedule ___ _ s e9 59 Setif invalid data is found in RAM reload your schedule 90 5A Setif invalid data is found in RAM reload your schedule SSS KA Set when If Then statement or macro nesting is more than 16 levels deep you must change your schedule 98 62 Setif clock can t be read properly orisaninvalidvalue Y 99 63 Setwhen an illegal flag condition type is encountered __ __ 300 Chapter 27 Miscellaneous D Decimal Hex DESCRIPTION S 102 66 _ Setwhen presence pulse is missing from digit
392. outputs all 8 lines must be configured the same As inputs the lines can read TTL or CMOS digital inputs or can be directly connected to switch closure inputs they contain internal pull ups As outputs they can drive TTL or CMOS loads or other low current peripherals such as LEDs The controller can be configured to automatically perform a set of actions when an input changes Output lines can be individually set high low or toggled Output lines can be individually pulsed for specified times ranging from 1ms to 65 seconds All 8 lines of an output port A or C can be set simultaneously with a single command All 8 lines of an input port B or C can be read simultaneously with a single command The states of input and output ports can be used as conditions in If Then Else statements Input ports can be viewed enabled and disabled from the video screen system Output ports can be viewed changed enabled and disabled from the video screen system Input and output ports can be set to predetermined states in the event of a power failure Input and output ports status can be read and the ports can be controlled from the serial interface The user connects to the ports through terminal blocks located on the controller circuit card Their locations are shown in the board drawing in chapter 1 Additional input and output ports are available with optional multifunction expansion boards More details are provided in the Expansion Boards
393. ovides some features of loop type controllers An understanding of how these types of systems differ will help explain how the controller works In a loop system the schedule is essentially a long list of conditions If Then statements and associated actions The controller continually runs through them in a loop evaluating each condition If a condition is met the controller then executes the associated actions These systems can be powerful because you can specify complex combinations of conditions Loop systems have several drawbacks however e The controller spends most of its time checking conditions that are rarely true This slows down its response when an input changes or a command is received The response time may be OK for simple applications but not for more advanced applications For example an infrared remote control used to control video text on the TV screen needs a quick response in order to be usable Chapter 27 Miscellaneous 297 When an If Then Else statement is used either the THEN or ELSE part will be executed every time through the loop Thus some commands will be executed each loop This is rarely the desired behavior as most commands only need to be executed once in response to some event Preventing repeated actions requires cumbersome programming techniques such as setting a flag after performing the action to indicates that it has already been done An event driven system in contrast only e
394. own during the power failure recovery process Depending on whether the timer should have expired during the power outage one of two things will happen 1 If the timer still hasn t expired it will continue running normally For example assume the timer was at 1 minute when the power went out and remained out for 10 seconds After recovering from the power failure the timer will be at 50 seconds and continue running just as if the power never went out 2 If the timer expired during the power outage it will count down to zero during the power failure recovery process Any associated actions will be performed For example assume the timer was at 1 minute when the power went out and remained out for 5 minutes After power is restored the value will be at zero and any associated actions defined to be performed when the timer expires will be performed Of course since the power was out for 5 minutes the actions will actually be performed 4 minutes after they were intended If multiple timers and or scheduled events expired while the power was out the controller will perform them all unless halted during the power failure recovery The order in which they are performed is based on the sequence they would have occurred in if the power never went out Refer to the Miscellaneous chapter for details on the power failure recovery process and how these events are caught up e Stop The timer will be stopped by clearing the Running fl
395. pes of events can be automatically written to the log You can control what s logged using the Controller Settings screen under the Configure menu of the PC software The time of the event can also be logged You can also write your own text to the log area Commands to do this are located with the video screen commands on the actions entry screen Thermostat Screens Page 3 of the TV main menu system contains entries for controlling a 2 zone heating and air conditioning system Refer to the Thermostats chapter for details Weather Conditions Screen Page 3 of the TV main menu system contains entries for viewing a weather conditions screen which is described in a separate chapter Custom Menu System Overview The custom menu system allows you to very quickly create your own video menus You don t have to use these as HomeVision Pro has the built in video menu system discussed above However the custom menu system allows you to tailor the video system to your own needs It has the following features e Screens menus are created by entering text into a simulated TV screen in the PC software e You can have up to 16 screens e For each screen you can define actions for 15 different infrared remote buttons The 10 number keys Channel up and down Volume up and down Enter Allowable actions are Runamacro Display another custom menu screen Display a built in screen Chapter 13 Video Output 123 Exit the video m
396. played This command is most appropriate for transmitting data to a program that can receive the full range of values from 0 to 255 If you simply want to display data using a terminal emulation program you should use one of the following two commands instead Transmit Variable As 2 Hex Bytes Transmits the value of variable number using two bytes in hex ASCIlI format For example assume the variable contains 23d 17h First the digit 1 will be transmitted in ASCII format since the number 1 is represented as 31h 00110001b in ASCII the 8 bits will be 00110001 Assuming you re viewing the data on a communications program the program will convert this to the number 1 for display Next the second digit of 7 will be transmitted in ASCII the number 7 is represented as 37h 00110111b in ASCII so the 8 bits will be 00110111 The communications program will convert the 00110111 to the number 7 and display it Thus the variable s value is displayed as two hex bytes 17 This is the hexadecimal representation of the decimal number 23 Transmit Variable As 3 Decimal Bytes Transmits the value of variable number using 3 bytes in decimal ASCII format These examples show how values would be displayed on a terminal emulation program A variable value of 145d is displayed as 145 A variable value of 31d is displayed as 031 A variable value of 4d is displayed as 004 Notice that the value is always transm
397. played using a simple communications program It could also be used to interface with a program running on the PC to command other actions It s also possible to connect to another controller or electronic device instead of a computer When serial commands are executed only the specified data is transmitted Unlike Controller Report Messages and Command Responses no Message ID Numbers or Done notes are added and no carriage returns and line feeds are sent However it is possible to put carriage returns line feeds and other characters into the data if desired Serial Commands The following serial commands can be included in a schedule These commands are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the appropriate toolbar button The command is chosen from the pull down list You can select any of the available serial ports to transmit from Serial Transmit Commands Transmit ASCII String XXXXXXXXXX This command transmits the text string XXXXXXXXXX without the quotation marks in ASCII format where the Xs can be any ASCII characters If computer on the receiving end is running a terminal emulation program the text string XXXXXXXXXX will be displayed exactly as typed The string can be up to 255 characters long It s important to understand the differences between ASCII hexadecimal and binary data formats and how they are actually transmitted As a first example consider how the ASCII c
398. pt up to date It may take several seconds after the serial command is sent before the HomeVision Pro variables are updated with the data from the file You can t send the serial command and expect the variables to be updated immediately For example assume you have these commands in a schedule Serial port 1 transmit Read data file temperatures txt If Variable 1 Indoor temperature gt 80 Then Do something End If Assume that the file temperatures txt contains data that updates variable 1 The If Then condition checking variable 1 will be performed before data file is read and the new temperature loaded into variable 1 Thus the condition will be checking the old value not the new value Chapter 27 Miscellaneous 293 Complete Example Here s an example of the complete process It reads a data file containing 23 weather condition variables There are also four fields that will be read into your variables number 0 through 3 you may delete these lines or change the variable number if this would interfere with your schedule operation Here are the steps 1 Paste the following text into a word processor Save it as a text file named HVConfig txt and place it in the same directory as the HomeVision Pro application SECTION NAME Custom data file SECTION FORMAT Comma separated values Unused OutsideTemperature InsideHumidity DailyLowInsideHumidity DailyHighInsideHumidity OutsideHumidity DailyLowOutside
399. put jack not an RF coaxial cable output A second video cable with RCA plugs A programmable or learning infrared remote control A Phillips screwdriver in case you need to adjust the video signal level from within the controller 2 Make controller connections Plug the power supply into a 110VAC standard for the U S wall outlet and the connector end into the controller s Power jack The Power OK LED should light and all four Status LEDs 1 2 3 and 4 should light If not refer to the Trouble shooting chapter Plug the TW 523 or equivalent module into a 110VAC wall outlet Use the phone cable to connect the TW 523 to the X10 jack in the controller s lower right corner The controller LED labeled X 10 Intf should light 30 Chapter 3 Quick Start e Use the serial cable with 9 pin connectors to connect the controllers main serial port to your PC The HomeVision Pro serial port is a female connector labeled Serial 1 on the circuit board If your computer only has a 25 pin serial connector an adapter will be needed e If you wish to view video screens you must connect the video output jack to a video input on your TV or VCR Any standard phono cable with RCA type jacks can be used The audio jacks on your equipment are not used e Connections for video input infrared output and input output ports are not covered in this Quick Start section Refer to their specific chapters when you re
400. put ports flags variables analog inputs and digital temperature sensors To use the auto report feature you must first enable it This is done with the Controller Settings screen under the Configure menu using the PC Communications tab You can individually enable or disable reporting of each object type You must download the schedule for any changes to take affect You should note several things about how this auto report mode works e The controller will report whenever an object changes state regardless of what caused the change For example changes in any of the following ways will be reported The controller receives an X 10 signal such as A 1 ON or B All Lights Off A command in the schedule causes the controller to send an X 10 signal Chapter 26 __Web Server 263 The user transmits an X 10 signal using the PC software s X 10 control screen or the TV screen The user changes a flag or variable using the PC software s flag and variable control screen or the TV screen An input port changes e When an object changes state the new states of all objects of the same type are reported in a single message For example if you have 20 flags in your schedule and one of the flags changes state the serial message will show the new state of all 20 flags e The controller will sometimes send a report even if no object changed state This can occur when a command in your schedule is performed but the object is already in the comma
401. puter s serial port and that the HomeVision Pro application be running on the computer Activating The Desired Application Window When the controller sends keystrokes to a program the keystrokes will go to the active window Therefore you need to make sure the desired application window is active before sending them If you use the Run program command discussed above that program will be active You can make the desired window active at any time by sending an Activate window command This is done by entering a serial interface command in your schedule to transmit the following ASCII text Activate window window title Replace window title with the window s title The title is shown in the title bar at the top of the application window you want to activate If no window has a title that matches this a window with a title that begins with the same text will be activated If no window begins with the same text the command will not be performed For example assume the NotePad application is open but not the active topmost window To activate it send a serial interface command from your schedule that transmits the following ASCII text Activate window NotePad The NotePad window is usually titled Notepad filename Since the first seven letters match those in the command upper lower case doesn t matter the window is activated If you had several Notepad windows open one would arbitrarily be chosen Sending Keystrokes To
402. r Third party computer software may be able to collect weather data from weather instruments the Internet or other sources and then transmit it to the controller for display The HomeVision Pro PC software cannot currently do this but may at a future time Creative users may also find ways to directly connect weather instruments to obtain this data To activate this screen select the Controller Settings screen under the Configure menu in the PC software Then select the Other tab and check the Enable Weather Conditions Screen option Weather Variables The controller contains internal variables called system variables to hold weather data These variables are in addition to the variables you can create and name yourself Some of these variables are used for displaying information on the weather screen Other weather variables are not displayed but can be used for other purposes In future versions we will be adding more commands to take advantage of these other weather variables Each weather variable is limited to the range of 0 to 255 This makes it tricky to hold negative numbers or decimals To get around this problem different variables have different formats Some variables have an offset which must be added to or subtracted from the actual value Other weather data requires two variables to hold the complete information such as one variable to hold the rainfall inches and another to hold the rainfall hundredths of inches
403. r the new line will be placed at the END of the listing Clicking on the toolbar buttons adds a default entry to the listing window and then brings up the desired action condition entry screen Each type of action and condition has its own screen These screens are used to enter the details of the action or condition you want When you re done with a new entry you ll automatically return to the actions screen and the new action or condition will appear in the listing window Chapter 2 _ Software Overview 15 e The toolbar has two modes which display different buttons depending on whether you can enter actions or conditions Actions mode This mode is indicated by the title Actions at the toolbar s top In this mode you can enter new actions or comment lines in the schedule You can also enter an If Then or Ilf Then Else statement The conditions of the If Then or lf Then Else statement are entered with the toolbar in the Conditions mode discussed below The Actions mode is the default toolbar mode Conditions mode This mode is indicated by the title Conditions at the toolbar s top In this mode you enter conditions associated with If Then or If Then Else statements This mode is only active when a condition may be entered To enter a condition you must first select either the THEN line or an existing condition You can then enter conditions for the If Then or If Then Else statement The cur
404. r at a different random time each day but always within the interval you set around the base time Events can be set up to catch up after a power failure if desired If the scheduled time occurred while the power was out the event will be performed when power is restored This can ensure that lights and others items are put in the proper state Times for the events can be changed from the video screen system by using an infrared remote control They can also be enabled or disabled in the same way Events can be performed immediately upon command from the serial interface 255 scheduled events are available Defining Scheduled Event Times To set the time to perform a scheduled event Open the Scheduled Event screen under the Objects Events menu Select the scheduled event you want to set Double click on the Scheduled Time or Random Interval field This takes you to another screen to set the event s time and random interval if used To enter a fixed time select the Fixed Time option and enter the desired time To enter a variable time select one of the following option boxes to define what the event should be based on Sunrise Sunset Dark defined as 30 minutes after sunset Next enter how long before or after this time the event should occur You can specify up to 4 hours before or after any of these times 70 Chapter 7 Scheduled Events e You can also specify a random inter
405. r each partition in your system You can select any or all of the partitions to sound Request all partitions status This command causes HomeVision Pro to request the status of all partitions from the security system This command is normally not needed as HomeVision Pro will request status periodically This command is provided mainly for possible future use with other security systems Request zones 1 16 status This command causes HomeVision Pro to request the status of zones 1 through 16 from the security system This command is normally not needed as HomeVision Pro will request status periodically This command is provided mainly for possible future use with other security systems Request zones 17 32 status This command causes HomeVision Pro to request the status of zones 17 through 32 from the security system This command is normally not needed as HomeVision Pro will request status periodically This command is provided mainly for possible future use with other security systems Request zones 33 48 status This command causes HomeVision Pro to request the status of zones 33 through 48 from the security system This command is normally not needed as HomeVision Pro will request status periodically This command is provided mainly for possible future use with other security systems Request zones 48 64 status This command causes HomeVision Pro to request the status of zones 49 through 64 from the security system This command is
406. r example if you divide 39 by 10 the result will be 3 39 10 3 9 which is rounded down to 3 If you want your final result to be rounded off instead Chapter 11__ Variables 95 of down add half of the denominator before dividing For the previous example add 5 to the variable before dividing This would give the result of 4 39 5 44 44 10 equals 4 4 which is rounded down to 4 Variable XXX Variable XXX Variable YYY Divides variable XXX by variable YYY and puts the result in variable XXX If the result is not an integer the remainder is discarded See the previous command for more details Other Variable Commands Variable XXX Current Year This command puts the last two digits of the current year into variable XXX For example if the year is 1996 96d will be placed in the variable Variable XXX Current Month This command puts the number of the current month into variable XXX January is 1 and December is 12 Variable XXX Current Date This command puts the current date of the month into variable XXX The value will range from 1 to 31 Variable XXX Current Day Of Week This command puts the current day of the week into variable XXX Monday is 1 Tuesday is 2 Sunday is 7 etc Variable XXX Current Hour This command puts the current hour of the time into variable XXX The value will range from 0 to
407. r expires counts down to zero Enable Controller Actions Report Mode Disable Controller Actions Report Mode These commands enable or disable the Controller Actions Report Mode When enabled the controller will send a report message over the serial interface whenever certain controller actions occur The actions that will be reported are Chapter 15 Controller Functions 161 e When the time passes midnight and the controller calculates new sunrise and sunset times e Ifan error occurs The error number will be reported Refer to the Miscellaneous chapter for error information e If the Watchdog Timer times out due to an error condition The software address of the time out will be reported This address is helpful to us in diagnosing problems Hopefully you ll never see a time out occur Operating Modes Commands The major controller operating modes can be individually enabled and disabled with these commands Enable Infrared Receive Function Disable Infrared Receive Function In order to receive infrared signals the IR receive function must be enabled These commands enable and disable this function If you are not using the IR receive capability you should disable it this will slightly improve the controller s operating speed While disabled you can still transmit IR signals Enable X 10 Receive Function Disable X 10 Receive Function In order to receive X 10 signals the X 10 receive function must be enabled Thes
408. r other X 10 modules are initially in This provides one way to tell it Chapter 2 Software Overview 13 The initial states are specified by setting the Initial State field in the object summary screens Each object can be individually set to its own state When the schedule is loaded into the controller the objects will then be set to the specified initial state Note that the objects states don t immediately change when you set the value in the object summary screen but only when the schedule is loaded to the controller What if you are making minor changes to a schedule that you already have running Flags variables output ports and other objects may already be set properly You may not want them to change when you load the revised schedule You can avoid changing the state of an object by selecting the No Change entry in the Initial Value Field When the new schedule is loaded the current state or value will be left unchanged The only exception to this is with timers Timers are always stopped and their time values set to zero when a new schedule is loaded The capability to individually set states or leave them unchanged at loading time allows you to make frequent updates to your schedule without difficulty Power Failure States The controller is designed to automatically recover from a power failure However you have total control of how it does this You can have objects automatically set to certain states when power is res
409. r should act at each point so you can verify it s working properly 1 Make sure you have everything you need The following items are supplied with the controller Control unit TW 523 or equivalent X 10 interface module Phone cord Power transformer 12VDC 1 5A or higher current rating Serial cable DB 9 male to DB 9 female Installation CD or setup file downloaded from our web site at www csi3 com This owner s manual User registration card To run the PC software you need a computer with the following capabilities IBM compatible computer 80486 or higher with 64 Mbytes RAM minimum recommended configuration is Pentium 300MHz with 128 Mbytes RAM VGA or better monitor Windows 95 98 2000 NT XP operating system Hard disk with at least 16 Mbytes free One free serial port minimum of 19 200 baud or USB port You may also want to have these handy An X 10 transmitter such as a mini controller so you can verify that the controller can receive X 10 signals An X 10 receiving device such as a wall switch or lamp module so you can verify that the controller can transmit X 10 signals If you want to view the video screen system you ll need ATV with a video input jack A video cable with RCA plugs to connect the TV to the controller If you want to provide video input to the controller you ll need A video source such as VCR camcorder video game etc with a video output This requires an Audio Video type out
410. r you want to perform the actions you enter a command to perform the macro Macros provide the following features and capabilities e Can hold an unlimited number of conditions and actions e Can be run with a single command in a schedule e Can be run upon command from the PC software s macro control screen e Can be run upon command over the serial interface e Can be viewed and run from the video screen system e Can call other macros e Can be of unlimited length 255 macros are available for use Entering Macro Actions You enter the actions and conditions for a macro as follows e Open the Macro screen under the Objects Events menu e Double click on the Actions Defined field of the macro you want The actions entry screen will appear e Enter the actions and conditions then click OK You ll return to the macro summary screen e Enable the actions by checking the Actions Enabled field The actions are automatically enabled after you enter them but you re free to enable or disable them at any time Load the new schedule into the controller Macro Commands The following macro commands can be included in a schedule They can also be issued to the controller over the serial interface The format for sending commands over the serial interface is described in the Serial file installed in the HomeVision directory These commands are entered in your schedule from the actions entr
411. ral points about this screen If you attempt to display incoming video or overlay text on top of it and you haven t connected a video input to the controller the display will be distorted or solid black If the display text is erratic or is not clear adjustment of the video signal level may be necessary Refer to the video chapter for this This control screen provides the best way for you to learn how the various video commands work You can also use it to see what the built in video screens look like Thermostat Control Screen This screen provides direct control of a two zone thermostat system Refer to the Thermostats chapter for details Chapter 2 Software Overview 23 Phone Control Screen When using HomeVision Phone you can e Take the phone off hook or put it on hook e Dial a phone number e Show phone status hook status ring count and received touchtones Flag amp Variable Control Screen From this screen you can View the state of any flag View the value of any variable Change a flag Change a variable value Controller Command Screen From this screen you can send direct commands to do many things Check communications with the controller Enable or disable any of the controller s operating reporting or logging modes Change the controller s baud rate and more Refer to the controller functions chapter for details on the various controller functions and operating modes Advanced Screens Thes
412. range from 0 A 1 to 255 P 16 as shown in the following table in Hex format HOUSE CODE Cc J L a 7 7 O D o gt D D O m O gt N oO RB oO Nh NINININI NININININININ NIN NI NWN M ODIO DW YS O aO N OD on Alon gt gt PB BB BlBlRlBl amp 2 B18 eases easels m O wW gt C N on BO Nh giaigiiaieiela eigia giaieigigi TM CO CQ DW S oO c N om on AIIN o iw iw is sisigisisisis g e g g g g x 2 s E E e a a ea e a a G TM DO O DW S oO N Om on R IYVIN o Tm mm my oy om mo mo Faaalia al B NINININI NI DIMI MIDI P D DO DO M ODIO DW FS O aO N OD on BR aw rp alo wj wi C1 Go Go Go G Go G G2 Co Co M ODIO DW YS O O N OD an KR aw rp oO A ASA A ALA A AA DR A DR A A ALD nim OC O DW FS EO NY Hm aa KR ol rpl Alo orf O1 C1 On C1 cn On On on cn ca ca ca on M OO DW YS O BO N OD an KI aw p oO o oo m olur JN glAN o o e C ojojoj o m O gt N oO B oO Nh Chapter 5 X 10 51 X 10 Command Details On Force Off Force Dim Force If the module is initially OFF or NEUTRAL this command sends an X 10 On command and sets the internal state level to 16 If the module is already ON no action is taken On This command sends an X 10 On command regardless of the current module state If the module is initially OFF or NEUTRAL it s
413. rate may be incorrect e See the HomeVision web site for application more troubleshooting tips You will most likely want to add commands to your schedule to fully use the security system capabilities This is described in the following sections Security System Commands The following security system commands can be used anywhere in your schedule Arm partitions in Home mode This command arms the partition s specified by in the Home Stay mode There will be separate check boxes on the screen for each partition in your system You can select any or all of the partitions to arm Arm partitions in Away mode This command arms the partition s specified by in the Away mode There will be separate check boxes on the screen for each partition in your system You can select any or all of the partitions to arm Disarm or silence partitions This command disarms the partition s specified by There will be separate check boxes on the screen for each partition in your system You can select any or all of the partitions to disarm If an alarm is going off this command will silence it Toggle zone bypass This command toggles the bypassed state of zone number If the zone is not currently bypassed it will become bypassed If it is currently bypassed it will become unbypassed Turn partitions chime mode on This command turns on the chime mode for the partition s specified by There will be separate
414. read the sensor immediately it could interfere with all the other sensors requiring the process to start over This is the only command related to the digital temperature sensors To use a digital sensor first use this command to put the temperature value into a variable Then use any of the other variable commands or conditions to work with the temperature value Note that the temperature value is stored in degrees Fahrenheit plus 50 as shown below 234 Chapter 20 Other Inputs Variable Value Actual Temperature 0 50 50 0 100 50 150 100 200 150 255 ERROR See note Storing the temperature in this manner allows negative temperatures You will need to subtract 50 from the variable value if you want to get the actual temperature NOTE If there is an error during the temperature process the value is set to 255 You can check for this to detect errors such as a broken or disconnected sensor and ignore these readings Digital Temperature Sensor Conditions There are no specific If Then conditions for the digital temperature sensors However you can put the temperature value into a variable and then use any of the variable conditions Chapter 21__ Expansion Boards 235 CHAPTER 21 EXPANSION BOARDS This chapter covers some of the expansion boards that are available for the controller Multifunction Expansion Board The controller can connect to up to two multifunction expansion boards Each board provides these features
415. redetermined states in the event of a power failure e Can be read and controlled from the serial interface e 255 timers are available Timers can be used to provide delays between events count elapsed time or cycle between events at a specific rate among other things Delays can be used to briefly halt controller operations Delay A delay is a command in an action list to briefly wait before proceeding When the controller encounters a delay command it simply waits the specified time before proceeding During this time it can still receive X 10 and IR signals but it will not immediately take action on them Instead the controller waits for the delay to end then performs any actions following the delay command When those actions are complete it will then handle any previously received X 10 or IR signals Delays should only be used when you need a precise pause before for proceeding Delays are limited to a maximum of 10 seconds and are generally recommended to be one second or shorter For longer pauses use a Wait Timer A Wait Timer will not halt other controller operations and is therefore preferred to using a delay General Timer Operation Before a timer is used in a schedule you must create it with the timer summary screen under the Objects Events menu Timers operate generally as follows First the timer is loaded with a value and started running The initial value can be up to 59 hours 59 minutes and 59 99
416. reen then loading the new settings into the controller By a command over the serial interface The following section explains the settings and commands that are available and what they do Clock Adjustment You can set a daily clock adjustment factor At approximately 3 30 AM each day the controller will adjust the internal clock by the specified amount This allows you to improve the clock s accuracy in case it is drifting Specify the adjustment factor with the controller configuration screen under the Configure menu Note The adjustment is only made if the controller is running at 3 30 AM If power is removed at that time no adjustment will take place that day Also note that the adjustment will not affect any timers that happen to be running at that time For example if a timer has 20 seconds left at the time the clock is adjusted ahead by 5 seconds the timer will remain at 20 seconds Thus timer accuracy is maintained If you wish to set this adjustment value we suggest you first let the controller run for several days or more to get an accurate reading of how much it is drifting then determine the needed adjustment factor Also note that if you re comparing the controller s time to your computer s your computer is likely drifting by a small amount also Controller Commands The following controller commands can be included in a schedule Some of them can also be issued to the controller over the serial interface
417. reload your schedule If there are no errors refer to the communications troubleshooting section to verify proper communications B Command Executed The controller transmitted the signal Did the device respond properly I Yes The transmission worked 308 Chapter 28 Trouble Shooting Il No Did the controller s X 10 TX LED blink when the signal was transmitted a No This could occur if the controller is halted or experienced an error Open the status screen under the Other menu and read the controller s status If the controller is halted or there are other errors reload your schedule If no errors are reported try transmitting again If this problem persists the controller may be defective b Yes Did the LED on the TW 523 module blink when the signal was transmitted i Yes The command was properly transmitted The problem is probably with the X 10 signals traveling through your household wiring Refer to X 10 Noise Interference Problems for help is isolating this type of problem ii No Try the following e Verify that the cable between the controller and the TW 523 module is installed and the connectors are securely mated e Make sure the phone cable is a 4 conductor cable Many cables are only two conductor and will not work Test the controller with its original cable If these do not solve the problem the TW 523 module is probably defective There is a very slight chance that th
418. rent time as they change you ll have to repeatedly redraw the screen with the most recent data Although there are several ways to do this we recommend the following method Write the commands that draw the screen within a periodic event Set the periodic event to be performed every loop Initially set the periodic event to disabled When you want to display the screen perform these commands BROWN 140 Chapter 13 Video Output Start Internal Video Mode Display Video Screen 0 Clear Screen Enable Periodic Event XX This will set up the video system and display a blank screen Since the periodic event is now enabled it will be executed every program loop every 10 20 milliseconds Thus the screen will be redrawn each time With this approach any text that changes will be updated automatically each time the periodic event is executed Just make sure not to clear the screen in the periodic event This would cause the screen to flash as it repeatedly gets cleared then redrawn Instead clear the screen when you first start displaying the new screen before enabling the periodic event Also note that you should only enable one periodic event that draws a screen at a time If more than one is enabled they will alternately redraw the display resulting in flickering e When writing text on top of existing text make sure you cover up everything underneath For example assume you re displaying a screen that shows your securit
419. rent toolbar mode is based on the currently selected line in the listing window As you select different lines the toolbar is automatically set to the correct mode Other Features After you ve finished entering all the actions and conditions you want click the OK button This will return you to the object or event summary screen from which you entered the actions screen If you don t want to keep the changes you ve made select Cancel e The Delete All button deletes all lines in the listing window The window title describes the event to which the actions apply Configuration Screens These screens are accessed from the Configure menu and configure both the PC program and the controller Serial Port User Location Input Output Port Controller Time Date Controller Settings Video Remote Control Thermostat Security System Custom Lighting Caller ID if using optional caller ID S W version or HomeVision Phone CID add on Expansion Board IR Transmit Zones if a multifunction expansion board is connected Digital Temperature Sensors Web Server Remote Internet Access Preferences 16 Chapter 2 Software Overview Serial Port Configuration Screen This screen is used to set up the PC s serial port that is used to communicate with the controller You can select the communications port comm port for short as well as the baud rate Several important points should be noted regarding the
420. resistor through switch B1 Thus the controller will read the input as High a logic 1 Chapter 12 Input and Output Ports 105 When the switch is closed current will flow through it and pull the input port down to ground Thus the controller will read the input as Low a logic 0 The table below summarizes the current flow and voltage levels for the opened and closed positions External Switch Position Current Flow Through External Switch OV Voltage at Input Buffer Approximately 3V Controller Input Port State High 1 Low 0 NOTE For proper operation the resistance of the external switch and wiring to the controller should be less than 500 ohms This should not pose any problems as even long wiring should have well under 100 ohms resistance Port B can also be used with other external voltage sources although this usually requires disconnecting the input port s pull up resistor When you apply a signal that s 12V or another voltage when activated the input will be read as high If the input signal connects to ground when deactivated then it would be read as low and this would work fine regardless of whether the input port s pull up resistor is connected or not However if the external device opens when not activated as many devices do instead of switching to ground the pull up resistor must be disconnected If it were left connected the resistor would pull the open input up and th
421. rforms any actions that you ve specified if they expire The controller will perform these scheduled events and timer actions in the proper sequence even if they are intermixed There are several important points regarding this process If the power is out for more than a day this process can result in some scheduled events being performed multiple times For example assume power goes out at 6 00 PM Monday and is restored 11 00 PM Tuesday Assume also that scheduled event 1 turns a light on with an X 10 command at 7 00 PM every day and scheduled event 2 turns it off at 10 00 PM While catching up the controller will send the following sequence of X10 commands X 10 ON command scheduled event 1 for 7 00 PM Monday X 10 OFF command scheduled event 2 for 10 00 PM Monday X 10 ON command scheduled event 1 for 7 00 PM Tuesday X 10 OFF command scheduled event 2 for 10 00 PM Tuesday All of these events should have occurred during the power outage and are therefore performed during the recovery As a result the light will go on and off twice but will end up in the correct position 284 Chapter 27 Miscellaneous This catch up process is designed to work for power outages lasting less than two days For example if power is removed on Monday and restored later Monday or on Tuesday the catch up process will work properly However it works differently if it lasts longer than two days If the power is out for more than 2 days
422. rget field will show the path to the HV Desktop application At the end of this after any quotation marks that may be present enter S note there should be a space before this command A 1 FORCE ON enter this S X0001 The S tells HV Desktop that this is a command line parameter containing a serial message and the X0001 is the serial data the serial format is discussed below 202 Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface e Click OK In order to use this program you will need to determine what serial message to send to perform your command Refer to the Serial file installed in the HomeVision directory for full details on the serial protocol Following are examples of commonly used commands Macro Commands 00300 Run macro 3 O1000 Run macro 16d 10h Output Port Commands 30001 Set output port 0 high 30100 Set output port 1 low 30700 Set output port 7 low Infrared Commands 70500 Transmit IR signal 5 1400 Transmit IR signal 20 14h lt 1407 Transmit IR signal 20 14h 7 times X 10 Commands X 10 commands use two characters to indicate the module address device and house code The following table shows these characters for each address HOUSE CODE A B C D E F G H 1t s K tLI MINIO P 1 00 10 20 30 40 Ao BO Co 2 o1 11 24 31 41 3 02 12 22 32 42 E2 F2 u 4 03 13 23 33 43 E3 F3 N _5 04 14
423. rm the two commands shown above the second command which tells HomeVision Pro to simulate button 2 will overwrite the internal setting indicating to simulate button 1 and only button 2 will be performed This somewhat unexpected way of performing the Simulate IR Button Press commands is necessary to make them act the same way as if it had actually received the signal This limitation is Chapter 13 Video Output 139 normally not a problem as you d typically only want to perform one command for each user entry i e X 10 signal touchtone phone input keypad entry etc In the event you do find it useful to perform multiple commands you can accomplish this by using a Wait Timer between each command like this Simulate IR Button 1 Press Wait 0 00 00 01 with Timer 1 IR button timer then Simulate IR Button 2 Press End Wait This code will perform the first command load the timer with 0 01 seconds then leave This allows the controller to run through a normal loop during which it will execute the Simulate IR Button 1 Press command When the timer expires it will return here and set up the Simulate IR Button 2 Press command and leave Upon returning to the normal loop operation it will perform the Simulate IR Button 2 Press command Video Conditions You can check whether the video mode is currently active in an If Then or If Then Else statement However this condition is entered under the Controller button on the
424. rmats including ASCII hexadecimal or binary If the HomeVision Pro software is running on a connected PC the serial transmission can play WAV files display messages and much more The general data formats for the three types of transmissions are described below Controller Report Messages The controller can be set up to report different types of events when they occur such as X 10 command received IR signal received Input port changed state Scheduled event has occurred To use this feature the desired report mode s must first be enabled This can be done from the PC program or within a schedule as described in the Controller Functions chapter Report Message Format When the controller is configured to report events it will transmit a new message over serial port 1 every time the event occurs The message follows the following format XX lt Message gt CR LF Terminator XX is the Message ID Number Each type of report message from the controller has a unique ID number in a 2 digit hexadecimal format Each digit will be a hexadecimal value numbers 0 9 or letters A F When converted to decimal they represent the numbers 0 through 255 See Table 16 2 for the Message ID Numbers of each type of report message They range from 80h through A3h By reading these two bytes a user program can quickly identify the type of message from the controller lt Message gt will contain a text description of the e
425. rmed inadvertently Disabling the output will prevent this problem until you get around to fixing it at which time you can enable the output Outputs can be enabled or disabled in several ways A command in the schedule i e Disable Output Port A command from the serial interface The output can be enabled disabled upon downloading a schedule by first enabling disabling the output in the output port summary screen The output can be automatically enabled disabled after a power failure by setting the Power Fail State to the desired state 116 Chapter 12 Input and Output Ports Power Failure Options When power is restored after a power failure some devices connected to the digital outputs might not respond properly You might want to control these outputs in a certain way to prevent improper operations You can do this by programming the controller to take certain actions on an output when power returns This is done by setting the output s Power Fail State to one of the following e NoChange Makes no changes to the port This is the default setting e High When this is selected the controller will set the output high after recovering from a power failure The state of the output prior to the power failure does not matter The output remains enabled so it can be changed by subsequent commands e Low This is similar to the High command expect the output is set low instead e Disabled The controller will disab
426. rmostat that reports the current temperature in the following format Temperature is 85 degrees Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface 193 You may want to check that all the expected text is received properly However you wouldn t want to include the number 85 in the check as it could be a different number each time Here s how to do this If Serial Input Character Numbers 1 15 are Temperature is AND Serial Input Character Numbers 18 25 are degrees Then Do whatever you want here You can even read the temperature into a variable End If If No Serial Input Data Being Received This condition is true if no User Data is currently being received It s false if User Data is either In Process or Complete conditions which are described below Note that this condition only refers to receiving User Data When Command Data is being received this condition is true If Serial Input Data In Process This condition is true if User Data is currently being received but is not yet complete Note that this condition only refers to receiving User Data When Command Data is being received this condition is false If Serial Input Data Complete This condition is true if the User Data input is complete It s complete when either 1 The 50 millisecond gap between consecutive characters is exceeded or 2 254 characters are received This condition becomes false when the controller finishes the Serial Data Input event actions
427. rol screen to perform macro 4 and called it Arm Burglar Alarm You then loaded this into the controller Now assume you later revised your schedule and changed macro 4 to turn off you interior lights You also changed the macro control screen description of macro 4 and called it Turn Off Interior Light However you haven t yet loaded the revised schedule into the controller If you click the button to perform the Turn Off Interior Light macro you will instead arm the burglar alarm The new schedule must be loaded before any of the changes will take effect IR Control Screen From this screen you can transmit any infrared signal that has been previously loaded into the controller You should note several points about this screen 22 Chapter 2 Software Overview When you first display the screen the software will attempt to read the number of IR signals currently loaded in the controller If unsuccessful an error message will be displayed and you will not be able to transmit the signal You can assign different signals and text descriptions to each of the 30 buttons To do this click on the text descriptions A new window will open where you can select from the available signals and change their descriptions When you click the button to transmit the signal the PC will command the controller to transmit the signal with the corresponding ID number The signal ID numbers and text descriptions for the buttons are stored
428. roller will transmit the following message immediately after reporting the event 84 Time HH MM SS Date MM DD YY CR LF Terminator 84 is the message ID number for the Time Date message and precedes each report HH MM SS represents the time hours minutes and seconds and MM DD YY represents the date month day and year Note that the time is reported in military time 0 23 hours instead of AM PM The numbers are already in decimal format The example below shows a time of 11 04 PM and 50 seconds and a date of March 5 1995 84 Time 23 04 50 Date 3 5 95 CR LF Terminator The best way to understand the format of specific messages is to use the built in control response window or a stand alone terminal emulation program to watch the various messages from the controller Command Responses Whenever the controller receives a valid command over serial port 1 it provides a response confirming it was performed or reporting an error You will only see this message if you send a command with a terminal emulator Details on issuing commands to the controller and the resulting responses are provided in the Serial file installed in the HomeVision directory 186 Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface Commanded Serial Transmissions Commands can be placed in the schedule to transmit data over any serial port In most applications there would be a computer on the other end of the interface to receive the data The data could be dis
429. rom having to press the Back button but it might not be clear whether the command was performed properly or not If you enable this option there is a way to automatically return to the page that issued the command To do this edit the file HVCommandStatusFormat htm using a text editor Between the lt HTML gt and lt BODY gt tags in the file insert the following text lt HEAD gt lt META HTTP EQUIV Refresh CONTENT 5 URL AUTORETURN gt lt HEAD gt The start of the file will then look like this lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt META HTTP EQUIV Refresh CONTENT 5 URL AUTORETURN gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY BGCOLOR F8FBFF text 000000 link 004080 vlink 004080 gt The number 5 specifies that the browser should automatically return to the previous page after 5 seconds You can change this to any number you like If you do not wish to automatically return to the previous page you can either delete the text between the lt HEAD gt and lt HEAD gt tags or delete the text AUTORETURN Create Log File Check this if you want the web server to create a log file of its activity This will be a text file in the HTML directory named in the format WebLogXx txt XX represents the date of the month Require password Check this box if you want to require a user name and password when accessing the server If your PC is connected to the Internet we recommend you enable this to minim
430. rom the pop up menu If lt Bytes Free In Data Log True if less than or equal the specified number of bytes are free in the data log Free means that space is available to log more data The condition value can range from 0 to 255 This command can be used to tell if the data log is full or close to becoming full If gt Bytes Free In Data Log True if greater than or equal the specified number of bytes are free in the data log Free means that space is available to log more data The condition value can range from 0 to 255 You can use this command to ensure there is sufficient space available before logging a set of data to it If there is insufficient space you may want to report this is some fashion Using The Data Log Writing To The Data Log We recommend that you write to the data log in fixed record sizes interpreting the data from it This will simplify reading and For example assume you want to record four analog temperature sensor values every 5 minutes You can create a periodic event set to run every 5 minutes and include these commands in it Var 1 Temporary Variable current month Write variable 1 Temporary Variable to data log Var 1 Temporary Variable current date of month Write variable 1 Temporary Variable to data log Var 1 Temporary Variable current hour Write variable 1 Temporary Variable to data log Var 1 Temporary Variable current minut
431. roperly control your equipment you may need to learn measure the signal s carrier frequency Select the measure carrier frequency option and learn the signal again When measuring the carrier frequency with the built in IR receivers you must hold the remote close to the receivers usually within 2 12 inches When using an external receiver you might need to experiment to find a suitable distance usually 5 or more feet away Unless this option is checked the controller will use a default frequency of 38 4kHz which works with most remotes However some remotes use other frequencies 57kHz is common For these measuring the actual frequency will improve performance e If the learned signal still does not properly control your equipment try learning several times Compare the carrier frequency number of pulses and signal length for each If the carrier frequency is near 10kHz or 100kHz the signal is near the controller s limits and may be more difficult to learn You may have to try several times When measuring the carrier frequency it should be fairly stable within 2kHz each time If it varies by more than this try moving the remote a little closer or further away lf the signals are of different lengths or have different number of pulses you may be getting multiple transmissions when you re pressing the button Try pressing it more quickly e If you still have problems learning put fresh batteries in your rem
432. rrently listening running When a client connects to the server the Remote Client Connection field will show connection status While the server is listening you can use the software in its normal manner The Remote Internet Access Screen may be closed or left open Client Configuration To access your HomeVision Pro controller from a remote PC the client PC you must first install the HomeVision Pro software on it You must also start the server listening as described above When you are ready to connect the client PC to the HomeVision Pro server PC open the Remote Internet Access Screen under the Configure menus In the Select Connection Mode field select the Client option In the Remote Server field set the following items IP Address Enter the IP address of the server PC you wish to connect to Port Number Enter the port number of the server PC you wish to connect to Next check the Automatically start reconnect if connection is lost box if you want the client to automatically start whenever the HomeVision Pro software starts and to reconnect if the connection doesn t 280 Chapter 26 Web Server properly open or is lost If you want the client always running you should check this When you first check it the client will also try to immediately connect to the server Click the Open Connection button to connect to the server if it didn t connect automatically Connecting
433. rs input ports infrared signals and so forth The tables have a heading row followed by one row for each object The tables are generated with embedded tags for displaying the status of the objects Before the web page is sent to the browser the server replaces these tags with the current status of the object In addition most tables contain buttons to control the object for example the macro table has buttons to run each macro and the X 10 table has buttons to send on and off commands to each X 10 address The resulting table displays the object status information and gives the user a way to control them from the web page You can include these tables in your custom web page using a single HTML tag All the tags follow a similar format lt HV TABLE TableName HeadColor EvenRowColor OddRowColor gt Where e TableName is the name of the table to display e HeadColor is the background color of the heading row for example 0099FF is medium blue e EvenRowColor is the background color for the even numbered table rows for example FFFFDD is light yellow e OddRowColor is the background color for the odd numbered table rows for example FFFFCC is a slightly darker yellow Here s an example lt HV Table Flag 0099FF FFFFDD FFFFCC gt The allowable tags are shown in the following table The commands are not case sensitive TABLE DESCRIPTION TAG FORMAT General status clock time lt HV TABLE Status HeadColor EvenRowColor O
434. rted in military time 0 23 hours instead of AM PM The date format in Month Day Year The numbers are already in decimal format The above example shows a time of Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface 187 11 04 PM and 50 seconds and a date of March 5 1995 The time and date is the only part of the message in decimal format All other numbers are in hexadecimal format Also note that this command will not work with port 3 and 4 If you do need to transmit the time or date out this port you can do so by putting each field hour minute date etc into a variable then transmitting the variable Transmit Carriage Return and Line Feed As its name implies this command causes the controller to transmit a carriage return and line feed Most of the other commands do not transmit a carriage return and line feed so you may want to perform this command when you re through with a line of text Transmit Variable As 1 Binary Byte Transmits the value of variable number as a single byte in binary format For example A variable value of 0 is transmitted as 00000000b A variable value of 1 is transmitted as 00000001b A variable value of 128 is transmitted as 10000000b A variable value of 254 is transmitted as 11111110b Remember that many values cannot be displayed on standard terminal programs that convert the data to ASCII For example a variable with a value of 0 would correspond to the Null character in ASCII which can t normally be dis
435. ry screen e Enable the actions by checking the appropriate Actions Enabled field The actions are automatically enabled after you enter them but you re free to enable or disable them at any time e Load the new schedule into the controller Once set up in this fashion the controller constantly checks for the specified X 10 signals When one is received the controller will immediately perform the specified actions If you want other X 10 signal s to trigger actions you can use X 10 Sequences X 10 Codes X 10 modules are uniquely identified by House Codes and Unit Codes Function codes specify the action that should be performed by the selected module These codes are briefly described below e House Codes There are 16 house codes represented by the letters A through P e Unit Codes There are 16 unit codes numbered 1 through 16 Each X 10 compatible device is addressed with one house code and one unit code Since each of the 16 house codes has 16 unit codes a total of 256 16 x 16 unique devices can be addressed in the X 10 protocol Chapter 5 X 10 43 Function Codes These codes specify the action that will occur for the addressed device s Some function codes act on individual modules selected by house code and unit code while others act on all devices with the same house code There are 13 function codes available as listed below The first seven are by far the most widely used most devices don t support the o
436. s You can also use buttons on your web page to request the PC software to read object status from the controller The software needs to know the object states in order to send them to your browser To tell the PC to read the status you add an HTML form to your web page and post it to the HomeVision Pro server The form element name defines the object type to read As an example here s the HTML code to display a button that when clicked will command the PC software to read the status of all flags from the controller lt FORM method POST gt lt input type submit name UpdateFlag value Read flag status now lt FORM gt The name field indicates its a request to read flag status The type field named submit tells the browser to display a button The value field indicates the button label text that is displayed this can be anything The allowable tags are shown in the following table the commands are not case sensitive OBJECTS TO READ NAME FIELD TO USE IN FORM General status clock time schedule name etc UpdateStatus 278 Chapter 26 Web Server Remote Internet Access The Remote Internet Access feature provides an Internet access capability that differs from the web server The following table summarizes how the two methods work Remote Internet Access Server PC setup e HomeVision Pro unit is connected HomeVision Pro unit is connected to server PC s
437. s to export by moving the cursor to the left end of the row The cursor will change to a right arrow click to select it Hold down the SHIFT or CTRL keys to select multiple rows e Click the Export button In the new window that opens click the Select File button and select an existing IRL file or enter a new name e Click the Export Now button to export the signals To import signals Open the IR Signal screen e Click the Import button In the new window that opens click the Open File button and select an existing IRL file to import from e Select the signal s to import by moving the cursor to the left end of the row The cursor will change to a right arrow click to select it Hold down the SHIFT or CTRL keys to select multiple rows e Click the Import Selected Signals button to complete the importing e The imported signals will appear at the bottom of your IR signal list Unfortunately there is no way to move them around or to import them to specific locations IR Signal Commands The following infrared signal commands can be included in a schedule They can all also be issued to the controller over the serial interface The format for sending commands over the serial interface is described in the Serial file installed in the HomeVision directory These commands are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the appropriate toolbar button The command and selected IR sig
438. s once and only once each time an alarm occurs for the specified partition This event can be used in an If Then condition allowing you to perform actions whenever an alarm occurs This If Then condition can only be used in the Security System Event actions section if you need to know elsewhere in your schedule whether an alarm is currently occurring use the Partition has alarm condition condition When a partition alarm occurs the Security System Event will run once and this condition will be true After the Security System Event is finished running this condition will be false This ensures that the condition is true only once for each alarm Security System Conditions The following security system conditions can be checked in an If Then statement anywhere in your schedule they are not limited to use in the Security System Event like the security system events are Partition is disarmed This condition is true if the specified partition is currently disarmed Partition is armed in Home mode This condition is true if the specified partition is currently armed in the Home Stay mode It will be false if armed in the Away mode or disarmed 256 Chapter 25 Security Systems Partition is armed in Away mode This condition is true if the specified partition is currently armed in the Away mode It will be false if armed in the Home Stay mode or disarmed Partition is armed in Home or Away mode This conditi
439. s so that temperatures that aren t available can be left blank instead of displaying a meaningless number Here are some examples of how different variable values would be displayed VARIABLE VALUE DISPLAYED VALUE 0 99 1 99 2 98 99 1 100 0 101 1 175 75 254 154 255 Relative Humidity Variables Six different relative humidity values can be tracked Current inside relative humidity Today s low inside relative humidity Today s high inside relative humidity Current outside relative humidity Today s low outside relative humidity Today s high outside relative humidity Relative humidity s can range from O to 100 in increments of 1 A value of 255 is displayed as blank spaces Barometric Pressure Variables Both pressure and the direction of change can be stored e Current barometric pressure inches e Current barometric pressure hundredths e Barometric Pressure Direction The barometric pressure requires two variables for storage one for the inches reading and one for the hundredths Each variable can range from O to 99 in increments of 1 All other values are displayed as blank spaces Chapter 23 Weather Data 247 The barometric pressure direction of change is stored as follows 0 steady 1 falling 2 rising anything else blank spaces are displayed For example to display a pressure of 29 75 inches and rising set the weather variables as follows Current barometric pressure inches 29 Curren
440. s to count with 2 variables This allows counting up to 65 535 A few simple lines in the schedule can create higher counts easily extending into the trillions if you can find anything that requires counting that high e Storing the time or date when an event occurs There are a variety of commands for storing the current hour minute second day month year etc into variables e Passing information to macros or other parts of the schedule For example you might want to create your own video screens for display on your TV You could create a variable called Video Screen Number and assign different numbers to each screen One macro could then be written to draw all 92 Chapter 11 _ Variables the screens It could use a series of If Then statements based on the value of Video Screen Number to determine which screen to draw Whenever you want to display a new screen set the Video Screen Number variable to the desired screen and run the macro Variables can also be viewed on a TV through the video screen system You can see the current values of all variables and even watch them change in real time You can also change the values at any time with an infrared remote control Variable Commands The following variable commands can be included in a schedule They can all also be issued to the controller over the serial interface The format for sending commands over the serial interface is described in the Serial file
441. s to the controller Use the PC software s configuration screens to set the various configuration options Define the necessary objects and events name them set their times initial states power fail states etc Enter the actions you want to perform when each event occurs Load the schedule into the HomeVision Pro control unit the controller Test the schedule Enjoy your automated home You ll probably want to start by creating a simple schedule to make sure you know how everything works You can then add to it as you think of new things you want it to do HomeVision Pro makes this easy by allowing you to individually enable and disable events You can be running your home with a schedule while adding to it You can keep new events disabled until they re working then enable them Our web site has a brief tutorial of the HomeVision software which is essentially identical to the HomeVision Pro software that you might look at it you run into problems After the schedule is loaded the controller will run independently of the PC You can disconnect the controller and move it if you like If you choose to leave it connected you will be able to control your whole house from the computer if you wish How to Get Started We suggest you take things slowly at first in setting up HomeVision Pro HomeVision Pro contains a tremendous wealth of capabilities there s no way to learn everything in a few minutes Get the basics wor
442. seconds While running the timer continually counts down towards zero When it reaches zero the timer is said to be ringing and no longer running While ringing its value will remain at 0 The timer can also be halted stopped from running but maintaining the current value or resumed started running again after being halted 78 Chapter 9 Timers and Delays What happens when the timer rings depends on what mode it is in There are two possible modes described later Regardless of what mode it s in each timer is always in one of three states running ringing or stopped You can check the current state of a timer at any point in your schedule and perform conditional actions based on the result The following conditional checks are allowed If Timer XXX Ringing If Timer XXX Running If Timer XXX Stopped However in most cases you will not need to check the timer state in an If Then condition Instead you will set it up to automatically perform actions when the timer goes off or rings or expires Timer Operating Modes Timers can be used in two different modes e Standard Timer often referred to simply as a timer in this manual e Wait Timer Any of the 255 timers can be used in either mode The mode is determined by what command you use in your schedule to start the timer running Both modes are described in detail below A particular timer should only be used as a Standard Timer or a Wa
443. sed for which functions To test the 16 video screen control buttons push each of the corresponding buttons on your remote one at a time The Device Code and Key Code for the received signal will be shown in the window Compare these to the codes listed beside each of the 16 functions If all 16 buttons match Chapter 14 Infrared Control 147 you re ready to control the video screens If some of the buttons use different Key Codes you can change the entry to match the actual received Key Code Some points to note e If your remote is transmitting different Device and Key Codes than those shown it s not a problem Just enter the actual Key Codes in the text boxes corresponding to each function and the Device code in the Device Code text box e All signals from a specific remote should have the same Device Code This code should match the one shown in the Device Code text box e Most remotes don t have a Cancel button we ve initially assigned this function to the Mute button You may want to move this to a different button that works better with your remote s keypad layout 5 Load the remote settings to the controller Until you do this you won t be able to use the remote to control the video screen system To do this choose Load Schedule from the File menu Click the Load button to load the schedule Once all 16 buttons are working you can use the remote to navigate through the video screen syst
444. send keystrokes to the active window enter a serial interface command in your schedule to transmit the following ASCII text Send keys keystrokes Replace keystrokes with the desired keystrokes The keys will be sent just as if you typed them by hand Note that the double quotes are not sent they are only used to indicate the beginning and end points For example to send Hello enter a serial interface command in your schedule to transmit the following ASCII text Send keys Hello The format for entering keystrokes is described below Note that it is not possible to send double quotes 196 Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface e To send the standard keys letters numbers punctuation marks simply enter the desired character s e The plus sign caret percent sign tilde and parentheses have special meaning To specify one of these characters enclose it in braces For example to specify the plus sign use Brackets have no special meaning but must be enclosed in braces as well To send brace characters use and e To specify characters that aren t displayed when you press a key such as ENTER or TAB and keys that represent actions rather than characters use the codes shown below CODE CODE BACKSPACE BS or BKSP RIGHT SCROLLLOCK e To specify keys combined with any combination of the SHIFT CTRL and ALT keys precede the regular key code with one or more of the follow
445. serial interface The controller s main serial port port 1 is initially set to a 19 200 baud rate If the wrong comm port or baud rate is selected the PC software will not be able to communicate with the controller Changes to this screen only affect the computer settings not the controller To change the controller baud rate use the controller command screen under the Control menu These settings are stored in the preferences file pref hap in the HomeVision directory When the PC program starts it will try to open the chosen serial port If it is successful the comm port number and baud rate will be shown in the main program window If the port is in use by another program an error will occur and will be reported to you You must then close the port usually by quitting the application that opened it before the software can use it User Location Configuration Screen Use this screen to tell the controller where you live This information is used to calculate sunrise and sunset times for your precise location Several important points should be noted The controller calculates sunrise and sunset times based on your latitude and longitude The more precisely you enter these figures the more accurate the calculation Latitude and longitude for many North American cities are given in Appendix C Many maps can provide more precise values for your location The algorithm used to calculate these times should be accurate to with
446. sets it low fHt can range from 0 001 to 65 535 seconds This command is normally used when an output is low It will pulse the output high for the specified period of time If the output is high when the command is executed it will stay high for the specified time then go low Please refer to the previous command for several important notes about these pulse commands Disable Output Port Disables the output port After an output is disabled the only command that can be executed is an Enable command Other commands such as to set the output high or low will be ignored After being enabled again it will work normally Each output port can be individually enabled or disabled at any time This command can be useful for e Disabling control of a device that is not working properly or is not yet fully installed e Temporarily preventing other parts of the schedule from controlling the output e Temporarily preventing users from controlling the output with X 10 or infrared remote controls Enable Output Port Enables the output port This command must be issued to a Disabled output before it will respond to any other command Advanced Output Port Commands Read Output Port State Into Result Value This command takes different actions depending on whether it is executed in a schedule or commanded over the serial interface 112 Chapter 12 Input and Output Ports In a schedule it puts the current state of t
447. so save the schedule using the Save button under the File menu The settings from this configuration screen are saved along with your schedule If you create a new schedule you ll have to set these again 4 If all 16 buttons are working you can now use the remote to navigate through the video screen system assuming you have the video output connected to your TV You can then Display the video screen system on your TV using the video control screen Start the video screen system with the Channel Up key Stop the video screen system with the Channel Down key Use the Volume Up and Down keys to move between screen menu pages Use the number keys to select from the lists Use the Enter and Cancel keys to confirm or cancel an action Chapter 4 Programming Language 35 CHAPTER 4 PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE This chapter describes the programming language used to define actions and conditions These actions and conditions are the heart of your home automation system They specify what happens when any event occurs You enter actions using the actions entry screen Access to this screen is described in subsequent chapters Calling these actions and conditions a programming language probably makes it sound more complex that it really is You don t have to type in commands with bizarre names and confusing syntax Instead you just choose the desired action from a toolbar or list with a few mouse clicks The action or con
448. sponding bit in the specified module s state table You can check these bits in your schedule to determine when such a signal is received Several commands are available for communicating with devices that support these signals Clear Status Request Bit Clear Status Is On Bit Clear Status Is Off Bit Clear Hail Request Bit 50 Chapter 5 __X 10 Clear Hail Acknowledge Bit Clear Preset Dim Bit and Level Clear All Advanced X 10 Bits Transmit Current Status Note that you can also transmit the advanced X 10 signals by using the Send House Function Code command noted earlier PCS Lighting Commands Powerline Control Systems PCS lighting modules are available that can be directly set to any level and dimmed in 1 2 increments They are controlled by the following X 10 commands e Set PCS Light Level To e Micro Dim PCS Light 1 Level 1 2 e Micro Brighten PCS Light 1 Level 1 2 X 10 Commands Based On Variable Values All of the previous commands allow you to select which X 10 address to use In addition it is possible to use a variable value to specify the X 10 address The X 10 Command Entry Screen has a checkbox labeled Use variable for X 10 address If you check this you will be able to select a variable When Home Vision Pro executes this command it will obtain the variable value which ranges from 0 to 255 and use it as the X 10 ID number The X 10 addresses also called ID Numbers also
449. ss ma f 7 BEL ETB l 7 G W w 1 i a E eS Pana hates ops Sees Eein Ses si c 8 BS CAN 8 H X x a SS ape sisi aS Sais bosces padaan PRIES posas Fae BSS Se n 9 HT EM 9 I Y I y t n S A aso SSS Sis hos SS eS SS pHs se5 6 ee Pass A LF SUB J Z 3 Zz F SSS a SS tea os Seas Fees a ames Por SS Pans A foaSSe i B VT ESC K k g TERoro aS SS panne SS SS to cn aie ate Sa a ae u G FF FS lt L 1 r Sa Pee ae ea apa ria 5 aaa iets FoS Poen E e D CR GS M m a iy ill Bae Sais bosses hea ss SSeS fesse PERES prenen E so RS gt N n SS SSeS Poms o ccs ens sc toscnH feria ows HESS F SI US i O ms fe DEL Appendix C Latitudes and Longitudes C 1 APPENDIX C LATITUDES AND LONGITUDES State Province Latitude Longitude 33 52 86 82 34 02 86 02 34 73 86 58 Alabama Alabama Alabama Alabama Alabama Alaska Alaska Alaska Alaska Alaska Alberta Alberta Alberta Arizona Arizona Arizona Arizona Arkansas Arkansas Arkansas British Columbia British Columbia British Columbia British Columbia California California California California California California California California California California California California California California California California California 30 70 32 38 61 17 64 80 58 30 64 50 57 17 51 05 53 55 49 70 35 20 33 45 32 22 32 72 35 38 34 52 34 75 49 50 54 32 49 32 48 43 35 38 37 87 32 63 40 80 36 73 33 77 34
450. st be connected to the ground of the interfacing devices The 5V position can provide up to 100mA of continuous current to external devices Using Port C As An Output Port When used as an output port Port C provides the following output voltages per line OUTPUT OUTPUT MAXIMUM STATE VOLTAGE CURRENT High Logic 1 One 300 uA Low Logic 0 Zero WARNING It s important to follow the current limits in this table as exceeding them could damage the PCF8574 Note that the output can sink much more current in the low state 20mA than it can provide in the high state 300uUA This is important to remember when driving medium current devices like LEDs The examples given in this manual show the proper way to drive such devices Port C Output Examples A few examples will best illustrate how to connect to Port C as an output The following diagram shows output port C 1 driving an LED sv Output C 1 gt This example shows a resistor in series with an external LED The resistor is necessary to limit the current through the diode to less than 20mA A resistor between 250 ohms and 1000 ohms should work fine When the output is low current will flow and the LED will light When the output is high the LED will be off Chapter 12 Input and Output Ports 107 Port C can also provide digital outputs to external circuitry The following example shows Port C driving a standard CMOS latch 74HC373 Ground Controller Extern
451. standard format is used by many infrared remotes on the market today If you have a programmable universal remote you can choose from a variety of codes devices that use this standard format Remotes using this format will be the easiest to use and most reliable for sending commands to the controller Standard format infrared signals are described by two parameters Device Code and Key Code Each button or key on a remote has a different Key Code but all have the same Device Code Device Codes vary between different electronic equipment although there are some devices that happen use the same codes Key Codes are not necessarily the same from remote to remote For example the Volume Up button may have one Key Code on a Sony remote but a different code for a Pioneer remote This does not pose any problems for the controller Receiving Standard Format Signals The controller is designed to automatically recognize received signals that use the standard format The signals can be used in various ways e To perform a set of actions when the signal is received e To navigate through the video screen system e Tosend a message over the serial interface that the signal was received Transmitting Standard Format Signals You can transmit IR signals to devices such as televisions and stereos that use the standard format Before doing this the controller must know the exact signal format There are two ways to do define it 1 Ent
452. t This command can be used to ensure that the thermostat is in the desired state If the thermostat has been changed manually and the controller does not know it this will put the thermostat back into the old state Thermostat Data Commands These thermostat data commands operate on the thermostat system variables described below Thermostat System Variable Summary The controller has 64 internal system variables that it uses to hold the thermostat data Each of the 16 available zones has these four variables Current Temperature Temperature Setting Zone Configuration Zone Status The zone s current temperature For zones 1 and 2 this is the temperature reading that is displayed on the TV Thermostat Control Screen This value can be changed in the following two ways By a command in your schedule perhaps after reading the temperature from a temperature sensor By the thermostat reporting a new temperature setting to the controller Of course this is only possible if the thermostat can report its temperature like the RCS TX10 B and TX15 B or serial thermostats can The zone thermostat s temperature setting For zones 1 and 2 this is the temperature setting that is displayed on the TV Thermostat Control Screen This setting can be changed in the following ways From the TV Thermostat Control Screen By acommand in your schedule By the thermostat reporting a new temperature setting to the controller
453. t Specify a location select the USB Drivers folder in the HomeVision directory and then click Next d The wizard should say it found a driver for the USB High Speed Serial Converter The driver file will be named FTDIBUS INF Click Next 176 Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface e The wizard should say it completed installing the software Click Finish You may be asked to restart your computer If so restart it 3 When Windows restarts it may report finding an unknown hardware device It will then look for a driver for the USB Serial Port If it does select the USB Drivers folder again and Windows will complete the installation 4 Select Start Menu Settings Control Panel then open System and select the Device Manager tab The Device Manager should now list a new USB Serial Port under the Ports section Note that the port may only be listed while HomeVision Pro is connected via the USB cable To view or edit the properties double click or right click and select Properties a Note the Com port number assigned to the device This is the port number you will use in the HomeVision Pro software b Tochange the Com port number select the Port Settings tab then click Advanced USB Notes e When data is transmitted across the USB interface the USB status LEDs and the Serial port 1 status LEDs will both blink e Once the drivers are installed open the Home Vision Pro so
454. t 0 255 Not used You may enter anything you like name Flag 127 LOW name flag 43 High name FLAG 22 neutral name FLAG 2 Toggle Allowable values for COMMAND Set Clear Neutral Toggle Chapter 26 Web Server 273 COMMAND NAME FIELD VALUE FIELD EXAMPLE FORMAT NOTES FORMAT NOTES FORMAT Variable Var COMMAND SE COMMAND Scheduled Event Periodic Event PE COMMAND is variable ID in decimal format 0 255 Allowable values for COMMAND Increment Decrement where is the value to set the variable equal to in decimal format 0 255 Note spaces before and after where the value to set the variable equal to is in the value field is scheduled event ID in decimal format 0 255 Allowable values for COMMAND DoNow Enable Disable is periodic event ID in decimal format 0 255 Allowable values for COMMAND DoNow Enable Disable Rate EveryLoop Rate 1Minute Rate 5Minutes Rate 15Minutes Rate 1Hour Rate 2Hours Rate 4Hours Rate 8Hours Note there are no spaces For the command the desired value in decimal format 0 255 must be in value field This is how you would do it if you want the user to enter the desired value into a text box Not used You may enter anything you like Not used You may enter anything you like name Var 13 Increment name Var 63 decrement name Var 12 255 name Var 12 value
455. t continue to step 11 32 Chapter 3 Quick Start The controller initially contains a sample schedule loaded at the factory This schedule automatically displays the main menu of the video screen system upon power up Set your TV to view the controllers video output The main menu should appear as white text on a blue background If the text is blurry or the screen appears scrambled like a scrambled TV channel the video sync level requires adjustment The video chapter explains how to make this adjustment If there appears to be no video output remove and then restore power to the controller If there is still no video refer to the trouble shooting chapter Select Video Control Screen from the Control menu You can view other screens using the Display Video Screen Number button on the Video Control Screen Enter a screen number between 1 and 60 and click the button Note that numbers 1 to 60 will bring up a built in screen display Entering 0 will bring up a blank screen To try creating your own custom screen Select screen number 0 The screen should go blank To display the current time or date click the appropriate button To display a string of text enter the text and click the Write Text button To type text directly on the screen select the Typewriter mode by clicking in the Typewriter text field Press a key and the character will be displayed on the screen Letters and numbers will appear
456. t a zero then the digit 1 9 Chapter 13 Video Output 137 If the month is less than 10 two character places will still be used first a blank space then the digit 1 9 Display XX character long stored text string starting at character YY This command displays some or all of the text storage buffer on the video screen It has two parameters XX is the number of characters to write to the screen It can range from 1 to 256 e YY is the location character number of the text storage buffer to start displaying It can range from 1 to 256 The text is displayed starting at the current cursor location If you try to copy characters past the end of the text storage buffer for example if you try to display 10 characters starting at location 250 it will wrap around and continue copying from the start of the buffer Refer to the earlier part of this chapter for details on how the text storage buffer works Event Log Commands Log Text To Memory This command writes the specified text to the controller s event logging memory This log holds 256 lines of data that can be displayed on your TV Events can be automatically logged to this memory This command allows you to write your own messages to it as well The text length is limited to 24 characters which is the width of the video screen Log Current Time And Date To Memory This command writes the current time and date to the controller s event logging memory
457. t barometric pressure hundredths 75 Barometric Pressure Direction 2 Wind Variables The controller can track wind direction and speed Wind direction digit 1 Wind direction digits 2 3 Current wind speed Today s low wind speed Today s high wind speed Wind direction in degrees from 0 to 359 requires two variables for storage The first variable holds the first digit which can range from 0 to 3 The second variable holds the second and third digits which can range from 00 to 99 If the first variable is gt 3 then blanks will be displayed on the weather conditions TV screen Wind speed can range from 0 to 254 in increments of 1 A value of 255 is displayed as blank spaces For example to set the current wind direction to due south 180 degrees and the wind speed to 15 set the weather variables as follows Wind direction digit 1 1 Wind direction digits 2 3 80 Current wind speed 15 Rainfall Variables Four different rainfall amounts can be tracked with each requiring two weather variables for storage Today s rainfall inches Today s rainfall hundredths Rainfall this week inches Rainfall this week hundredths Rainfall this month inches Rainfall this month hundredths Rainfall this year inches Rainfall this year hundredths The hundredths values can range from 0 to 99 Only for the variable Today s rainfall inches a value of gt 99 is displayed as blank spaces instead of the digits The other
458. t is set to a slow baud rate or the computer is unusually slow If the Show Light Level box is checked the level of each address is shown in gray scale from black full off to white full on A module in the neutral state is shown in light blue Click the left mouse button on any address in the grid The Selected Module field will show the name and current state of the address Click the right mouse button on any address in the grid A pop up menu will appear allowing you to send a standard X 10 command to that address The Update button reads the latest module states from the controller and displays it This screen automatically updates the module states when 1 You transmit an X 10 signal from this screen 2 The controller receives an X 10 signal It does not update when the controller transmits signals as part of macros scheduled events etc Use the Update button to read the current status after these events Chapter 2 Software Overview 21 Input Output Port Control Screen From this screen you can e View the state of all input and output ports e Set any output port high or low e Pulse any output port high or low for a precise length of time You should note several points about this screen e When you first display the screen the software will attempt to read the current port states from the controller If unsuccessful an error message will be displayed and you will not be able to control or read the ports
459. t many devices throughout the home These cables could be many meters in length and can both emit electromagnetic radiation and pick up electromagnetic radiation from other sources There are several things that can be done to minimize such interference Use ferrites on the cables Use shielded twisted pair cables Minimize the total cable length Route the cables away from the home s AC power lines Route the cables away from sensitive equipment such as radio receivers If the end user believes EMC problems may exist in the automation system and is unable to resolve them he she should contact a professional installer for assistance Custom Solutions Inc is not responsible for the performance of the overall automation system using products from other companies Appendix B__ASCII Code Chart B 1 APPENDIX B ASCII CODE CHART Most Significant Figure HEX 0 I 2 3 4 5 6 i 0 NUL DLE 0 P x p E Ae ha ones HoH se Pee aa Hees HiSanS 1 SOH DC1 1 A Q a q L aae r ESE recs Fodena padagos pandeh pasadi toaren Fedean e 2 STX DC2 2 B R b r a Steps eS Horio oases Se a 2 ia fees aces Sos s 3 ETX DC3 3 C S lel s t PSPS Ss Ss 5 oso y PaSa Pranas RSS SS Saale aie paasa Frea 4 EOT DC4 4 D a5 d t S Seb Se Se s tana PSS es PSS os hoes pe Sas hae SS fae eH i 5 ENQ NAK 5 E U e u g e Has sano ee a HGS ss hea aia Sn tales hes ae n 6 ACK SYN amp 6 F V f v X a E pessas FERSES PSDS Hess Pes eHS oa S S se
460. t stored temperature into the variable This approach maximizes speed because if we were to read the sensor immediately it could interfere with all the other sensors requiring the process to start over This is the only command related to the digital temperature sensors To use a digital sensor first use this command to put the temperature value into a variable Then use any of the other variable commands or conditions to work with the temperature value Note that the temperature value is stored in degrees Fahrenheit plus 50 as shown below Variable Value Actual Temperature 0 50 50 0 100 50 150 100 200 150 255 205 Storing the temperature in this manner allows negative temperatures You will need to subtract 50 from the variable value if you want to get the actual temperature If there is an error during the temperature process the value is set to 255 You can check for this to detect errors such as a broken or disconnected sensor Set All Variables Equal To Puts the value into all variables This command can be used to quickly initialize all variables usually to zero Chapter 11__ Variables 97 Advanced Variable Commands Indirect Commands Variable Variable XXX This command looks up the value of variable XXX and uses it as the ID number of the variable to set The corresponding variable is then set to the constant value If the value of the first variable is not a valid
461. t the display off Here s how to configure the controller for caller ID using the Call Editor RSA 1 Install the Call Editor according to the manufacturer s instructions However you do not need to connect a phone if you do not wish The required Call Editor connections are Power input Telephone line input Serial connection to your computer 2 Add anew macro using the macro summary screen you may want to name it Handle Phone Call or something similar This macro will be run automatically whenever a call is received It must contain one of the following two commands 208 Chapter 18 Caller ID Display Caller ID Screen On Solid Background or Display Caller ID Screen On External Video These are the commands that actually start the controller s video system and display the caller ID information The first command displays the information on a solid background while the second command overlays it onto any incoming video You may want to include other commands in this macro For example if the controller s video output is connected to your TV s A V input 1 you could transmit the infrared signals necessary to switch to that input Otherwise the controller would be sending out the video data but your TV might not be displaying it You could also include commands to mute your TV or stereo flash a light or take any number of other actions You may also want to have the macro automatically turn the display off after a certain a
462. t with the complete name of the desired file including the extension which must be txt or htm For example to clear the file log txt send this ASCII text Clear text file log txt To clear the file webpage htm send this text Clear text file webpage htm 198 Chapter 16__ Serial Interface Notes e You must place the desired text between the double quotes but the quotes will not be written to the file There is no way to write double quotes to the file The serial commands are not case sensitive However the text to write the text between the double quotes will be written in whatever case you enter e If the specified file does not exist it will be created This is true for both the writing and clearing commands e Ifthe specified file is already opened when the software tries to write to it the text will not be written e A carriage return is automatically added to the end of each line Therefore each ASCII command starts writing at the beginning of a new line e Status of the file writing will be shown on the bottom of the main software screen Automatically Logging Serial Data To A Text File The PC software can automatically write all the serial data it receives from the controller to a text file This requires that the controller be connected to the computer s serial port and that the HomeVision Pro application be running on the computer The controller reports a variety of information over the serial interface that
463. tages should not be applied Electrical Parameters Voltage inputs of 1 3V to 30V are read as a one high Voltage inputs of 30V to 1V are read as a zero low Voltage inputs between 1 0V and 1 3V are indeterminate If the input is left open the result depends on whether the pull up resistor is connected 104 Chapter 12 Input and Output Ports e If the pull up resistor is connected switch closed the input will be pulled up and be read as a one high e If the pull up resistor is disconnected switch opened the input will go low and be read as a zero low NOTE See the Miscellaneous chapter for details on the switches that control these pull up resistors A schematic of one input is shown below including a 2 2K pull up resistor located on the controller circuit board along with the switch that connects disconnects it 2 2K ohms Switch Controller Terminal Block Port B Examples A few examples will best illustrate how to connect to Port B as an input The following diagram shows input port B 1 connected to an external switch When multiple switches are used one end of each switch should be tied together as a common ground Switch B1 closed External Switch Controller Terminal Block Note that the pull up resistor should be connected i e the internal switch B1 closed When the external switch is open no current flows through it The input port is internally pulled high by the pull up
464. tatement by clicking the If Then button For the first condition in the lf Then statement enter an X 10 sequence by clicking the X 10 Sequence button In the screen that appears Define each signal Add or remove signals to the sequence Specify the time limit in which all signals must be received Click OK when done In the Then part of the If Then statement enter whatever actions you want performed when the sequence is received Load the schedule There are several important points to note about sequences X 10 sequences should be used as conditions in If Then statements only within periodic events that run every loop By running every loop the If Then statement is repeatedly checked Very shortly after the sequence is received the periodic event will be run the If Then statement will be true and the specified actions will be performed If you put a sequence condition somewhere else in your schedule it probably won t work Although the controller will receive the sequence it won t do anything with it It s up to your schedule to check for the sequence Since periodic events can be set to run every loop which is virtually continuous this is the place to put them You can check for as many different sequences as you want within a single periodic event there is no need for multiple periodic events The sequence should only be used in an If Then statement not an If Then Else statement With an If Then Else
465. te window NotePad send keys Hello ENTER fp The first command will activate NotePad The keystrokes will enter Hello followed by a carriage return The percent sign is the ALT key which selects the menu and the letters fp select the FILE menu then the PRINT command This should print the file Writing To Text Files You can write text to a file on your computer upon command from the controller This requires that the controller be connected to the computer s serial port and that the HomeVision Pro application be running on the computer Writing Text To write a line of text to a file enter a serial interface command in your schedule to transmit the following ASCII text Write to file filename txt TEXT TO WRITE Replace filename txt with the complete name of the desired file including the extension which must be txt Replace TEXT TO WRITE with the desired text For example to write Security system armed to the file log txt send this ASCII text Write to file log txt Security system armed To write a blank line send this ASCII text Write to file log txt You can also write to a file with a htm extension which can be read be a web browser like this Write to file filename htm TEXT TO WRITE Clearing A Text File You can also clear erase a text file To do this enter a serial interface command in your schedule to transmit the following ASCII text Clear text file filename txt Replace filename tx
466. temperature Request 6 Zone 1 temperature setting Request 7 Zone 2 temperature 8 Zone 2 temperature setting Request Request 249 Zone temperature Request 250 Zone temperature setting Request 251 Zone temperature Request 252 Zone Request 253 Zone temperature setting Al T 2 2 1 system mode E 2 2 Request 254 Zone fan mode Request 255 Zone system mode Request 256 Zone fan mode It then starts over repeating the process continually TX15 B The RCS TX15 B thermostats support an auto send feature When enabled the thermostat will send an X 10 message reporting any local changes changes made at the thermostat of system mode fan mode or temperature setpoint It will also report a change in the actual temperature HomeVision Pro will automatically receive and decode the X 10 messages from this thermostat However you must disable HomeVision Pro s automatic reading function to prevent it from periodically polling the thermostat You can do this from the PC software Thermostat Configuration Screen by unchecking the Enable automatic reading checkbox or from the TV video menu system Thermostat Configuration Screen by setting the request rate to zero If you do not disable automatic reading HomeVision Pro could misinterpret setpoint messages as temperature messages and vice versa Note that the command Initialize Thermostat will enable the TX15 B auto send mode However the TX15 B may lose this setti
467. ter Numbers 1 14 are Alarm Disarmed Then Do whatever you want here when the alarm gets disarmed End If 182 Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface If Serial Input Character Numbers 1 15 are Alarm Condition Then Do whatever you want here when the alarm goes off End If 3 Click OK then load the new schedule Here s how this works 1 As a serial message comes in it gets saved to memory a buffer 2 When the data is complete the controller executes the actions you ve specified in the Serial Data Input event for that port If the message matches any of the If Then statements the specified actions are performed The incoming message can be used in If Then statements repeatedly throughout this event 3 When the controller finishes the actions it clears the incoming message The controller is now ready to receive more serial input data either commands or user data The key to this approach is that all the conditions and actions involving the incoming serial data are contained in the Serial Data Input event The controller automatically executes this event when the message is complete Although you can receive and use serial data outside of the Serial Data Input event it becomes more difficult as you have to figure out on your own when the message complete Receiving Expected Serial Data As an example let s assume the serial port is connected to a thermostat The thermostat can report the current temperature in response to
468. ter blink on then writing the text you want to blink For text you don t want to blink set the character blink off before writing it The default position of the character blink is off so if you write text without performing one of these commands first it will not blink The On Screen Display works by blinking all text written while the character blink is on Text written while it s off will not blink For example the following sequence of commands will cause the word armed to blink but not the other text Write Text Alarm To Screen Set Character Blink On Write Text armed To Screen Set Character Blink Off Write Text and ready To Screen Video Text Commands 134 Chapter 13 Video Output These commands control the text that will be displayed on the screen They are most often used to create custom video screens Set Cursor Row To Set Cursor Column To These commands set the location on the screen where the next character will begin writing called the cursor location The row number goes from 1 to 12 and the column number goes from 1 to 24 As you write text to the screen the cursor location i e the current row and column number changes accordingly When text reaches the end of a line it wraps around to the start of the next row When it reaches the end of the screen bottom right it wraps around to the start upper left Do Line Feed and Carriage Return Clear This command moves th
469. terface is described in the Serial file installed in the HomeVision directory These commands are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the appropriate toolbar button The command and selected event are chosen from the pull down list Enable Scheduled Event In order to perform actions the event must first be enabled This is normally done from the scheduled event summary screen in the PC program However you can also enable or disabled events in the schedule This command enables the event allowing it to be performed Disable Scheduled Event In order to perform actions the event must first be enabled This is normally done from the scheduled event summary screen in the PC program However you can also enable or disabled events in the schedule This command disables the event preventing it from being performed Do Scheduled Event Now This command causes the controller to perform the scheduled event actions immediately The event will also still occur at its scheduled time When this command is executed the actions will be performed even if the event is disabled Chapter 7 Scheduled Events 71 This command provides great flexibility in your schedules because it allows you to use scheduled events as macros if you use up all 255 macros Scheduled Event Conditions There are no scheduled event conditions that can be checked by an If Then or If Then Else statement Power Failure Options W
470. that would have been performed while the power was out and performing them after it is restored However you have complete control of which actions the controller will catch up and which ones it won t The process the controller goes through immediately after power is restored is known as power failure recovery During this process the controller performs the following steps 1 The controller tests itself to ensure it is functioning properly 2 The controller checks most objects modules variables output ports etc and sets them to the states you specified with the Power Fail State option You specify the Power Failure States using the object summary screens of the PC program This allows you to put any object into the specified state automatically after a power failure Here are several examples of the Power Fail States Flags can be set to SET CLEAR or NEUTRAL or left unchanged Timers can be stopped left unchanged or only stopped under certain conditions Output ports can be set high or low or left unchanged They can also be disabled Input ports can be disabled For a detailed description of these refer to the Power Fail Options section in the each object s chapter 3 The controller next attempts to catch up any actions that should have occurred during the power outage It does this by performing any scheduled events that the user specified as catch up It also counts down all timers and pe
471. the PC program Once you ve done this you must enable the Off Trigger You would normally do this from the X 10 module summary screen before loading the schedule However you can also enable or disable the trigger with a command in the schedule This command enables the Off Trigger so the actions can be performed Disable Off Trigger This command disables the Off Trigger and will thereby prevent any associated actions you ve defined from being performed See the discussion for Enable Off Trigger for more details Enable On Trigger If you want the controller to perform actions when an X 10 On command is received you must first define the actions from the PC program Once you ve done this you must enable the On Trigger You would normally do this from the X 10 module summary screen before loading the schedule However you can also enable or disable the trigger with a command in the schedule This command enables the On Trigger so the actions can be performed Disable On Trigger This command disables the On Trigger and will thereby prevent any associated actions you ve defined from being performed See the discussion for Enable On Trigger for more details Set State To On This command sets the current state in the state table to ON Level 16 It does not send any X 10 signal over the power line Set State To Off This command sets the current state in the state table to OFF Level 0 It does n
472. the connector and terminal block simultaneously The Transmit signal goes to both allowing you to easily send the same data to two devices You should not however connect two devices to the Receive lines simultaneously If you do one or both devices could be damaged RS 485 Mode Connections RS 485 connections are made through the terminal block Two modes are available full duplex and half duplex RS 485 Four Wire Full Duplex Mode In the four wire mode HomeVision Pro would typically be the master and the other devices would be slaves see Figure 16 1 Connections are as follows e Connect the TXA and TXB positions the HomeVision Pro transmit output to the RS 485 network receive lines i e the receive inputs of the other devices e Connect the RXA and RXB positions the HomeVision Pro receive input to the RS 485 network transmit lines i e the transmit outputs of the other devices In making the above connections note that the polarity of the A and B lines must be correct A is often called the negative or side and B the positive or side Note that if you wish to use this port as a slave in a four wire system you should swap the transmit and receive connections RS 485 Two Wire Half Duplex Mode This is the mode used by most home automation equipment as it requires fewer wires than the full duplex mode see Figure 16 2 Connect it as follows e
473. the first group but these are Force commands These commands are Force On Force Off Force Dim Force Dim Times Force Brighten Force Brighten Times Force To Level These commands will always transmit the specified X 10 signals regardless of the current state of the module They guarantee that your specified commands are sent over the power line These are the commands that most users should use with devices requiring the On Off Bright Dim type of X 10 signals 3 The third group of standard commands contains some of the same commands as previous groups but with the keyword Slow afterwards These commands are Dim Times Slow Force Dim Times Slow Brighten Times Slow Force Brighten Times Slow Set To Level Slow Force To Level Slow These commands transmit multiple Brighten or Dim commands usually to change the level of lights The standard commands without the keyword Slow will transmit the signals about one half second apart These Slow commands will spread them out approximately one second apart This can make the lighting change a little more gradual which may be desirable in some applications Chapter 5 X 10 49 Advanced X 10 Commands That Transmit X 10 Signals These advanced commands provide more control methods than the basic On Off Brighten and Dim commands discussed previously These commands are Toggle Module Transmit House Unit Code Only Transmit House Function C
474. the serial message to the controller Method 2 The value field holds the serial name Serial TX value Arm alarm string to transmit to Home Vision SerialTX Pro A carriage return will be added to the end of the serial message to the controller 276 Chapter 26 Web Server COMMAND Open serial port Close serial port Serial command to HomeVision Pro software FORMAT OpenPort BAUD ClosePort Method 1 SwCmd XXXX Method 2 SwCmd NAME FIELD VALUE FIELD FORMAT NOTES Not used You may enter anything you like NOTES is the desired serial port BAUD is the desired serial port baud rate Allowable values 2400 4800 9600 19200 This command can be used to change the baud rate without closing the port first Not used You may enter anything you like Not used You may enter anything you like XXXX is the serial string for the HomeVision Pro S W to perform This will have the same effect as if the serial message was received from the controller The value field holds the serial string for the HomeVision Pro SW to perform This will have the same effect as if the serial message was received from the controller EXAMPLE FORMAT name OpenPort 2 19200 name ClosePort name SwCmd Play wav file chimes wav name SwCmd value Play wav file chimes wav Chapter 26 Web Server 277 Using Tags To Request Object Statu
475. the text file You may want to remove some of the extra serial data If you entered a direct serial command you ll see that command in the file Immediately prior to the data you ll also see 36 Cmad which is the controller s acknowledgment of the command and following the data you ll see Done indicating the command is complete Once the data is in a file you may wish to import it into a spreadsheet program The evenly aligned columns of data make this quite easy Automatically Transmitting Data Log Another approach is to have the controller automatically transmit the data log when it fills up or at a preset time each day We recommend using a scheduled event set for some time in the early morning The transmission can take a while so it s better to do it when nothing else is going on For this to work the HomeVision Pro software should be running and automatically writing the serial messages to a text file Chapter 23 Weather Data 245 CHAPTER 23 WEATHER DATA Introduction Page 3 of the video TV menu system accesses a weather screen This screen can display a variety of weather data as shown in this example WEATHER CONDITIONS NOW LO HI Inside Temp 72 70 74 Outside Temp 77 68 82 Inside RH 65 60 70 Outside RH 85 79 100 Wind Speed 16 Wind Direct 340 NNW Rain Today 0 58 Inches Pressure 30 05 PRESS ANY KEY TO RETURN This feature is intended primarily for use with the controller connected to a compute
476. the value time remaining of timer number on the video screen This allows you to display timer values on your own custom screens The display format is as follows HH MM SS where HH MM and SS are the hours minutes and seconds values Display Result Value On Screen This command writes the value of the system variable Result Value to the screen See the Miscellaneous chapter for a description of Result Value Display Current Time On Screen This command writes the current time to the screen in AM PM format The display format is HH MM XM Where HH is the current hour between 1 and 12 MM is the current minute between 0 and 59 XM is either AM or PM If the hour is less than 10 two character places will still be used first a blank space than a digit 1 9 This command only writes the current time once If you continue to display the screen for several minutes the time will not be updated automatically If you want it to update you need to rewrite it periodically See the notes at the end of this chapter for a description of how to create screens that update as changes occur Display Current Date On Screen This command writes the current date to the screen The display format is MM DD YY Where MM is the current month between 1 and 12 DD is the current day of the month between 1 and 31 YY are the last two digits of the year between 0 and 99 If the day is less than 10 two character places will still be used firs
477. their function on the entire house code However most only act on individual devices that have been armed by prior house unit code commands This signal takes approximately four tenths of a second to transmit over the power line Examples A few examples of X 10 signals transmitted from the controller or other devices will help clarify this Example You press the button Unit 5 On on a mini controller that is set to house code A with HomeVision Pro the command X 10 A 5 On in your schedule would do the same thing X 10 Transmissions First the house unit code combination of house code A and unit code 5 is transmitted This arms any device set to A 5 Second a house function code combination of house code A and the function code On is transmitted Module A 5 will then turn on since it was previously armed and the house function code command was addressed to its house code A 44 Chapter 5 X 10 e Example After turning device A 5 on in the previous example you press the Dim button on the same mini controller X 10 Transmissions A house function code combination of house code A and function code Dim is transmitted Module A 5 will remain armed after being turned on and will therefore respond to the Dim command by dimming one level If you continue to press the Dim button the same house function code command will be sent repeatedly dimming the module presumably a light e Example From the X 10 control screen in the P
478. ther six However the controller can transmit and receive all of these codes On Off Brighten Dim All Lights On operates on entire house code All Units Off operates on entire house code All Lights Off operates on entire house code Pre Set Dim Hail Request operates on entire house code Hail Acknowledge Status Request Status Is On Status Is Off X 10 Signal Transmissions The controller provides well over 40 different commands for transmitting X 10 signals This gives you a wide variety of options for controlling X 10 devices in your schedule To make the best use of these it s important to understand how X 10 signals are transmitted There are two different types of X 10 signal transmissions House Unit Codes This transmission consists of a single house code and unit code It is used to select which X 10 device the command is intended for Any module that receives a house unit code that matches its own will arm itself in preparation for a subsequent house function code command It is usually possible to send multiple house unit codes in succession arming multiple devices All the armed devices will then respond at the same time to a subsequent house function code command This signal takes approximately four tenths of a second to transmit over the power line House Function Codes This transmission consists of one house code and one function code Some of the function codes will perform
479. this works Example 1 Lt Condition A OR Condition B AND Condition C Then This is evaluated as Condition A OR Condition B AND Condition C This will be true if Condition A is true or if BOTH B and C are true Example 2 If Condition A OR Condition B AND Condition C AND Condition D Then This is evaluated as Condition A OR Condition B AND Condition C AND Condition D This will be true if Condition A is true or if ALL of conditions B C and D are true Chapter 4 Programming Language 39 Example 3 If Condition A AND Condition B OR Condition C Then This is evaluated as Condition A AND Condition B OR Condition C This will be true if BOTH A and B are true or if C is true Example 4 If Condition A AND Condition B OR Condition C AND Condition D Then This is evaluated as Condition A AND Condition B OR Condition C AND Condition D This will be true if BOTH A and B are true or if BOTH C and D are true Example 5 If Condition A AND Condition B OR Condition C OR Condition D AND Condition E AND Condition F Then This is evaluated as Condition A AND Condition B OR Condition C OR Condition D AND Condition E AND Condition F e In certain situations you may have to enter a condition more than once to achieve the desired effect For example assume you want to perform an action if an X 10 module is on and if either of two flags is also set In other words
480. timer running click the Wait button on the actions entry screen toolbar 2 Select Load Timer And Start 3 Select the timer you want to use from the timer name list 4 Enter the initial timer value hours minutes seconds and centiseconds hundredths of seconds 5 Click OK 6 Between the WAIT and END lines enter the actions you want performed when the timer goes off Chapter9 Timers and Delays 81 Comparing Standard And Wait Timers Remember that each timer in your schedule can be used as a standard timer or a wait timer It s even possible for a single timer to be used in different modes at different times in your schedule although this is generally not recommended We recommend using Standard Timers for most purposes Each function should have its own timer Use the timer summary screen to specify the actions you want performed when the timer expires Wherever in the schedule you need to start the timer you can do so with a single command using the Timer toolbar button One disadvantage of a Standard Timer is that it can make your schedule harder to read When you enter a command to start the timer it s not immediately obvious what happens when it expires To determine this you have to refer back to the timer summary screen to see what the actions are This is where a Wait Timer has an advantage over a Standard Timer as a Wait Timer can often be easier to understand in your schedule This is because the
481. ting a stereo plug the connections are as follows e The plug s tip is the infrared input e The plug s body is 12V to provide power to the external receiver e The plug s center ring is ground NOTE We recommend removing power from HomeVision Pro before inserting or removing a connector If you do this with power applied the jack will briefly short 12V to ground and will reset HomeVision Pro Power Jack This is a 2 1mm jack although plugs of 2 0 to 2 3mm work fine The shell outer ring is ground and the inner contact is the voltage HomeVision Pro requires a regulated 12VDC supply with 1 2A of current minimum although we recommend 1 5A to have plenty of margin Dynamic Data Exchange DDE Dynamic Data Exchange DDE is a process by which Windows based programs can exchange data The HomeVision Pro software incorporates a DDE interface that programmers can use when writing software to communicate with the controller This DDE capability is enabled with check boxes on the preferences screen If you use other software that uses this DDE capability you will need to enable these check boxes Otherwise leave these disabled If you are a programmer and need information on interfacing with HomeVision Pro via DDE see the example Visual Basic software on the web site Control Style The controller is primarily an event driven controller It performs the actions you define when specific events occur However the controller also pr
482. tions Inc products meets CE requirements and user needs e nternational 220V version of HomeVision Pro is almost always used with two accessories not provided by Custom Solutions Inc These are a 12 VDC power supply and an X 10 powerline interface module It is the responsibility of the distributor installer and end user to ensure that the A 2 Appendix A _ FCC CE Information chosen devices are CE compliant Failure to do so may result in a non compliant system and potentially EMC problems e To minimize radiated emissions ferrites should be placed on all cables connected to HomeVision Pro the Multifunction Expansion Board and Port Extender Board These ferrite devices simply clamp around one or more cables The ferrite device should be placed as close to the HomeVision Pro device as practical Custom Solutions Inc does not provide these ferrite devices the distributors installers or end users are responsible for obtaining them The following table lists common ferrite devices that are suitable and some of their distributors Although the system will function without these devices emissions might exceed CE limits Cable Type Manufacturer Manufacturer Distributor Distributor Cone hype Merve Mpart ume nn partum Round Fair Rite 2643164151 Ef Round Fair Rite 2643167251 e Other cables connected to the home automation system can present risks of EMC problems Cables may interconnec
483. tions of the 12 switches are described below receiver will not function This position may be selected when using the IR receive jack instead of an optical emitter placed near the built in receivers This will prevent the receiver from picking up noise SWITCH SWITCH DESCRIPTION LABEL WHEN OPENED LEFT WHEN CLOSED RIGHT IR Rx1 The built in infrared receiver 1 the main The built in infrared receiver 1 the main receiver will function This position must be selected when using an optical emitter placed near the receiver the S switched input will be disconnected You may want to use this position when reading the address of a sensor connected to the A input at which time no other sensors can be connected IR Rx2 The built in infrared receiver 2 used for The built in infrared receiver 2 used for measuring the carrier frequency during IR measuring the carrier frequency during IR learning will not function This position may learning will function This position be selected when using the IR receive jack must be selected when using an optical instead of an optical emitter placed near the emitter placed near the receiver built in receivers This will prevent the receiver from picking up noise RAM Switch is reserved for future use Setting Switch is reserved for future use Setting currently does not matter currently does not matter DTS Any digital temperature sensors attached to A
484. tions would be performed If this isn t the behavior you want use different X 10 signals A sequence can be as short as one signal Sequences can use wildcards to match a received X 10 signal When entering X 10 sequences there are three ways to use the wildcards 1 To match any unit or function code with a particular house code Select House Unit Code select the desired house code in the House Code list box then select the character in the Unit Code list box 2 To match any house code with a particular unit code Select House Unit Code select the character in the House Code list box then select the desired unit code in the Unit Code list box 3 To match any house code with a particular function code Select House Function Code select the character in the House Code list box then select the desired function code in the Function Code list box Use Of Module Enable Disable X 10 modules can be individually enabled or disabled When disabled a module will not respond to commands to transmit the signal You ll normally want to have all your modules enabled but the disable feature provides additional control capabilities that may be useful in certain situations For example If you re developing a schedule and one of the modules is not working the way you want it to you could temporarily disable it to prevent problems For example you might be using an signal to arm disarm
485. tm framework for displaying other pages Heading displayed at top of main HVTop htm HVTop htm Homevisorstropage fen Tein Index table of contents displayed along HVIndex htm HVIndex htm left side of main Home Vision Pro page Blank page used by HVWebPage htm to HVBlank htm HVBlank htm display blank areas Page used to report status of commands HVCommandStatusFormat htm HVCommandStatusFormat htm sent to the server from the browser bas Notes The format for these pages is based on the file named HVMainFormat htm The web server will read this file and replace the text InsertStatusHere with a table containing the desired information You can edit this file to change the overall format if you do this be sure to include the text InsertStatusHere somewhere in it so the server knows where to insert the status table The format for these pages is based on the indicated file The web server will read these files and send them to the browser exactly as is You can edit these files in any way you like The format for this page is based on the file named HVCommandStatusFormat htm The web server will read this file and replace the text InsertStatusHere with the status result of the command sent to the server You can edit this file to change the overall format if you do this be sure to include the text InsertStatusHere somewhere in it so the server knows where to insert the status
486. tor RSA section above for details 2 Open the caller ID configuration screen under the Configure menu A Select PC Other S W in the Caller ID Configuration option box Chapter 18 Caller ID 209 B Select the macro that you want to run when a call is received 3 Load your schedule 4 Configure the other software package as described in its documentation NOTE Some programs may not run the caller ID macro entered in step 1 Instead they may write the caller ID information directly to the TV screen In this case you do not need to set up the controller as described here Caller ID Phone Number Display Format Use the Caller ID Configuration screen to select the phone number display format The default method is to format it for the United States standard with the area code in parenthesis like this 407 555 1234 Such formatting does not work properly for international users as the number of digits and the spacing between them differ widely For international use you can display the phone number exactly as it is received eliminating the formatting problems Caller ID Log All calls will be logged to a text file on the hard disk The file will be located in the same directory as the HomeVision Pro application The file name is cid_log txt and will look something like this Began Waiting for Call 7 31 97 11 12 57 PM 9 31 97 at 10 22 12 PM 555 726 8864 Custom Solutions 9 31 97 at 11 13 16 PM 555 234 4444 Johnson
487. tor in noise caused by the infrared light present in most ambient lighting and the task becomes even more difficult This is why very few home automation systems today provide this capability The controller design overcomes these problems and is compatible with many different remote control types However there are a few signal types that it cannot automatically recognize Fortunately all learning remotes or preprogrammed universal remotes can be configured to transmit standard signals compatible with the controller The wide range of signals compatible with the controller should make it relatively easy to find appropriate signals for you to use The controller can also receive other types of signals if they are first learned Using IR signals as command inputs gives your home automation system a very quick response time Most IR signals are under 200mS in duration Since the controller can begin executing commands in less than 1mS the controller will respond nearly instantly to your command Response time is much faster than with an X 10 type remote control system In the X 10 system IR signals are first transmitted to a special receiver unit The receiver then transmits an X 10 signal that can be received by the controller and used to command 144 Chapter 14 Infrared Control actions The relatively long length of an X 10 signal about 1 second makes the entire process much slower Controller Setup For Receiving Standard IR Signals
488. tored You do this through the Power Fail State fields on the object summary screens The meanings of the possible power failure states are mostly self explanatory They are also explained in detail in the individual object chapters The overall power failure recovery process is explained in the Miscellaneous chapter Action Entry Screen The action entry screen is used to enter the actions you want performed for each event It is accessed from the various object summary screens The main features of this screen are highlighted below Listing Window The large box in the action entry screen is the listing window The actions and conditions are listed here You can use the mouse or cursor keys to move around this window e The schedule line currently selected will be highlighted If you click outside the listing window or below the last line of text then no line is selected e You can change the text colors from the Preferences screen To add a line to the schedule use the toolbar discussed later The line will be inserted before the currently selected line or at the end of the schedule if no line is selected e To edit a line already in the schedule double click on the desired line An editing window will open allowing you to change the line However you cannot change the action or condition type For example if the line is an X 10 action you can change it to any other X 10 action You cannot change it to an action for a
489. tores your learned infrared signals Signals are stored by recording the lengths of the individual pulses Typical signals require from 60 to 200 bytes Approximately 45 000 bytes are available the exact amount is shown on the screen This should be more than enough to hold 255 typical signals The other section displays the number of object names to be loaded into the controller The controller can hold up to 512 names You can you this screen to keep track of how many you have See the Miscellaneous chapter for more information on object names View Messages Screen The controller can send text messages to the PC for display in this window The window will show the message along with its date and time based on the computer s clock This can assist in debugging your schedule and for alerting the computer user to important events Refer to the Serial Interface chapter for more information Read Event Log Screen The controller can record events in an internal 256 line log that can be displayed on the TV Use this screen to read the log and display it on the PC Debug Tools Screen This screen is used to test serial communications and write the controller s RAM to disk You should never need to use this screen unless we ask you to help us debug a problem Chapter 3 Quick Start 29 CHAPTER 3 QUICK START This section describes the necessary steps for getting the controller initially up and running It explains how the controlle
490. tween response time and the amount of X 10 traffic After the controller sends a data request the thermostat responds with the requested data If the controller were to send another data request or any X 10 signal immediately after sending the first data request it could collide with the thermostat response and corrupt it To get around this problem each time the controller requests data it requests only ONE of the four data types from one thermostat zone This gives the thermostat time to respond before the next data request a minute or more later Each time the controller requests data it requests a different setting then the prior time However it doesn t simply loop through the four different data types Instead it only requests the system mode Off Heat Cool or Auto and fan mode On or Auto once every 256 requests The other times it alternates between requesting the current temperature and the temperature setting This approach gives the best response time for the temperature data which changes the most frequently The system and fan modes are not manually changed very often at the thermostat so the delay in recognizing such changes is usually not a problem Chapter 19 Thermostats 221 If you have two TX10 B thermostats the controller will alternate between them in this fashion Request 1 Zone 1 temperature Request 2 Zone 1 temperature setting Request 3 Zone 2 temperature Request 4 Zone 2 temperature setting Request 5 Zone 1
491. u can select from eight different background colors Incoming video can be passed through without any overlay The video screen system can be controlled from a standard hand held infrared remote control 118 Chapter 13 Video Output e The entire video system can be controlled from the serial interface e The standard video format is NTSC PAL video is available as an option it requires a modified controller card Choosing Between The Video Screen Types All the different types of video screens may make it confusing to know what you should use Here s a simple hopefully recommendation e Start by using the built in video menu system It s ready to go and will do everything most users need e Use the custom menu system if you decide that built in system is either missing some things you want or has some things that you don t the user to access like variable and timer screens e Create your own custom screens if you need to display changing information variable values flag states the current time etc e Use the RAM video screens only if you have PC software that supports them You can use all of the above screen methods together in your schedule For example you could create a custom menu system with multiple screens displaying menus of options One of the entries could start the built in video menu system this would allow you to access the more than 50 built in screens without having to include each of them individually in y
492. u may not realize that it s currently disabled You can view the current status on the TV screen from the IR signal screen If the signal is enabled but the IR TX LED still won t blink the signal may have been learned improperly Try learning it again resaving it to your schedule and then reloading it Yes The signal was transmitted If your equipment did not respond to the signal there may be a problem with your external IR distribution system getting the signal to the equipment Trouble shooting such systems is beyond the scope of this manual If the external IR distribution system is OK but the signal still does not control the equipment the signal may have been learned improperly Try learning it again resaving it to your schedule and then reloading it If you cannot get the signal learned properly so that it controls your equipment see the Home Vision web site for more trouble shooting tips Chapter 28 Trouble Shooting 305 Video Problem Is the video output jack providing any video output 1 No Try the following e Verify the video cable is properly connected from the controller s video output jack to the video input jack on your TV or VCR modulator etc e Make sure your TV or other device has selected the video jack for input This is a common problem e Open the video control screen under the Control menu To provide video text output perform these commands Stop video system Start video m
493. ude the following special characters in the phone number text box to control how the number is dialed pause typically for 2 seconds hook flash go on hook for 0 7 seconds wait for 5 seconds of silence before continuing Spaces hyphens and parenthesis entered in the phone number field are ignored Refer to your modem owner s manual for more information Chapter 27 Miscellaneous 289 e f you have call waiting you should cancel it before you dial This can usually be done by entering a code immediately before the phone number in the phone number text box The code 70 is commonly used check with your local phone company It may also require a pause afterwards using a comma Here s an example of how you might enter it in the phone number text box 70 407 555 1234 Graphic Background On Main Form You can display a bitmap graphic on the main software screen Name the desired bitmap file backgrnd bmp and place it in the same directory as the HomeVision Pro application At startup it will be displayed scaled to fill the form Exporting Schedule Data There is an Export function on the File menu This command exports a list of the objects in your schedule to a text file It s provided primarily as a way to send schedule information to other home automation software that several other companies have developed Reading Data Files Into The Controller Introduction Many users would like to be able to have programs runn
494. ult setting e Disabled The controller will disable the input The input will then respond only to a subsequent enable command If you disable an input then you probably want a way to re enable it later There are several ways to do this e In your power failure recovery routine set a Wait Timer to enable the input after a specified time period If the problem is with a device like a motion sensor not coming on quickly enough a delay of a second or two should be sufficient If you re waiting for a PC to reboot you ll need a longer delay e Wait for another external input before enabling it For example you might want to manually send an IR or X 10 command to the controller to enable the input Chapter 13 Video Output 117 CHAPTER 13 VIDEO SYSTEM Introduction The video system provides the following features and capabilities Can display predefined menus and screens on a television This is called the built in video menu system These menus provide the following capabilities To view the status of and issue commands for X 10 modules input output ports IR signals scheduled events periodic events macros flags variables and timers To change the current time or date To view and change the controller operating modes To provide special control capabilities thermostats security systems weather display event log etc Can display a custom menu system that you create on the PC This provides the following
495. under the Objects Events menu e Click the Enter Edit Actions button and the actions entry screen will appear e Enter the actions and conditions then click OK You ll return to the power failure recovery screen e Enable the actions by checking the Actions Enabled field The actions are automatically enabled after you enter them but you re free to enable or disable them at any time Load the new schedule into the controller Remote Modem Control The controller can be controlled over the phone line using modems You can download a new schedule check the controller s status and even send X 10 IR and video commands Anything you can do when you re connected directly to the controller can also be done remotely This requires e The controller connected to a modem which in turn is connected to a phone line e Acomputer with a modem internal or external running the HomeVision Pro software and connected to a phone line The connections are shown in the following figure Chapter 27 Miscellaneous 285 Modem Cable Null Modem Cable Phone Line Local Local Remote Remote Computer Modem Modem HomeVision Pro Initial Controller Modem Setup The modem connected to the controller must meet the following requirements virtually all modems meet these e Hayes compatible e 2400 baud or higher e Capable of auto answering The modem must be connected to the controller with a NULL MODEM CABLE O
496. urrent temperature or HVAC system mode for errors or wrong settings and correct them or issue an alert e If you can leave your PC running you can control EnerZone StatNet thermostats Refer to the file StatNet installed in the HomevVision directory for details This description is divided into three sections 1 Built in control Describes the capability for automatically controlling two zones of RCS X 10 or serial thermostats You can use these features to setup your thermostat s in virtually no time 214 Chapter 19 Thermostats 2 Advanced control Describes commands and conditions you can include in your schedule You can use these to get more control over zone 1 and 2 thermostats You can also use them to control additional zones 3 Custom control Describes how you can write macros to use in place of the built in controls This allows you to customize the system for virtually any thermostat type Most users will never need to use this capability but it s there just in case Built In Thermostat Control This section describes how the controller can automatically control two zones of RCS TX10 or TX10 B thermostats or serial thermostats It shows you how to quickly set up your system If you wish to control more zones up to the maximum limit of 16 you can use the commands described in the Advanced Thermostat Control section Step 1 Initial Thermostat Configuration Separate sections below discuss configuring the RCS X 10 t
497. urs the load will be incomplete The controller recognizes this and will remain halted If you then command it to restart with the Resume Controller commana an error will occur because the schedule is invalid e The schedule memory becomes corrupted Extensive error checking and data validation is performed by the controller Should the internal memory somehow become corrupted the controller should detect the problem and set an error message You would then have to reload your schedule e An invalid infrared signal is received A few infrared signal types could generate error messages These will not cause any operational problems 298 Chapter 27 Miscellaneous Table 27 1 Controller Error Message Summary DH DESCRIPTION S21 2 e o o o o OK no error Set when an invalid output port number is encountered in your schedule Set if RAM data is invalid or there s a major schedule error reload your schedule Set when an illegal X 10 condition type is encountered in your schedule Set when an invalid timer number is encountered in your schedule Set if RAM data is invalid or there s a major schedule error reload your schedule Set if invalid data is found in RAM reload your schedule i i i M Set if invalid data is found in RAM reload your schedule Set when an illegal command type is encountered in your schedule i s i Set if error receiving IR signal Set if invalid data is found in RAM reload y
498. use periodic events running every loop but the actions should be inside an If Then statement Assuming the If Then statement is only true occasionally and not continually you won t get repeated messages NOTE As noted previously this undesired behavior will not occur with HomeVision Pro version 3 44 and higher If you decide to enable this feature after doing so we recommend you open the Terminal Emulator screen You can then view any messages coming from the controller The auto report messages will look something like this FLAGUPDATE 009001110100 X10HCUPDATE C0a 000000 000100 If you see messages repeatedly you probably have a periodic event repeatedly performing the same action You may want to modify the event or disable reporting of that object type to prevent the continuous messages from slowing down performance Customizing The Web Pages HomeVision Pro is pre configured to display a variety of web pages for HomeVision Pro status and control However you can also customize them if you like There are several ways to do this listed below in order of increasing difficulty and flexibility 1 Edit the files HVWebPage htm HVIndex htm HVTop htm HVFiles htm HVComm htm HVMainFormat htm or HVBlank htm You can change the page layout color schemes displayed text link titles You can add graphics or fancier menus using JavaScript or VBScript 264 Chapter 26 Web Server 2 Cr
499. utton 7 Press Simulate IR Button 8 Press Simulate IR Button 9 Press Simulate IR Button Enter Press Simulate IR Button Channel Up Press Simulate IR Button Channel Down Press Simulate IR Button Volume Up Press Simulate IR Button Volume Down Press Simulate IR Button Cancel Press These 16 commands correspond to the 16 IR remote buttons used to control or navigate the built in video menu system When you execute one of these in your schedule the video menu system will act just as if a user had actually pressed the corresponding button on a remote To enter these commands use the Video button on the Actions Entry Screen Toolbar The effect of these commands depends on what video screen is being displayed at the time For example when viewing Main Menu Page 1 of the built in video screens pressing button 3 displays the macro screen Therefore if you run the Simulate IR Button 3 Press command while displaying the Main Menu Page 1 the macro screen will be displayed In contrast if you re displaying Main Menu Page 2 performing this command will display the flag screen The primary use for these commands is to provide an alternative to an IR remote for controlling the video screens Some users would prefer to use X 10 signals touchtone phone inputs or a digital keypad When HomeVision Pro receives a signal from such a device it can execute a corresponding Simulate IR Button Press command For example assume the user has an X
500. val around the selected time The interval can be up to 4 hours Each day the controller will calculate a new time for the scheduled event by randomly selecting a time within the allowed window For example Assume you schedule an event for 5 00 PM with a random interval of 30 minutes On any day the event could occur at any time between 4 30 PM and 5 30 PM Assume you schedule an event for 2 hours after sunset with a random interval of 1 hour If sunset today is at 6 00 PM then the base time for the event is 8 00 PM 2 hours later The random interval is therefore from 7 00 PM to 9 00 PM Entering Scheduled Event Actions To enter the conditions and actions for a scheduled event e Open the Scheduled Event screen under the Objects Events menu e Double click on the Actions Defined field of the scheduled event you want The actions entry screen will appear e Enter the actions and conditions then click OK You ll return to the scheduled event summary screen e Enable the actions by checking the Actions Enabled field The actions are automatically enabled after you enter them but you re free to enable or disable them at any time Load the new schedule into the controller Scheduled Event Commands The following scheduled event commands can be included in a schedule They can all also be issued to the controller over the serial interface The format for sending commands over the serial in
501. ve 1024 are recommended If you re also running the HomeVision Pro web server use a different port number for it Password If you want to require the client to enter a password when accessing the server enter the password here If you don t want to require a password leave this field blank If your PC is always connected to the Internet we strongly recommend you use a password to minimize the chance of unauthorized users accessing your system Without a password users have complete access to the server and HomeVision Pro You might disable this if you re using the server on a local area network within your home where you re not worried about unauthorized use Next check the Automatically start reconnect if connection is lost box if you want the server to automatically start whenever the HomeVision Pro software starts and to automatically restart if the connection doesn t properly start or is lost If you want the server always running you should check this When you first check it the server will also try to start immediately Click the Start button to start the server if it didn t start automatically If it doesn t start the IP address is probably incorrect although it s possible the port number is already in use Starting the server means telling it to start listening on the selected port for connection requests from clients The Status field will indicate whether or not the server is cu
502. ve a comma delimited file that holds the time the outdoor and indoor temperature plus the number of e mail messages you have waiting to be read in that order Also assume this file gets updated periodically by adding a new line at the end containing the most recent data The file might look like this 10 35 AM 50 72 3 10 40 AM 52 72 5 10 45 AM 55 73 5 10 50 AM 56 73 5 This means that at 10 50 AM the outdoor temperature was 56 the indoor temperature was 73 and you had 5 e mail messages waiting Assume you want to be able to read the most recent data from this file into HomeVision Pro You want to load the temperatures into the controller s weather variables and the e mail message count into Home Vision 292 Chapter 27 Miscellaneous Pro variable number 7 which you use in your schedule to track the number of unread messages but ignore the time field Here s what the configuration file would look like SECTION NAME Custom data file SECTION FORMAT Comma separated values Unused OutsideTemperature InsideTemperature Variable 7 Note how the last four rows define the four fields or columns of data in the data file Since we don t want to read the time into the controller the first field is named Unused so that HomeVision Pro will ignore it After creating this file save it in the same directory as the HomeVision Pro application naming it HVConfig txt Shut down Home Vision Pro and restart it and the HomeVis
503. vent Typical messages are IR Signal 85 Received Input Port 4 Changed High Scheduled Event 2A Occurred CR signifies that a carriage return is sent LF signifies that a line feed is sent Terminator signifies that a single byte terminator code is sent The byte has a value 1d which is the ASCII code SOH The terminator is provided to make it easier for a PC program to read and interpret the messages from the controller NOTE The carriage return and line feed do not actually appear on the screen if you re using a terminal emulation program Rather they cause the cursor to move to the beginning of the next line The terminator code ASCII code SOH also will not appear on some terminal programs although other programs may display it as a special symbol The PC software s built in terminal emulator strips this character out Chapter 16 _ Serial Interface 185 Table 16 2 Serial Report Message ID Numbers ID Hex MEANING X 10 Function Code Only Received X 10 Transmit Failed Collision X 10 House and Function Codes Received 80 er 89 90 X 10 House and Unit Codes Received _____ ae Time and Date Report Format The controller can also be configured to report the time and date over serial port 1 along with the event description This is done by setting the Report Time and Date mode from the PC program command screen or through the video interface control screen When enabled the cont
504. ver the serial interface is described in the Serial file installed in the HomeVision directory For all of these commands the controller uses the settings in the Thermostat Configuration Screen to determine how to send the command to the thermostat Set Zone System Mode to Off Set Zone System Mode to Heat Set Zone System Mode to Cool Set Zone System Mode to Auto The controller sets the specified thermostat zone from 1 to 16 to the specified HVAC system mode The controller also updates its internal system variable Zone Status for the specified zone to reflect the new system mode Set Zone Fan Mode to On Set Zone Fan Mode to Auto The controller sets the specified thermostat zone from 1 to 16 to the specified fan mode The controller also updates its internal system variable Zone Status for the specified zone to reflect the new fan mode Since the RCS TX10 thermostat cannot change the fan mode via X 10 this command will be ignored for these thermostats Set Zone Temperature Setting to XX The controller sets the specified thermostat zone from 1 to 16 to the specified temperature setpoint The controller also updates its internal system variable Temperature Setting for the specified zone to reflect the new setting Set Zone Temperature Back The controller set the specified thermostat zone from 1 to 16 to your setback temperature It also updates its internal system variable Temperature S
505. very 2 hours It will be performed every time the controller s clock hour value reaches multiples of 2 hours i e at 12 00 AM 2 00 AM 4 00 AM etc Change Event Rate To Every 4 Hours This command sets the rate at which the event is performed to once every 4 hours It will be performed every time the controller s clock hour value reaches multiples of 4 hours i e at 12 00 AM 4 00 AM 8 00 AM etc Change Event Rate To Every 8 Hours This command sets the rate at which the event is performed to once every 8 hours It will be performed every time the controller s clock hour value reaches multiples of 8 hours i e at 12 00 AM 8 00 AM and 4 00 PM Periodic Event Conditions There are no periodic event conditions that can be checked by an If Then or If Then Else statement Power Failure Options Periodic events do not have a Power Fail State that can be automatically set after a power failure Chapter9 Timers and Delays TT CHAPTER 9 TIMERS AND DELAYS Introduction Timers provide the following features and capabilities Can be used to time events between 0 01 seconds and 59 hours 59 minutes 59 99 seconds e Can be configured to automatically perform a set of actions when they expire e Can be temporarily halted and restarted e Can all be reset as a group e Can be used as conditions in If Then and If Then Else statements e Can be viewed stopped started and changed from the video screen system e Can be set to p
506. vices that lose their scene settings after a power failure and must be reprogrammed If you put the commands in a macro in your schedule you could run the macro after a power failure to automatically reprogram the switches X 10 Type Scenes As an example for X 10 brand devices assume you want to create these two scenes using modules A 1 A 2 and A 3 Scene 1 A 1 on at level 10 A 2 on at level 15 A 3 on at level 20 Scene 2 A 1 off level 0 A 2 on at level 50 A 3 on at level 63 Here s how you d create these scenes Select house code A and unit code 1 Select the custom command Include in scene at level XX Enter 1 in the scene number text box Enter 10 in the light level text box Click the Perform Command button This will send an X 10 command to module A 1 telling it to include itself in scene 1 at level 10 Select unit code 2 and level 15 and click the Perform Command button to put A 2 in the scene Select unit code 3 and level 20 and click the Perform Command button to put A 3 in the scene Scene 1 is now complete 8 Change the scene number to 2 Repeat the above steps using the desired levels for scene 2 oRWN NO The above steps send the necessary commands to the X 10 modules to put them in the two house code A scenes If you decide you don t want a particular module to be in a scene use the Remove from sc
507. w logic zero states will be slightly different Port A The relay will be turned off PortC The output will be driven low with a voltage lt 1V Set Output Port High Sets the output port to a high logic one state Ports A and C use different hardware drivers and therefore their high logic one states will be slightly different PortA The relay will be turned on PortC The output will be driven high with a voltage gt 4 8V Toggle Output Port Switches the output port to the opposite of its current state A high output will go low and a low output will go high Pulse Output Port Low For Seconds Sets the output port to a low state for seconds then sets it high HE can range from 0 001 to 65 535 seconds This command is normally used when an output is high It will pulse the output low for the specified period of time If the output is low when the command is executed it will stay low for the specified time then go high This command is designed primarily for controlling devices that require relatively short duration precise pulse widths Although long lengths are possible it s best to keep them to a few seconds or less When this command is executed the controller sets the port to the desired state then waits for the specified time to elapse While waiting it will still be able to receive X 10 and infrared signals However it will not immediately take action on them or perform
508. w ports will be listed in the input and output port summary screens 238 Chapter 21 Expansion Boards I O Port Numbering System The large number of I O ports available with the controller can be difficult to keep track of To help the controller uses a numbering system to uniquely identify each digital I O port Each port has a unique letter as shown in the table below This port letter is used in the software as the default port name If you have one Sylva IO 808I board the opto isolated inputs will be Port J and the relay outputs will be Port K Note that you do not have to have Multifunction Expansion Board 2 so ports G H and may not exist in your system Port Letter Located On A Output SPDT relays 30V inputs C 5V digital inputs or outputs IO 808I board 1 10 8081 board 2 10 8081 board 2 10 8081 board 3 10 8081 board 3 Chapter 22 Data Logging 239 CHAPTER 22 DATA LOGGING Introduction The controller can log data to memory and later transmit it over serial port 1 This capability is summarized below The amount of space available for the data log depends on the size of your schedule actions and the number of learned infrared signals The total memory available for these three functions is approximately 85 000 bytes Any memory not used by your actions and IR signals can be used for data logging up to a maximum of 65 535 bytes The status screen located under the Other menu will show how much space
509. w to expect a response 2 Data can come in at any time from the attached serial device An example would be a security system that sends a serial message every time a zone is opened or closed This type of data is called Unexpected Serial Data since it can come in any time It may surprise you to know that the second case is easier to handle than the first case Connecting to a device that uses BOTH of these methods to communicate requires special care However the controller can still work with all such systems Receiving Unexpected Serial Data As an example of receiving serial data at any time let s assume the serial port is connected to an alarm that can report the following three serial messages Alarm Armed Alarm Disarmed Alarm Condition Here s how to setup the controller to recognize when any of these messages come in 1 Select the Serial Data Input for the desired port from the Object Events menu This opens the actions entry screen for the Serial Data Input Event The actions entered here will be run each time a complete serial message is received 2 In the actions entry screen enter three separate If Then statements each checking for one of the possible messages In the Then portion enter whatever you want to do when the message is received Here s an example If Serial Input Character Numbers 1 11 are Alarm Armed Then Do whatever you want here when the alarm gets armed End If If Serial Input Charac
510. wer line that is addressed to this X 10 module Refer to the Clear Status Request Bit command for a discussion of how best to use this X 10 condition After you ve received a preset dim signal you can use the X 10 command Put Received Preset Dim Level Into Variable to store the level in a variable From there you can do whatever else you need to with it X 10 Conditions Based On Variable Values All of the previous conditions allow you to select which X 10 address to use In addition it is possible to use a variable value to specify the X 10 address The X 10 Condition Entry Screen has a checkbox labeled Use variable for X 10 address If you check this you will be able to select a variable When HomeVision Pro executes this condition it will obtain the variable value which ranges from 0 to 255 and use it as the X 10 ID number The X 10 addresses also called ID Numbers also range from 0 A 1 to 255 P 16 as shown previously under the X 10 Commands Overview section 62 Chapter 5 __X 10 X 10 Sequences X 10 sequences allow you to perform actions whenever the controller receives a certain sequence of X 10 signal s Sequences are entered as conditions within an If Then statement Follow this procedure to specify a sequence Add a periodic event and call it something like Check X 10 Sequences Set the periodic event to be performed every loop Open the actions entry screen for the periodic event Add an If Then s
511. will be fed to the video output jack The video switch must be in the OSD position when you want to display any video screens Note that in order to display video screens you must also turn the OSD circuitry on which is a separate command Video In External Video Po Internal Video Video OSD Video Video Switch OSD Switch OSD Circuit Figure 13 1 On Screen Display Switch Positions You can change the video switch position any time you wish regardless of what if any data you re displaying You can also change its position while displaying the video menu system This allows you to quickly switch between the menu system and external video Turn On Screen Display On Turn On Screen Display Off These commands turn the On Screen Display OSD control circuitry on or off It must be turned on before you can display video screens When you re not displaying video screens you should turn it off to conserve power When it s off you cannot display any video screens but you can still display external video by putting the video switch in the external position You do not need to use these commands if you use the Start Video Screen System Start Internal Video Mode Start External Video Mode and Stop Video Mode commands Those commands will automatically turn the OSD circuitry on or off as required Set OSD To Internal Video Background Set OSD To External Video Background This is a switch internal to the On Screen
512. witch in the closed position Remove any other sensors that are connected to the A and S positions 2 Inthe Digital Temperature Sensor Configuration Screen select the single drop mode 3 Click Read Address If successful the 8 byte address will be displayed Otherwise an error message will be shown 4 To add this sensor to the sensor table click the Add Sensor button 5 After reading the address click Paste Address to copy it to the sensor selected in the table This saves you from having to type the numbers in manually 6 You can also click Read Temp to read the current temperature After adding sensors in this manner you must download the schedule for the changes to take affect Chapter 20 Other Inputs 233 NOTE The sensors shown in the software table must be present on the wires during normal operation If not an error will occur although this error will not affect the operation of the rest of the system Reading The Sensor From The PC The configuration screen has controls that allow you to directly access the attached sensors You should note several things about how these work e The Check Device button issues a reset pulse and looks for a presence pulse back from the sensor There is no way to tell if more than one device responds you can only know that at least one did If this check fails then the device is either not properly connected or not functioning e The Read Address butt
513. xecutes actions when an event occurs The controller constantly checks for the events then immediately performs the actions associated with it This provides several advantages over a loop type system The controller can respond much faster to the event e Programming is simpler as the user can easily specify the actions to perform in response to any event There is one disadvantage to an event driven controller What if the event that you care about is not one the controller is looking for For example say you want to turn on a light when a variable is equal to 67 and it s dark outside If the controller doesn t have a built in function checking for these precise conditions you can t do it For this reason loop type controllers can be more powerful as you can typically set any combination of conditions you care about The controller provides the best features of both types of systems At its heart it s an event driven controller that provides the rapid input response typical of such systems With it you can develop powerful schedules with only limited programming However the controller can also execute a group of user specified commands at a rapid rate every few milliseconds with a periodic event set to execute every loop simulating the loop type systems You can then use combinations of If Then Else statements to check for any set of conditions you desire and perform appropriate actions You could even put the entire
514. y Events can be performed immediately upon command from the serial interface Events performed every loop allow you to check for virtually any combination of conditions with If Then statements and perform whatever actions you want This is useful if you want to perform actions when a certain event occurs but the controller doesn t automatically check for them For example if you want to do something when a variable is equal to 100 there s no automatic event for this Instead you could create a periodic event that checks every loop to see if that variable is equal to 100 255 periodic events are available Entering Periodic Event Actions To enter the conditions and actions for a periodic event Open the Periodic Event screen under the Objects Events menu Double click on the Actions Defined field of the periodic event you want The actions entry screen will appear Enter the actions and conditions then click OK You ll return to the periodic event summary screen Enable the actions by checking the Actions Enabled field The actions are automatically enabled after you enter them but you re free to enable or disable them at any time Load the new schedule into the controller 74 Chapter 8 Periodic Events Periodic Event Commands The following periodic event commands can be included in a schedule They can all also be issued to the controller over the serial interface The format for sendin
515. y in a trouble condition Zone has alarm in memory This condition is true if the specified zone has an alarm stored in its memory i e this zone is currently or was previously in an alarm condition Zone does not have alarm in memory This condition is true if the specified zone does not have an alarm stored in its memory Any zone is faulted This condition is true if any of the system zones are currently faulted Any zone is bypassed This condition is true if any of the system zones are currently bypassed Any zone is in trouble condition This condition is true if any of the system zones are currently in a trouble condition Any zone has an alarm in memory This condition is true if any of the system zones currently have an alarm stored in memory Security system communications is OK This condition is true if communications between HomeVision Pro and the security system are OK Security system communications error This condition is true if there is currently a communications problem between HomeVision Pro and the security system Chapter 26 _Web Server 259 CHAPTER 26 INTERNET ACCESS Introduction Home Vision Pro provides three different means of Internet access 1 HomeVision Internet Control Group This is a group of software programs and components that allows you to access HomeVision Pro over the Internet This was our first approach to Internet access It was never officially released but is available in
516. y screen by clicking the appropriate toolbar button The command and selected macro are chosen from the pull down list 206 Chapter 17 _ Macros Do Macro This command performs the specified macro one time Run Macro At Variable Once This command uses the value of variable number as the ID number of the macro to run If the value is not a valid macro number the command is skipped Enable Macro This command enables the specified macro A macro must be enabled before it can be used Disable Macro This command disables the specified macro A macro must be enabled before it can be used A command to run a disabled macro will be ignored Macro Conditions There are no macro conditions that can be checked by an If Then or If Then Else statement Power Failure Options Macros events do not have a Power Fail State that can be automatically set after a power failure Chapter 18 Caller ID 207 CHAPTER 18 CALLER ID Introduction The controller contains a caller ID TV display screen that can display the name and phone number of the caller It uses three lines on the screen as in this example Phone call from John Doe 407 555 1234 This feature requires leaving the controller connected to your computer There are three different ways to get the caller ID information into the controller 1 A special caller ID device is connected to another PC serial port and the HomeVision Pro software is running on the PC
517. y system status in a periodic event as recommended above Assume your schedule looks at the state of a flag to determine whether to write the system state as ARMED or DISARMED Assume that it s initially disarmed so your screen is displaying DISARMED While you re displaying this the system gets armed Your schedule now writes the word ARMED instead of DISARMED You ll get the following unexpected display ARMEDMED What happens is that the word ARMED overwrites only the first 5 characters of the previous text DISARMED Consequently the last 3 letters MED are left unchanged and are still displayed To get around this problem write the text string ARMED with 3 blanks at the end instead of ARMED The three blanks will overwrite the last 3 letters of DISARMED In general whenever you have different text strings that could be displayed make them all the same length by adding blank spaces to the shorter ones e You can also create your own screens that respond to infrared commands Refer to the example schedule installed in the application directory Chapter 14 Infrared Control 141 CHAPTER 14 INFRARED CONTROL Introduction The controller provides the following infrared IR signal control features and capabilities Can learn infrared commands and transmit them to control external equipment such as televisions stereos etc There is both a 3 5mm mono jack and a terminal block for connecting to external
518. yte to the bus Output Port Conditions The following output port conditions can be checked by an If Then or If Then Else statement If Output Port Is Low This condition will be true if the port is low logic zero false if high logic one If Output Port Is High This condition will be true if the port is high logic one false if low logic zero If Output Port Is Enabled This condition will be true if the port is enabled false if disabled If Output Port Is Disabled This condition will be true if the port is disabled false if enabled Chapter 12 Input and Output Ports 113 Control Of Input Ports Input ports can be controlled in three ways e By a command in the schedule e By a command received over the serial interface e By the video menu system and an infrared remote This section describes the commands that can be used Input Port Commands The following input port commands can be included in a schedule They can all also be issued to the controller over the serial interface The format for sending commands over the serial interface is described in the Serial file installed in the HomeVision directory These commands are entered in your schedule from the actions entry screen by clicking the appropriate toolbar button The command and selected port are chosen from the pull down list Standard Input Port Commands Disable Input Port Disables the input port When an input is disabled the controll

introduction - Custom Solutions, Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents